, »* .0 






C 



o 



<i^ /j 






J,^:^^. 






■'^>. 






-i« ' • • * ,\ * 



-Jy^ . 






.V 









.^^ 



o. 


























•1 o 




CO' ^» 









•^0^ 




V ^0 














J.*- o 



• AX O 


















°^ *'-* ^0 % •»-»' y o "... . 





V^ .* 


















AMERICA' 


'S 


TOMORROW 


By 
SNELL SMITH 




fFith an Introduction by 
Hudson Maxim 





"The traditions of the American 
people are sound and their ideals 
will endure when the dynasties of 
old are decayed and forgotten." 
r— Theodore E. Burton. 



BRITTON PUBLISHING COMPANY 
New York 



3lj)6"6' 



Copyright, 1919, by 
BRIXTON PUBLISHING CO., Inc. 

MADE IN U. S. A. 

All Rights Reserved 



©CI.A530319 

JUL 22 19 id 



To 
Col. William Hayward 
and the heroes of our army and 
navy, both men and women, who 
labored and sacrificed at home and 
abroad for the cause of liberty, 
equality amd fraternity. 



I 



INTRODUCTION 

My friend Snell Smith's book, ''America's To- 
morrow," is essentially an historic, prophetic and 
anthroponomic treatise. It is a most informative 
analysis of our economic and political institutions 
and their possibilities. The author of the work 
must be recognized as an exceedingly scholarly man, 
whether or not one agrees with him in any or all 
respects. He has put a prodigious amount of la- 
bor and thought into the volume, and it is admir- 
ably calculated to make its readers think. The book 
stimulates inquiry, and inquiry is the parent of all 
progress. 

A man's mind is a mill in which he grinds the 
grist of all mental acquirements, facts and fancies 
with experience, and the mental mill of no two men 
works with equal efficiency in separating the real 
meal of merit from the orts and chaff. No two per- 
sons, from a given set of premises not absolutely 
mathematical in their exactness, arrive at entirely 
like conclusions. 

He is the best teacher who tells the student only 
what is absolutely necessary, and who puts the stu- 
dent in the way of finding out things for himself. 
Eeady-solved problems do not instruct so well as 

i 



ii INTRODUCTION 

problems which one has to solve for himself. Sci- 
entific books must essentially be largely statements 
of fact, and in reading them any but the most sci- 
entific mind becomes quickly weary. Statements 
of mere fancies, from their suggestiveness, often 
serve so to stimulate imagination and inquiry in 
the mind of the reader as to lead him to the ac- 
quisition of more truth than he would get were 
the facts first baldly stated to him in purely sci- 
entific terminology. 

It is better to bury the corn for a hen, leaving 
just kernels enough on the surface to indicate 
where it is, so that she will have to scratch for it. 
Likewise, it is better not to uncover all the corn 
of truth for the student, but to leave enough un- 
covered to make him scratch for it. 

One may make bread of a mixture of ground 
wood or cotton cellulose, adding such sodium, po- 
tassium and phosphate salts with paraffin grease as 
to answer the chemical requirements of a balance^ 
ration for human consumption; but the digestive 
organs of man would be unable to digest and as- 
similate the unpalatable product. Likewise, a vast 
amount of scientific information may be served in 
so dry and unpalatable a way as not to be either 
relished or easily assimilated by the mind. Food 
for the sustenance of the mind, just like food for 
the sustenance of the body, is better when flavored 
and seasoned to the taste. It is not so interesting 



INTRODUCTION iii 

to read something full of useful facts that we can 
see at once are true, as it is to read something 
pregnant with suggestiveness. 

The value of a book depends upon its interest 
and the good it will do one to read it. Snell Smith *s 
book is most interesting, and it will do anyone good 
to read it. 

There are, broadly speaking, two kinds of minds 
— the ratiocinative and the intuitive. The ratio- 
cinative is the strictly scientific mind, and the in- 
tuitive is the poetic or mystical mind, splendid in 
its imaginative perceptions. The writings of the 
strictly scientific man are apt to be dry. It is not 
alone the load of facts a writing carries that con- 
stitutes its main merit ; it is also the appeal it makes 
to the imagination. 

Snell Smith's mind, while both ratiocinative and 
intuitive in its functioning, becomes in some por- 
tions of the book more intuitive. His last three 
chapters are especially imaginative and mystical, 
and are withal highly optimistic, especially as to 
the realization of the forlorn hope of the human 
heart that there is a coming time when men shall 
war no more, when love and gentleness shall ban- 
ish brutality, greed and avarice. 

Every person necessarily employs the results of 
his own personal experience to guide him in future 
conduct. Also, he employs the gathered results 
of the experiences of others for the same purpose. 



iv INTRODUCTION 

He also, as occasion may arise, employs his experi- 
ential knowledge for the instruction of others re- 
garding their conduct. 

The student of history, ethnology and anthropon- 
omy, if he be a man with large human sympathies, 
is prompted to use his interpretation of the lessons 
of history for the general instruction and benefit 
of his fellowmen. Such is the evident purpose of 
the present volume. 

Present-day political and social problems are 
here discussed by a man who has long been a Wash- 
ington newspaper correspondent, and has had an 
opportunity to study them first-hand. His patri- 
otism leads him to an ardent hope that America 
is to become the arbiter of the world's destiny be- 
cause of her vital strength and the benign charac- 
ter of her institutions. He pleads for order and 
unity at home, and the extension of American gov- 
ernmental ideals everywhere abroad. In fact, I 
know of no work in which is so clearly discussed 
the relation of America to the world and the rela- 
tion of the world to America. 

While I agree with Snell Smith that the facts of 
past human experience should be utilized to govern 
the future conduct of mankind, and while I agree 
with him that it is the duty of all of us to help 
one another in every way possible, and also to try 
to lead mankind in the direction of Utopia, vdth, 
as far as practicable, the banishment of war from 



INTRODUCTION V 

the world, still, though we may move farther than 
we now are in such direction, it is my opinion that 
the human race will never reach an actual Utopia 
**till the sun grows cold and the stars are old and 
the leaves of the Judgment Book unfold." 

While I do not believe that any League of Na- 
tions will be able to banish war from the world, 
still I strongly believe that much good may be done 
by the banding together of di:fferent peoples for 
peace. Some wars may be prevented. 

In this sense, I, in this Introduction, and Snell 
Smith in his book, enter into a sort of joint debate 
in continuation of those we have had in private 
conversations for many years. Friendly discus- 
sion is always helpful. 

Eegardless of any league to enforce peace, the 
nations are destined to grapple again in many and 
many an Armageddon, and with the increase in 
population, in wealth and industrial development 
of the nations, some of the great struggles that are 
coming will be of such colossal magnitude as to 
make the great world- war through which we have 
just passed seem far less large by comparison. 

For all practical purposes, human nature is a 
constant. Circumstances may change, but the ac- 
tual character of the race alters but little from 
century to century. The race to-day, in certain re- 
spects, is very old, but in other respects it is young. 
The size and build of the body, the size of the 



vi INTRODUCTION 

brain-cavity and shape of the head, have altered 
but little through thousands of years; but in the 
matter of accomplishment the race has changed 
more during the past hundred and fifty years than 
it had previously changed in all the long-drawn 
ages since our home was a cave in the hill. 

Ethnologically speaking, it was only yesterday 
that the ancestors of those of us of the great Nordic 
race, clothed in the skins of beasts, ran wild in the 
woods of Germany and Britain, or in frail boats 
coasted the rocky promontories of Scandinavia. It 
was also, ethnologically speaking, but yesterday 
that the ancestors of the Mediterranean, Semific 
or Arabic races were wild, hill tribesmen, hunters 
and fishermen about the great inland seas, or were 
fierce, piratic nomads hovering about the deserts 
of Eastern Asia. Those were conditions under 
which neither large populations nor great in- 
tellectual or moral advancement was possible. A 
state of warfare was normal to them. Man-hunt- 
ing was the greatest of all their sports. The might 
of the sword was then universally recognized as 
right. ^ ' 

There were, in those days, two professional 
classes — the priesthood and the military; and also 
the non-professional or working class, to which the 
women and the slaves belonged. The military sys- 
tem combined with the slave system reached its 
apex in the Roman Empire, and when that vast 



INTRODUCTION vii 

Empire fell under the blows of the Northern bar- 
barians, the feudal system came into being. 

The Crusades to the Holy Land, the development 
of trade and commerce, the building up of indus- 
try, brought industrial centres or cities into prom- 
inence and into collision with the feudal barons. 
The people of the cities walled themselves in and 
defended themselves against the barons, and the 
barons, being brought to straits for lack of oppor- 
tunity for plunder and pillage, were forced to 
terms. Again, the absence of the feudal lords in 
the Crusades strengthened the hands of the kings, 
and the kings allied themselves with the cities to 
bring the barons under the domination of kingship. 

Industry, by slow degrees, made itself respect- 
able, or at least respected. Again, industrial de- 
velopment led to invention and discovery; and it 
was found that inventors and discoverers would 
work better, and were therefore more profitable to 
a community, when allowed to enjoy the fruits of 
their labors. This led to inquiry into and to the 
recognition of the inalienability of human rights, 
and this recognition paved the way to human 
freedom. 

Although such rights had been respected or 
somewhat recognized before, yet it was the indus- 
try of post-feudal times that compelled general re- 
cognition of the inalienability of certain human 
rights, especially the ownership and enjoyment of 



viii INTRODUCTION 

property, the inviolability of the home, the free- 
dom of body, mind and conscience, and the pur- 
suit of happiness in one's own way, so long as in 
pursuing his happiness he does not interfere with 
the happiness of others. 

All manner of labor-saving machinery, and all 
the vast and complicated mechanism of the modern 
world, have been the direct result of the recogni- 
tion of the inalienability of human rights, for that 
recognition gave the greatest possible stimulus to 
invention, discovery and industrial development. 

Improvements in means of transportation and 
communication led to the discovery of new lands, 
and the discovery of new lands, in its turn, greatly 
stimulated the development of transportation and 
communication. 

A given area of the earth's surface, inhabited 
merely by hunters, must necessarily be thinly pop- 
ulated. Development of agriculture makes a far 
denser population possible. Again, the develop- 
ment of all manner of agricultural implements re- 
leases to the manufacturing arts, to the professions 
and to trades, a large percentage of the population, 
which, in turn, creates an enormous market for the 
produce of the farm. So it has been that in re- 
cent times the populations of the great civilized 
countries have increased by leaps and bounds. 

The discovery of America and the opening up of 
vast areas in other lands, have provided room thus 



INTRODUCTION !x 

far for the increased numbers of the earth's in- 
habitants. But the time is near when this will no 
longer be the case. The time is near when the 
peoples of the nations will press upon one another, 
and then there will come intense rivalry and com- 
petition and actual warfare for a place in the sun. 
So long as there will be opportunity for all, room 
for growth, and food to eat, it may be possible to 
maintain pretty general peace, but, as Napoleon 
said, "There is no subordination in an empty stom- 
ach." It is necessary only for a man to be hungry 
enough to make him a savage. Starving mothers 
in Jerusalem, when the city was besieged by Titus, 
ate their own children. 

A high state of moral and intellectual culture, 
and general observance of law and order and peace 
between peoples, are possible only when living con- 
ditions are tolerable. Therefore, in order to banish 
war from the world and to establish Utopian con- 
ditions, such as the much-mooted millennial broth- 
erhood of man, it would be necessary also to banish 
want from the world, necessary to reverse the law 
of survival of the fittest through the struggle for 
existence, for populations always multiply accord- 
ing to the Malthusian law right up to the full feed- 
ing-capacity of the land, and then, just like a lake 
with its outlet dammed up, the rising flood is bound 
to overflow its confines. 

It is our duty to promote, as far as possible, 



X INTRODUCTION 

peace and good-will over the earth, but there is 
no power on earth great enough to shackle up old 
Mars and keep him chained. 

It is the supreme effort of the supreme leaders 
of every species, both animal and vegetable, that 
gives to the multitudinous species their respective 
positions in the world. Every species and every 
race of animals is constantly being put to the su- 
preme test for Nature to determine whether it shall 
continue to hold its place in the world, its position 
in the sun, or whether it shall yield it up to others 
better fitted. 

The same inexorable natural law applies to every 
species of life, from the lowest organism up to man. 
Man owes his dominant position in the world to 
the primordial bent in his psychology that led him 
to use cunning instead of sheer brute force as his 
main weapon in contending with the brute creation 
and with his f ellowmen. 

The fathers of our country based our so-called 
free institutions on the oft-uttered but widely mis- 
understood proposition that all men are created 
equal. They doubtless did not mean to imply that 
all men are actually created equal mentally, mor- 
ally and physically, but that all men have equal 
rights to the law's protection and equal rights to 
the world's opportunities for life and thrift. 

The peace delegates at Paris presumed to recog- 
nize this proposition of equality, but with reserva- 



INTRODUCTION xi 

tions. They were willing to have it that all men 
are created equal — except certain Orientals, and 
their declination to recognize the Japanese as 
equals seems pregnant with augurings and fore- 
bodings. 

The Japanese and Chinese are our superiors 
in their ability to make Mother Earth provide for 
dense populations, and the Chinamen stand the 
highest of all people on earth in commercial 
honesty. 

We beat the world at invention, but the Orientals 
beat us at imitation, and thus keep right along 
with us in the march of progress. 

Taking the foregoing facts into consideration, let 
us see whether or not we can make some sug- 
gestive prognostications as to the future limita- 
tions of the League of Nations. 

In the future, if all goes well in industrial and 
commercial development, there will be three great 
centres of commerce. That of first importance will 
be about the Bosphorus. Napoleon wisely foresaw 
the importance of that position and declared Con- 
stantinople to be the key to universal empire. The 
second great commercial centre will be the United 
States of America, and the third will be in China 
and Japan. 

Within a wide radius of Constantinople, are 
Greeks, Armenians, Syrians, Turks and Arabs, the 
sharpest bargainers in the world. It is said that 



xii INTRODUCTION 

a Greek can out-bargain a Jew, and that an Ar- 
menian can out-bargain both the Greek and the Jew. 

If the nations heretofore antagonistic in race, re- 
ligion, and ambitions about Constantinople are to 
get together and work together in a brotherly way 
— and they will have to do it if the Peace League 
succeeds — then the various peoples about the Bos- 
phorus will, from commercial self-interest, get to- 
gether and form a great Central-Eurasian state, 
while the Japanese and Chinese, with boundless 
resources of cheap labor, are sure to compete suc- 
cessfully for the ocean-carrying trade, and as com- 
petition becomes more and more strenuous, and 
the demand for food for denser and denser popu- 
lations more and more exacting, then the Central- 
Eurasians, habituated for centuries to privation, 
and the Orientals, who have through long ages be- 
come adapted to thrive on a stingy vegetable diet, 
will place the great Nordic race at a disadvantage 
— a race that has been developed under conditions 
that have given it large bodies, with the digestive 
requirements of the carnivora. The meat-eating 
Nordics could no more compete with Japanese and 
Chinese under conditions of food-shortage than 
lions, turned out to grass with goats and jack-rab- 
bits, could compete with them as grass-eaters. 

The time is coming when the great warlike Nordic 
race will feel the pressure of competition and 
crowding of the Central-Eurasians, Chinese and 



INTRODUCTION xiii 

Japanese, and it is certainly doubtful if the Brit- 
ish lion, the American eagle and the German eagle 
will, when the pinch comes, tamely submit to the 
peace provisions of any League of Nations — the 
lion to let his hair be browsed off his hungry body 
by the goats, and the eagles to allow their feathers 
to be plucked by the rabbits. No, the time-old fight- 
ing and world-dominating spirit that has belted the 
globe with Nordic dominance is going to employ 
the same old masterful traits to secure future sur- 
vival and future dominance. The Nordics will do 
that which will give the utmost use to their big 
brains and big muscles. They will fight for their 
share of the world's food supply — a share which 
will be the lion's share and the eagles' share, a 
share sufficient to meet their greater food require- 
ments. 

I do not take a pessimistic view of the future, but 
merely what I conceive to be a view warranted by 
all history and by the law of evolution. Those who 
do not take a view which has trouble in it for some- 
body, and war-breeding trouble, are going to make 
a mistake, just as the peace-prophesying pacifists 
of America, Britain and France, before the great 
world- war, took too optimistic a view of the future, 
believing that the last great war had been fought, 
and neglected to prepare accordingly, whereas if 
they had seen the truth that Germany was prepar- 
ing for world-conquest, they would have prepared. 



xiv INTRODUCTION 

and when the clash came they would not immedi- 
atelj^ have run short of ammunition and have been 
reduced to the necessity of either retreating pre- 
cipitately or charging the multitudinous enemy with 
the bayonet and sacrificing lives by hundreds of 
thousands that could have been saved had they 
been supplied with the necessary guns and am- 
munition. 

Let us not, like the ostrich, hide our head in the 
sand. Let us look to the future with a vision not 
afraid to discern what the future has in store. 

Hudson Maxim. 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER PAGE 

Introduction i 

I Our National Strength 3 

II Republicanism vs. Monarchy .... 72 

III War and Peace 88 

IV The Dawning of Another Bra . . . . 114 
V The Significance of the United States 135 

VI Menaces to the Republic 151 

VII Menaces to Liberty 172 

VIII One Law for the Union .... 198 

IX The United States and North America 219 

X The Future of the Pacific Ocean . . 235 

XI The Future of the Atlantic Ocean . 252 

XII The Federation of the World . . . 271 

XIII Genius for the Task 294 

XIV The Prophecies of Daniel .... 336 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

CHAPTER I 

OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

"Teach my son to read and reflect upon history."— Napoleon. 

"Consider history with the beginnings of it stretching dimly 
into the remote time and merging darkly out of the mysterious eter- 
nity, the true epic poem and universal divine scripture." — Carlisle. 

"For behold the Lord cometh out of his place to visit the 
iniquity of the inhabitants of the earth upon them; and the earth 
shall disclose her blood and be no longer a cover for her slain." 
—Isaiah 26:31. 

ASSURANCE of the complete subjection of all 
nations and peoples to the ideals and civiliza- 
tion of the United States within the near future is 
contained in a law of history and nature which has 
for its ultimate and certain goal the unity of the 
race under popular government. 

This law lies deeper than our national aspira- 
tions, which in themselves have not been sufficient 
to wrest extraordinary achievement out of the new 
conditions brought about by our participation in 
the great war and the politics and alliances of the 
mighty powers of the world. It has a basis more 
profound than extent of territory or material 
wealth, which have not alone been responsible for 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

such a stupendous miracle as the awakening in the 
eighteen months from April, 1917 to October, 1918, 
of a population of an hundred millions from isola- 
tion and inactivity to raising and equipping an army 
of 3,750,000 men and sending 2,200,000 of them 
abroad to win every battle in which they were en- 
gaged ; to increasing our naval forces to an enlist- 
ment of 612,000 men and assisting in foiling the 
submarine menace; to building 535 merchant 
ships in 198 shipyards and supplying three millions 
of tonnage; to lending eight billions to our allies 
and expending for the cause a grand total of 
twenty-five billions of dollars; to taking over for 
the national welfare the public utilities ; to the pro- 
hibition of waste of food, light, heat and time ; and 
to bending all the agencies of the religious life to 
the maintenance of morality among those directly 
or indirectly engaged in the fight. 

Nor has this tremendous result been primarily 
due to that system of popular government, resting 
upon the consent of the governed, which has given 
the world a Washington and a Lincoln, provided 
universal free education for the children of its citi- 
zens of whatever extraction, vouchsafed the fullest 
right of expression at the ballot and in the public 
service, set up barriers against abuse of execu- 
tive or legislative authority by carefully devised 
checks and balances, protected the minority against 
intolerance or tyranny by any class, creed or ma- 
jority, and given scope to the mentality of men and 
women of unequalled resource and initiative. 
Without this formative agency it is unlikely that 

4 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

such a contribution to civilization would have been 
achieved so effectively, for none but the spirit of a 
state untranmieled by kingly power can so well 
direct multifarious forces working in the interests 
of liberty. But underneath all as the direct cause 
is a superabundant energy which is inherent in the 
American people. 

This energy is in turn occasioned by a vitality 
which has been ripened by natural processes. 
Strengthened and developed though the American 
people may be physically by centuries of hardship 
and struggle, their brawn and quickness flow solely 
from an amalgamation of the blood of the peoples 
of many lands into one. Their type is the result of 
the crossing of species and the perfection of attri- 
butes of independence for themselves and an ideal 
of liberty for the earth which are fit to survive. 
Differing in form, feature and mental trait from 
any other race on the earth, they have entered upon 
the greatest stage of all time in order that they 
may give their message to the ever growing life 
of man. 

It would be a truism to say that blood is the elixir 
vitae of all animate creation. Its effect in the field 
of history, where it may be observed quite as mi- 
nutely as under the microscope, is but an extension 
of its application to the physiology of the individ- 
ual, where it feeds the cells of the body with new 
sustenance, where the degree of its quantity and 
quality is the index of strength, and where it dis- 
charges the waste materials consequent upon exer- 
tion. 

5 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

When a person is depleted in energy his physician 
advises him to produce new blood by diet, exercise 
or medicine in order to gain fresh vitality. In ex- 
treme cases of illness the surgeon produces a trans- 
fusion from the blood of a healthier person. Chil- 
dren of parents of differing type and nationality 
are mentally more capable and physically stronger. 
Mendel demonstrated the advantageous outcome of 
fowl variation. 

Darwin says: '*I have collected so large a body 
of facts, and made so many experiments, showing, 
in accordance \\dth the almost universal belief of 
breeders, that with animals and plants a cross be- 
tween different varieties, or between individuals 
of the same variety but of another strain, gives 
vigor and fertility to the offspring; and on the 
other hand that close interbreeding diminishes 
vigor and fertility; that these facts alone incline 
me to the belief that it is a general law of na- 
ture. ,..''"■ 

And Burbank, most original of botanical experi- 
menters, declares : 

'' During the course of many years of investiga- 
tion into the plant life of the world, creating new 
forms, modifying old ones, adapting others to new 
conditions and blending still others, I have been 
constantly impressed with the similarity between 
plant and human life. . . . The crossing of species 
is to me paramount. ' ' ^ 

^ "Origin of the Species," p. 90. 2 "Training of the Human 
Plant," by Luther Burbank, pp. 3-4. 

6 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

Draper, who laid down the postulate that man in 
his historical development is governed by natural 
law and proved its soundness with exactitude, 
touched upon blood transfusion as a cause but did 
not pursue his investigations to the secret of its ef- 
fect. He said: 

*'By interior disturbances, particularly blood ad- 
mixture, with more rapidity may a national type be 
affected, the result plainly depending upon the ex- 
tent to which admixture has taken place. This is 
a disturbance capable of mathematical computa- 
tion. If the blood admixture be only of limited 
amount, and transient in its application, its effects 
will sensibly disappear in no great period of time, 
though perhaps never in absolute reality. 

' ' This accords "with the observation of philosoph- 
ical historians, who agree in the conclusion that a 
small tribe intermingling with a larger one will dis- 
turb it only in a temporary manner, and, after the 
course of a few years, the effect will cease to be per- 
ceptible. Nevertheless, the influence must continue 
much longer than is outwardly apparent; and the 
result is the same as when, in a liquid, a drop of 
some kind is placed, and additional quantities of 
the first liquid then successively added. Though it 
might have been possible at first to detect the adul- 
teration without trouble, it becomes at every mo- 
ment less possible of doing so, and before long it 
cannot be done at all. But the drop is as much 
present at last as at first; it is merely masked; its 
properties overpowered. 

** Considering in this manner the contamination 

7 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of a numerous nation, a trifling amount of foreign 
blood admixture would appear to be indelible, and 
the disturbance, any moment, capable of computa- 
tion by the ascertained degree of dilution that has 
taken place." ^ 

It is clear, then, that the crossing of races has in 
the course of time formulated national types. Some 
of the most widely known authorities of the nine- 
teenth and twentieth centuries have come to this 
conclusion. But if this chapter had for its purpose 
merely the reiteration of such a truth, it would not 
have been written. If, however, with the full data 
of five thousand years of history before us, we may 
discover not only the proof of such an inference 
but go beyond it and disclose a law which works 
with mathematical exactness and explains the en- 
tire development of civilization, we shall find in 
the past the exact reading of the immediate and 
even the far future. We shall then have a purely 
scientific and therefore absolutely accurate barom- 
eter of events among the nations of our time and 
of the following generation. We shall read the des- 
tiny of the United States as clearly as if it were 
told by an infallible prophet — and what prophet is 
so infallible as nature ! We shall be able to fore- 
tell the form and scope of the entire future life of 
mankind on the planet on which he dwells. We 
shall have solved the riddle of history. 

Under this law it follows that a transfusion of 
the blood of several stocks throughout a period of 
three hundred years produces an entirely new peo- 

1 "Intellectual Development of Europe," by J. W. Draper, Vol. 
i, p. IS. 

8 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

pie which at the maximum of strength caused by the 
admixture conquers its rivals, expands into empire 
and does its work in the world. The process of 
transfusion is begun by political conditions which 
make for unity in a territory where there has been 
marked division or distinct separateness. It is 
accompanied by gradual metamorphosis into the 
new organism, which is bound thereby ultimately to 
disturb the peace and aifect the fate of mankind. 
This condition is frequently marked by the strong- 
est of the original peoples within contiguous and 
naturally accessible limits overcoming the others 
and bringing about their amalgamation, as the an- 
cient Bomans exerted swa}^ over the Italian penin- 
sula to the Alps, the English subdued their entire 
island, the Prussians mastered their rivals in 
North Germany, and, it is possible, we shall ex- 
pand on this continent. But in all cases whenever 
the new people created by the fusion of two or 
more elements attains its apex of power after three 
centuries it overcomes opponents and gains influ- 
ence over further domain. As Burbank says, 'Hen 
generations of human life ^ should be ample to fix 
any desired attribute. iTiis is absolutely clear and 
neither theory nor speculation. '^ ^ 

People fall exactly within the observation of 
Darwin concerning a lower order of existence that 
' ' each newly formed variety would be at first local, 
as seems to be the common rule with varieties in a 
state of nature ; so that similarly modified individ- 

iQf Thirty years each, or three centuries. ^ "Xraining of 
Human Plant," by Luther Burbank, p. 63. 

9 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

nals would soon exist in a small body together. If 
the newly formed variety were successful in its bat- 
tle of life, it would slowly spread from a central 
district, competing with and conquering the un- 
changed individuals on the margin of an ever-in- 
creasing circle." In the instance of human kind 
the growth is slow and, so far as outward show of 
strength is concerned, at times imperceptible; but 
the very maximum of expanding strength is in- 
variably reached at the end of the period of three 
centuries from the beginning of the conditions 
which made unity and admixture possible. 

The reason for the attainment of utmost strength 
in this exact period is no more provable within 
present knoAvledge than the fact that the earth re- 
volves on its axis each twenty-four hours. The 
cause of the revolution is apparent, but not the 
number of hours. It is certain, however, that this 
lapse of time of blood transfusion is requisite for 
attainment of full strength. 

"When a people enjoj^s its full power it is under 
natural necessity of exercising it, just as an indi- 
vidual in the heyday of his energies must give vent 
to them in activity. It utilizes an army and a navy 
and a merchant fleet, engines of its advancement. 
Its strength creates within it an ambition to do 
mighty things. The national consciousness takes 
on more settled and determined purpose. Think- 
ers and agitators whip its vitality into rage at the 
attitude of neighbors or an earnest idealism to bring 
about better conditions. Kings and emperors and 
heads of democratic states heed this vitality and 

10 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

themselves become anxious to assist it by advanc- 
ing beyond the past. 

But the real object of giving full expression to 
fresh and irresistible vigor is the same. A people 
fights in its prime and thereby exhausts itself in 
gaining dominion which is limited only by its 
strength to acquire. It holds this territory only 
until a more virile power arises to wrest its suprem- 
acy from it. Then it resumes the boundaries it 
had before the period of spreading out. 

Thus civilization may be likened to a torch car- 
ried by the strongest. When the arm that upholds 
it becomes weak it is seized by another and borne 
along. At the time of the zenith of a people the 
Alexanders, Caesars, Charlemagnes and Napoleons 
appear. Good blood, racing through the arteries 
and pulsating along the nerves that feed the brain, 
quickens and gives force to thought. Commingled 
blood produces the red corpuscles by which each 
people and therefore each nation leaves its imprint 
upon posterity and contributes to that store of the 
world 's achievement by which we of the present day 
are made heirs of the ages. 

Modified though civilization may be by climate 
and topography, it is vitality given by blood trans- 
fusion which enables man to react upon his politi- 
cal, intellectual and even economic surroundings 
so as to give them shape and fiber, and then, 
through the decline by exhaustion of that vitality, 
compels him to be reacted upon in turn by more 
vital and therefore more fit organisms, thus weav- 
ing the warp and woof of history. 

11 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

If it can be proven that this natural process of 
the crossing of human species resulting in strength 
and variation is analagous to that in plant and ani- 
mal life ; that the enumeration of instances of fifty- 
empires throughout as many centuries of history 
reaching this maximum of conquering sway after 
three hundred years of transfusion is complete with 
one partial exception ; that the circumstances in the 
effect of the partial exception prove the cause and 
verify the remaining instances; that where, as in 
a very early period, the facts are not sufficiently 
available to show the exact lapse of time between 
cause and effect, but the amalgamation of blood 
prior to the period of utmost expansion is clear; 
that where there has been no transfusion there has 
been no empire ; that the extent of the subsequent 
empire is entirely dependent upon the amount of the 
blood commingled ; that where the expanded people 
has become exhausted, returned to original limits 
and then retransf used a new empire has developed ; 
that wherever in history an infusion, however slight, 
occurs, activity consequent upon the new vitality 
results three centuries later, — it must be concluded 
that this law is universal and is the cause of the 
rise and decay of nations. 

If it can be demonstrated that such a law is a 
part of the phenomena of nature and is therefore 
dependable, and that the United States mil soon 
reach its apogee after an amalgamation of blood 
throughout exactly three centuries, it must become 
as patent as the periodicity of the stars that the 
American Republic mil continue to emerge tri- 

12 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

•umphant from its battling in our generation and 
fulfill its destiny to give to civilization what a na- 
tion or individual can give — that which is of itself 
— its own ideal to the peoples in a system which 
will grant self-determination to all of them. Neither 
sea nor land can withstand the perfect precision of 
the law of blood. Europe, since the beginning of 
the upheaval in 1914, has been unable to avoid the 
force of its insistent effects more than the ancient 
East, the Middle Ages or prehistoric Mexico and 
Peru. Neither will America or any other nation- 
ality be able to depart from the organic law of 
human life to any greater extent than the bee and 
the ant from the natural rules governing their re- 
spective spheres. 

Careful examination of the historical record for 
invariable application of the law of blood may be 
begun with the case of ancient Rome. The people 
which originally occupied the Italian peninsula 
south of the Arno and the Rubicon were the Rom- 
ans, Latins, Hernici, Volsci, Etruscans, Sabines, 
Samnites, Lucanians, Vestini, Ausones, Marsi, 
Paelegni, Umbri, Sabellians, Bruttians, Veientes, 
Aequi and some Greeks.^ At the opening of the 
Samnite wars in 345 B.C., the Roman people began 
to overcome their rivals, subdue the territory to 
the Arno, bring about closer conmiunication by the 
building of roads, and to transfuse these bloods. ^ 

1 "History of Rome," by Theodor Mommsen, Vol. i, pp. 107, 
114, 119, 128. 2 Ibid. pp. 348-355- 

13 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Three centuries later, under Julius Csesar, who 
died in 44 B.C., the people thus made conquered 
western Europe, northern Africa and Asia Minor 
and laid the foundations of the mighty empire which 
gave the world its law and administration. And 
as during the Punic wars Sardinia, Corsica and 
Sicily, as well as Venetia,^ were annexed, and as all 
of northern Italy above the Arno was added by the 
older population conquering the Cenomanni in 
197,' the Insubres in 196,' the Boii in 191," the 
Appuani in 180,^ and the Ligurians in 176,^ so three 
centuries later, under Trajan, whose death occurred 
in 117 A.D., the additional blood thus commingled 
widened the limits of the empire to their greatest 
extent, the maximum of the Eomans.' 

Likewise in Greece it was blood that told. Ac- 
cording to Grote, the foundations of Macedonia 
were laid in the seventh century before the Chris- 
tion era.® Then Perdikkas began consolidation of 
the Lyncestians, Orestians and Pseonians.° It was 
this combination into a Macedonian people that en- 
abled Alexander the Great in the fourth century to 
conquer Western Asia and give it the imprint of 
that Hellenic civilization which consisted of suprem- 
acy in architecture, sculpture, philosophy, liter- 



1 Encyclopsedia Brittanica, XXVII, 986. Wherever possible I 
refer to this greatest compendium of critical historical knowledge, 
rather than the original sources, because handiest to the general 
reader. - "Histor}' of Rome," by Theodor Mommsen, Vol. 2, 
p. 182. 3 Ibid. 4 Ibid., p. 184. ^ ibid., p. 185. Mbid. ''"Gen- 
eral History," by P. V. Myers, p. 288. » "History of Greece," by 
George Grote, Vol. 4, p. 204. ^ Ibid. 

14 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

ature and its city life. The teacher of the youthful 
warrior was Aristotle, the Greek mind with them 
reaching its zenith. 

The riddle of how the older Greek states fell be- 
fore Macedon is answered by the law of blood. 
Each had had its time. In Attica it Avas a union of 
the Pelasgians, Cecropes, Acharnians and the men 
of Thoricus, Eleusis, Icaria, Aphidnae and Presiae 
that made the empire of Athens possible.^ This led 
to transfusion. In the golden age of Pericles, three 
centuries later, Athens reached its maximum. The 
Boetians descending into the ^gean peninsula from 
the northwest, established unity and infused with 
the Cadmeans and other peoples.^ They flowered 
in the hegemony of Thebes. The Dorians entered 
Laconia and mingled with the Leleges, Minyans and 
Phrenecians.^ The supremacy of Sparta was the 
result. The Dorians also entered Argolia and 
tilansfused mth the Hylleia, Pamphili and Dy- 
manes. * The race thus formed for a time domi- 
nated the Peloponnesus. The Dorians, mixing with 
Ionic populations in Corinth, led to expansion in 
Syracuse and Corcyra.^ The Aeolians conquered 
and amalgamated with the Epeans, later extending 
their power.® The Thessaloi settled in Thessaly 
and the Achaeans in Achaea, but neither ever played 
a prominent part in Grecian history because each 
remained practically one blood.'' 

In the second century the Goths, descending into 

1 "History of Greece," by J. B. Bury, p. i66. 2 Ibid., p. 60. 
3 Ibid., pp. 61-62. * Ibid. » Ibid. « Ibid., pp. 57-58. ^ ibid., 
p. 59- 

15 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Southern Europe from their seats on the Vistula, 
transfused with the Ulmerugi, GepidaB and Scyth- 
ians. ^ Ir the fifth century they moved rapidly 
westward and, attaining their maximum as a con- 
quering nation under Theodoric the Great, ex- 
panded over Italy, Gaul and Spain.^ The Van- 
dals came in contact and amalgamated with Mar- 
comanni, Lugii and Silingse in Central Europe in 
the second century.^ After being impeded by the 
Somans and Goths, in the fifth century they over- 
ran Spain and Africa, establishing in the latter ter- 
ritory a large kingdom.* 

In the fifth century also came the Huns at the 
heighth of their power under Attila. Their empire 
extended from the Caucusus to the Ehine and from 
the Baltic to the Danube.^ Prior to their entrance 
into this scene of action they had in the steppes 
north of the Caspian been conquering and trans- 
fusing their blood with the Alpizuri, Alcidzuri, 
Hunari, Tuncarsi, Boisci and Alani. ^ The time 
from their zenith back to the beginning of amalga- 
mation ma}'' be computed to have been about three 
hundred years. ^ After the death of Attila their 
empire disappeared and they were disseminated 
among the peoples they had conquered, though the 
greater part of them remained in what is now Hun- 
gary, to be overcome centuries later by the Mag- 

1 Ency. Brit., XII, 272. 2 ibid., p. 274. 3 ibid., XXVII, p. 884 ; 
XXIII, p. 652. 4 Ibid., XXVII, pp. 884-5. ^Ibid., XIII, p. 933. 
6 Ibid. 7 Ibid. 

16 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

yars, but not before giving their name to the land. * 
It was there that Attila had his capital. ^ 

After the Goths, Vandals, Huns and Franks had 
passed one after another into Gaul in the fifth cen- 
tury, submerging the Gauls, Iberians, Ligurians, 
Romans and Celts who dwelt there, the Sicambrian 
Franks, under Clovis, subdued the others.^ All 
were amalgamated into a new and greater people. 
Three centuries later, under Charlemagne, this peo- 
ple attained its maximum, conquered the greater 
part of Europe and reestablished the Empire of the 
West* This resumption of that vast authority did 
not last long, being divided among the Great Em- 
peror's three grandsons, but it flashed across the 
darker centuries that followed it an ideal of order 
and strength. 

In the early period of Norwegian life were Lapps, 
Finns and tribes that had immigrated from Jutland 
and Sweden.' These peoples lived separate ex- 
istences and were distributed among different duke- 
doms until the beginning of unification under Har- 
old Haafinger in the tenth century.^ Under Haa- 
kon IV, in the thirteenth century, Norway took Ice- 
land and developed to its utmost extent.^ During 
this time the adventurous Normans gave new vital- 
ity to France, Sicily and England.' 

Denmark was composed of Jutes, Cimbri, Heruli, 
Langobardi, Charydes, Angli, Sigoulones, Sabalig- 

lEncy. Brit, XIII, p. 932. 2 Ibid., II, p. 885. ^ Ibid., X, p. 
804. *Ibid., p. 809. 5 Ibid., XIX, p. 806. 6 Ibid., pp. 806-7. 
Ubid., p. 808. 8 Ibid., IX, p. 751 seq. 

17 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

goi and Kabandoi in ancient times/ In the eighth 
century, under Harold and Sigifridus, transfusion 
began among those disunited peoples that had re- 
mained after the earlier migrations.^ In the 
eleventh century Canute the Great conquered Eng- 
land, Norway, Sweden and part of the present Prus- 
sia on the Baltic.^ This empire, which thus reached 
its greatest extent, was short lived, though Denmark 
itself remained a power to be reckoned with in the 
North for five centuries longer.* 

What is now Sweden was formerly made up of 
the Svear, Gotar, Visigoti, Finns, Vinovi, Rere- 
fenni and Greatas.'' Most important of these were 
the Gotar and Svear.® In the early fourteenth 
century, under Magnus Lodalus, unity began. ^ 
Three centuries later, in the early seventeenth cen- 
tury, Sweden conquered Finland, Denmark, Nor- 
way, the Southern Baltic and Poland.^ This was 
accomplished under Gustavus Adolphus and 
Charles X.^ The Swedish empire was twice the 
size of the nation of today. As the Union of Kal- 
mar, cemented by Sweden, Norway and Denmark 
in 1397, resulted in further transfusion, so in 1697, 
immediately upon the accession of Charles XII, 
Sweden began another short period of expanding 
power. 

Moravia was at one time inhabited by the Quadi, 
Vandals, Heruli, Rugii and Lombards before it was 
subdued by the Moravians, who began amalgama- 

Ubid., VIII, p. 28. 2 Ibid. 3 Ibid., p. 29. * Ibid, s Ency. 
Brit, XXVI, p. 196. 6 Ibid. ^ ibid., p. 199- ® Ibid., p. 203. 
» Ibid. 

18 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

tion in the sixth century.^ This people helped 
Charlemagne defeat the Avars and in the ninth cen- 
tury reached its maximum with territories extend- 
ing from the Moldau to the Drave and from the 
Riesengebirge to the Vistula, as large as the pres- 
ent Austria-Hungary.^ But Moravia soon fell be- 
fore the advancing Magyars, who had entered the 
plains of Hungary about 900, conquering the Bul- 
garians, Serbs, Croats, Huns and Avars they found 
there.* 

Under Arpad this work was completed in 906 and 
the transfusion of blood into the Hungarian people 
began.* Three centuries later, in 1195, Bela III 
expanded the Hungarian empire southward and 
westward to Bosnia and Dalmatia, helping to break 
up that of the Byzantines, and extending suzerainty 
over Servia.^ The empire then declined and after 
three-fourths of Hungary had been devastated by 
the Tartars in 1241, leaving a stratum to mingle 
with the rest, wholesale immigration set in, includ- 
ing great numbers of Cumanians, and a new period 
of amalgamation followed.^ Three centuries af- 
terwards Hungary became the leading power in 
Europe under Matthias Corvinus.^ He took Mo- 
ravia, Silesia, Upper and Lower Lusatia, Styria, 
Carniola and Carinthia, and established suzerainty 
over Bosnia.^ Having expended its strength, Hun- 
gary, too, soon succumbed to stronger rivals. 

The territory of Wallachia, a part of what is now 

1 Ency. Brit, XIX, p. 206. 2 Ibid.. XVIII, p. 817. ^ ibid. 
4 Ibid., yill, p. 901. Gibid., p. 903. 6 Ibid., p. go8. Ubid., p. 
904. ^ Ibid. 

19 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Rumania, was formerly inhabited by Dacians, 
Goths, Tartars, Slavs, Vlachs, Petchenegs and Cu- 
manians/ Radu the Black led a numerous people, 
the Rumans, into the land between 1290 and 1310 
and overcame the older peoples he found there.^ 
Three hundred years passed and then, in 1601, Mi- 
chael the Brave extended this dominion over Trans- 
sylvania and Moldavia.^ 

In Moldavia the same process had taken place. 
Rumanian settlements were made there in 1164, 
leading to an amalgamation with Vlachs, Hungar- 
ians and others/ During the early part of the 
reign of Stephen the Great, which lasted from 1458 
to 1504, Moldavia reached its maximum, annexing 
part of Poland and expanding from the Molcovu to 
the Dneister rivers, including Bukovina and Bess- 
arabia/ Speedily it fell before Turkey. Wliile 
both Wallachia and Moldavia were united in 1859 
under the title of Rumania, they are Rumanian only 
in a basis of people, in each case having mingled 
with others and emerged into a separate nation. 

Bohemia was early occupied by the Marcomanni, 
Tartars, Cechs, Slavs, Avars, Moravians and 
Greeks.*' The empire of the tenth century was the 
result of the consolidation of these peoples three 
hundred years earlier and the beginning of further 
transfusion. About 1275, in the latter half of the 
thirteenth century, under Prmysl Ottocar II, the 
Bohemian empire reached its maximum, asserting 



1 Ency. Brit., XXIII, pp. 831. 2 Ibid, s lyd., pp. 832-3. * Ibid., 
p. 834. t^Ibid., p. 835. 6 Ibid., IV, p. 123. 

20 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

its sway over Moravia, Silesia, Galicia, Upper Lu- 
satia, Styria, Carinthia, Istria and parts of North- 
ern Italy.^ With the rise of Austria, under Ru- 
dolph of Hapsburg, it succumbed.^ 

The Swiss, who have fought steadily toward their 
ideal of federation and liberty for more than six 
centuries, fulfill in exact terms the law of blood. 
Composed of peoples of French, Burgundian and 
Italian stock, as well as the original Helvetii, they 
began amalgamation upon the formation of the 
Everlasting League in 1291.' Three centuries 
later, a Swiss people, they attained their widest 
extent of territory and, in addition, gave mercena- 
ries to their neighbors.* In 1584, the last exten- 
sion of territory, Geneva, was added to Zurich." 
The names of Calvin and Zmngli attest the intel- 
lectual importance of the Swiss in the Reforma- 
tion. 

In Portugal the early peoples were the Iberians, 
Alani, Suevi, Carthaginians, Greeks, Gauls, Goths, 
Romans and later the Arabs and Berbers.^ Greeks 
and Carthaginians were almost negligible.^ Most 
of the people remained separate for centuries.^ 
It was not until Sancho II, from 1223 to 1248, that 
the country was consolidated and amalgamation be- 
gan.^ Then after three centuries the Portuguese 
empire reached its greatest height. By 1540 it had 
acquired its most extensive possessions in Brazil, 
East and West Africa, Malabar, Ceylon, Indo-China 

1 Ency. Brit., pp. 123-4. ^ Ibid. » Ibid., XXVI, p. 247. * Ibid., 

p. 255. 5 Ibid. 6 Ibid., XXII, p. 139. 7 Ibid. 8 Ibid. 8 Ibid., 

p. 141. 

21 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and the Malay archipelago/ Overflowing into 
those lands, its population was diminished from 
two millions to one million.^ 

Forty years later it fell before the power of 
Spain, which had been made np of Iberians, Celts, 
Celtebarians, Romans, Vandals, Suebians, Visi- 
goths, Arabs, Negroes and Basques.^ Unification 
began under Alphonso of Castile at the close of 
the twelfth century/ At the end of the fifteenth 
century and the beginning of the sixteenth century 
Spain reached its maximum under Ferdinand and 
Isabella and Charles V. ^ The Spaniards con- 
quered Portugal and Italy, circumnavigated Africa 
and the globe, founded colonies, subdued Mexico 
and Peru and dominated Europe. Their power 
conmienced to steadily descend with the revolt of 
the Netherlands and the defeat of the Great Ar- 
mada/ 

The Netherlands in early times were inhabited 
by the Gaulo-Celtic tribes known as the Belgse/ 
Among these were the Nervii, Frisians and Ba- 
tavi. In the fifth century came the Salian Franks 
and a little later a Saxon admixture/ Finally in 
the tenth century a considerable infusion of North- 
men was added. Godfrey, a Norse duke, was con- 
firmed in the possession of Friesland.^ In the 
eleventh century feudalism was established and civil 
wars between the different racial interests were 
constant. In the late fourteenth and early fif- 

1 Ency. Brit., XXII, pp. 143-4- ^ Ibid., pp. 145-6. ^ Ibid., XXV, 
p. 537. *Ibid., pp. 544-S- ^ Ibid., p. 550. ^ ibid., p. 551. ^ ibid., 
XIX, p. 413. 8 Ibid. 3 Ibid., p. 414. 

22 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

teentli centuries consolidation began under the 
dukes of Burgundy, fostered by commerce between 
the industrious and wealthy towns.^ Three hun- 
dred years later, after William the Silent had 
fought the power of Spain single-handed, in the late 
seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, that 
part of the Netherlands which became Holland 
reached its maximum of strength under the Dutch 
Republic, controlling the seas of the world and over- 
flowing into the East Indies and South and North 
America.^ That part which is now Belgium, with 
less Norman and Saxon infusion, and held in closer 
sway by Spain and France, never conquered, and 
overflowed finally in the Congo alone. 

Bulgaria was once a mighty empire. Originally 
a Turanian people, the Bulgarians emerged from 
their tracts in the Urals and in the seventh century, 
under Kahn Ishperikh, took Moesia and began an 
amalgamation with the Slav, Ugrian and Finnish 
populations tliere.^ In the tenth century, under 
Simeon, Bulgaria reached its zenith with an empire 
which extended from the Black Sea to the Adriatic 
and from the borders of Thessaly to the Save and 
the Carpathians.* Then it became decadent. In 
the latter part of that century Russians and Greeks 
transfused with the Bulgarians.^ In the thirteenth 
century occurred a temporary and partial renewal 
of the empire.* Finally, with the rise of the Turks, 
it again passed away. 

lEncy. Brit, XIX, p. 415. 2 ibid., pp. 419-20; XIII, p. 595 seq. 
3 Ibid., IV, p. 779. 4 Ibid., p. 780. 5 Ibid. « Ibid. 

23 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

The Serbs were first known historically when 
inhabiting Galicia.^ From there they migrated to 
the Black Sea and across the Danube to their pres- 
ent position in the Balkans toward the middle of 
the seventh century.^ They mingled with Greeks, 
Hnns and Croats.^ After thorough unification 
under Bulgarian domination and an important ad- 
mixture of Bulgarian blood in the eleventh century, 
in the fourteenth century Servia reached the zenith 
of its empire, conquering Albania, part of Mace- 
donia, the Sanjak of Novibazar, Bosnia, Herze- 
govina and Montenegro.* Maintaining its power 
a few years, it also fell before the Turks. 

The Ottoman Turks were forced westward from 
Central Asia by the Mongols.^ In the middle of 
the thirteenth century they began to overflow aiKl 
amalgamate -with, the already declining Seljuks and 
other peoples, such as Byzantines, in Asia Minor.° 
Three centuries after, in the middle of the sixteenth 
century, Turkey, under Suleiman the Magnificent, 
reached its greatest power and extent.'^ When tins 
Sultan died in 1566 his empire extended from the 
frontiers of what is now Germany to Persia.® Tlie 
Black Sea was a Turkish lake and from Egypt to 
Morocco the Sultan's power was supreme.^ The 
Turkish empire commenced to fall five years later 
at Lepanto, but sovereignty over the Balkans and 
Greece was retained.^" 

Transfusion in the new territories was prevented 

lEncy. Brit, XXIV, p. 690. 2 ibid. ^ Ibid., p. 6qi. •* Ibid. 
^ "History of the Ottoman Turks," by E. S. Creasy, pp. 2-3. 
^ Ibid., pp. 4-5. 7 Ibid., Chaps, ix-x. ^ Ibid., p. 197. » Ibid. 
i»Ibid., Chap. xi. 

24 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

becanse of further wars, until after the peace of 
Sitvatorok in 1606/ Three centuries more and in 
1912 Bulgaria, Servia and Montenegro, together 
with Greece, defeated the older state in a decisive 
campaign, again expanding into wider dominion 
and thereby fulfilling the law of blood. Bulgaria, 
in nearer proximity to the Turkish center, Con- 
stantinople, and without mountain barriers be- 
tween, and therefore with greater transfusion, pro- 
duced in the Balkan war a much more vital force 
of fighting men and General Savoff , an exceedingly 
able strategist. 

The Poles, or Polabs, believed to have been driven 
from the Danube to North Central Europe by the 
Romans, found rivals in the Slavonian peoples and 
the Pomeranians and Silesians.^ After being 
wasted by the sword manj'- times, their territory 
was finally devastated by the Turks in 1241.^ Dur- 
ing the following half century considerable immi- 
gration was invited, including the people of the 
Teutonic Orders, Letts and Lithuanians.* With 
the process of recuperation amalgamation started. 
Three hundred years later the Polish people thus 
made reached their maximum.' Mosovia was taken 
in 1526, Livonia in 1561, Volhynia and Podolia in 
1569, and in the latter year Lithuania was practic- 
ally annexed.^ The empire then extended from the 
Baltic to the Black Sea and from near Berlin to 
the 35th parallel of longitude, far east of the 

1 "History of the Ottoman Turks," by E. S. Creasy, p. 239. 
2 Ency. Brit, XXI, p. 902. ^ Ibid, p. 903. * Ibid. ^ ibid, p. 908 
seq. ® Ibid. 

25 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Dneiper. Poised for a brief period, it went down 
before the Turks and then the Russians, Swedes, 
Prussians and Austrians. Because of its form of 
government, even nationality was lost, but the Pol- 
ish people still live and at last, through the United 
States, have found independence. 

In the vast continent of Asia many conquering 
empires existed and centuries ago passed into that 
comatose condition which has since seized upon 
them. In their day they gave the great religions, 
philosophies and arts to man. In these the modern 
has never surpassed the ancient world in fund- 
amental conception. The highest civilization of 
the present time has not been wrought by Christ- 
ianity, forms of law or centuries of buffeting 
against the rigorous climate of Northern Europe, 
but to the fresher and vitality-giving transfusion 
of races in Europe and America. The architecture 
of Egypt, India, Greece, Rome and the Caliphs, the 
the thought of Syria, Greece and Arabia, and the 
achievements of Alexander, Caesar, Justinian and 
Harun were not merely the productions of the men 
of a milder climate. Nor was it boundless expanse 
of plain which tempted the hosts of Attila and 
Jinghis Kahn to threaten Europe, but the blood- 
mixed life within them. 

Each of these Asiatic nations had its period of 
youth and age and in every case it was timed by 
this cause alone. Every people there, with the 
exception of the Japanese, has had its maximum, 
expanding and falling back through decay to its 

26 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

original limits. Their history is dim, because of 
lack of adequate records, but where facts appear 
the same infallible law of blood is found at work. 

Thus in early Babj^lonia a transfusion of the 
peoples immediately surrounding Eridu and Nip- 
pur led to the empire of Accad.^ Another mix- 
ture of Lagash and Kis, and long enough after 
the beginning of consolidation to have approxi- 
mated three hundred years, the unified people ex- 
panded from the Persian Gulf to the Caspian.^ 
After a further infusion of Semitic blood the em- 
pire of Sargon of Accad extended its boundaries 
over the greater part of present Asia Minor and 
Arabia.^ It shortly disappeared. Then came that 
of Ur, widening its limits to the Mediterranean.* 
When it went down Babylon fell to the sovereignty 
of Elam, under Chedolaomar. ^ This was neces- 
sarily accompanied by another infusion of new 
blood, including Canaanites.® When a new people 
conquered they took the old capital, the city of 
Babylon, and made it theirs. Thus the appearance 
of a revival of Babylonia itself was given, whereas 
the opposite is the case. ^ The new people thus 
transfused found empire under Hammurabi. * 

This was followed by one of Sumerian supremacy 
and then the land was conquered and transfused by 
the Kassites under Kandis.^ During the suprem- 
acy of the latter and that of Egypt the Assurites 
had been overcoming their neighbors, including 

1 Ency. Brit., Ill, p. 102. 2 ibid, s ibJd., p. 103. •* Ibid, s Ibid. 
6 Ibid. Ubid. 8 ibid. ^ Ibid., p. 104. 

27 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Hittites, and developing into an Assyrian empire, 
before which Babylon fell temporarily. Declining 
for a time, a second Assyrian empire, greater 
than the first, gathered new strength from further 
transfusion with Armenians, Hittites, Medes and 
Syrians, following their consolidation. It de- 
clined and then, after being taken by the Chal- 
deans, Babylon again arose to be a mighty city and 
the seat of an empire, performing its greatest feats 
of arms under the second Sargon and his immedi- 
ate successors.^ Chaldean struggles with Egypt 
and Elam brought exhaustion.^ After this ap- 
peared the Scythians and Cimmerians.^ They, too, 
overran Asia Minor, destroyed Nineveh and took 
Babylon as a capital. Their empire lasted less 
than half a century and went down before Cyrus 
the Persian.* Realizing the religious significance 
of Babylon, he, too, made the city his capital.^ 

There is evidence that the Phrygians amalga- 
mated during three hundred years with the Bittyn- 
ians, Thyni, Mariandyni and other peoples before 
the expansion of Phrygia over western Asia 
Minor.® Its empire fell before the Cimmerians and 
then to Lydia.'^ In the case of the latter, the Cim- 
meri captured Sardis in 1078 B. C.^ They mixed 
with the Mysians and Dardani.^ Three centuries 
later, under Croesus, the richest king of his age, the 
Lydian Empire reached its greatest extent and be- 
came the financial center of the Mediterranean 
world.'" 



1 Ency. Brit., Ill, p. 105. 2 Ibid. 3 Ibid. •* Ibid., p. 106. b ibid. 
6 Ibid., XXI, p. 541. 7 Ibid. 8 Ibid., XVII, pp. 157-8. 8 Ibid. 
10 Ibid., p. 158. 

28 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

In Ancient Persia were Iranians, Poricanii, Ge- 
drosii and Myci, and in Media were Anaraiacae, 
Tapuri, Amardi, Caspii, Caducii, Galse, Gnteans 
and Lnlubeans.^ After the Scythian and Cimmer- 
ian invasions, leaving strata of population, Media 
extended over the greater part of Asia Minor and 
east to Iran.^ It had reached its zenith in 553 B. C. 
when Cyrus revolted. Three years afterward it 
fell and Persia became the great power in Western 
Asia, as the result of its peoples having been in the 
previous centuries welded into one.^ After the in- 
evitable decay it began to go dowoi before the 
Greeks in the following century at Salamis. All 
these empires, the history of which extended over 
many centuries, were made by and followed a com- 
bination of blood. 

About three hundred years after the inundation 
of the Hyksos tribes, probably from Arabia, one of 
the most brilliant periods in the history of Egypt 
occurred, from Tethmosis I to Tethmosis III.* Of 
the latter, the period from 1550 to 1546 B. C. is 
especially mentioned. ' This great king subdued 
Syria, Babylon, Libya, Ethiopia, Phoenecia and the 
Hittites.^ New blood was infused. Three centuries 
later, under Rameses II, Egypt conquered and took 
in Nubian, Libyan, Syrian, and Hittite blood.'' 
Peace was made and amalgamation began again 
about 1250 B. C.® Libyans thereafter served in 
the armies.® The country fell into decay and lost 

1 Ency. Brit., XXI, p. 202-3. 2 ibid., p. 206. ^ ibid. ■* Ibid., 
IX, p. 83. 5 Ibid., p. 79. 6 Ibid., pp. 83-4- Ubid., p. 85. « Ibid. 
8 Ibid. 

29 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

its power. Then, three centuries after Rameses II 
had reinvigorated it, at about 950 B.C., under Shes- 
honk I, Egypt took Palestine, Israel, Judah, Nubia 
and Thebia. ^ AVhen this empire began to go down 
Ethiopia conquered Egypt and gave it new blood. ^ 
After three centuries had again passed, under 
Psammeticus (664-610 B.C.) and Necho, Egypt 
again restored something of its ancient limits.^ In 
the fourth century A.D. Abyssinia (Ethiopia) was 
opened to immigration.* In the seventh century it 
conquered Yamen and much of Arabia and carried 
on a large trade with India and Ceylon.^ In the 
sixteenth century Mohammedans conquered and 
retransfused the country.^ In the nineteenth cen- 
tury the Emperor Theodore extended his dominions 
over Shoa, Amhera and Tigre. "^ 

Thirteen hundred years before the Christian era 
the twelve tribes of Israel began their amalgama- 
tion. * About 1000 B. C, under David, the Hebrews 
extended over much of Syria. ^ They gave to man- 
kind the sublime message of the ages. They fell 
before Nineveh and Babylon. Today wherever 
placed the Jews command respect for their intelli- 
gence, but as conquerors they had their time alone 
under the son of Jesse. 

Of India little is known before Alexander the 
Great as to dates and for centuries after him is ob- 
scurity, but where facts are clear the law of blood 
is found working with a startling sureness. Thus 

lEncy. Brit., IX, p. 89. 2 ibid. 3 ibid., p. 87. « Ibid., I, p. 
89. 5 Ibid. 6 Ibid., p. 90. 7 Ibid., p. 91. 8 ibid., XV, p. 374. 
» Ibid., XV, p. 375- 

30 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

in the middle of the first century A.D. the Yue-chi, 
a strange people, entered the Kabul valley and be- 
gan amalgamation under Khadphises.^ In the 
fourth century Chandraguptra expanded thus do- 
minion over an empire.^ 

In Chinese history is evidence that the rise and 
fall of dynasties were due to new elements from 
the outside which from time to time entered the 
land and conquered the former reigning force after 
it had fallen to decay. The first ruler was always 
brave and vigorous. The last was degenerate. The 
earliest such account of any authenticity is that of 
the Tsin regime, which originated in a people on 
the western borders who had mingled with other 
blood three centuries before conquering the entire 
ancient territory.' The Manchus were a people 
occupying what is now Manchuria, the name first 
attaining prominence in the thirteenth century.* 
After having been a shifting population, they then 
began amalgamation with the Yih-low, Wuh-keih, 
Moh-hoh and Pohai.^ Three centuries afterward 
following the example of the Khitians, Nuchiks, 
and Mongols before them, they, under their leader 
Nurachu, conquered not only Mongolia but the 
Chinese Empire. ^ The empire of Jinghis Kahn, 
extending from the China sea to the Dneiper river, 
had been founded upon an amalgamation of the 
peoples of what is now Mongolia.^ After their task 
they shrank to their original limits. 

lEncy. Brit, XIV, p. 399- ^ Ibid. ^ Ibid., VI. p. 194. ■* Ibid., 
XVII, pp. 553-4. 5 Ibid. 6 Ibid, nbid., XVIII, p. 712- 

31 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Neither is Tibet so dark as to hide subjection to 
the law of blood. In the seventh century Strong- 
tsan-gampo subdued with his ovra the remaining 
tribes of the vast territory of Tibet/ Amalgama- 
tion was inevitable. In the tenth century the 
Tibetan Empire was extended over Northern India 
to the Bay of Bengal.^ In Siam, about 1250 A.D., 
occurred a transfusion of Lao-tai, Khmer and 
Siamese peoples.* Exactly three centuries later 
the country's greatest conqueror, Phra Naret, ex- 
panded the territory of this new people into Cam- 
bodia, Laos and other portions of the Malay pen- 
insula.* 

In Burma it was the same. The Mongols invaded 
the country in the thirteenth century and estab- 
lished dominion.^ In the early sixteenth century 
the Toungoo dynasty arose to widen the limits of 
the nation into empire.* This led to a further com- 
mingling of blood, with the result that in the early 
nineteenth century Burma attained its maximum, 
conquering Siam, Assam and Manipur and pene- 
trating Bengal. ^ In the last half of the eleventh 
century the Seljuks conquered, consolidated and 
began amalgamation with the peoples of Transox- 
iana.® Just three centuries later, in the last half 
of the fourteenth century, the mighty Timur, at the 
head of a new empire, spread his authority over 
all of Central and AVestern Asia.* 

The Phoenecians founded Carthage in 822 B.C. 

~^ncy. Brit., XXVI, p. 026. 2 ibid. 3 Ibid., XXV, p. 7- -♦ Ibid. 
5 Ibid., IV, p. 843. «Ibid.. p. 844. nbid. » Ibid., XIV, p. 608. 
9 Ibid., p. 608; XXVI, p. 994. 

32 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

and began amalgamation with the Lib5^ans.^ Three 
centuries later the Carthaginian empire spread out 
over the Mediterranean, conquering Sardinia, 
Sicily, cities in Spain and Italy and further terri- 
tory nearer home." This empire declined, but be- 
cause of the new blood added to the older stock, 
three centuries later, under Hannibal (247-185 
B.C.) Carthage conquered Spain and half of Italy.' 
As this North African power went to pieces before 
Rome, Numidia, which had been given new blood 
by it, expanded under Massinissa (238-149 B. C.) 
over the lands from Mauretania to Cyrenaica.'' 
And as the tribe of Kinda extended its sway in the 
fifth century A.D.,^ causing a transfusion which 
eventuated in the empire of the late Omayyads and 
early Abassidas,® so Mahomet in the late seventh 
century began an amalgamation of the fierce tribes 
of Arabia and caused, three centuries later, a fur- 
ther resumption of empire.^ After shedding the 
luster of its learning and institutions, this fell be- 
fore the rising Turks and Byzantium. 

The East Roman Empire, established by Con- 
stantine with the founding of Constantinople in 
330 A.D., is a further exemplification of the law of 
blood. Though Roman law and government were 
at first transferred there from Rome itself, the 
transfusion which began under his authority with 
the Greeks, Goths, Avars and afterwards the Huns 
made a new nation with different customs, archi- 

lEncy. Brit, V, p. 428. 2 ibid, s ibid., V, p. 429. ■* Ibid., XIX, 
p. 868. 6 Ibid., II, p. 265. « Ibid., V, p. 33 seq. ^ Ibid., II, p. 267; 
V, pp. 50-51. 

33 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

tecture and views of life.^ The Goths had de- 
scended into the Macedonian peninsula and Greece 
in 259, and the Slavs settled in the provinces of the 
former at about the same time." Consequently, the 
conquests under Justinian were made in the middle 
of the sixth century and up to the date of his death 
in 565. ^ 

As Constantine brought about more thorough 
transfusion after 328, so Heracleus restored the 
conquests of Justinian which had dwindled in the 
meantime and in 628 equalled the furthest advance- 
ment into Persia of Roman arms.* The rapid de- 
cline of the empire in the latter years of his reign 
was due not to lack of prowess on his part, but to 
the fact that the strength of his people had passed 
its maximum. And as the shake-up in his time had 
made the beginning of a further commingling of 
blood imperative, so, three centuries later, in the 
latter half of the tenth century the Byzantine Em- 
pire enjoyed a short respite of strength.^ 

Earlier, Sapor I, potentate of the Sassanid 
Empire, expanded his dominion over Syria and Ar- 
menia and assumed the title of ''king of the kings 
of the Iranians and non-Iranians. ' ' ® This was the 
result of amalgamation which had taken place three 
centuries before during the upheavals caused by 
Caesar, Pompey and Antony ; ^ and these were 
themselves caused by the Greek colonization of 
Philip and Alexander three hundred years previ- 



1 "Greece Under the Romans," by George Finlay (Dutton), p. 
113 seq. 2 Ibid ^ p X04. 3 Ibid., Chap. iii. * Ibid., pp. iii, 112, 
33^< 339i 19- ^ "History of the Byzantine Empire," by George 
Finlay (Dutton), p. 301 seq. ** Ency. Brit., XXI, p. 219. ^ Ibid., 
p. 218. 

34 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

ous.^ Following the widely extended expansion of 
Sapor in the middle of the third century, in the 
middle of the sixth century Chosroes I took Antioch, 
widened his power to the Black Sea and the Cau- 
casus, ravaged Cappadocia and conquered Bactria.^ 
This was not sufficient to give new conquering 
strength, though in the middle of the ninth century 
the Caliphate subdued with difficulty a serious re- 
volt of Persian Mazdakite sectaries.^ 

In the adjacent lands east of Media the Parthi- 
ans had in the middle of the second century B.C., 
under Mithradates I, extended their victories to 
the Indus and over Media and Babylon.^ These 
successes of the height of Parthian vitality may be 
ascribed to the annexations of Darius and Xerxes 
in this region three centuries before.^ 

Likewise in Mexico and Peru the law of blood 
has worked with perfect exactness. The Aztecs 
conquered the older peoples they found in Mexico.® 
Upon the establishment of their sway in 1195 A.D., 
in what is now the City of Mexico, they celebrated 
the festival of ' ' tying up the bundle of years ' ' and 
beginning a new cycle. '' Amalgamation resulted. 
After exactly three centuries had gone by, they ex- 
panded into a great empire which extended from 
Panama to California.^ They had reached their 
zenith and were ready for their fall when the Span- 
iards arrived. 

In Peru the Incas entered the Cuzco valley three 

1 Ency. Brit, XXI, p. 213. 2 Ibid., p. 223. s ibid., p. 225. * Ibid., 
XX. p. 871. 5 Ibid., XXI, p. 209. Mbid., XVIII, p. 329 seq. 
1 Ibid. 8 Ibid. 

35 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

hundred years before Pizarro.^ The evidence of 
subsequent transfusion lies in the fact that origin- 
ally two languages were spoken.^ Under Huana 
Capac, the Great Inca, the empire reached its height 
and extended from north of Quito to the southern 
part of the present Chili.^ He died the year be- 
fore Pizarro reached Peru, in 1520. * Then the 
Peruvian Empire, too, was ready for defeat. 

Spanish women did not emigrate to Mexico and 
South America with the early conquerors. The 
soldiery, adventurers, ecclesiastics and colonists 
mingled with the natives. Transfusion followed. 
Three hundred years later, from 1810 to 1826, Latin 
America threw off the yoke of the motherland in 
revolution. In 1609 occurred a negro revolt in the 
Vera Cruz region and an Indian rebellion in Sinaloa 
and Durango.^ Blood mingled slightly. In 1910 
came Madero's uprising. 

It appeared to me at first, after I had examined 
the history of all the nations with scrupulous care, 
seeking to find refutation in my own mind of the 
law of blood, if possible, that the case of the Japan- 
ese might disprove it. Japan has had no trans- 
fusion for 1400 years at least and has never ex- 
panded until now, except to a limited degree in 
Korea. In 1917, with an area not much larger 
than the British Islands and about the size of the 
State of California, that nation had a population 
of 52,985,000. The people had been so densely 
settled they could hardly be fed. It needed no 



lEncy. Brit., XXI, p. 274. 2 ibid. 3 Ibid. * Ibid. ^ ibid., 
XVIII, p. 338. 

36 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

prophet to foresee that, like new wine in old bottles, 
they must break through at the expense of Asia; 
as they gave evidence of intention of doing when at 
the beginning of the great war they made demands 
upon China which meant the relinquishment of 
its sovereignty. No people in history were ever 
shut up so long or under such unique institu- 
tions. 

And yet, it will be said, if the Japanese could 
defeat the Chinese Empire of 360,000,000 souls and 
the Russian Empire with 150,000,000 population 
and extending from the Baltic to the Pacific, with- 
out having begun an amalgamation of blood three 
centuries earlier, then the law is disproved. If the 
Chinese and Russians were vigorous races in their 
prime, this would be true, but what are the facts? 
The Chinese passed their zenith three thousand 
years ago. They have been conquered and recon- 
quered since. They are as weak as water and 
cannot excel in the field of battle. 

Is it wonderful, then, that the Japanese people, 
whose strength has been pent up so long, should 
have defeated China and have done it with modern 
weapons and a trained force which their opponents 
did not have? In the war of 1904-5 Russia was 
unable to get sufficient troops across the Trans- 
Siberian Railway and faced its enemy "with but 
300,000 men. Japan had the same number with a 
base of supplies near at hand. The Japanese 
fought two great battles, Liao-Yang and Mukden, 

37 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

each requiring more than a week, and only forced 
the Russians to retreat and take up a strong posi- 
tion. At the Portsmouth conference they could not 
even force -an indemnity. 

No doubt the Japanese did attain their strength 
three centuries after their amalgamation began. 
But they never utilized it. They held it back under 
a social and intellectual system which is itself re- 
pressive and peculiar. Percival Lowell observes 
that the Japanese speak, read and write backwards, 
and that this is only the abc of their contrariety; 
that they think backwards, upside-down and inside- 
out.^ Laf cadio Hearn tells of ' * forms of unfamiliar 
action strange enough to suggest the notion of a 
humanity even physically as little related to us as 
might be the population of another planet."^ 

While the strength of the Japanese originally 
came from infusion of Mongolian, Korean, Chinese 
and Aino blood, the last such having immigrated in 
the sixth century, they could not keep that strength 
at the full, though bottled up.^ The Japanese are 
diminutive in stature. As far back as the Han and 
Wei records of China (25-265 A.D.) they were 
spoken of as dwarfs.* By adopting western meth- 
ods during the last half of the nineteenth century 
and mth such strength as they have withheld they 
are able to conquer more territory in Eastern Asia, 
because of the weak peoples opposed to them, and 
further fulfill that part of the law of blood which 

1 Quoted by Lafcadio Hearn in his "Japan," p. ii. 2 I5i(j_^ p_ 
12. 3 Ency. Brit., XV, p. 256. * Ibid., p. 254. 

38 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

applies to expansion ; but tliey have not tlie youth- 
ful vigor to successfully combat the United States. 
And such additional power as they attain will be 
short, because they have not the energy to maintain 
it. They, too, do not deny but keep the course of 
the law of blood. 

Of the more important European nations enter- 
ing the mightiest of conflicts, in what is now Russia 
were originally Scythians, Goths, Huns, Avars, Bul- 
garians, Magyars, Khazars and Slavs. ^ This is the 
fourth century. The mists of obscurity fall for a 
time and when they lift again in the tenth century 
there are Slavs, Krivitches, Polotchians, Drego- 
vitches, Radimitches, Viatitches, Drevlians, Sever- 
ians, Polians, Croats, Tivertses, Loutitches, Doule- 
bes, Boujans, Tcheques, Lechites, Finns, Turks, 
Mongols, Letts, Livonrans, Esthonians, Carelians, 
Lapps, Moravians, Bachkirs, Metcheraks and 
Tchouvachs.^ These should be divided among Rus- 
sian Slavs, Letto-Lithuanians, Finns, and Turko- 
Tartars or Mongols.^ During the last half of the 
fifteenth century Ivan III threw off the Mongol 
yoke, which had lasted more than two centuries, 
and consolidated the various dominions under the 
sway of Moscovy. * Transfusion followed. 

During the last years of the eighteenth century, 
in the reign of Catherine II, Russia reached its apex 
of power, expanding over an empire extending from 

1 "History of Russia," by Alfred Rambaud, Vol. i, p. 21. 2 Ibid., 
p. 22. 3 Ibid., p. 32. 4 Ibid., p. 245 seq. 

39 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Eussian Poland to Behring Sea. To be exact, the 
Tartar yoke was thrown off between 1480 and 1487, 
and in 1503 the greater part of Lithuania was an- 
nexed. ^ In 1774 Catherine widened the empire to 
the Black Sea and the Danube.'' Ten years later 
the Crimean peninsula was annexed.^ In 1792 she 
claimed Ochakov and the coast between the Bug 
and the Dneister.* In 1795 Courland was taken, 
and the third of the partitions of Poland brought 
about the last of the great seizures of foreign ter- 
ritory. ^ Siberia had been gradually absorbed dur- 
ing the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.^ Hav- 
ing obtained its maximum under the empress, Rus- 
sia was unable to withstand Napoleon, being de- 
feated at Austerlitz and Friedland, and wasted his 
armies only by withdrawing into the interior and 
burning Moscow. In the following century Russia 
did nothing more than consolidate the territory al- 
ready in its possession. 

Italy has long since declined from that maximum 
of strength by which it conquered and expanded 
over other lands. Odoacer, an Herulian, ascended 
the throne of the Caesars in 476.'' After that Rome 
soon fell before the Goths under Theodoric* Then 
from 539 to 553 appeared the Byzantines under 
Belisarius and Narses.^ They in turn w^ere over- 
come by the Lombards.^^ When Pope Gregory II 



lEncy. Brit, XV, p. 244. 2 ibid., Vol. II, p. 130. 3 ibid., p. 
159. *Ibid., p. 165. 6 Ibid., p. 178. 6 Brit. Ency., XXV, p. 18. 
7 "Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire," by Edward Gibbon, 
Vol. IV, p. 56. 8 "History of the Italian Republics," by J. C L. 
Sismondi, p. 4. ^ Ibid. ^° Ibid., p. 5. 

40 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

united with these Lombards and threw off the yoke 
of Leo the Isaurian, the Eastern emperor, the be- 
ginnings of amalgamation might have been made. ^ 
But Pepin and then Charlemagne came, bringing 
an infusion of Franks into the peninsula and estab- 
lishing a protectorate over it.^ This, too, might 
have brought unity of all the strong new races, but 
after the latter 's death his empire fell away. 

''Under the degenerate descendants of Charle- 
magne,'* says Sismondi, "public spirit decayed, 
personal violence increased, jealousy, defiance and 
disdain rendered even neighboring villages hostile 
to each other ; it became dangerous to sow the fields ; 
the crops were subject to plunder and destruction, 
and wayside robbery was the rule. ' ' ^ Then followed 
the Saracens, overrunning Sicily and Southern 
Italy.^ At this time Pope John VIII wrote to 
Charles the Bold: "If all the trees of the forest 
became tongues they could not describe the ravages 
of these impious pagans ; the devout people of God 
are destroyed by the continuous slaughter ; he who 
escapes fire and sword is taken into slavery ; cities, 
castles, villages are wasted, and are without a liv- 
ing soul; bishops wander and get their bread as 
beggars or flee to Rome as their only place of 
refuge. ' ' ' 

The Bj^zantines returned late in the ninth cen- 
tury^ and afterwards the Magyars invaded and 
devastated the northern lands.^ Sismondi says: 

1 Gibbon, Vol. V, p. 278. 2 Sismondi, p. 11. ^ Jbi^., p. 9. ■* Ibid., 
p. 18 seq. 5 Ibid., p. 22. ^ Ibid., p. 21. ^ Ibid. 

41 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

'*In Italy, owing to a variety of interfering forces, 
the disorders attendant on the weakness of central 
authority continued throughout the Middle Ages, 
and if the peculiar constitution of feudalism was 
less marked there than elsewhere, its real nature 
was more agile, and it endured for a longer time. ' ' ^ 
It was Otto the Great who brought his Germans, or 
more properly speaking his Saxons in 961.^ 
*' Weary of turmoil, exhausted Italy clutched at the 
resuscitated empire as the last stay from despair." ^ 
He, too, began to establish cohesion, but after his 
death appeared in Southern Italy the Normans, 
completing their conquests in 1130.* 

Finally Frederick Barbarossa of the Hohen- 
staufen line, crossed the Alps in 1154.^ After he 
had triumphed for a time the League of Cities was 
formed against him and the amalgamation of the 
many new bloods began.^ Italy did not at this 
time become one state, and therefore lost oppor- 
tunity for again expanding into a unified empire, 
but exactly three centuries after Frederick had en- 
tered it and started the movement which began the 
process of transfusion the five powers of the penin- 
sula extended their respective territories to their 
utmost limits — ^\^enice under Foscari, the two Sici- 
lies under Alphonso the Magnanmous, Milan under 
Francesco Sforza, the Papacy under Nicholas V 
and Florence under Cosimo de Medici — and this 
confederated Italy, for a time independent, gave 
new life to the world of art and literature in the 



1 Sismondi, p. 25. 2 Ibid., p. 24. ^ Ibid., p. 26. * Ibid., 52 seq. 
'^ Ibid., p. 57. ^ Ibid., p. 107 seq. 

42 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

humanist movement known as the Renaissance.* 
This was the age of Michelangelo, Leonardo de 
Vinci, Christopher Columbus and Niccolo Machia- 
velli, the supreme height of Italian genius.^ 

United, the states of Italy might have withstood 
the shock of the northern invaders, but divided they 
soon fell before the armies of Spain, France, Aus- 
tria and their Swiss auxiliaries.^ They had long 
been under the domination of the Hapsburgs when 
Napoleon liberated and united them. Then, when 
both France and Austria had passed their zenith, 
the peninsula was able to unite itself. But to con- 
tend that Italy was capable of conquering the Ger- 
many of 1914 would have been the same as to say 
that a nation can come back to expanding life after 
nearly four centuries have gone by since its death. 

France, too, when the war began in 1914, had long 
since passed its zenith so far as ability to meet the 
German tide alone is concerned. With the break-up 
of the empire of Charlemagne, because of none to 
wdeld his sword, the land his grandson Charles ruled 
soon disintegrated into small principalities between 
which there was fighting for centuries.* Different 
languages were spoken and it was impossible for 
a condition to be brought about whereby amalgama- 
tion of the Normans, Flemings and other new stocks 
might be made.^ Philip Augustus in the thirteenth 
century started such a process, but in only a portion 
of the realm that w^as to be modern France.® Con- 

iSismondi, p. 737 seq. 2 ibid. 3 ibid., p. 759 seq. '"A His- 
tory of France," by J. R. M. Macdonald, Vol. I, p. 80. ^ ibid. 
8 Ibid., pp. 131-2. 

43 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

tinned internecine strife and the Hundred Years' 
War drew the forces even further from union.^ 

It was not until the reigns of Louis XI, Charles 
VII and Louis XII that the peoples were consoli- 
dated into one.^ Before his death in 1483 Louis 
XI, the Frederick the Great of France, had annexed 
Burgundy and Provence and extended the southern 
boundaries to the Pyrenees.' After his wars with 
it Brittany finally came to his son Charles VIII 
through the marriage of the latter with Anne of 
Brittany in 1491.* Louis XII married the widow 
in 1499.^ He added Orleans to his domain.^ In- 
ternal warfare began to cease under these kings 
and one-third of the realm was restored to cultiva- 
tion.^ The peasantry enjoyed rest and laid the 
foundations of French thrift.* Society took on the 
forms it was to maintain, including taxation and 
systems of law and judicial procedure.' 

It may be said that between the years 1499 and 
1515 France was organized.^" That this is so is 
shown by the fact that French historians date the 
beginning of absolute monarchy from 1515. In this 
period connnenced the amalgamation of the Iber- 
ians, the Ligurian strains of the Mediterranean, the 
inconsiderable German admixture in the east, the 
Normans, the Basques of the Pyrenees, the Flem- 
ings of French Flanders, the new Burgundian ac- 
quisitions and the original Frankish and Celtic 

1 "A History of France," p. 203. 2 ibid., p. 332. 3 Ibid. * Ibid., 
p. 341. 6 Ibid., p. 353. 6 "Cambridge Modern History," Vol. I, 
p. 397. J Ibid., p. 399. ^ Ibid., p. 398-9. ^ Ibid., p. 403. " Ibid., 
Chap. xii. 

44 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

stocks. Just three centuries later the life thus 
created burst forth with volcanic energy in the 
French Revolution, and under Napoleon extended 
over Egypt in 1799, Italy between 1797 and 1809, 
Holland in 1806, Spain and part of Portugal in 
1807 and 1808, nearly all of present Germany be- 
tween 1805 and 1807, and Illyria in 1809/ This 
was the maximum. After such tremendous efforts 
and the losses in Russia it was an exhausted France 
that faced the British squares at Waterloo in 1815. 
As the result of this exhaustion the French Empire 
dissolved. 

Britain, at the beginning of the great war in out- 
ward appearances the mightiest empire in the 
world, had long since reached its maximum, though 
ready to again demonstrate its old solidarity of 
spirit. To the island originally inhabited by the 
Scots, Picts, Britons and then the Romans, emi- 
grated the Angles, Saxons and Jutes in the fifth 
century, extending their separate conquests in the 
following two hundred 3^ears.^ To them were added 
Danes with a small sprinkling of Scandinavians in 
the last years of the eighth and the beginning of 
the ninth century.^ Alfred held them back.* Then 
came the great Danish inundation in the first years 
of the eleventh century under Sweyn and after- 
wards Canute, who finally conquered the country 
and made it a part of the Danish Empire. Unity 
might then have begun, but Canute died in 1035 



lEncy. Brit, X, p. 86o seq. 2 "A Short History of the Eng- 
lish People," by J. R. Green, p. i. ^ ibid., p. 42. * Ibid., p. 44- 

45 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and in 1066 appeared a flood of Normans under 
William the Conqueror, who also brought with him 
an inconsiderable amount of Breton, Frank and 
Flemish blood.^ The Normans subdued England 
proper, but mutual hatreds and warfare under 
feudalism were long continued.^ 

It was in the reign of Edward I that transfusion 
started.^ Between 1282 and 1295 he conquered 
Wales/ He took the lower part of Scotland and 
nominally subdued the entire realm for a time.^ 
When he died in 1307 he had begun to make Eng- 
land over, though the Scots were already in revolt.® 
However, the Hundred Years' War and the Wars 
of the Roses prevented any thorough amalgama- 
tion of the peoples of the island until after the 
fiercest of the battles of the latter wars ceased in 
1461/ From this time, when the attention of the 
country was turned away from dominion in France 
to national development, and through the reign of 
Henry Tudor, opportunity for understanding be- 
tween the races was found/ From this English 
King's accession in 1485 until his death in 1509 he 
established order and unity^ With the marriage 
of Henry's daughter to James IV of Scotland, lead- 
ing later to the Stewart dynasty, thorough social 
and political equality with Englishmen was start- 
ed/*' England, Scotland and Wales began to 



i"A Short History of the English People," p. 68 seq. 2 Ibid., 
p. 75 seq. 3 Ibid., p. 158. * Ibid., p. 150 seq. ^ Ibid., p. 169 seq. 
« Ibid., p. 158. "^ Ibid., p. 272 seq. ^ Ibid., p. 284 seq. ^ Ibid. 
10 Ibid., XVIII, p. 264. 

46 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

breathe a new life in nnison in the half century 
between 1461 and 1513/ 

The "conquest of Ireland was begun under Henry 
II in 1162, but thorough amalgamation of the Irish 
with the peoples of the main island never resulted, 
due partly to the fact that Ireland is a territory 
separated by water from the suzerain power and 
partly to that governmental policy adopted by suc- 
cessive English kings, which is best summed up by 
Macauley: "Ireland was undisguisedly governed 
as a dependency won by the sword. Her rude na- 
tional institutions had perished. The English col- 
onists submitted to the dictation of the mother 
country without whose support they could not exist, 
and indemnified themselves by trampling on the 
people among whom they had settled. The parlia- 
ments which met at Dublin could pass no law which 
had not been previously approved by the English 
Privy Council. The authority of the English legis- 
lature extended over Ireland. The executive ad- 
ministration was intrusted to men taken either from 
England or from the English pale, in either case 
regarded as foreigners. ' ' ^ 

Transfusion having started in the British Island 
in the last years of the thirteenth' century, expan- 
sion began under Elizabeth in the last years of the 
sixteenth century — the time of Shakespeare. New 
Foundland was taken in 1583.^ The Spanish Ar- 
mada was defeated in 1588.* The West Indies, 

1 Green, p. 272 seq. 2 "History of England," Vol. I. p. 73. 
3 Ency. Brit., IV, p. 608. * Green, p. 394 seq. 

47 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

much of Canada and parts of India were annexed 
in the seventeenth century/ And as further amal- 
gam of British blood occurred after 1461, the maxi- 
mum of British conquests came three centuries 
later. From 1753 to 1760 Clive conquered India.^ 
All of Canada remaining to France was wrested 
from it in 1763.* Green says : ''England had never 
played so great a part in the history of mankind as 
now. The year 1579 was a year of triumph in 
every quarter of the world. In September came 
the news of Minden and of a victory off Lagos. In 
October came tidings of the capture of Quebec. 
November brought word of the French defeat at 
Quiberon. 'We are forced to ask every morning 
what victory there is,' laughed Horace Walpole, 
'for fear of missing one.' " * In 1770 Cook peace- 
fully established British suzerainty in Australia.^ 
Having passed the zenith of its land aggression, 
England lost its colonies in central North America 
to the United States. When the empire of Napo- 
leon began to decline, because of having in its turn 
expended its strength, Wellington triumphed in the 
Spanish peninsula and overthrew the Emperor at 
Waterloo with the aid of the Prussians. Britain 
was able to do this and to hold its colonies by sea 
power and the strength it had gained by amalgama- 
tions up to 1515, sweeping the ocean of its enemies 
in 1806. The subsequent acquisitions of territory 
in Africa and Australia were mainly without con- 



1 Ency. Brit., IV, pp. 608-9. 2 Green, p. 708 seq. ^ ibid., p. 712, 
4 Ibid. 5 Ency. Brit., II, p. 959. 

48 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

quest and by this naval power and the prestige of 
its name. Up to 1914 the British Empire had had 
no real trial of strength since 1815. The brush 
with the Boers was desultory and proved nothing 
except that with all the resources of the Empire 
two and a half years were required to finish the 
task. But that struggle roused Britain to its 
greater work. 

With its zenith passed a century and more, the 
British Empire, however, could not hope by itself 
to conquer a younger and more virile power on the 
land, and it became more and more apparent that 
in order to hold its possessions it must rely chiefly 
upon its fleets and its ability to gather new forces 
into the fight in order to stem the tide until the 
wave of fresh vitality with its autocratic menace 
had expended itself. Whether the rule of Brittania 
over the waves could be maintained permanently 
in spite of the law of blood was a question from the 
beginning of the war. They may appear to have 
been maintained at Aboukir Bay and Trafalgar, 
but the British people were still near their maxi- 
mum. 

The presumption throughout all the centuries of 
the working out of this law M^as decidedly against 
the continuance in power permanently of any em- 
pire. It seemed unlikely, so far as science could 
throw any light on the problem, that massive and 
preponderating instruments of steel and gunnery 
on the water could protect a blood which by itself 
no longer had conquering vigor, though plenty of 
defensive strength, unless it could combine mth a 

49 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

sufficient number of allies to hold the seas and 
Western Europe until the most terrible storm in 
history had passed. 

In spite of our own entrance into a righteous 
Avar against the Central Powers to the utmost ex- 
tent of our lives, money and other resources, and 
in spite of the just indignation against the German 
government which the conflict engendered among 
us, we must have only historical and scientific 
truth in view when we examine the development 
of the German people, so recently at their maximum 
after exactly three centuries since the beginning 
of their amalgamation. 

It will be contended that the people out of which 
the present Germany is made are Teutons and have 
been united by ties of race from time immemorial. 
But the Germans are a new stock. Never before 
the present time has there been a unified German 
people. It is true that in Roman history appeared 
the name of the Teutoni, a tribe which is said to 
have originated in the neighborhood of Denmark 
and was defeated by the consul Marius in 102 B.C. 
when it expanded into Gaul and attacked the gates 
of Italy, and was so named after its legendary 
original father (stammvater).^ But this was only 
a single people which for a time dominated the 
Cimbri and Ausones who accompanied them, and 
was then swallowed up among others.^ 

The sobriquet of German or ''shouting man" was 
given by the Romans to all those peoples who 



1 Tacitus, "Germania," II; Ency. Brit., XI, p. 829. 2 ibid., 
XXVI, p. 679. 

60 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

surged westward across the Rhine from Central 
Europe and uttered loud cries as they entered into 
battle, irrespective of whether they were related or 
not. Tacitus says : * ' The people who first passed 
the Rhine and took possession of a canton in Gaul, 
though known at present (about 100 A.D.) by the 
name of Tungrians, were in that expedition called 
Germans, and hence the title assumed by a band of 
emigrants, in order to spread a general terror in 
their progress, extended itself by degrees and be- 
came in time the appelation of a whole people. ' ' ^ 
The Roman historian then goes on to show that 
each of the peoples east of the Rhine was at that 
time exerting its strength or had fallen to decay. 
Each was separate and different from the others. 

Archeology has attempted to bridge the demar- 
cation between them, but its conclusions are purely 
speculative. Neither this science nor philology 
holds the key to these early peoples. The expan- 
sion of each alone can explain any traces of the 
civilization it may have left outside its original 
territory. The change of names among them in 
the early centuries, so puzzling to historians, is due 
to their transfusion into new peoples who in their 
turn held sway for a while and then disappeared. 
With some scholars the term "Teutonic" has been 
used to designate a type of blue-eyed and light- 
haired peoples in Northern Europe. But they re- 
ceive that type only from climate, as contrasted 
with dark haired and eyed races near the equator. 

Says the Brittanica Encyclopaedia, a monument 

1 "Germania," II. 

51 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

to the scholarship of the British race, "It is to be 
observed that the term 'Teutonic' is of scholastic 
and not of popular origin, and this is true of the 
other terms ('Germanic,' 'Gothic,' etc.), which are 
or have been used in the same manner. There is 
no generic term now in popular use either for the 
language or for the peoples, for the reason that 
their common origin has been forgotten." ^ 
- The use of general terms to cover lack of precise 
knowledge proves nothing. Thus it is extremely- 
unlikely that there ever was a widespread Aryan 
people. Philologists have discovered that the bar- 
est similarity of root of language pervades peoples 
from India to Europe. Some of these scholars 
(less Max Muller, who scoffed at the contention) 
have set up the preposterous postulate that all such 
peoples are descended from an Aryan race. If the 
records of the present time were lost and three 
thousand years hence certain pedants observed 
that among the peoples of Europe and the Ameri- 
cas there was a basis of similarity of Latin deriva- 
tive, would a presumption that their common an- 
cestors were at one time Roman be justified ? Is it 
wiser to conclude that because there was before the 
Christian era a tribe known as the Teutoni, and 
because the Romans gave a general nickname to 
the peoples east of the Rhine who advanced against 
them with loud battle shouts, that all the peoples in 
the latter district were at one time one ? 

No more intelligent is the claim that there is an 
Anglo-Saxon race. The Angles, Saxons and Jutes 

lEncy. Brit., XXVI, p. 679. 

52 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

were submerged by the Danes and then by the Nor- 
mans. Amalgamated, they made a British people. 
In America we have a conglomerate of the entire 
white race which constitutes the American people. 
As close as the feeling between them may be be- 
cause of similarity of language, common law and 
fundamental ideals, the British and American peo- 
ples are entirely separate. Incidentally, it may be 
mentioned that nations amalgamate into unity. 
Having united their blood, they cannot, in the na- 
ture of the case, disunite them. Hence it is impos- 
sible that there could have been an original Ger- 
manic or Teutonic people which disintegrated. 

After the Romans had defeated the Teutoni and 
Cimbri, they came in contact before and immedi- 
ately after the beginning of the Christian era with 
the f ollomng peoples which had their habitation east 
of the Rhine: Bructeri, Chatti, Cherusci, Chauci, 
Langobardi, Cimbri, Cherudes, Rauraci, Medioma- 
trici, Sequani, Tribocci, Nemetes, Vangiones, Mat- 
tiaci, Ubii, Sugambri, Tencteri, Usipetes, Ampsi- 
varii, Chasuarii, Marsi, Angrivarii, Cannefates, 
Frisii, Marcomanni, Quadi, Hermanduri, Semnones, 
Varini, Burgundiones, Lugii, Galindi and Ampsi- 
varii.* By the fourth century A.D. these tribes or 
peoples had solidified into the Franks, Alamanni, 
Goths, Vandals, Heruli, Saxons, Burgundians and 
Langobardi.^ In the sixth century the predomi- 
nant peoples were the Franks, Frisians, Saxons, 
Alamanni, Bavarians (fused with Marcomanni), 



1 Ency. Brit., XI, p. 830. 2 Ibid., p. 831. 

53 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Langobardi (Lombards), Heruli, Warni and Thur- 
ingii/ 

To the east of the Saxons were the Polabs and 
Havelli.^ In the northeast were the Prussi, Lithu- 
ani, Milcieni, Lusici, Warnabi and Leuteci, to- 
gether with the Pomeranians, the progenitors of 
the modern Prussians.^ After the period of the 
great migrations there began to grow up in what is 
now Germany the separate dominions of the Sax- 
ons, Thuringians, Alamanni and Suevi (Swabia), 
Ripuarian Franks (Franconia), and Bavarians/ 
A thousand years were to pass before they would 
begin unification. Charlemagne started such a 
process as he had in Italy, subjugating the Saxons, 
but after his death the former disintegration was 
resumed.^ His grandson Charles melded a tem- 
porary and nominal sway over the great empire, 
but the Normans came into the north to help break 
this up, and afterwards the long night of separate 
dukedoms and feudalism in Germany began.^ 

Through the Middle Ages the different princi- 
palities were maintained.^ Even under Otto the 
Great and Frederick Barbarossa there was no 
tendency toward union of peoples.^ The dukes con- 
stantly extended their privileges and separate 
rights by the sale of allegiance to the emperors dur- 
ing their contests with the Papacy to maintain jur- 
isdiction in the Holy Roman Empire — that great 
phantom of the mediaeval mind.^ Neither German 

1 Ibid. 2 Ibid., p. 832. s ibid. *Ibid. « Ibid., p. 833. ^ Ibid. 
1 1bid., p. 833-4. 8 Ibid., pp. 835, 841. ^ Ibid., pp. 835-841. 

54 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

king nor emperor was hereditary, but elective and 
in the hands of the dnkes.^ Nor was either con- 
fined to a single dukedom. Thus Henry the Fowler 
and the first three Ottos were Saxons, Henry II 
was a Bavarian, Conrad II a Franconian, as were 
Henry III to V, Lothair was duke of Saxony, and 
Frederick Barbarossa, Henry V, Philip and Fred- 
erick II were Swabians.^ 

Finally internecine wars and long absences of 
the emperors in Italy, where Guelph and Guibbeline 
continued fighting, caused even the dukedoms to 
break up. ' There were archbishops, bishops, ab- 
bots, dukes, margraves, landgraves and counts who 
claimed no superior but the emperor whose author- 
ity they had destroyed.* Petty knights and barons 
descended upon passing travellers.^ The peas- 
antry and serfs of the different principalities did 
not mingle. ® Culture and refinement prevailed 
only in the courts of the great dukes.'' Leagues of 
cities were local.^ 

To digress briefly, the last half of the thirteenth 
century saw the beginnings of Austrian power. 
The Osterreich, or East Realm, had been occupied 
in old time by the Quadi, Taurici and considerable 
Marcomanni.^ There had been in Styria, Carinthia, 
Triest and Istria strata of- Huns, Slovenes, Avars,, 
Franks, Moravians and Magyars." Under Rudolph 
of Hapsburg Austria extended its dominion over 

lEncy. Brit., XI, p. 845. 2 Ibid., p. 834 seq. 3 Ibid., p. 845. 
4 Ibid. 5 Ibid. « Ibid. Ubid., p. 844- * Ibid., p. 845. » Ibid., 
Ill, p. 5. 10 Ibid. 

55 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and consolidated the districts named and made it 
possible to start a process of amalgamation. ^ In 
the last half of the sixteenth century the Austrian 
people thus created attained their maximum and 
conquered Bohemia, most of Hungary (due to the 
death of Suleiman and the decline of Turkish 
power), Slavonia and Transylvania. 

It was the Spanish Charles V who inherited this 
dominion, as well as the old Hapsburg territories 
in the Netherlands and the Spanish conquests in 
Italy.^ But Austria had expended its strength, ac- 
cepting the feudal and nominal allegiance of the 
northern principalities and interfering very little 
therein.^ If there had been a complete transfusion 
of Austrian and Hungarian blood after the con- 
quests in the latter part of the sixteenth century, 
Austria would now, three centuries later, have been 
within itself again a great power. But Hungary 
has kept its identity, customs, language and politi- 
cal institutions and the transfusion has been incon- 
siderable, though enough to add new strength to 
Austria. Bohemia, too, has maintained its lan- 
guage. 

When the foundations of Austria were laid in 
the thirteenth century the German kingship was 
held in such light esteem, due to the constant disin- 
tegration, that it was conferred electively upon a 
Bohemian, a Moravian and then a Hungarian.* In 
the fifteenth century the disunion among the duke- 
doms increased, and few of the elective kings had 
any authority except over their own original juris- 

"lEncy. Brit., Ill, p. 6. 2 ibid, s ibid. 4 ibid., XI, p 845 seq. 

56 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

diction/ In the north was constant fighting among 
the duchies.^ Austria gradually drew away from 
the principalities there, now added to by Branden- 
burg under the Hohenzollerns.^ These were indif- 
ferent to Austria ^s foreign wars.* Local diets ad- 
ministered them and the princes were practically 
sovereigns.^ 

The breaking away from the church in the Refor- 
mation awakened the peoples, but merely accentu- 
ated their territorial separateness.® When Luther 
appeared the sole pure German language was that 
of the chanceries.^ With that as a basis he trans- 
lated the Bible and made what grew into a common 
language later.^ But the principal states still spoke 
different tongues.^ The attempts of Sickingen and 
Hutton to establish unity resulted in their deaths." 
The League of Schmalkalden fell apart and the 
Protestant states fought each other with great 
cruelty." The empire had now disintegrated into 
three hundred separate territorial entities.^^ 

It was not until 1618, at the opening of the 
Thirty Years ' War, that the peoples of the present 
Germany started amalgamation. In their struggle 
against the Papacy and the Austrian Empire the 
Saxons, Prussians, Bavarians, Franconians, Thur- 
ingians, Swabians and Pomeranians began to feel 
a common interest." In the awful process by which 

1 Ency. Brit, XI, p. 849 seq; "Cambridge Modern History," 
Vol. II, p. 14. 2 Ibid., Vol. I, Chap, ix ; Ency. Brit, XI, p. 849. 
3 Ibid. *Ibid., pp. 849-50. sibid.^ p. 850. « Ibid., pp. Ssi-a 
T Ibid., p. 788. 8 Ibid. ^ "Martin Luther," by A. C. McGiffert 
pp. 225-6. 10 Ency. Brit., XI, p. 852. " Ibid., p. 855. ^^ ''Holy Ro- 
man Empire," by James Bryce, p. 394. ^^ Ency. Brit, XI, p. 
857 seq. 

57 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

their population was cut down from twenty to six 
millions in thirty years and, cannibalism is said to 
have been practiced, was forged the weapon by 
which modern Germany was made.^ With the ex- 
ception of two years nearly all the fighting took 
place in the south, particularly Bavaria and Bo- 
hemia, leaving the northern peoples to be drawn 
together by mutual ties. These thought and fought 
as one.^ Feudalism disappeared.^ Turenne's in- 
cursion into Bavaria saved its people for amalga- 
mation into the future German Empire.* By the 
treaty of Westphalia in 1648, having loved free- 
dom enough to die for it, they made it certain that 
men should be allowed to think as they pleased.^ 
Then came Frederick the Great, who, with the 
sword of Prussia, tempered by the vital blood, 
principally Pomeranian, that had been infused with 
it, further consolidated the peoples. Each of the 
older states — Bavaria, Saxony, Thuringia, Fran- 
conia and Swabia (now Wurtemburg) — had had its 
time. It was Prussia that took the lead. Napoleon 
brought about still greater union, first by conquer- 
ing and giving these peoples law and then by arous- 
ing their patriotic ardor to defeat him. Finally 
came Bismarck and then William II, and the Ger- 
mans — no longer Bavarians, Saxons, Thuringians, 
Prussians, Franks, Pomeranian^ — after three cen- 
turies of transfusion were enabled to expand at 
the expense of the older peoples from the very be- 
ginning of the war in 1914. 



lEncy. Brit, XI, p. 860. 2 ibid., p. 857 seq. ^ Ibid. ^ Ibid., 
p. 859. ^ Ibid., p. 861. 

58 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

In this expansion German}'^ again fulfilled the 
law of blood, which provides that every nation at 
its zenith shall impose its sovereignty over other 
lands, just as the bud rises to bloom, flowers and 
decays. Every other European power had, when 
the war began, already done so. Britain had 
spread over a fourth of the globe and controlled a 
fourth of its population. Its most aggressive sons 
had gone to Canada, the United States, Australia, 
South Africa and India. The least vital remained 
at home. These called upon the colonies to help 
them. Canada, Australia and South Africa re- 
sponded liberally, but they could not conquer alone 
on the battlefield ; they are of one blood. They not 
only could not advance but were driven back until 
the Americans appeared. Of Australians, 97 per 
cent, are British. In Canada, with the exception of 
French Quebec, nearly all are so. The three hun- 
dred millions in India were ruled by 165,000 Eng- 
lishmen. This was no miracle, but the law of blood ; 
for they have been so weak and orderly under so 
small a number because of efficient British rule and 
awe of the British name. 

Britain gave to the earth constitutional liberty 
and representative government. It gave birth to 
four great nations. It taught its institutions to 
India. It did as great a work as has ever been done 
by any nation, -with the exception of the United 
States, in all the history of mankind. France gave 
art and literature to the modern world. Russia 
gave a semblance of order to the semi-barbaric 
tribes that surged westward from Asia, and thereby 

59 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

protected the civilization of Europe. Italy in its 
renewal of life gave the Renaissance. But mighty 
conquering forces of themselves they could no 
longer be, and it was the presumption until the 
United States entered the war that they must take 
on the original form from which they started to 
expand, if they had not already done so. And so 
every nation has its time. Every nation does a 
work. Every nation falls to decay. None comes 
back to again conquer new territory. It is the same 
as with a man whose body dies, but whose work 
lives on. 

"When the curtain arose upon the conflict in 1914 
it found England fighting for the neutrality of Bel- 
gium, for a preponderance of influence in Europe 
and for commercial supremacy. It found France 
anxious to retake Alsace-Lorraine. It found Rus- 
sia ambitious to enter the Mediterranean. It found 
Italy aloof because of a purpose to gain increased 
dominion and prestige at the expense of Austria. 
It found Japan seeking to aid its ally, England. It 
found Servia, Montenegro and Belgium struggling 
for independence. And it found Germany mth its 
mailed fist upon Belgium and ready to Prussianize 
and Junkerize the world. 

How different this was from that softer side 
which had been evident for a century may be 
gathered from the statement of President Wilson 
that Germany had surpassed Europe and America 
and that all the world had gone to school to her. 
Germany had conceived the Kriss Kringle and was 
the toy maker of the world ; had given the highest 

60 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

expression in modern music, through the melodies of 
a Mendelssohn, a Beethoven, a Strauss, a Bach, a 
Meyerbeer, a Schumann, a Brahms, a Wagner; 
caused the desire to join in chorus of song in the 
thousands of singing societies throughout the Em- 
pire ; created and developed the kindergarten, tech- 
nical training and specialization ; added the thought 
of Leibnitz, Lessing, Schleiermacher, Fichte, Kant, 
Schelling, Hagel, Nietzsche and Eucken, and the 
poetry of Goethe, Schiller and Hauptmann; pro- 
duced Koch, Virchow and Schliemann in the re- 
spective fields of bacteriology, pathology and arche- 
ology; achieved marvels in medicine and surgery; 
given the world modern sanitation ; enacted a poor 
law which abolished poverty; reduced illiteracy to 
less than one half of one per cent. ; and in admin- 
istrative system, particularly municipal govern- 
ment, and all that meant the application of scien- 
tific method, outdistanced any of its European 
rivals. James Bryce in the latest revision of his 
**Holj^ Roman Empire" speaks of that "breadth 
of development in German thought and literature 
by virtue of which in the first half of the nineteenth 
century it transcended the French hardly less than 
the Greek surpassed the Roman." 

But now, at the beginning of the war in 1914, 
Germany threw aside these refining influences and 
came forth as the ruthless exponent of its Emperor, 
who said: '* There is only one law — ^my law — ^the 
law which I myself lay down." Blood vitality at 
maximum gave the submarine to shake the com- 
merce of the earth as it had not been shaken since 

61 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the disappearance of Venice as a sea power. It 
gave the genius of a Hindenburg and a Mackensen 
to crush the empire of the Czar, advance in the 
Balkans and seize Northern France. It gave the 
hope and purpose to take vengeance upon Italy, 
wrest all of Africa from its enemies possessing it, 
and restore the Empire of the West. Vital German 
blood and German generals won in Galicia after 
decadent Austria had been driven back to the Car- 
pathians, did a similar work in Italy, assisted the 
Turks, and with undying hate declared that Eng- 
land should have the fate of Babylon: *'0h, thou 
that dwellest in many waters, great m treasures, 
thy end is come, the full measure of thy selfish rob- 
bery." 

Hopeful of conquering in the end unless the older 
peoples could, with the arms, ammunition and food 
provided by the United States, continue the struggle 
until three full Teutonic centuries had passed in 
1918 and they should be finally overwhelmed as was 
Napoleon after the French had reached their maxi- 
mum, the Germans fought with a ferocity like that 
of ''the beast, dreadful and terrible and strong ex- 
ceedingly, with great iron teeth" foreseen by Dan- 
iel. Three years of such fighting caused Lloyd 
George to admit in the House of Commons that the 
chief dependence of the Allied cause rested upon 
the United States. In a speech early in 1918 Gen. 
Leonard Wood warned: "This is a war against 
efficiency, against a degree of efficiency such as the 
world has never before witnessed. Do not under- 
estimate the strength of the enemy you are sending 

62 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

your men against. He is skilled m war, trained in 
arms, wonderfully well led, and also brave and en- 
during. We may damn his methods and condemn 
his morals and denounce his object in the war, but 
do not let us underestimate his value as a fighting 
machine. ' ' 

When this country entered the mighty conflict in 
1917 it had less than an hundred thousand men in 
its standing army hardly worthy of the name. The 
navy had not been recruited to its full strength. 
Despite these w^holly inadequate forces, but with 
the immense resources of America in mind, Presi- 
dent Wilson nobly announced to Congress and the 
w^orld a crusade against autocracy and for demo- 
cratic institutions everywhere. Almost while he 
was speaking Russia had ostensibly become a part 
of it. H. G. Wells, the novelist, at the same time 
proposed that Britain become a republic, carrying 
along with it liberty for India and Ireland. It was 
to be hoped that Italy and Japan would join in the 
movement as it gained even further momentum. 
The President had voiced the goal of humanity and 
by his leadership of the tremendous efforts initi- 
ated by him to raise adequate disciplined military 
forces proved he realized that more than vague 
humanitarianism was needed to bring it about. 
Isaiah long ago and Tennyson had also predicted 
the coming of a democratic age, and many others 
have at intervals announced its advent. But it is 
the lesson of the ages that only by struggle can it 
arrive. 

Upon Congress declaring war it could not but be 

63 



AMERICA'S TOi^IORROW 

foreseen that if the British Empire was not first 
forced by the German submarines to go the way of 
all the earth, and Germany was not able to exert its 
■utmost strength beyond the very limit of its three 
hundred years of amalgamation, we should be able 
to raise and equip forces more than sufficient to 
overthrow the modern colossus at the head of which 
William II ruled in blood and iron. On the other 
hand, it was also perceived that if England should 
succumb to the subsea menace, our entrance into 
the conflict could not but be the mere beginning of 
an even greater contest for supremacy between 
America and Germany. With the knowledge of our 
greater transfusion, it was a certainty with us that 
we should crush Germany in the end. No matter 
what it might accomplish against the remainder of 
Europe in the war of wars, we had the scientific 
assurance that it must inevitably succumb finally 
to our far more virile and now awakened power. 
With these facts in our possession we knew that 
the defeat of the mighty enemy could not be stayed. 
Because the law of blood works with exactness the 
spreading out of Germany on the continent was 
unavoidable. So Japan with its compressed popu- 
lation has expanded in Eastern Asia. We alone 
were able to destroy the German power. And thus 
we have the strength to end all empires. 

Peoples without transfusion have been without 
extra territorial dominion. The Irish with prac- 
tically the same Celtic stock for two thousand years 
have been held in subjection by the many times 
amalgamated British. The negroid peoples of Af- 

64 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

rica south of the great desert and without trans- 
fusion have made no impression upon history. 
Only those north of that waste of land who have 
mixed with Mediterranean peoples have added to 
the pages of man's record. The Philippines have 
produced no conqueror because containing only an 
expansion of an older Malay race and not an amal- 
gamation, as in the case of Japan. South America 
is of one Spanish blood, with the exception of un- 
infused Italians, Germans and Portugese, the lat- 
ter so similar to the Spanish as to be almost one. 
That continent, for this reason and because of cli- 
mate, holds for the immediate future no conquering 
people. J^Or ^oes Australia. In every other part 
of the world each people has had its day of expand- 
ing strength with the exception of the Americans 
and perhaps the Japanese. We, having the most 
profuse transfusion of blood since Adam, have 
nothing to fear from any race, kingdom or clime, 
and in our time will subdue all, if necessary, in 
order to rear our ideal of liberty for mankind. 

It is but natural that the United States, in giving 
to mankind that which is of itself in government 
and ideals, should combat and utterly defeat other 
peoples so as to compel each 'world empire to re- 
turn within original limits. Hence it may be that 
it will have to wield the sword as no predecessor 
on the face of the earth has done, if the result can- 
not be attained peaceabl}^ and thus it should have 
adequate military service and a navy second to 
none. AAvakening of peoples to the example of our 
free institutions may bring revolutions and make it 

65 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

less necessary for it to oppose empires ; yet it has 
also a destiny to preserve order and civilization. 
Conquer and destroy it will in the meantime, but it 
will not do its mightiest work until three hundred 
years after the beginning of amalgamation of blood 
mthin its borders and when the American people 
shall have reached the maximum of their strength. 

That transfusion, it would seem, began about the 
year 1638, when the Dutch West India Company 
for the first time threw open to the world the right 
to cultivate land in New Amsterdam in free allo- 
dial proprietorship.^ All privileges were then ex- 
tended equally to other nationalities in the same 
degree as to Dutchmen. Indeed, direct encourage- 
ment to innnigration was provided. Each settler 
was given a farm free for six years with barn, 
horses, cows, sheep and smne. The only monopoly 
retained by the company was the carrying of the 
newcomers. The way was thus opened for the mi- 
gration of Dutch, Swedes, Huguenots and English- 
men and their subsequent intermingling. At Christ- 
mas of that year came the first shipload to mark 
the beginning of a new era. 

Certainly this policy did not extend elsewhere. 
John Fiske says that ''the Puritan exodus to New 
England which came to an end about the year 1640 
was purely and exclusively English. There was. 
nothing in it that came from the continent of Eu- 
rope, nothing that was either Irish or Scotch, very 
little that was Welsh. As Palfrey says, the popu- 
lation of 26,000 that had been planted in New Eng- 



1 "The Dutch and Quaker Colonies in America," by John 
Fiske, Vol I, p. 149 (II. ed.). 

66 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

land by 1G40 'thenceforward continued to multiply 
on its own soil for a century and a naif in remark- 
able exclusion from other communities. ' " ^ Those 
on the Mayfloiver were solely subjects of James I. 
In Virginia and Maryland the early colonists were 
likewise English. In the far south and southwest 
the Spaniards brooked no intruders. Further north 
the French maintained exclusiveness. That port 
which was renamed New York alone made way for 
the mightiest overthrow of history. So many Eng- 
lish and others came to it that they were at first 
compelled to swear allegiance to the Director of 
the New Netherlands, the States General and the 
Prince of Orange. 

It is a remarkable fact that at this very period 
of the beginning of the strength of the American 
people there also germinated those ideals of society 
and government which that force was destined to 
spread over the entire world. In 1639 the to^vns of 
Hartford, Windsor and Wethersfield formed a 
union, with a legislative body known as a general 
court, in what was to become Connecticut. Fiske 
relates : 

**At the opening session of the General Court, 
May 31, 1638, Mr. Hooker preached a sermon of 
wonderful power, in which he maintained that 'the 
foundation of authority is laid in the consent of 
the people,' 'that the choice of public magistrates 
belongs unto the people by God's own allowance,' 
and that 'they who have power to appoint officers 
and magistrates have the right also to set the 

i"The Beginnings of New England," p. 136. 

67 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

bounds and limitations of the power and place unto 
which they call them.' 

*'0n the 14th of January, 1639, all the freemen 
of those towns assembled at Hartford and adopted 
a written constitution in which the hand of the 
great preacher is clearly discernible. It is worthy 
of note that this document contains none of the 
conventional references to a 'dread sovereign' or a 
'gracious king' nor the slightest allusion to the 
British or any other government outside of Con- 
necticut itself, nor does it prescribe any condition 
of church membership for the right of suifrage. It 
was the first written constitution known to history, 
that created a government [The compact drawn up 
in the Mayfloiuer's cabin was not, in the strict sense, 
a constitution, which is a document defining and 
limiting the functions of government. Magna 
Charter partook of the nature of a written consti- 
tution, as far as it went, but it did not create a 
government] and it marked the beginnings of 
American democracy, of which Thomas Hooker 
deserves more than any other man to be called the 
father. 

''The government of the United States today is 
in lineal descent more nearly related to that of Con- 
necticut that to any other of the thirteen colonies. 
The most noteworthy feature of the Connecticut 
republic was that it Avas a federation of independ- 
ent towns, and all attributes of sovereignty not ex- 
pressly granted to the General Court remained, as 
of original right, in the towns. Moreover, while 
the governor and council were chosen by a majority 

68 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

vote of the whole people, and by a suffrage that 
was almost universal, there was for each township 
an equality of representation in the assembly. This 
little federal republic was allowed to develop peace- 
fully and normally; its constitution was not vio- 
lently wrenched out of shape like that of Massachu- 
setts at the end of the seventeenth century. It 
silently grew until it became the strongest political 
structure on the continent, as was illustrated in the 
remarkable military energy and the unshaken 
financial credit of Connecticut during the Revolu- 
tionary War. And in the chief crisis of the Fed- 
eral Constitution of 1787, Connecticut with her com- 
promise which secured equal state representation 
in one branch of the national government and popu- 
lar representation in the other, played the control- 
ling part. ' ' ^ 

Between 1631 and 1637 Roger Williams in Massa- 
chusetts expressed views which, if carried into ef- 
fect, meant the entire separation of church and 
state, the equal protection of all forms of religious 
faith, the repeal of all laws compelling attendance 
on public worship, the abolition of tithes and of all 
forced contributions to the support of religion.^ In 
New Amsterdam the Dutch provided for element- 
ary schools at public expense, in 1635 the to^vn of 
Boston took action to the end that ''our brother 
Philomon Pormort shall be entreated to become 
school master for the teaching and nurturing chil- 
dren with us," and in 1636 Harvard College was 
founded. In 1638 also negotiations were begun for 

1 "Cambridge Modern History," Vol. VII, p. 23. 2 ibid., p. 124. 

69 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

a federal union of the colonies of Massachusetts, 
Connecticut, New Haven and Plymouth.^ 

Computing with scientific exactitude, it was de- 
creed in 1638 that in 1938 the American people 
should attain their greatest power. Because their 
ideal is the government of Thomas Hooker, Alex- 
ander Hamilton and Thomas Jefferson, and because 
since the early date the liberty and opportunity 
loving of every land have come to our shores in 
increasing numbers — ^before the great war at the 
rate of a million amraally — it is certain that the 
power of the United States will be maintained at 
maximum for another three hundred years, a suf- 
ficient period to establish any federation of the 
world on a firm and unalterable basis. Should 
this government extend its borders so as to embrace 
the continent and many more immigrants come 
from other lands, a still further period of blood 
admixture would result, with a concomitant exten- 
sion of power. A nation cannot give more than 
it is. Ours is one wherein it is guaranteed that 
all men everywhere shall be free. Hence only mon- 
archy and autocracy have aught to fear from an 
ever mightier America. 

It may be that we have reached our apex sooner, 
but there is not the slightest trustworthy evidence 
of amalgamation in America before 1638. Our re- 
cent achievements would lead us to think that our 
transfusion has been so constant that we are an 
exception to the otherwise imalterable rule of na- 
ture that three hundred years be required for cul- 

1 "The Beginnings of New England," by John Fiske, p. 153. 

70 



OUR NATIONAL STRENGTH 

mination of the strength of a people, and that we 
were thus able to turn the scale in Europe. Our 
armies came in contact with those of Germany at 
the final and maximum effort of the latter and ac- 
complished their purpose by resistless energy in 
four months. At any rate, the law of blood assures 
us that it is the destiny of the United States to 
expand within contiguous limits during the coming 
decades and annihilate not only the Spanish and 
German power, as in the past, but all other em- 
pires, if they do not in the meantime become repub- 
lics and allow full and free self-determination. 

"WTiether the struggle requires a few or many 
years, when we shall have accomplished our task all 
kings mil have disappeared as the result of our 
battling or our thoroughly successful and highly 
altruistic example. With almost the entire world 
against Germany for a time, due to our entering 
the war, and a resultant initially enhanced com- 
munity of interest and a high appreciation on the 
part of all peoples of the beneficent efforts of the 
United States, our work is thoroughly under way 
in what Heine termed "the liberation war of hu- 
manity." America will at maximum of strength 
revivify and make free a world of men. 



71 



CHAPTER II 

REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 



"We hold these truths to be self evident; that all men are 
created equal ; that they are endowed by their creator with cer- 
tain inalienable rights; that among these are life, liberty and the 
pursuit of happiness; that to secure these rights governments are 
instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the con- 
sent of the governed." — Declaration of Independence. 

"The world is not going to consist now of great empires. It 
is going to consist for the most part of small nations, and the 
only thing that can bind small nations together is the knowledge 
that each wants to treat the other fairly." — Woodrow Wilson, 
at Milan. 



nr* HOUGH the earth by means of a tremendous 
^ conflict during the brief period of four years 
has been rid of the autocratic domination of three 
once potent and feared dynasties, and has thereby 
immeasurably advanced central and eastern Europe 
in the direction of political freedom, its work and 
that of the United States in this respect will re- 
main only partially done, no matter how much the 
ideal of a league of powers temporarily acting to- 
gether may point to its completion, so long as a 
third of the land surface of the globe is still in- 
fested by monarchy and some peoples do not yet 

72 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

enjoy self determination and republican institu- 
tions. 

Indeed it may be said that while any king any- 
where either exerts authority or holds title the full 
ends of liberty can never be achieved. The Haps- 
burgs had ruled in splendor for six hundred years, 
the Romanoffs for three hundred years and the 
Hohenzollerns for seven hundred years. The al- 
lied countries have rejoiced that tlioir blood and 
sacrifice have helped to bring an end to such abso- 
lutism. For with them passed forever the force 
of the principle of the divine right of kings, an 
event the most important since the termination by 
Napoleon in 1806 of the Holy Roman Empire, 
which for so many centuries had claimed unlimited 
authority. With them also disappeared the Ger- 
manic Empire, which had exerted so wide an influ- 
ence in the history of men in the eleven hundred 
years since Charlemagne, as well as the Turko- 
Tartar power on the borders of Asia. With them 
expired the close connection between religion and 
state which had meant to both Latin and Greek 
Christianity so much of bitterness and woe. With 
them terminated that system of militaristic bond- 
age and caste which had been reared outside of 
constitutional guarantee and to uphold oppression. 
Few events in the life of mankind have ever marked 
such vast change from an old system to a new. 

But when the peacemakers met at Versailles 
there remained as a part of that monarchial sys- 
tem which had caused so much suffering in the past 
the king of England, ruling vast multitudes and ter- 

73 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ritories in Britain and Ireland, India and Africa, 
Australia and Canada; the king of Italy, controll- 
ing the Latin peninsula and a portion of Northern 
Africa; the emperor of Japan, dominating the 
Island Kingdom and Korea and recognized by us 
as having a preponderent influence in China and all 
Eastern Asia ; the king of Belgium, restored to sov- 
ereignty by our arms and having power over the 
Congo ; the queen of Holland, with her native land 
and that of Dutch Guiana and the rich and populous 
East Indies under her sway ; the sultan of Turkey, 
still tormenting a small bit of Europe and a large 
portion of Asia Minor with his force ; and the kings 
of Norway, Sweden, Spain, Greece, Montenegro, 
Bulgaria, Roumania, Servia, Persia, Afghanistan, 
Burma and Siam. 

These sovereigns have been shorn by legislative 
checks of the authority once held by their ances- 
tors, and it is no longer possible to force their will 
upon their subjects as law, but it is nevertheless 
true that tliey gain their prestige and commanding 
eminence only because born of certain persons who 
have preceded them in royalty. They do not come 
up out of the body of the people and represent 
them in any executive capacity. On the contrary, 
most of them not only misrepresent but are notori- 
ous for their incapacity. Their place in their re- 
respective governments is an extra constitutional 
function. They therefore form a useless appen- 
age from the past. Their support is waste and ex- 
travagance. Millions of the money of the peoples 
they rule as puppets is exacted by taxation for 

74 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

this purpose. Soon the entire world will find them 
stupid nonentities, and the government of the 
United States should do nothing to uphold some 
of them while its arms and example drive others 
from power. 

Nor does the evil rest alone in the person of the 
sovereign himself. His family is also maintained. 
As in the case of the Hohenzollerns and Hapsburgs, 
they enrich themselves at the expense of the state. 
William II was reputed to be one of the richest men 
in Europe. The royal family of England is wealthy. 
Leopold of Belgium amassed an immense fortune 
out of the nefarious rubber trade in the Congo, 
and this descended to his progeny. The Sultan of 
Turkey and the King of Greece made themselves 
rich out of business investments, as did the Roman- 
offs. Those kings who remain are surrounded by 
satellites of princes and princesses, lords and ladies, 
gentlemen of valor in bowing and adulation and 
women in waiting given to flattery. All of them 
belong to the gilded tinsel of the past. The coro- 
nation of the king of England brings forth to the 
Guildhall myriads of them, attired in knee breeches, 
scarlet and ermine robes, and crowns and coronets. 
They are a sham. Away vdth them ! 

The German Empire was the last of the strong 
autocracies, and the ruin of that was caused partly 
by the weakness inherent in monarchial power. It 
was a survival of the Roman system of minimizing 
the importance of the individual for the benefit of 
the entire state. As the Roman officials worked 
under the direct control of the emperor, so did 

75 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

they in Germany. As the Roman senate had no 
final authority, so the Bnndesrat was selected by 
the states of the empire and was partially under 
the control of the Kaiser. The Reichstag, elected 
by the people, while having more authority than 
the ancient body, was in the same general sense 
subject to the will of the sovereign. As in Rome 
the throne was upheld by the army, especially the 
Pretorian guard, and the monarch therefore sought 
to propitiate the cohorts by dotations and other 
favors, so in the German Empire the emperor, real- 
izing that his chief dependence was upon the army 
and navy, pampered them. As consols, prsetors, 
sediles, tribunes and questors were subordinated to 
the higher central authority of the princeps, so all 
the administrative system of Germany before the 
war was subordinated to the will of the emperor. 
In both cases a bureaucracy existed for all practical 
purposes. The ' ' Pandects ' ' of Justinian have this 
to say : ' ' The pleasure of the emperor has the vigor 
and effect of law, since the Roman people by the 
royal law have transferred to their prince the full 
extent of their o^m power and sovereignty.'* As 
Gibbon remarks, ^^The will of a single man, or a 
child perhaps, was able to prevail over the wisdom 
of ages and the inclination of millions." 

This centralization of authority for a time was 
highly beneficial to the Roman people. Harbors, 
roads and bridges were built, waste lands were 
reclaimed, connnerce was regulated and encour- 
aged, loans were advanced to the farmers at small 
interest upon the security of their land, and the 

76 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

finances of the empire were supervised by trained 
experts. And so it was in Germany, where the im- 
perial government conducted internal improve- 
ments in the building of harbors, canals, military 
roads and post and telegraph communication. Pub- 
lic sanitation and other rules for the furtherance of 
health, order and obedience were enforced with 
stern strictness. The Roman Empire reared great 
soldiers and statesmen to be its head. The age of 
the good Antonine emperors was among the hap- 
piest in the history of the world. But when abso- 
lute authority was placed in such successors as 
Conmiodus, Pertinax, Caracalla and Alexander 
Severus the people were given hideous examples of 
injustice and infamy. And so Frederick the Great 
will ever be among the inspiring spirits of all time. 
One has but to peruse Catt's *'Memoires" to de- 
termine the heroic mould of the monarch who was 
the first in Europe to declare that the king should 
be the first servant of the state. But the ambition 
of AYilliam II for world dominion caused him to 
bare the mailed fist and attempt to stifle genuine 
liberty. Without the military genius, constructive 
statecraft or personality of Napoleon, he sought 
to appropriate to himself something of the atmos- 
phere of divinity. Like Lucifer he fell and with 
him crashed to fragments the temporary edifice his 
monarcliial hof)e had reared. 

Thus it will be seen that the causes of the precipi- 
tation of the disaster to Germany were inherent in 
the principle of monarchy itself. The will of the 
emperor, supreme as ^var lord and ambitious for 

T7 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

renown, helped to bring on the conflict. From 
Babylon and Nineveh to Rome and therce to the 
old empire ruled over by Haiienstofen, Swabian, 
Franconian and Saxon, to the Spanish Charles V, 
the Hapsburgs and then the Hohenzollerns the mo- 
narchial traditions of the Empire were clear. There 
were other great potentates who ruled in regal 
splendor, but they did not fill so large a page in the 
history of civilization. Yet all of them, without ex- 
ception, fought for glory and aggrandizement. 
Some precipitated conflict and misery over a fan- 
cied affront. Others there were who trampled hu- 
man beings too far with resultant rebellion. For a 
thousand years the Pope was the instigator of wars 
to extend his power. The Crusades, the fights 
against the Turks, the attempts to recover the ter- 
ritory of the Greek Church, and the Thirty Years' 
War are examples. Unbridled ambition, seeking 
to add more revenue, subjects and world influence, 
has been a prolific cause of sorrow. 

At the other extreme is the United States. Its 
traditions have been handed down from the repub- 
lics of Greece and Rome, the free states and cities 
of the Middle Ages, the Dutch Republic, Switzer- 
land and six hundred years of constitutional de- 
velopment in England from Magna Charter to the 
Declaration of Independence. Guizot has said that 
the form of government in which the greatest self 
control of the people is demanded is a federal re- 
public. In the less than a century and a half of 
national existence we have subdued a savage race 
and a wilderness, abolished slavery, wrought a 

78 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

homogeneous people out of a heterogenous mass 
of inhabitants, and repressed all to peace, order and 
happiness. The fears of De Toqueville have been 
followed by the optimism of Bryce. Great soldiers 
and statesmen have been reared by the multitude 
to perform its tasks. Some of them have wrought 
for all manl^ind. But when their work was done 
thej were either relegated to dignified retirement 
or had their will modified by that of all the people. 
Humanity has received its greatest benefit in 
government from limitation of power and repre- 
sentation of the governed by their consent in all 
authority. History is a long story of abuses of 
power and struggles to escape from them. "When 
monarchy did not provide such abuses, a tyranny 
was established by a something crudely termed a 
democracy. But the effect was the same. Democ- 
racy in Greece, in the French Revolution and Bol- 
shevik Russia set up personal abusers of the un- 
checked temporary power with which they were 
clothed. But republicanism, wherein there has been 
coordination in authority, where full representa- 
tion has been established, where the federal princi- 
ple has remained intact, and in which the head of 
the government has been elected for a stated term 
of office, has given the fullest expression of life, 
broken every shackle in the way of betterment, and 
given promise of a constantly increasing degree 
of happiness, contentment and accomplishment in 
the future. This system has been found to be best 
for all men and women everywhere and must ulti- 
mately prevail in every land and clime. 

79 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

How important a blow was given to the princi- 
ple of monarchy by the United States in the recent 
European conflict and how similar this was to the 
fight against tyranny in other times is revealed by 
Sismondi in his description of the struggles of the 
free Italian cities of the Middle Ages against Fred- 
erick Barbarossa: 

* ' Twenty years before Frederick had devastated, 
in his pride, the very country which he was now 
stealthily traversing, a fearful fugitive. He had 
believed that as the ruler of the Roman Empire he 
was, by divine right and appointment, the ruler of 
the kingdoms of this world. He had claimed the 
prerogative of his position, and the learned pro- 
fessors of the newly revived study of civil law had 
supported him in his claim; the cities had rebelled 
and he had considered it his bounden duty to sup- 
press a dangerous spirit of defiance to his just au- 
thority, as well as the wanton insolences of the 
towns to himself and to one another. 

*'For this the Lombard malcontents had been 
traitors to God, even. Who had appointed the em- 
pire to which he had, therefore, affixed the title of 
'Holy.' To repress anarchy and to establish just 
authority he had employed all of the resources of 
his realm ; seven times had he summoned the armies 
of the north against the Alpine barrier, and seven 
times had they melted away like the snows they tra- 
versed; half a million men in all had gleefully 
leaped to his arms at his summons, and now he 
stood at his ancient capital of Lombardy, defeated, 
surrounded by his foes and almost alone. He, the 

80 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

representative of all the Csesars, holding his au- 
thority from the German conquerors of Italy, had 
been vanquished by a handful of trading townis of 
a country which had no voice in the election of its 
own Emperor. The high priests of his creed had 
called down on him the thunders of heaven and 
their appeal had been answered. The conquest of 
Italy Avould mean the disruption of Germany, even 
were that conquest now possible. With all sincerity 
and simplicity, traits in a bold and honest charac- 
ter, Barbarossa sought for peace, since the will of 
God had declared against him. ' ' 

And in the great contest of freedom against mon- 
archial Germany the world has been reminded of 
that more fictional incident in the *'Les Miserables" 
of Victor Hugo when Marius in the ABC club lauds 
Napoleon : 

*'AATiat a splendid destiny for a nation to be the 
empire of such an emperor! To appear and to 
reign, to march and to triumph, to have for halting 
places all capitals, to decree the fall of dynasties, 
to make you feel that when you threaten you lay 
your hand on the hilt of the sword of God ! ' ' 

**And what is greater?" he exclaims, as though 
there could be no answer. 

Then Cambef erre quells him with a word. * * To 
be free," he replies. 

After Napoleon had been sent to St. Helena, a 
martyr to his ambition, the Congress of Vienna, 
composed of representatives of the potentates of 
Europe, established, under the direction of Met- 
ternich, a grand scheme for maintaining the status 

81 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

quo as it then was. The Holy Alliance was formed 
and given its name by the idealism of Alexander I 
of Russia. This was to keep the peace and pro- 
tect monarchs. It seemed certain of success be- 
cause of the power of united armies to save it. As 
the result of his fear of aggression by any one 
of these protected kings, President James Monroe 
proclaimed the doctrine which bears his name. But 
after Europe had recovered slightly from the Na- 
poleonic wars there was an uprising in France in 
1830, and then in 1848 came revolutions toward 
liberty and constitutionalism throughout much of 
the continent. Monarchy remained in the ascend- 
ant, however, and it was only the overthrow of Na- 
poleon III at Sedan that made possible a republi- 
can France. Meanwhile the monarchial aggres- 
sions of the members of the Holy Alliance went on 
as before, and it was but a short time after the 
Congress of Vienna that rivalry between them re- 
asserted itself as the result of dynastic and national 
ambition. 

The Congress of Versailles, called to make peace 
with Germany, reorganize the map of Europe in 
the interests of the allied powers, and formulate 
some sort of vague generalization concerning joint 
action under the terms of a league of nations, 
also succeeded, with the aid of the United States, 
in maintaining a status quo whereby the kings of 
England, Italy, Belgium and Greece were kept in 
being and the emperor of Japan continued in auto- 
cratic dominion. This was not the object or work 
of the peace conference, but was the result of the 

82 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

nations composing it acting together in unison and 
attaining victory in the war and their giving ex- 
pression to a desire for international amity after- 
wards. To a world longing for peace and good will 
among men after more than four of the most war- 
ridden years in history there may be a hope that 
the pact thus made will endure. But in so far as it 
interferes with the competitive struggle of existence 
and maintains monarchy or empire anywhere it 
cannot last. The law of blood is the law of nature 
and the law of nature is stronger than the desire of 
any statesman or idealist. 

Monarchy and empire imply subjection. There 
can be no liberty within their authority. The 
kingly office cannot exist without subjects, and so 
long as there are subjects there must be a limita- 
tion of freedom. To hedge the office about Avith 
traditional sanctity and surround it mth the flunk- 
eys of the realm does not make it less odious and 
ridiculous to the peoples of republican lands. The 
terms democracy and republicanism and kingdoms 
and monarchy are forever separate and distinct. 
By winning the war against Germany our institu- 
tions were temporarily made safe, but republican 
institutions anywhere can never be made perma- 
nently safe until all monarchial institutions every- 
where have been abolished. In the chaos of society 
following disruption and disaster some of the 
peoples may stumble through madness for a time, 
but under representative institutions they will best 
secure lasting recuperation and peace and order. 
In a decade China, Siberia and Eastern Europe 

83 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

have passed through this stage and are emerging 
into a better day. 

Likewise does empire mean an infringement of 
the principle of nationality. So long as any power 
still extends its dominion over races other than its 
own it stands in the way of the fullest development 
and expression. India and Ireland cry out of the 
centuries for the right, inalienable in every people, 
to govern themselves in their own way as free re- 
publics. They are held to the British Empire by 
the power of steel and iron. If the people of each 
of them could vote as to whether they desired to be 
free and independent there would be no doubt of 
the result. The people of Korea are held by force 
beneath the sway of Japan. Indeed it may be said 
with truth that no people has by its o-\\m consent 
ever been subjected to the absolute will of another. 
Witness the Poles, who have been divided and 
trampled by three empires and yet in nationality 
have survived them all. The Jews have for three 
thousand years maintained separate identity as one 
people, withstanding the persecutions of all that 
period. The Filipinos have never completely yielded 
to the United States their longing for national ex- 
pression. In Armenia and Malaysia are peoples 
that long for free government. 

It was not the French Revolution which inaugu- 
rated the tremendous movement toward republican- 
ism in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, for 
that was a phantasmagoria of riot which over- 
turned a degenerate despotism and made way for 
a new monarchial order; but the pioneers of the 

84 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

New World who set up in America a federal re- 
public which was to stand the test of time. It was 
not until 1871 that France permanently discarded 
the habilaments of empire, and thereafter for fifty 
years it constituted the only strong government of 
the people in Europe. On the other hand, the 
United States gave inspiration to the revolt of all 
of Spanish North and South America in 1821, and 
gradually extended its influence until in the early 
years of the present century it taught much of 
Asia how to be free and fought that Europe might 
become republican. 

At the conflusion of such a mighty upheaval as 
the European War it was anticipated that the im- 
agination of other peoples would become kindled 
by the example of the strength and spirit of Amer- 
ica, that more would in time rebel from sovereigns, 
and that additional representative states would be 
set up. Never before the free men, in a few months, 
transformed from untrained citizens into the best 
of soldiers, turned the scale of battle and swept the 
Germans out of France and Belgium, had the Unit- 
ed States so fired the thoughts of men every^vhere 
with the efficacy of its institutions and united ef- 
forts and with the hope for mankind embraced in its 
sj'^stem of government and ideals. 

At the same time the American people became 
more confident than in the past of their potential 
possibilities for tremendous achievement and more 
cognizant of their world mission to make all men 
free. From their isolation in thought and the 
bumptiousness of their pride, they became imbued 

85 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

with world-wide vision, interested in the boundaries 
of distant lands, mindful of social, economic and 
political conditions which demanded remedy in 
other continents, participants in the most moment- 
ous European reorganization since Waterloo, and 
sharers in the peace their representatives helped 
to make. And so noAv they should prepare to 
preach their gospel of federal republicanism to all 
nations, to rear fleets and armies and statesmen in 
order that they may be protected while doing 
this, and, if need be, fight in the future for 
the utter abolition of monarchy in whatever form 
and the complete destruction of empire any- 
Avhere. 

Then, and not until then, can the American people 
give their final word to a humanity wearied by 
conflict. Not until then should they consent to 
universal and permanent peace. Not until then 
should they cease the efforts and sacrifice their un- 
rivalled energies make possible. Not until then 
should they say to exhausted men, careworn women 
and tear-stained children: Let there be no war. 
Thus far and no farther shall the ambitions for 
aggrandizement of nations and peoples go. Let us 
make every human being on the globe free from 
servility and woe. Let us do away with privilege 
and tyranny, whether in the name of religion or the 
state. Let us give to man those blessings which 
were promised by the Almighty through the pro- 
phets of Israel in ancient days. Let us melt down 
the states of the earth and make them one great 

86 



REPUBLICANISM VS. MONARCHISM 

republic. Let us place all religions in the crucible 
of reasoning and experience, so that there may 
emanate from them a common humanity and a 



common God. 



87 



CHAPTER III 

WAR AISTD PEACE 

"Wars, therefore, are to be undertaken for this end, that we 
may live in peace without being injured." — Cicero. 

"Terrible as war is, it yet displays the spiritual grandeur of 
man daring to defy his mightiest hereditary foe." — Heine. 

"America and all who care or dare to stand with her must arm 
and prepare themselves to control the mastery of the world." — 
Woodrow Wilson. 

IN 1787 Aurelio Bertola, monk and historical 
philosopher, made the prediction that the Euro- 
pean political system had arrived at a perfect and 
permanent eqnilibrimn and that thereafter no 
further wars would occur. Yet during the follow- 
ing quarter century tlie Continent was bathed in 
blood. In the early part of 1914 Andrew Carnegie, 
philanthropist; Charles W. Eliot, president emeri- 
tus of Harvard University; Theodore E. Burton, 
president of the American Peace Society ; William 
Jennings Bryan, advocate of pacifying nations with 
arbitration treaties, and Richard Bartholdt, presi- 
dent of the American branch of the Inter Parlia- 
mentary Union, were accounted leaders in the 
United States of a movement to prevent future 
wars. Their efforts were in vain. The mightiest 

88 



WAR AND PEACE 

of conflicts, perhaps the precursor of another twen- 
ty-five years of upheaval, began in July of that year. 
Later, there were some like Henry Ford who with 
greater zeal than judgment were all the more anx- 
ious to **cry peace, peace, when there is no peace." 
Others were disposed to imitate Burton, who, wiih 
the msdom of a statesman, withdrew from the 
Peace Society and became an ardent advocate of 
military preparedness. 

How wide is the gulf between the dreams of those 
who idealized peace and the practical facts of life 
may be gathered from the remark of Frederick the 
Great that in looking over the pages of history he 
had found not a decade in which there had not been 
a great war. The gulf becomes wider when we con- 
sider whether those wars have harmed or benefited 
mankind. It becomes an impossible barrier when 
reflection is had upon the question of whether the 
world is even now ready for permanent peace. For, 
as Saint Augustine said, war is the transition from 
a lower to a higher state of civilization. Reaction- 
ary and mediaeval as this conclusion may seem in 
view of the suffering upon the battlefields of our 
day, the facts of the centuries completely vindicate 
it. Peace pleaders are not new. For three thous- 
and years there has seen upon the distant hill the 
beacon of warless brotherhood. The prophets of 
Israel saw it. Jesus of Nazareth said in one breath 
that every one should turn one cheek to his neigh- 
bor when smitten on the other, and in the next that 
he came mth a sword. Christendom in the two 
milleniums since has followed his example, ideal- 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

izing peace and turning from it when confronted by 
disconcerting reality. 

The disparity between the great seers of Israel 
and the leaders of the now historic peace movement 
in the United States lies in the fact that the former 
perceived universal amity as the ideal of a far dis- 
tant time, to be attained after countless wars, and 
the latter saw it in the immediate present, to be 
brought about by the holding of congresses. By 
Isaiah the Almighty says: ''I have created the 
waster to destroy." And through Jeremiah: 
* ' Cursed be he that doth the work of the Lord neg- 
ligently, and cursed be he that withholdeth his 
sword from blood." It is only in the Gospels that 
the ear of the centurian is healed in a twinkling 
when Peter cuts it off. American advocates of 
peace at any price and their opposition to the 
mighty task to which the government has since 
dedicated itself were like those of whom Jeremiah 
speaks : 

' ' Then said I, Ah, Lord Eternal ! behold the pro- 
phets say unto them, Ye shall not see the sword, 
neither shall ye have famine ; but a permanent peace 
will I give in this place. Then said the Lord unto 
me. Falsehood do the prophets prophesy in my 
name; I have not sent them, neither have I com- 
manded them, neither have I spoken unto them ; a 
vision of falsehood and idolatrous folly, and the 
deceit of their hearts do they prophesy unto you. 
Therefore hath said the Lord concerning the 
prophets that prophesy in my name when I have 
not sent them, while they say, sword and famine 

90 



WAR AND PEACE 

shall not come in this land; by the sword and by 
the famine shall these prophets come to their end," 

And in Ezekiel: ** Therefore, thus hath said the 
Lord Eternal, Whereas j^e have spoken falsehood, 
and have seen lies; therefore I am against you, 
saith the Lord Eternal. And my hand shall be 
against the prophets that see falsehood, and that 
divine lies ; in the secret council of my people shall 
they not be, and in the register of the house of Israel 
shall they not be written, and unto the land of Israel 
shall they not come ; and ye shall know that I am the 
Lord Eternal. Even because tJiey have seduced 
my people, saying , 'Peace* when there was no 
peace." 

Are these latter day peace makers to be laughed 
to scorn, then, because their dreams failed to come 
true? On the contrary, they are to be appreciated 
as helping to keep mankind awake to the great time 
for which the ages have waited. Andrew Carnegie, 
busily working to bring about the brotherhood of 
man, will not have lived in vain if he shall have en- 
abled men to perceive the light more clearly. Nor 
mil Eliot, Bartholdt and Ford. But it may be that 
in their zeal for peace in their later years they have 
overlooked the fact that when younger they over- 
came their rivals and attained their ends by in- 
dividual war alone, one as head of a university, 
another as a member of the House of Represen- 
tatives for two decades, and the last as the leading 
automobile manufacturer in America. Bryan ruled 
the Democratic party for twelve wears with an iron 
hand, brooking no opposition, making his will su- 

91 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

preme. He never won a battle over party opponents 
with a pact of peace. The older of these men, hav- 
ing attained their utmost, were content to stand 
by and urge a milder dispensation. If they had been 
so inclined toward peace in the earlier part of their 
lives, they would not have become so prominent. 

So it is with every nation. "When youthful and 
vigorous it of necessity exerts itself and accomplish- 
es its ends by conquest. When its time for such 
exertion has passed it is content to remain passive. 
It is true in nature, from the lowest protoplasm to 
the highest organism, that when opposing interests 
clash they fight. By this means the strong and 
healthy organism overcomes the weak and the fittest 
survives. Nothing gained by struggle is lost. A 
man fights for his living, gains it, is thereby enabled 
to marry and give children to the world, and at the 
same period of existence contends for whatever he 
may undertake in mind or material. Then he enjoys 
what he has earned and gradually passes to decline. 
An old man of ninety may produce intellectual re- 
sults, but that which comes from strenuous effort 
of nerve or muscle has passed from him forever. 
And so all that mankind has accomplished has been 
the result of struggle. Added together, it expresses 
modern civilization. The outbreak of the great war 
indicated that the process had not stopped. As 
man can attain nothing except by contention, so 
states can give nothing to humanity except by war. 
By battle they defend themselves until they have 
expressed their civilization. By war they extend 
it over the territories they conquer. The art and 

92 



WAR AND PEACE 

philosophy of Greece and the law of Rome are at 
the disposal of a world today only because the 
Greeks and Romans did not hesitate at bloody strife 
when the occasion required. 

"War stimulates the highest and noblest impulses 
of man. It is primal to be aggressive, to struggle, 
to advance. The female admires the male who can 
protect her and her offspring. The individual who 
mil not fight for his mate when she is attacked or 
for his brood is not manly, but effeminate. The 
citizen who attempts to evade his duty to fight for 
his native land when it is assailed is no patriot, 
but a shirker. They who praise peace for its o^^^l 
sake indulge in cheap cant and extol weakness in 
the name of humanity. Those who declared a few 
years ago that the time of battle was not at hand 
for this country in the near future were without 
sufficient energy to be the leaders of a young and 
vigorous nation in the hour of its peril. 

The highest virtue is sacrifice. The utmost sac- 
rifice a man can make is to lay dowm his life for his 
family or his country ; and it is not in vain if there- 
by the race is for all time made happier. The wo- 
manly woman who has a manly son desires that he 
fulfil the highest and most normal instincts of the 
genus homo, and that he always be prepared to 
fight for the right ; that he protect the weak and the 
hungrj^, and that he aggressively devote his life 
when a soldier to a worthy purpose. Both men and 
women of this land have come to reject the council 
of those who think they can stop human nature 
from asserting itself against continued wrongs*, and 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

by their mere assertion compel the clock of civiliza- 
tion to stand still. 

Peace is stagnation. War is life. Its victories 
mean progress, and the most important victories 
in all wars have come to the United States. The 
conquerors have made history. Every war has left 
humanity better than it found it. The American 
colonies fought in 1775 against the tyranny of a 
British king and for liberty. The constitution of 
the greatest republic is the result. Those engaged 
fought for seven years. Did they die for naught? 
It was war and the defeat of Napoleon on the sea 
that led to the Louisiana purchase, extending up 
the Mississippi and to the Rockies. The French 
Emperor practically gave this third of the present 
territory of the country in order that he might 
raise up a future antagonist of the British Empire. 
He did not foresee that the English speaking peo- 
ples would unite in a greater war in an endeaver to 
protect the soil of the France that had helped 
America gain its freedom in the Revolution. 

It was the war with Mexico that led to the an- 
nexation of Texas, New Mexico and all the Pacific 
slope, another third of the nation. Can it be doubt- 
ed, in view of the barbaric conditions that have 
during the past decade prevailed in Mexico, that 
the land won by the spirit of the Alamo, with its 
teeming population, is enjoying more blessings un- 
der the segis of American institutions than would 
have been the case had the territory remained in 
Mexican hands ? In 1860 this nation was confronted 
by the alternatives of slavery or freedom, disunion 

94 



WAR AND PEACE 

or union. Four years of war decided the issues 
involved. A million men lost their lives. Did those 
on either side die in vain if they thereby advanced 
the cause of freedom? In 1898 Cuba, Porto Rico 
and the Philippines were released from the cruel- 
ties of Spain by the victories of Manila Bay, San- 
tiago and San Juan. Have not the peoples of those 
islands and indirectly all manlcind thereby been 
benefited through more orderly and enlightened in- 
stitutions? In 1918 America did away with auto- 
cratic dominion in Central Europe. Is not the 
world better fitted thereby for more liberty and 
enlightenment 1 

The work of Hamilton in the framing of the con- 
stitution would have been impossible without the 
sword of George Washington. So impregnated for 
a time were the American people mth the ideas of 
those who upheld peace as a thing to be beloved in 
itself that in their adulation of Abraham Lin- 
coln — all of it deserved — they almost ceased to re- 
mind themselves of that hero of the nation, General 
Grant, who preserved the Union. It was Grant 
and not Lincoln who made peace with Lee at Ap- 
pomattox after the entirely righteous ends for 
which he and his soldiers had fought were accom- 
plished. The constitutional amendments admitting 
the black man to equal rights under the law were 
written by the sword. And so the present new 
spirit in our land has been augmented by Pershing 
and his men. 

An individual passes through a tremendous cri- 
sis in his life and is made to think more rapidly and 

95 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

seriously and to produce more. That is why out of 
struggle come the greatest achievements of men. 
Musicians and artists working in a garret in pov- 
erty but losing nothing of the spark within, Demos- 
thenes wandering along the sea shore with pebbles 
in his mouth so he could overcome impediment of 
speech, Luther begging for bread by singing in the 
streets, Benjamin Franklin starting as a printer's 
devil and Lincoln splitting rails and reading Black- 
stone by candle light stand out as examples from 
myriads of others of the same sort. In the gruel- 
ing crisis of war a man faces adverse conditions 
and even death with all his manhood. After it is 
over he thinks in vaster terms. 

Those who commanded in the Civil War were 
leaders afterwards when peace came. The charac- 
ters of iron that they had attained in battle enabled 
them to cope with opponents in the intense rivalry 
of industry and the professions. Out of that war 
came, not only Grant, but Sheridan, Meade, Far- 
ragut, Porter, Garfield, Carl Schurtz, Sickles, Ben- 
jamin Harrison, William McKinley, James J. Hill, 
Andrew Carnegie and most of the leaders of the 
House and Senate for more than a generation. 
And out of it, too, came Robert E. Lee, John B. 
Gordon, Beauregard, Joe Wheeler, John T. Mor- 
gan, Stephen Mallory, John B. Regan, Isham G. 
Harris, Bennett Young, Charles F. Crisp, George 
Vest, John W. Daniel, L. Q. C. Lamar and Edward 
D. White, chief justice of the United States. Other 
wars have not stilled the rebel yells of the heroes 
of the Southland, plunging up the steep hill under 

96 



WAR AND PEACE 

Pickett and attacking the batteries at Gettysburg. 
Did they who gave their lives there die in vain? 
Not if the South today profits by their nobler man- 
hood. And the victors, fighting through the fire 
and smoke of the peach orchard and "little round 
top," saved the Union. 

Horrible slaughter, wasn't it? The rivers ran 
with blood. But there were no mollycoddles to 
bleat in those dark days except the Northern "Cop- 
perheads." Men took their medicine and took it 
grandly. Mothers gave their sons and were proud 
of it. They as well as the sons were exalted by the 
sacrifice. And Lincoln wrote to the mother of five 
such who had perished on the field, of battle that 
he could add no word of praise to those who had 
given all upon the altar of freedom. There were 
maimed and halt, but the absent limb or arm was 
more revered, by a nation rebuilt and glad to ex- 
press its gratitude on every occasion, than the whole 
carcasses of those who had crawled under the bed 
upstairs when the recruiting officer appeared. The 
South has cherished the memory of its heroes mth 
a sentiment and loyalty hardly less fervent than in 
the strife itself. In an earlier day the wars of 
1845-6 with Mexico helped inspire the pioneers of 
'49 who sought gold in the land conquered during 
that conflict. And at a later time the Spanish war 
was followed by a decade of wonderful industrial 
achievement in America. Our fighting at Chateau- 
Thierry and the Marne has inspired the nation. 
When Ulysses had ended his struggles came Pene- 
lope and Hercules. And so the United States has 

97 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

advanced by terrible hardships in which its fitness 
alone enabled it to survive, through constant 
bloody contest and din of battle, and always to 
higher things. 

Few instances should be required to prove that 
the advantages of armed conflict are not confined 
to our own country. It was war by the barons at 
Runnyiuede that compelled King John to grant the 
priceless privileges contained in Magna Charter, 
led Charles I to the block and established the pro- 
tectorate of Cromwell, overthrew Bourbon despot- 
ism in the French Revolution, caused the beneficent 
work of Napoleon and then ended his subversion 
of nationality. It was grim death under powder 
and shot that removed forever the horrors of the 
thumb-screw and the rack and enabled men to seek 
truth without risk of torture by either Protestant 
or Catholic. This during two centuries of almost 
incessant conflict in the Wars of Religion, the 
Thirty Years' War, the fight to free the Nether- 
lands, and, in a lesser degree, in the wars of Louis 
XIV and Frederick II and the battles of Napoleon 
in Italy. 

Wars through the Middle Ages destroyed the 
weak and led to the rule of the more vigorous. 
Charlemagne, fighting for law and order, made men 
better. During the great migrations of peoples 
after the fall of the Roman Empire conflicts gave 
new life to Europe. Atilla, ''the scourge of God," 
assisted in this process and at the same time ex- 
hausted his o\^^l Huns. Jenghis Kahn, Timur and 
many others did the same for Asia, sweeping away 

98 



WAR AND PEACE 

the wastes of life, reinvigorating the entire con- 
tinent and carrying the world onward to better 
things. The crusading knights transmitted ideas 
and spread ideals of conrage and bravery. Wars 
protected Europe from the Saracens, lifted Asia 
out of inhumanity and stopped the savagery the 
colonizing nations found. The Spaniards were un- 
speakably harsh in Mexico and Peru, but they did 
away with a system wherein the hearts of men were 
cut out while they stood alive in front of the sac- 
rificial stone. 

All fundamental law has been made possible by 
the conquerors alone. The Code Napoleon was 
compiled after the subjugator of Italy had done 
his work. After 1866 and 1871 came a new system 
of administration in Germany. The bases of the 
British constitution were laid by war. The "Pan- 
dects" of Justinian were made possible by the arms 
of Beli sarins and Narses. In so far as these were 
but codifications of previous law, the latter had in 
turn been prepared by the wars of Caesar and his 
successors. The capitularies of Charlemagne fol- 
lowed his career in the field. 

AAHiat potent deeds for humanity are represent :d 
by the names of Washington, Grant, Dewey, Persh- 
ing, Garibaldi, Wellington, Blucher, Napoleon, 
Frederick the Great, William of Orange, Turenne, 
Suleiman, Charles of Lorraine, John Sobeiski, 
Bernhard of Saxe Weimar, Peter the Great, Gus- 
tavus Adolphus, Oliver Cromwell, Nelson, D^n 
Juan, Tromp, Timur, Jinghis and Kublai Kahn, 
Howard, William the Conqueror, Frederick Bar- 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

"barossa, Marshal Saxe, Marlborough, Clive, Cortez, 
Pizarro, Louis XI, Alphonso of Castile, Casimir 
IV, Canute, Hugh the Great, Otto the Great, Charl- 
emagne, Charles Martel, Alfred, Mahomet, Harun, 
Mansur, Heracleus, Attila, Theodoric, Constantine, 
Aurelian, Septimus Severus, Trajan, Tiberius, 
Marcus Aurelius, Caesar, Marius, Chedolaomar, 
Apgar, Nurachu, Mithradates I, Saleucus Nicator, 
Hasdrubal, Hannibal, Pyrrhus, Alexander, Milti- 
ades, Sargon, Sheshonk, Rameses, Thutmosis III, 
Joshua and David ! 

They cleared the way for or were themselves the 
builders of civilization. A mighty host, they ask 
where mankind would have been without them and 
— ^more to the point — ^\\^here the race would not be 
if it had been guided by the timid souls who did 
not grandly dare but were content to let the world 
remain as it was in the name of peace. It is inter- 
esting to speculate as to what would have been the 
result to all that the life of Athens meant if one of 
these latter had been the choice of the polemarch 
instead of Miltiades at Marathon. 

By battle, too, ideas have been promulgated. 
Mahomet warred and today 250,000,000 people ac- 
cept his teachings. Christian princes fought, car- 
rying in one hand the gospel of peace and good will 
toward men and in the other the sword, and half 
a billion of men now pronounce the name of Jesus 
as the Savior of the World. Wars have helped to 
add another 420,000,000 to the folds of Buddhism 
and Hindooism. Confucianism, established as the 
religion of the state and upheld by force, has 

100 



WAR AND PEACE 

340,000,000 adherents. Men have gained their ideas 
first by the inspired spirits, then by battle and last 
by habit. Opposing principles have been decided 
by gun poM^der. Ambitious kings have united peo- 
ples to crush opponents and carry on the work of 
progress. New peoples, new hopes, new ideas, new 
leaders have overcome older and weaker ones. And 
so it has been through the ages. Wars, wars, wars ! 
Advancement, advancement, advancement! 

But what of the maimed and the halt ? 'What of 
the widows and orphans? What of the desolate 
homes and heart-rending sorrow? What of the 
awful agonies of the battlefield, with comrade dis- 
emboweled or his head blown off, mth the shrapnel 
laying many low, the groans and shrieks of the 
sorely wounded and dying, the horse torn asunder 
with none to help? What of the hand to hand 
clashes, man braining his brother man with the butt 
of his rifle and wildly stabbing him to death with 
the bayonet? True, but what of the benefits all this 
may bring to men in general? Neither an individ- 
ual nor a nation develops to the utmost without 
striving. The easy way is not that to achievement. 
' ' I have refined thee in the fire of adversity. ' ' But 
it is such a price to pay, it is urged. For what? 
For the more progressive and awakened society war 
brings in its wake. Men are brought back to the 
fundamental things of life. Before the great cat- 
aclysm the intellect of France had descended to 
''Cubism" and ''Futurism." It was time for the 
quickening hand. 

Gunpowder clears the air. Men see God again. 

101 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

And they perceive that the untold suffering is not 
too high a price to pay that an old civilization may 
crumble and give way to a new one which will de- 
light all future generations. Each age of the world 
is better than the last and is made so by the willing- 
ness of men to go through just such harrowing ex- 
perience in order that those things they hold most 
dear may not be taken away from them. The 
''noble six hundred" who charged at Balaklava 
made the blood of men tingle for more than half a 
century because they had no fear of "shot and 
shell." 

That war does not waste the physical energies of 
an otherwise healthy state and that, on the con- 
trary, it helps to stimulate them, may be gathered 
from an examination of the birth rate in Germany 
after the Avar of 1870-1871. In that conflict 28,000 
men in the German armies were killed in action, 
about 3 per cent, of the 835,000 men placed in the 
field, and 101,000 were wounded and disabled. In 
the ten years after the war 8,728,946 male children 
were born and 8,287,591 females, a preponderance 
of males over females of 441,355, or 5^/^ per cent. 
After 1865 in the United States the lack of statis- 
tics between that year and the census year of 1870, 
together with the greatly increased immigration 
after the conflict, makes it difficult to obtain exact 
figures, but in the decade from 1870 to 1880, sub- 
tracting the children born to foreign born parents, 
the preponderance of male children reported is 
about the same as in Germany. 

It seems to be a law of nature that in a virile 

103 



WAR AND PEACE 

state twenty- one males are born to every twenty 
females. In France, where a more unhealthy con- 
dition has been noted for some time because of a 
stationary population, during the war with Prussia 
156,000 men were killed and 146,000 were woimded 
and disabled out of a total of 970,000 engaged. In 
the decade follomng 2,627,809 males were born and 
2,728,737 females, a preponderance of females of 
100,928, or 3.03 per cent. 

In the greatest of wars the United States lost in 
killed about one and a half per cent, of those en- 
gaged. The British list of killed totalled about 
nine per cent. The Italians lost in battle about 
four per cent., the Austrians eight per cent., the 
Germans sixteen per cent., and the Kussians about 
five per cent. The losses of all the countries par- 
ticipating in the war amounted to something less 
than ten per cent — a comparatively small sacrifice 
to pay for a free Europe and a rejuvenated and 
revivified world. 

Socialists declare that all wars are brought about 
by what they term ''capitalism." The normal am- 
bitions of men, their hatred of wrong and their 
willingness to lay do^Yn their lives for justice and 
right, are erased from the equation. The great con- 
troversy over the right to secede from the Union, 
which went on for twenty years with increasing 
acrimony with Webster, Seward and Sumner on 
one side and Calhoun, Hayne and Da^ds on the 
other, according to this view, was not a con- 
tributing cause of the war between the states. The 
fervor of righteous indignation against slavery 

103 



AMERICA'S TOMORROV^ 

that swept tliroiigli the North, fanned by ** Uncle 
Tom's Cabin," John Brown's raid and the firing 
upon Fort Snmter, had nothing to do with the out- 
break of the struggle. It was * ' capitalism. ' ' When 
the people of a reunited America were roused to 
fever heat by the cruelties practiced by "VVeyler and 
the blowing up of the Maine in Havana Harbor and 
went to war and crumpled the power of Spain in 
order to enable Cuba, Porto Rico and the Philip- 
pines to enjoy the benefits of free institutions, 
it was really ** capitalism" that did it all. It was 
the same with those who desired liberty more than 
life in the war of American independence. And to 
the last war Socialists in this country expressed 
bitter opposition on the same ground. 

According to this reasoning every conqueror in 
history who had ambitions must have been a "cap- 
italist. ' ' William the Silent, fighting Spain for free 
thought in the Netherlands, was no doubt one also. 
Gusta\'Tis Adolphus and his Swedes at Lutzen were 
*' capitalists. " The Swiss defeating Charles the 
Bold, of Burgundy, at Grandson with love of inde- 
pendence in their hearts had never heard the term 
used by Karl Marx, but if they had they probably 
would have realized that that was what they had 
laid down their lives for. The Crusaders who sal- 
lied forth from Europe with the ideal of regaining 
the true cross were really desirous of ''exploiting" 
somebody. Alexander, animated by love of glory 
and the laudable desire to extend the boundaries 
and civilization of Hellas, if Socialists may be be- 
lieved, was a ** capitalist." Henry of Navarre, 

104 



WAR AND PEACE 

fighting for years with reckless courage, gained a 
throne and established the Edict of Nantes, guar- 
anteeing religious toleration. What did capital 
have to do with it? Robert Bruce, utterly discou- 
raged, saw the spider fall and rise for the seventh 
time, took courage and won Scottish independence. 
Was he a *' capitalist"? 

Csesar risked all, crossed the Rubicon and gained 
all. Hannibal surmounted the Alps and fought 
Rome for twenty years by maintaining himself and 
his soldiers in Northern Italy by sheer courage and 
genius. Frederick the Great took about vnth him 
a phial of poison. AVhen defeated, worn, weary 
and tempted to take the dose, he, by his aggressive 
and mighty spirit, gathered together his resources 
and fell upon the enemy instead. Napoleon bridled 
the Revolution, which had taken so many lives sim- 
ply because they had worn good clothes or been of 
noble birth or good repute, and then by his indom- 
itable ambition conquered Europe. Which does the 
world prefer, the spirit that animated these heroes 
of the past or that of those who ascribe all their 
noble actions to what they term "capitalism"? 

But the Socialist says all this was long ago and 
human nature as well as conditions have changed. 
This is the same error as is made by those who con- 
tend that armaments produce wars and that if the 
world did not have them there would be no armed 
conflicts. Hmnan ambitions and hatreds and loves 
were created before gunpowder and armor and 
even bows and arrows. The implement was always 
invented to express the desire. When the savage 

105 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

\dslied to rule the tribe and felt he was strong 
enough, he slew with a blunt instrument his nearest 
rival and lorded it over the others. Then he led 
them against another tribe and, after defeating it 
and perhaps roasting its members in a kettle, oc- 
cupied its ground. That was the beginning of wars. 

The titanic struggle of our time was precipitated 
in 1914 by a shot heard around the world. The 
Austrians rushed to avenge the murder of their 
crown prince. The Russians hastened to the de- 
fense of their fellow Slavs in Servia. The Ger- 
mans met this by fighting for German ambitions on 
land and sea. The French advanced to the aid of 
Russia. Britain fought to protect Belgium and, as 
Kitchener said, to "pay a debt of honor which we 
owe to France. ' ' The Japanese entered the war to 
fulfill the terms of their alliance with Britain. Italy 
joined the Entente because of ambition to gain ter- 
ritory from Austria. Belgium and Servia entered 
the war to protect themselves, Bulgaria and Tur- 
key to gain land as a reward for helping the Central 
Powers, and Roumania by assisting the Allies. The 
United States entered it to protect its rights under 
international law on the seas and to advance the 
cause of democracy. Portugal took part because 
of long friendship for Great Britain, and Brazil for 
her motherland. China did so because of the dem- 
ocratic movement. 

Outside of certain fundamental antipathies, these 
were the causes of the war. What did "capital- 
ism" or annaments have to do with the cataclysm, 
especially when 1,700,000 men, including Socialists, 

106 



WAR AND PEACE 

volunteered in Germany alone? If there had been 
no huge armaments the ambitions of the individ- 
uals and nations, their mutual jealousies and hat- 
reds, would still be present. Without such arma- 
ments it is possible that the conflict would have 
brought prolonged chaos and anarchy and out- 
lasted our generation. 

Nations have their hopes, passions, obsessions, 
discontents, ideals, hates and ambitions, just as 
individuals do. Every nation is normal in this 
respect. Some of its citizens may be abnormal in 
their vows not to do the normal thing to save the 
state should disaster appear, but the healthy organ- 
ism throws off this effect as a disease. These vows 
are usually only mental and pass away in the hour 
of excitement when the nation is attacked by a jeal- 
ous rival and rapacious power, or when the nation 
acts as a unit to protect its rights. When the call 
comes they usually grumble a bit but give evidence 
that the}'' are human beings and patriots ; theory is 
forgotten. If, however, the vow not to risk life and 
limb and not to slay a f elloAv being for the sake of 
what the national government represents be con- 
genital, it should be remembered that there are 
cowards in every land; and those of proper age 
who attempt to shirk their part should be detested 
as such. 

On the other hand those who enter gladly in the 
work of fighting for liberty in the occasion of 
danger have many compensations in the training 
they receive. Strict military discipline in the open 
air, with constant exercise and contests of manly 

107 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

strength, make any young man much more fit than 
he would othermse be for the remainder of his life. 
He is ever after more inured to hardship. Difficul- 
ties seem less to him. It is not upon the old men 
or the peace lovers but upon these youths of red 
blood and warm impulses that the future of the 
United States must primarily rest. Hence, uni- 
versal military service has been urged in order that 
the million boys who reach the age of eighteen or 
nineteen each year may be called into cantonment 
and other local duty for a part of a year. 

All those who entered such training would have 
their economic efficiency developed through the 
learning of system and method, self reliance and 
the comradry consistent with a democratic state. 
One has but to recall the rare enthusiasm for this 
extraordinary development of the physical man to 
grace and beauty, to litheness of limb and quick- 
ness of eye, in the Greek states, to realize what 
might be the outcome of the military service for 
this free republic. Born conunanders would ap- 
pear as a matter of course. And they would ulti- 
mately bring many more victories. Our army and 
our navy have the greatest of all gifts — liberty — 
to defend. 

In preparation and in war itself economic ends 
are advanced rather than retarded. In the conflict 
fixed and not floating capital is destroyed, and for 
the victor not even that. The circulating medium 
changes hands, but remains the same, unless depre- 
ciated for the time being with resultant stimulation 
of prices. Man would consume food and wear 

108 



WAR AND PEACE 

clothes in any event. The energies of the nation 
are turned to the manufacture of the implements 
of war and ammunition and to supplying the armed 
forces with food and raiment. All these materials 
are perishable. To destroy them at one time is not 
greatly different from another. This is true also 
of buildings, public and private, and vast fields of 
ordinary production which are swept bare by the 
storm of war. Afterwards they regain their accus- 
tomed appearance, and better, by the new energy 
which is turned into them and their more modern 
design. 

Instead of causing waste, war does away with it 
by subduing menacing peoples. These extend their 
credit and expend their strength. At the end they 
are shorn of territory and bankrupt. This leads to 
the rule of the better organism. The latter is as- 
sisted in paying back its borrowed capital with the 
domain it has conquered. With us the war ha^^ng 
been fought on foreign soil, our fixed capital re- 
mains intact. Stimulated energies and vastly in- 
creased production in a few decades or generations 
remove the debt. 

Not even life is wasted. Many contend that each 
of us has died many times, that each Avill live again. 
What matters it, then, if one's head is blowai off; 
the spirit survives. If men pass away in agony, the 
pain is but momentary. If maimed for life, they 
have the satisfaction of knowing that they have 
helped humanity. And when the percentage of ac- 
tual deaths is considered, it must be admitted that 
the chances of passing through the ordeal without 

109 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

either loss of life or serious injury are very great — 
something over 90 per cent. And those who return 
— the 90 per cent. — are stimulated to greater en- 
ergy. The Christian with his fortitude and belief 
in immortality should not hesitate to take the 
chance. Certainly the Japanese, with his feeling 
that the hero of the battle is rewarded in the here- 
after, does not stop at any daring deed. And so far 
as the comparatively small misery among troops 
is concerned, that is largely minimized by the de- 
velopment of medical science, sanitation and dietics 
during the past half century. The hardship caused 
among wives, mothers and children gradually ad- 
justs itself in a generation. Their suffering may 
be cruel, but it would be far more heartless to an 
infmitely vaster number of men, women and chil- 
dren in the future not to risk life and limb for the 
liberties our nation and civilization stand for. 

It has been proposed that all this might be done 
away with by men submitting that which they hold 
most dear to the arbitration of third parties. 
Where disputes of a minor nature arise between 
states and they can be readily adjusted in this way 
by submission of the facts, it would be ridiculous to 
think of war. But where the mighty aims of great 
peoples, led by those ambitious for glory and 
achievement, are involved, arbitrators are swept 
aside as mollycoddles. Think of a Richelieu stop- 
ping the work of the rejuvenation of France to 
listen to such sweet faced brethren ! There was no 
compromise with him. He went ahead with his 
grim work and the opponents of law and order and 

110 



WAR AND PEACE 

civilization received the headman's axe. Louis XVI 
'^arbitrated" his difficulties with the revolutionists 
and paid for it at the guillotine. Napoleon, peering 
over the fence on a July day, reflected on how much 
might have been accomplished with powder and 
shot. But Louis was not made of that kind of stuff. 
His *' children" should not be fired on hj the Swiss 
guards, he said. Arbitration treaties with people 
we shall never fight are nauseating. American free- 
dom and the fundamental principles America 
stands for can never be arbitrated except by the 
sword. 

Does this mean that a state of war is preferable 
to a state of peace ? Certainly it is, if, again quot- 
ing St. Augustine, war is the transition from a 
lower to a higher civilization. Certainly it is, if by 
peace men, nations and the world remain stagnant. 
Certainly it is, if, through aggressive struggle, the 
highest aims of the earth are obtained, and if, 
through sorrow and suffering and sacrifice men 
gain in character and perceive more clearly the fun- 
damental verities of life. Certainly it is, if by war 
men gain means of leisure to utilize their stimulated 
energies in the paths of peace, until they relapse 
into desuetude and another great war or series of 
wars produces a mighty upheaval. Certainly it is, 
if, as Jesus of Nazareth said, 'Hhe kingdom of 
heaven suffereth violence and men of violence take 
it by force." 

Will wars never cease, then? Must men go 
through the ordeal of battle all through the coming 
time? No; only until that day when each people 

111 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and nation has risen to its maximum of strength, ac- 
complished its work in the world and fallen to de- 
cay, so that, by all nations uniting in the Federation 
of the World, righteousness and justice liiaj at last 
prevail upon the earth so far as government can 
make them do so. As much as war and hardship 
and suffering are a stimulant to the race, so there 
comes a reward brought by them when they are no 
longer necessary because the energy expended in 
them finds other outlet in the building of one world 
state ; but they will not pass away until humankind 
is one and won for the liberty of every people and 
each individual under forms of law. Under such a 
unified structure of society where the sovereignty 
of the single conunonwealth is universal the bene- 
fits of transfusion will be so recognized and util- 
ized that the earth will one day be composed of a 
single people, an admixture of all its predecessors. 
How vain would strife then be ! And in a govern- 
ment of man wherein the rights of all are fully pro- 
tected and each is given opportunity for the utmost 
development of his or her powers, so that all may 
find representation and expression, what need will 
there be of war ? 

Heroes will be none the less. Nature will by the 
crossing of all the elements demand the conquering 
of the earth, the sky and the water by the single 
organism thus produced. The process of final and 
complete amalgamation being simultaneous, and the 
world state upheld by the strongest and most un- 
selfish element having liberty as its ideal, any other 
constituent part will be prevented from disturbing 

113 



WAR AND PEACE 

the others. For that time men have fought through- 
out the ages — steadily, step by step, approaching 

* ' One God, one law, one element, 
And one far-off divine event 
To which the whole creation moves. '* 



113 



CHAPTER IV 

THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA. 

"The old order changeth, yielding place to new, 
And God manifests Himself in many ways." — Tennyson. 

WHEN Gutenberg invented the printing press in 
1464, Columbus discovered America in 1492, 
da Gama found a new route to India in 1498, Luther 
nailed the theses upon the door of Wittenberg in 
1517, Magellan circumnavigated the globe in 1521, 
Copernicus completed his heliocentric theory of the 
universe in 1530, and Cortez and Pizarro in the 
meantime conquered the new world for Spain, there 
were probably few who realized the significance of 
a great movement created by those events which was 
to sweep on with ever widening aspects, adding 
more liberties, shedding further light and opening 
new avenues to endeavor and wealth for four hun- 
dred years. Hardly more than half a century 
had been necessary to begin the process of break- 
ing away from old traditions, customs, habits of 
thought and policies of government. The ultimate 
result was freedom of conscience, the sovereignty 
of the people, and the development of nationality. 
Today, after many inventions, unlimited printed 
knowledge, the law of evolution, critical examina- 

114 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

tion of the sacred scriptures, opening of the Panama 
canal and the bloodiest war man has seen, changes 
far more portentious seem to be at hand. 

In the past fifty years the relation of man to life 
has been considerably altered. In that short space 
of time he has done more to conquer the materials 
about him than in any previous period. The result 
is that he no longer thinks so much in the terms of 
the passions and prejudices of a given locality, but 
looks out upon a world transformed for liis benefit. 
His customs have become less enslaving. His 
thought and action radiate from a wider compass. 
He is a new man, another personality, and hence 
he is conceiving a new time. The nature of the 
epoch he is creating may be discerned in the factors 
that have remade him. The man of fifty years ago, 
our grandfather, was not the same as he who works 
and lives in the heroic present. He was served by 
his neighbors. His food was gathered from farms 
near at hand. His clothes were homespun. His 
comings and goings were with a horse. Books and 
papers were rare. His amusements were simple. 
Laughter was often compounded out of tragedy. 
The sole social center was the church. Ignorance 
was rife. Intolerance held sway. There was little 
else to do except be born, till the soil, marry, have 
children, zealously participate in religious observ- 
ance and die. The revolution that has been since 
wrought is far more a miracle than any in ancient 
days. Men and women, old and young, have been 
lifted completely out of their enviroimient. The 

war has given the world a common interest. 

lis 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Development of railway and water transportation 
has enabled man to circle the globe in less time 
than was formerly required to cross the Atlantic 
ocean. This continent is now crossed in three and 
a half days, as compared to three months in 1870. 
A network of steam railways gives local accommo- 
dation to every part of the land and enables all to 
travel at a minimum of expense. In addition, trol- 
ley lines have penetrated wherever the density of 
population has made them feasible. Automobiles, 
bicycles and motorcycles have made jaunts pleas- 
anter and more healthful, and advanced the people 
of both city and country beyond the strength of a 
beast. Anthracite coal, oil and electricity have 
largely done away with smoke on the heavier trains. 
The Pullman and similar accommodations have 
made long distance journeys more comfortable. On 
the sea the turbine engine, the steel propeller, the 
steamship, yacht and motorboat, to say nothing of 
superior and oftentimes palatial furnishings afloat, 
made it possible for travel there to be speedy and 
agreeable prior to 1914. Risks have been reduced 
to a negligible quantity for the 1,033,679,680 pas- 
sengers carried on the railroads of the United 
States in 1915. Half that number were reported 
in 1900. 

Means of written and verbal communication have 
been multiplied to such an extent that the farmer 
no longer feels himself apart from the thrill of civ- 
ilization. The telephone has brought a continent 
beneath its sway and made possible an intricacy of 
business undreamed of a quarter of a century ago. 

116 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

It has made men nearer to each other everywhere, 
annihilated distance and caused calls for help, con- 
venience or news to be heard instantaneously. A 
world is the debtor of Alexander Graham Bell. The 
telegraph, and cable have imited nations, continents 
and hemispheres. The daily doings of the heart of 
Asia, np to a generation ago unknown in their most 
important aspects until years later, are now flashed 
around the earth in a few minutes. Conununities 
are no longer excluded from the tide of life any- 
where. The earth moves by ideas, and the in- 
dividual sends them to the chief centers and, in 
the more concentrated districts in the United States 
and Europe, to every home. Postal facilities, aided 
by the automobile and the pneumatic tube, have in- 
creased at an enormous rate, with the result that 
no person need remain hidden if he does not desire 
to be. The remotest tiller of the soil is now nearer 
to New York, Chicago and San Francisco than the 
denizen of the village or small city fifty years ago. 
The rural free delivery has helped to accomplish 
this result without delay. 

Such means of rapid intercourse have made the 
modern newspaper possible, aided by the multiple 
rotary press. For so little expense that the cost is 
not felt by the very poorest, each citizen keeps him- 
self informed every morning as to the affairs not 
only of the locality in which he dwells, but of the 
entire globe. Business and the consequent enhance- 
ment of advertising support a machinery of news 
production which has made man a neighbor to hu- 
manity. Together with editorials and the Sunday 

117 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

magazine section of the more important dailies, the 
news is digested for every reader and he is in- 
structed as to all vital matters. There are now 
25,000 newspapers in the United States. In addi- 
tion a vast number of periodicals of all kinds stim- 
ulate thought and keep everybody who desires to 
know informed on any subject, however technical. 
The leading dailies of the large cities have corres- 
pondents in every spot on earth from whence news 
is likely to emanate, serving it with such terse in- 
terest that the reader easily grasps the simple facts 
and draAvs his o^vn conclusion therefrom. 

Books, too, are now presented to the public with 
a cheapness and attractiveness that have brought 
the mind seeking knowledge through the printed 
page within easy access, not only to the immediate 
locality and time but to the storehouse of learning 
and fact of the ages. Intellectual output of all 
periods may be upon the shelf of the poorest at an 
expense which would have been impossible a quar- 
ter of a century ago. Encyclopaedic knowledge is 
placed within arm's length of the busiest man. Bi- 
ography is written without panegyric and only to 
portray the facts of the subject. History, because 
of the impetus toward scholarship in the last cen- 
tury and those archeological discoveries which have 
laid bare the story of ancient empires, has been re- 
written upon a scientific basis, with regard to con- 
firmable reality and not to bear out an argument. 
Men are no longer compelled to accept mere state- 
ments of opinion as authoritative : they may seek the 
proofs and accept or deny the ideas presented. 

118 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

Books have not only spread the gospel of learning 
and informed the earth, but added to the happiness 
of the individual and made him a citizen of the 
world. 

In the home, where a generation ago genuine com- 
forts were the property of the fcAv, all of those with 
a meager income may now feel a joy in life so far 
beyond that possible to the man who labored with 
his hands heretofore as to make it almost beyond 
belief that changes of such vast importance to 
human kind could have been attained in the short 
span of half a hundred years. Wherever sufficient 
population warrants, the candle and oil lamp have 
well nigh disappeared and gas and the electric light 
have taken their place. He who sits beneath the 
effulgent glow of the results of the inventive brain 
of an Edison, shedding a warmth about the hearth 
that it never received before, can hardly conceive 
of the barrenness of the old method. New and con- 
stantly developing processes have made possible the 
almost universal use of the carpet and rug, brass 
and iron bed, wall paper and upholstered furniture. 
Over them the magic wand of art has cast a spell, 
and today the domicile of the poorest, if a little 
taste be displayed, may appear a place that kings 
a century ago would have envied. 

Plumbing conveniences unknown to any but this 
contemporary time have added immeasurably to 
comfort and health. The tile bath has made clean- 
liness a duty and generally prevalent. Towels, soap 
and various manufactured articles of the toilette 
have increased the joy of living. With a well 

119 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

stocked library in this home its owner finds life 
pleasanter. The pneumatic cleaner and the carpet 
sweeper have lessened the burdens of women in the 
household. Invention, as in the case of man, 
has lessened her toil and increased leisure for 
the enhancement of mentality and usefulness 
outside the domicile. This is mainly responsible 
for the increasing desire of women to par- 
take in greater measure in social and public 
activities. 

The style of architecture of the housing of the 
people has changed and made for community of in- 
terest. Modern plumbing, the steel girder and the 
transference of large tracts of forest through the 
saw mill by cheap transportation to the chief cen- 
ters are responsible for the apartment building, 
where many hundreds may live as neighbors with- 
out knowing each other, and the great business 
structure, reaching a heighth up to fifty stories, 
where several thousands of persons daily have their 
headquarters and transact their affairs. Electric- 
ity has brought the present elevator and made it 
possible for man to climb higher than the maximum 
of six stories at the close of the Civil War. Cement, 
concrete and tile processes, with which engineering 
knowledge has kept pace, have not only intensified 
the attractiveness of the interior' of all buildings, 
but have become so cheap relatively as to enable 
building operations to take on a grander scale. 
Purely by the inventive means of a single genera- 
tion such undertakings as the Pennsylvania and 
New York Central stations and the Metropolitan, 

ISO 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA, 

Singer, Whitehall and Equitable office buildings in 
New York City have been made possible. 

Without the growth of desire for creature com- 
forts and easy access to centers of mercantile ac- 
tivity the department store — the marvel of a quar- 
ter century — ^would have been impossible. Local 
and special shops for immediate and particular 
selection still have their place in the large cities, 
but the greater mart supplies readily the needs of 
a community, and very cheaply because of greater 
volume of purchases. Clothing has become more 
varied as the result of the wants of the individual 
being supplied from a more extended field of pro- 
duction and the cheapening of cost by diversified 
labor and machinery. Good and attractive ma- 
terial may now be worn more generally than ever 
before. To the farmer and dweller in the small 
to"wms the facilities of the mail order establish- 
ments have become such as to enable all to secure 
products the inhabitant of a large city could ob- 
tain at a high class department store, by ha\^ng a 
selection presented to him through the printed ad- 
vertising page in newspaper and periodical. 

Medical research has been revolutionized in half 
a century, with the result that health has been im- 
measurably bettered and life prolonged. Chemical 
research has brought quick remedies for simple ail- 
ments within reach. Where manufacturers have 
abused public confidence in these, an enlightened 
opinion has enforced the enactment of strict pro- 
hibitive laws. The process by which light has 
emerged from the darkness of medical methods of 

121 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

a generation ago has been the constant application 
of analytical thought to canse and effect in accord- 
ance with the scientific spirit of the age. A doctor 
in Porto Rico experiments at the cost of his life and 
the truth he finds protects future millions of his 
fellow men from the ravages of yellow fever. Oth- 
ers experiment, stagnant waters are drained, mos- 
quitoes disappear and with them malaria; the 
extent of the result being dependent upon the thor- 
oughness of the method. By the same means 
typhoid and the bubonic plague have found their 
cause and remedy. A physician carrying a particle 
of radium in his pocket and his hand coming in 
contact with it, he finds eventually that it is an alle- 
viant and perhaps an antidote for cancer. Bac- 
teriologists and pathologists concentrate their at- 
tention upon the plague of tuberculosis, and hygiene 
and sanitation do the rest in lessening its ravages. 
The war has enhanced surgical knowledge. Dis- 
eases that reflect the darker and more crassly selfish 
side of mankind are brought to more thorough in- 
vestigation, with the outcome that the world is 
awakening to the steady and terrible results of 
depravity, and the conclusion that cleanliness of 
life is the true remedy. The desire of humanity for 
the elimination of preventable maladies and to know 
the why and wherefore of things medical has caused 
those men of great wealth who desire the esteem of 
their fellows to endow institutions of learning and 
hospitals, as well as special means of research, 
which have helped to bring greater and more effi- 
cient changes for human good in the field of med- 

122 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

icine in the past generation than in all those pre- 
ceding since Hippocrates and Galen first thought 
enough of the bodily woes of men to experiment in 
order to eliminate them. Every good physician 
trained in a school of facts, every discovery of 
means for the prevention or remedy of illness, every 
chemist with a method for making life cleaner and 
healthier has assisted in making the individual 
everywhere less obsessed by his own ills and his 
own environment, and given him more freedom to 
comprehend and take part in the world outside of 
his individual life and his locality. 

Certainly not less important than any other 
change in the surroundings of man in the last half 
century has been that in the field of amusement. 
There the development of means of transportation, 
the asphalt pavement, cement sidewalk and incan- 
descent light, has, in this country especially, made 
possible a variety and standard of attractions upon 
the stage that would have excited the awe and won- 
der of our grandfathers. A cheap and melodra- 
matic character of production Avas that presented 
before the eyes and ears of the people of the small 
town and even the cities in 1870. Then came the 
vaudeville circuit and the stock company, which, 
with the perfection of instrumental music, gave 
much more life and hence wider inspiration to every 
small community. With the working out of the de- 
tails of electrical appliance, Edison and others 
brought out the phonograph, which, carrying the 
divine harmony into every home affording it, en- 
abled men, women and children to be lifted above 

123 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the cares of everyday life. With mechanical prop- 
erties of the theatre enriched by devices to give 
wider range to acting, the drama took on a more 
instructive tone and broke away from the classical 
as the ideal. 

Then was created the moving picture — still in its 
infancy — to bring to the door of every person on 
the earth the story and action of every other indi- 
vidual, age, race and clime and to do it at an expense 
of a few pennies. Everybody, rich or poor, has 
followed this device like the Pied Piper of Hamelin 
and had his thoughts stimulated to a broader vision. 
The saloon, even before the prohibition law was 
enacted, and the corner grocery, as well as the 
dive and the music hall, had lost the influence they 
once had. The "movies" have ushered in a new 
age, and so quietly and steadily that it is difficult 
to estimate the full consequence. Their reaction 
upon the legitimate stage has been to maintain rea- 
sonable prices and stimulate better production. 

Education has been so extended as to give assur- 
ance that it will in all countries in time become 
universal. The enthusiasm of Horace Mann for 
free and nonsectarian training has borne fruit be- 
yond his dreams. The old individualistic and clas- 
sical schooling under private and religious auspices 
has given way to the participation by children 
everywhere in preparation for the duties of com- 
mon citizenship, and is now evolving into adapta- 
tion of the youth for economic efficiency as well. 
The highly developed normal college has come into 
being, the salaries of teachers have been increased 

124 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

to more fairly compensate them for so valuable a 
service to the community of the present and future, 
and taxpayers have given to the maintenance of the 
educational system more willingly than to any other 
agency of government. The common school has ex- 
ceeded its function of imparting knowledge and has 
become an organizer of character, altruism and 
patriotism, and is to-day one of the chief instru- 
ments for the upbuilding of the spirit of a higher 
civilization. 

Material avenues of enabling men and women to 
live a more interesting and intelligent life have had 
their inevitable effect upon laws and government. 
The vision of happier conditions has been the incen- 
tive for the eight-hour day, demanded by the worker 
in order that he may have a more equitable share 
in the joys of the new life about him. Public san- 
itation and regulations to protect the health of the 
toiler have been further results of material factors. 
As men have been enabled to break the shackles 
that bound them to an old order, they have had 
more leisure to reason regarding the affairs of their 
fellows and to arrive at a clearer comprehension of 
true equity between man and man. Transportation 
and the mails have also been brought into play to 
make possible gatherings for the discussion of every 
subject, which the press has reported broadcast. 

Legislation for the child, the amelioration of the 
condition of women and a more strict accountability 
of those in authority, whether industrial or polit- 
ical, has been enacted. Mercy and kindness have 
shed their light in greater measure in the daily life 

125 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of the coinintiiiity, removing imprisonment for debt, 
rescuing the heavily laden debtor through bank- 
ruptcy so that he may have new opportunity, less- 
ening the rigors of punishment of those who have 
offended against law, giving free legal aid to the 
poor to obtain redress for their wrongs, abating 
the strictures against divorce in order that mis- 
mated couples may benefit themselves and the world 
by parting, and providing such advantages as pub- 
lic play grounds and musical and other entertain- 
ment. Government has changed in a generation 
toward more and more utilization of community 
energy for the good of the locality or nation as a 
whole, and even the conservation of resources for 
the enjoyment of future generations. 

Sociological education and the tendency toward 
social service have further concentrated attention 
upon the needs of humanity, with resultant thor- 
ough and sometimes too methodical agencies for 
assisting the poor. In fact, what is known as set- 
tlement work is entirely the creation of a genera- 
tion. The sympathy of mankind for the war suf- 
ferers has been organized through the Red Cross 
and other kindred agencies. And as schools, books, 
newspapers and magazines have informed and in- 
structed school boys as statesmen were not in- 
formed and instructed a century ago, the pulpit has 
steadily lost its authority. At the termination of 
the Civil AVar the minister was still a local oracle. 
Without the present means of communication with 
the outside world, either by travel or printed page, 
he enjoyed an influence in the community second 

126 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

to none. He had leisure and opportunity for study 
which others did not. On Sunday he was listened 
to with something more than respect and less than 
awe. His sermon was the piece de resistance at 
every table during the week. The great preachers, 
Henry Ward Beecher and T. DeWitt Talmadge, 
were national figures. It is no longer so. ** Billy'* 
Sunday is a sensationalist. 

The good minister who tends his flock in every 
hamlet has lost none of the respect, either of that 
flock or the conununity. The sweet and wholesome 
influence of the church and Sunday school over the 
child has not gro\\Ti less, nor has that of the mani- 
fold social activities of the congregation over the 
older folk ; but men, women and children alike have 
come to perceive that goodness is not confined to 
those who attend church. Under the free institu- 
tions of the United States, where none may be per- 
secuted because his beliefs do not conform to those 
of the majority, the mutual hatreds and jealousies 
of creeds have been diminished to a negligible quan- 
tity, and we have become aware that all that is 
required of us is, as Micah said, 'Ho do justice, to 
love mercy and to walk humbly with thy God." 
Church, minister and priest are the same, and their 
respective message and work are not dissimilar, 
but we are no longer content mth forms and be- 
liefs, and have as our ideal only the simple doing 
of good and service to others. 

The s^Tupathy of a world for men and of men for 
a world has brought a clearer perception of *'the 
fatherhood of God and the brotherhood of man." 

127 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

In accord mth a scientific spirit, the human mind 
working upon materials has wrought so much in the 
field of investigation and accomplished snch tre- 
mendous results for daily comfort and well being, 
making it possible to overcome ills in larger meas- 
ure, that the people mil no longer readily accept 
in the sphere of religious observance that which 
cannot be proven on grounds of efficacy. The value 
of cleanliness of life, obedience to the Ten Com- 
mandments and kindness toward others may be 
demonstrated, but the usefulness in th^ daily life 
of man of mere traditional ritual and acceptance 
of time honored statement of belief is not easily to 
be found ; hence they are discarded by increasingly 
large numbers. As men have thought less of im- 
pressing upon other men with refinement of cruelty 
that they alone represented Almighty God, they 
have by their kindness and mercy been enabled to 
perceive Him more clearly and to better understand 
and appreciate the Biblical injunction, ''Fear God 
and keep His commandments, for this is the whole 
duty of man. ' ' It may be expected that the pebble 
of this broader conception thus throwm upon the 
receptive surface of an awakened humanity will in- 
crease its circles until it ultimately reaches the 
uttermost land. 

These influences have had their effect upon mor- 
ality. Enlightened public opinion had done away 
with the grosser forms of amusement. Respect for 
the cleanliness and health of the human body has 
increased. Drunkenness is rare. Temperance and 
total abstinence from intoxicating liquors have be- 

128 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

come more prevalent, even where tliey have not 
been forced. Various forms of gambling have be- 
come less conspicuous and in som^e cities and states 
have been done away with. Athletic contests and 
exercises and outdoor games have caused more life 
in the open air and hence more wholesome living. 
And with all the multitudinous communication and 
knowledge between man and man, as well as respect 
for public order, crime and hypocrisy have become 
more difficult if not less desirable. 

Not among the unimportant tendencies of the 
time is that to seek to penetrate the veil which has 
until now covered the grave. Hardly more than 
half a century ago the Fox sisters began investiga- 
tions in spiritualism, in exact reproduction of the 
revelations of the witch of Endor three thousand 
years before. As the latter is said to have called 
up the spirit of Samuel to answer the questions of 
the troubled Saul, and she could see the departed 
prophet in vision but the King could not, so these 
sisters stated that they had held conununication 
with the so-called dead. The impetus which they 
, gave to the subject was long in reaching effect. But 
in the last two or three decades the number of 
alleged instances of demonstration of coimnunica- 
tion has become so large as to arouse the interest 
of such scientific observers as Flammarion, Lom- 
broso. Sir Oliver Lodge, Sir Alfred Wallace and 
Professor Hyslop. A person who seeks light 
upon psychic phenomena is no longer considered 
''queer." Clairvoyance, clairaudience, mesmerism 
and similar terms have become common. Mankind 

129 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

is awakening to the fact that the theory of evolu- 
tion failed to account for the human spirit, and 
dimly to perceive that life is made everlasting by 
universal law. 

With less immersion in his immediate neighbor- 
hood and more respect for himself, man has de- 
manded a greater degree of liberty. Slavery has 
been done away with on this continent since 1865. 
Serfs have been emancipated in Russia since 1881. 
Republics have been established in greater number. 
Privileges have been swept away, and for those 
that remain the world has a decreasing regard. 
Even the Jew in this free land is beginning to re- 
ceive his just due. As industrial production has 
become more varied and labor more skilled the 
emoluments of toil have increased. Women vote 
in some states and nations. Suffrage without proi>- 
erty qualification has become more general. Re- 
strictions upon public assemblage and free speech, 
except in war, have been lessened. The liberty of 
the press has increased in all countries. The ten- 
dency of the age is toward freedom under forms 
of law and public order. 

Industry up to half a century ago was largely 
local. It has since become national and even inter- 
national. Great stock companies have been formed 
to carry on worldwide industrial enterprises. In- 
vestment in the shares of these companies have been 
purchased by those who have surplus earnings 
everywhere. Along with closer community of in- 
terest there has come farther discussion of the 
relations between the wage earner and the em- 

130 



THE DAWNING OF ANOTHER ERA 

ployer. Better understanding has been songlit. 
Fifty years ago the employer was allowed full sway ; 
today he is compelled by a new spirit among men 
to act more justly. The result is an impetus toward 
the solution of the industrial problem. The^ partici- 
pation of both sides of the controversy in the financ- 
ing of a common enterprise — the greatest of wars — 
and the deaths of their sons and brothers on the 
same field of battle in the cause of democracy has 
accomplished much to bring about a more mutual 
point of view. 

Events of world magnitude in the past century 
have made quite startling the similarity between 
this period and that of Columbus, As then the con- 
quest of Mexico and Peru added to the supplies of 
gold by which Spain carried on its aggressive policy 
toward the remainder of Europe, so in this genera- 
tion the production of that metal has doubled, with 
a resultant rise in prices and stimulated industrial 
development. As the great Genoese navigator dis- 
covered continents, Magellan crossed the two oceans 
and da Gama rounded the Cape, in our day Peary 
and Shackleton have completed man's knowledge 
of the earth on which he dwells by finding the exact 
location of the two poles. And as the great discov- 
eries of new lands excited the wonder of men, we 
have in our time beheld scientific revelations even 
more marvelous in their significance. As trade 
routes were changed by circumnavigating Africa 
and making a new route to India, ruining the com- 
merce and power of Venice, so the Suez canal has 
opened the old way to India and in some degree 

131 



AIMERICA'S TOMORROW 

resuscitated the importance of Egypt ; and the Pan- 
ama canal has brought the peoples and continents 
nearer to each other and given a new life to the 
Pacific ocean. 

For the substitution by Copernicus, Kepler and 
Newton of the heliocentric theory of the universe, 
as opposed to the geocentric idea which had led to 
the belief that man is the center of all things, we 
have had Darwin and the theory of evolution, which 
has taught that man was not created in a day in the 
Garden of Eden but as the result of slow and nat- 
ural development throughout the ages. For Pet- 
rarch, Boccacio and the Revival of Learning, this 
age has had its tremendous interest in archeology, 
education and investigation the world over. And 
for the great Martin Luther and his defiance of the 
church of his fathers, we in this time have seen an 
Ingersoll and a hundred others, sneering at the 
absurdities of old beliefs and creeds and seeking to 
bring about a religion of humanity. Finally as gun- 
powder, the disruption of Christendom through 
religious difference and the rivalry of peoples for 
share in the new discoveries brought Europe to pro- 
longed and bloody wars, so we have seen the might- 
iest powers and peoples at each others' throats, 
battling in the fiercest hell since the beginning of 
human story. 

Indeed, it may be said that mankind is in the 
greatest state of transition since the dawn of his- 
tory. It is true that during the short but eventful 
life of Alexander, and again at the time of Csesar, 
new forces were let loose on the earth wliich were 

133 



THE DA\^7NING OF ANOTHER ERA 

to have a permanent effect upon the futnre; hut 
their impact was felt chiefly around the Mediter- 
ranean hasin and not by the vast populations of 
Central and Eastern Asia. When the Roman Em- 
pire disappeared in its own decay and Christianity 
grew upon its ruins another vast change was 
wrought. So it was when Charlemagne started the 
activities of men moving in new directions. And 
also at the period of the Renaissance and the Re- 
formation when the modern world was born. But 
today mightier forces are working and with vaster 
portent than at any previous time. Men are stirred 
as not before. Seeing institutions and long cher- 
ished beliefs crumbling around them ever3rwhere, 
they perceive that a ^n.e^v age is at hand. They 
realize that neither they nor the planet will ever be 
the same again. And the thought comes, what does 
it all mean! After the roar of cannon, a thousand 
inventions and new social, religious and political 
ideals, men ask whether a brighter day is coming. 
What is to make the new age entirely distinct 
from the past? How will it react upon mankind, 
upon the time to come and especially upon America 
in the next few decades ? As its causes are broader 
and more far reaching than those which formed any 
previous era, it must be apparent that its effects 
will be more widespread. And as those causes 
have embraced the earth, so the effect will be to 
provide means for a closer community of interest 
until it includes the entire race of man. The hat- 
reds engendered by great nations struggling at 
war do not long endure. Two generations and they 

133 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

have passed away. But the inventive genius of the 
individual and the results of his creativeness will 
go on, and, no matter how extensive armed conflict 
may have been, the earth will never return to what 
it was before it gained the spirit to look beyond 
the borders of single states. So many citizens of 
the world have been created by steam, electricity, 
the printing press and the war that no cataclysm 
can make them provincial or merely national again. 
What, then, is the meaning of the new age if it 
is not that it is America's mission to make every 
man upon the face of the earth free from privilege 
and monarchy and injustice, that each shall be able 
to speak and think without prejudice or harm, that 
every child upon the globe shall have an education, 
that any person shall have a living wage if willing 
to earn it, and that all shall enjoy the splendid op- 
portunities which inventive genius and the sacrifice 
of the nation's manhood in heroic battle have placed 
at the disposal of a world? What is its portent if 
not that by means of physical and intellectual com- 
munication that time is near at hand when the 
brotherhood of man shall by the sword of the United 
States become a reality and the world will realize 
that 

**He prayeth best who loveth best 
All things both great and small, 
And the dear God who loveth us 
He made and loveth all." 



134 



CHAPTER V 

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

"Nations and peoples act from self-interest, buttressed and sus- 
tained by race rivalry and national pride, and also, thank God, 
from patriotism, which is love for your own country, your own 
government, and your own people, before and above other coun- 
tries, governments and peoples. Without that patriotism, that 
sacred passion, which reached its sublime heights at the Marne 
and at Chateau Thierry, the world would not be fit to live in. 
Whatever plans we have, let us build them under the inspiration 
of the proud traditions of the Republic and the teachings of 
Washington and Jefferson, of Jackson and Lincoln." — William 
E. Borah. 

NOW that republican America has put aside the 
traditional and studied policy of isolation 
from alliances scrupulously practiced by its states- 
men for more than a century and has entered boldly 
upon a period of earnest and active participation 
in world war and politics a brief reexamination 
should be made of the ideals of society and govern- 
ment thought worthy of expanded influence through 
such a change and such tremendous sacrifice ulti- 
mately into a world conception. 

It is not necessary that a thousand years shall 
have fled and men have read and reflected upon a 
universal history in order that the distinguishing 
characteristics of the United States be fully under- 
stood; for its significance lies within the character 

135 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of the American people and the nature of their in- 
stitutions created in 1787. What better evidence 
could there be of a Divine hand in history than that 
for so many ages those continents afterwards 
named North and South America should have re- 
mained unknown until a something told Columbus 
to seek India and find them, and that in the north 
temperate zone there should have amalgamated 
several races so that they might at exactly the pro- 
pitious time three centuries afterward be able after 
much struggle to make the world absolutely safe 
for republicanism? Long after the great navigator 
had passed away there came to North America those 
who sought escape from religious intoleration. 
Their heads no longer in danger of the block or their 
bodies of torture on the rack, they braved the wil- 
derness, fought savage Indians and established a 
new civilization. 

These were our fathers. Greater opportunity 
was also sought by them. Some were adventurous 
and looked for a new life in the open. In increas- 
ing volume they immigrated from every European 
land. The hardy and practical peoples of the north 
of that continent built the nation. Usually from 
each individual family came the strongest and the 
most forceful and aggressive. And some of these 
peoples gave of their best blood when at the stronc;- 
est: the Dutch when at the heighth of their sea 
power in the seventeenth century, the English when 
expanding into the greatest empire the world had 
heretofore seen in the seventeenth, eighteenth and 
early nineteenth centuries, the Germans and Scan- 

136 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

dinavians from 1845 to 1860 and the Irish during 
the following fifty years. Latterly have come the 
Italians, Austrians and Hungarians. France and 
Switzerland have contributed a small but steady 
supply. Turks, Greeks, Rumanians, Bulgarians, 
Serbians, and latterly two and a half millions of 
Eussians, mostly Polish Jews, have added more. 

Practically all of these vastest numbers of human 
beings that ever migrated from one cherished spot 
on the earth to another have come without distinc- 
tion or privilege; the few who had them were soon 
shorn of them in the hardships of the common lot. 
It was only at a later day when education became 
more general in Europe that some of the new- 
comers brought with them the rudiments of school- 
ing. Growing up with the young country, inter- 
changing ideas and undergoing lil^e struggles, they 
developed a sense of humor found nowhere else, an 
energetic and aggressive spirit, and a mightj^ na- 
tionality. 

The chief value of the constitution of the TTnited 
States, the instrument framed to protect and guide 
aU these peoples and mould them into one, is that 
it provides a governmental system of checks and 
balances, conserves the rights of the minority from 
encroachments by the majority to which it gives 
control, guarantees religious liberty and prevents 
centralization of authority in executive or legisla- 
ture. When it is remembered that because of the 
lack of these benefits men underwent untold mis- 
eries for centuries and elsewhere are still lamenting 

their lack, the statement of Gladstone that our Con- 
is? 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

stitution is tlie greatest instrmiient ever struck off 
at a given time by the mind of man does not seem 
unjustified. Created for the most part by the genius 
of Alexander Hamilton and containing a pattern of 
government for a distraught world, in its essentials 
it seems an inspiration from the Almighty. 

Surviving a great civil war and the changes in 
customs and thought of 130 years, it still proves 
itself most just and practicable Avhen its original 
spirit is strictly adhered to. Nowhere does it seem 
more venerable than when compared with the gov- 
ernmental charters and systems of other nations. 
In the great basic document of the United States 
the fundamental evils of other commonwealths have 
been done away with and a government *'of the 
people, by the people and for the people" instituted 
among men. 

While the executive in the United States is 
clothed mth more power than that of the king in 
most constitutional monarchies, and more than a 
dictator during the period of a great war, he is en- 
tirely subject to check by the legislature. If the 
Congress yields its authority for the time being, it 
may at "v^nll recall it. If he should exceed his powers 
or seek to destroy the government of a free people, 
he may be impeached by the House of Representa- 
tives and removed by a two-thirds vote of the Sen- 
ate. He is commander in chief of the Rrmj and 
navy and, if he has genius as a commander, may 
lead in the field; but even then he is still entirely 
subject to the will of the people as expressed 
through their representatives. They and not he 

138 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

have the right to declare war. He appoints to offi- 
ces only in the executive and judicial branches, and 
cannot interfere with Congress. Those appointees 
may be removed for cause by the Senate. 

The House of Representatives originates money 
bills, but cannot enact them without the critical as- 
sistance of the Senate and the signature of the Pres- 
ident, who has the power to veto them but cannot 
insist upon his opposition if both houses pass them 
again by a two-thirds vote. The Supreme Court 
passes upon questions of authority between the 
branches of the national government and between 
the state and federal government and keeps them 
in conformity with the written constitution and 
the rights guaranteed to all citizens. 

No nation in history ever gave its citizens such a 
share in the government or protected them against 
themselves to such an extent as the United States. 
In the Constitution it gave every male of twenty- 
one years and over the right to vote for elective 
public officers, leaving to the states provision for 
means of so doing. After the Civil War an amend- 
ment was enacted providing that the right to vote 
should not be denied or abridged because of race, 
color or previous condition of servitude. Another 
is now before the people removing disqualification 
because of sex. Neither in ancient Greece nor in 
any modern state was the right to vote made uni- 
versal among males except in this country. The 
small number of those who voted for Washington 
has gro"v\m until today nearly five times the total 
population of 1790 participate in the direct election 

139 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of the chief executive of the nation. The people 
own and operate the government, subject only to 
their own Constitution. 

Never on the earth has a democracy been more 
pure than in this land where all men enjoy the bene- 
fits of freedom. The governments of Solon and 
Lycurgus were never extended to the common man, 
the slave or helot. Under the Roman republic the 
people had no universal means of expression. Class 
distinctions prevailed both there and in Greece. 
America has placed no restrictions upon the free 
exercise of right by any man. The son of a negro 
slave becomes the head of an institution of prac- 
tical learning which is an inspiration to his race. 
A boy born in a log cabin and without schooling, 
except that which he gives himself, by sheer merit 
and love of his fellow man, is elevated in a time of 
stress to lead the greatest of nations. A lad as- 
cends from canal boy to the presidency. An Ohio 
youth teaches country school, fights in the Civil 
War, and leads the country to victory in the con- 
flict with Spain. 

Another is born in Virginia in humble circum- 
stances and arises to lead and inspire the country 
in an even more vital crisis and become one of the 
great of the earth for all time. Every boy born 
within the borders of the land may emulate their 
example, no matter how poor his circumstances, 
even though an inmate of an orphan asylum. As 
Napoleon used to say that every soldier carried in 
his knapsack a marshal's baton, so each youth in 
the United States is restricted solely by his own 

140 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

abilities, character and opportunities from ulti- 
mately assuming the highest position in the land. 

Just so the avenues to wealth are open to all. The 
originator of every great fortune in America started 
without a penny and by his thrift, industry and 
shrewdness, stimulated by his ambition, laid the 
foundation of his riches. Andrew Carnegie began 
active life here as a telegraph operator, later saw 
the possibilities of the steel business, by his genius 
helped to organize it, and reaped the reward of his 
abilities as a pioneer. John D. Eockefeller opened 
his career as a bookkeeper. By care and shrewd- 
ness he and those who were later associated with 
him organized the oil industry. A fortune esti- 
mated at a billion dollars resulted. These men later 
became benefactors of mankind by assisting enor- 
mously in the spread of knowledge and education 
and in the provision of means of scientific research 
of a nature calculated to lengthen life and make the 
globe more habitable. 

As much as men may deprecate some of the meth- 
ods by which Rockefeller attained his wealth, it 
must be admitted that he merely availed himself of 
the opportunities of a new age and that his fellow 
boold^eepers had the same avenue at their disposal 
without the same insight and craft. James J. Hill, 
ablest of the builders of the Northwest, worked his 
way from steamboat clerk to extending the Great 
Northern Railroad to the Pacific. He became its 
executive and controlled it financially. Thomas A. 
Edison, George Westinghouse and Henry Ford 
started with nothing. By perseverance, acumen 

141 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and inventive skill they built massive fortunes, but 
not without benefit to humanity. 

The original John Jacob Astor was the son of a 
butcher. By energy and sound judgment he orga- 
nized the fur trade. Jay Gould was reared on a 
farm and kept books for the village blacksmith. By 
dint of hard struggle he gained an education, be- 
came a banker and finally, by shrewd manipulation, 
the owner of railroads and the Western Union Tel- 
egraph Company, leaving a fortune of $72,000,000. 
Cornelius Vanderbilt, founder of the fortune of that 
name — estimated at $100,000,000 at his death — was 
also a farmer's boy and began life at sixteen by 
carrying produce and passengers in a sailboat from 
Staten Island to New York. Then taking advan- 
tage — open to all — of the demand for and growth of 
transportation he became a steamboat captain and 
the head of a great railroad system. 

Another farmer's lad was Marshall Field, mer- 
chant prince of Chicago, who started as a clerk in 
a country store. In a land of opportunity Jacob 
Schiff began his career as an alien and with little 
help. By fighting his way through hard work and 
honest dealing, he became a great banker. Benjamin 
Altman, also a Jew, started as a peddler and left 
$15,000,000 in art treasures to be enjoyed in per- 
petuity by the people of the City of New York. The 
first of the Morgans began with practically no as- 
sistance. His son, the elder J. Pierpont Morgan, 
was a genius as an organizer of industry and prof- 
ited by it, helping to build the country and keep its 
financial honor intact in time of peril. 

142 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

And so thronghout the list of twenty thousand 
millionaires it is the same. Starting with nothing, 
and with the advantage of compulsory struggle, 
they took advantage of opportunities and, with the 
thought that all was before them and that they were 
dependent solely upon their o^^^l energies and abil- 
ities, hewed out or organized new fields of produc- 
tion, gave employment to labor and bought with 
their rewards such comforts as stimulated the more 
general enjojment of a higher standard of civili- 
zation. 

Great lawyers, physicians, newspaper proprie- 
tors gained their start for the most part in the 
same way. The elder Pulitzer came to America 
from Germany as a cabin boy, sold papers on the 
streets of St. Louis, by his genius developed the 
St. Louis Post-Despatch and New York World and 
left a fortune of $30,000,000. The elder Bennet of 
the New York Herald, the elder McLean of the Cin- 
cinnati Enquirer, Horace Greely of the New York 
Tribune, Dana of the Sun and Medill of the Chicago 
Tribune were dependent for their success only upon 
their o^vn acumen and energy. Senator Hearst, of 
California, was an intrepid spirit, who, like Spreck- 
els and Fair, took advantage of opportunity in the 
days of '49, extracted gold from the earth and 
helped to build California. Adolph Ochs, starting 
without help and with the handicaps of the Jewish 
race, solely by his genius built up one of the great- 
est newspapers in the world, the New York Times. 

Thomas F. Walsh and John B. Haggin, with 
nerve and daring in rough and wild mining camps, 

143 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

dominated their surroundings and amassed not only 
the means of obtaining palatial comforts for them- 
selves but of stimulating new industry by their cap- 
ital. Presidents and members of Congress were, as 
boys, poor in circumstances but rich in character. 
Only a few have been wealthy. In the United States 
a man may be penniless today and rich tomorrow ; 
he is no different from his fellow citizens in this 
democracy. Rich today, he may be penniless to- 
morrow, he also is no different from his fellows. 

It is the spirit of American institutions not to 
respect any man because of his position or wealth 
gained because of those institutions, not to have any 
lack of respect for him because of that position or 
wealth, but to laud or criticise him because of qual- 
ities of personality and character which would 
please or displease in any man, rich or poor. Feel- 
ing that he may rise to any height of position or 
possession, if he has the requisite capabilitj'- and 
opportunity, the true American has no dislike for 
that which he might by nerve, patience, persever- 
ance, shrewdness, industry, thrift and sobriety 
aspire to, or his children some day attain. And he 
and his fathers have made this possible in a land 
which is democratic in the larger sense but has con- 
ferred its greatest benefit upon mankind by giving 
it the example of a representative republic. 

Under these institutions, where unlimited oppor- 
tunity is given to the enterprising and skillful, 
where property is protected by mse laws, the re- 
sourceful and aggressive people of the United 
States, the descendants of discoverers and pioneers, 

144 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

have found means of expressing themselves and 
bettering their condition by inventive capacity 
which has astounded humanity and caused more 
progress in the amelioration of himian wants than 
in all the centuries preceding the nineteenth. The 
trolley car, motor propelled elevated railroad, sub- 
way train, motorboat, omnibus, automobile and 
motorcj^cle were created here, as were the electric 
light, telephone, telegraph, phonograph, moving 
picture, steam boat and railroad, typewriter, sewing 
machine, multiple press, wood pulp paper and the 
modern newspaper and magazine. "With free ini- 
tiative to develop to any extent of wealth indus- 
trially, increasing desire everywhere for the com- 
forts and practical necessities of life, and a larger 
number of skilled laborers, the people of the country 
have received higher wages and professional income 
and attained a better standard of living than any- 
where on the earth. The result has been inventive 
genius which has brought the greatest control by 
man over nature yet attained. 

Eun briefly through the recent evidence I The 
telephone was invented by Bell in 1876, the type- 
writer by Sholes in 1878, the cash register by Pat- 
terson in 1885, the incandescent lamp by Edison in 
1878, electric furnace reduction by Cowles in 1885, 
electrolyctic alkali production by Castner in 1890, 
the transparent photograph film by Eastman in 
1888, the motion picture machine by Edison in 1893, 
the button hole sewing machine by Reece in 1881, 
carborundum by Achcson in 1891, calcium carbine 
by Willson in 1888, artificial graphite by Acheson 

145 



AMERICA'S TOxMORROW 

in 1896, the air brake by Westinghouse in 1869, 
electric welding by Thomson in 1889, typebar cast- 
ing by Mergenthaler in 1885, the chair stitch shoe 
sewing machine by French and Myers in 1881, the 
single type composing machine by Lanston in 1887, 
the contimions process match machine by Beecher 
in 1888, chrome tanning by Schnlz in 1884, the disc 
plow by Hardy in 1896, the welt machine by Good- 
year in 1871, the electric lamp by Brnsh in 1879, 
the recording adding machine by Bnrronghs in 
1888, celluloid by Hj^att in 1870, the automatic knot- 
tying harvester machine by Appelby in 1880, water 
gas by Lowe in 1875, the machine for making barbed 
wire by Glidden in 1875, the rotary converter by 
Bradley in 1887, the automatic car coupler by Jen- 
ney in 1873, high speed steel by Taylor and White 
in 1891, the dry air process for blast furnace by 
Gayley in 1894, block signals for railways by Rob- 
inson in 1872, the trolley car by Van Depoele and 
Sprague in 1887, and Harveyized armor plate by 
Harvey in 1891. In an earlier day Wliitney in- 
vented the cotton gin and Benjamin Franklin first 
discovered the electric spark, born almost at the 
same time as the Declaration of Independence, both 
precursors of this age of intellectual and practical 
enlightenment. 

Besides these American inventions, in number 
and importance those of other lands pale into com- 
parative insignificance. Thus electric steel was in- 
vented by Heroult, a Frenchman, in 1900, djoiamite 
by Nobel, a Swede, in 1867, artificial alizarine dyes 

146 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

by Graebe and Lieberman, Germans, in 1869, the 
siphon recorder by Thompson, an Englishman, in 
1874, the gas engine, Otto cycle, by Otto, a German, 
in 1877, wireless telegraphy by Marconi, an Italian, 
in 1900, smokeless powder by Vielle, a Frenchman, 
in 1886, the Diesel oil motor by Diesel, a German, 
in 1900, the centrifugal creamer by De Laval, a 
Swede, in 1880, manganese steel by Hadfield, an 
Englishman, in 1884, the electric transformer by 
Gaulard and Gibbs, Englislmien, in 1883, the cya- 
nide process for extracting metal by Arthur and De- 
Forest, Englishmen, in 1888, the mantel burner by 
Welsbach, an Austrian, in 1890, and the by-product 
coke oven by Hoffman, an Austrian, in 1893. 

To make its intense and practical life possible 
the United States has accomplished more for educa- 
tion than any other country, mth the possible ex- 
ception of Germany, during the past half century. 
Following the ideal of Luther that the child should 
receive mental training, in 1647 the colony of Mas- 
sachusetts laid do\\Ti a system of popular instruc- 
tion in free schools which has been the model in 
principle for every state in the Union since that 
time. At present, of the white children in the en- 
tire country between the ages of six and nine years, 

77.2 per cent, are attending school, and of negroes 

49.3 per cent. ; of the whites between the ages of ten 
and fourteen years 91.1 per cent., and of the blacks 
68.6 per cent.; of the whites between the ages of 
fifteen and twenty years 33.7 per cent., and of the 
negroes 26.5 per cent. 

147 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Americans advancing from New England and the 
East generally to the Middle West and Far West 
took with them the little red school house, which 
became the tutor of many a future leader in life. 
Graded and high schools and numerous colleges and 
universities, as well as technical institutions, have 
been created during the past fifty years to meet the 
needs of a greater and more diversified population 
athirst for knowledge. Several countries in Europe 
have since greatly developed their educational sys- 
tems, but the people of the United States were the 
first to provide imiversal non-sectarian instruction 
for all of its children, rich or poor, Catholic or Pro- 
testant, white or black. No influence in America is 
more democratizing than the connnon school and 
none should become more world wide. 

In this country, where there is absolute equality 
under the law, is to be found the utmost effort to 
maintain public order. Great crowds on election 
night or receiving news of critical events need no 
guiding hand. In the courts the jury system and 
methods of appeal in both civil and criminal eases 
have given ample opportunity for even-handed jus- 
tice. The rich are estopped from mulcting the poor 
and the poor are prevented by constitutional guar- 
antees from stealing or destroying the property of 
the rich. Justice moves with as much celerity as 
crowded calendars will permit. There is no re- 
spect for persons. In cases of murder four Jews, a 
prominent police lieutenant, a Catholic priest and 
a Protestant minister within a short time pay the 
penalty with their lives. Every rebellion, whether 

148 



THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES 

against law and order or in opposition to the fun- 
damental conceptions of the state, has been put 
do^vn. 

If courts have sometimes erred, it is because men 
have erred ; and juries may also err. Students of 
jurisprudence in foreign lands have paid tribute to 
the high character and abilities of the bench of the 
United States as exemplified by such men as Jay, 
Marshall, Brewer, Harlan, White, Hughes and Taft. 
The bar of the country, too, is careful to maintain 
a high standard. William Nelson Cromwell, Phi- 
lander C. Knox, Eliliu Koot and John C. Spooner 
are the peers of the great lawyers of any land. 

At no previous time has the United States proved 
the efficacy of republicanism than after its entrance 
into the great war. Never in history did a nation 
of such numbers and wealth so earnestly and thor- 
oughly turn themselves from an isolation founded 
upon peace to a mighty warlike machine for freeing 
oppressed peoples — the greatest of all triumphs of 
free institutions — the beginning of its work of mak- 
ing all men everywhere free. 

This, then, is the meaning of the United States, 
known to every lad within its borders and soon 
announced to the poorest immigrant : that this gov- 
ernment of the free provides an asylum for the 
oppressed of every Caucasian and therefore assimi- 
lable race; that the many transfused into the one 
have made the American people, the most vital the 
earth has known ; that equal opportunity is offered 
by our republican institutions to every individual 
to attain to the highest position and greatest wealth 

149 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and to quietly enjoy without molestation the fruits 
of his toil ; that Catholic, Protestant, Greek or Jew 
may worship the Creator in his own way and with- 
out suffering from law or prejudice ; that the child 
of every citizen, native or foreign born, shall have 
the right of non-sectarian education at the expense 
of the state ; that every man, and soon every female 
as well, of twenty-one years and over shall have the 
right to vote and hold office ; that under liberty and 
wise laws every man, woman and child in the land 
shall have greater comfort and joy of living than 
anywhere in the world, now or throughout the past ; 
that it is the ideal of the people of America to give 
their civilization to the earth, and that it is willing 
to yield its last resource of life and material to 
accomplish that end. 



150 



CHAPTER VI 

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

"The principle of democracy is corrupted not only when the 
spirit of equality is extinct, but likewise when it falls into a spirit 
of extreme equality, and when each citizen would fain be upon a 
level with those whom he has chosen to command him. Then 
the people, incapable of bearing the very power they have dele- 
gated, want to manage everything themselyes, to debate for the 
Senate, to execute for the magistrates and to decide for the 
judges." — Montesquieu. 

TO those means provided in the original Consti- 
tution for giving expression to the popular 
will there have sprung up during the past few years 
opponents who have pointed out what they have 
termed their imperfections and declared that they 
are inadequate to meet the needs of a more diverse 
civilization and to give force quickly enough to the 
wishes of the majority. These opponents, there- 
fore, urge that extra constitutional powers be given 
to the electorate, such as the initiation of new leg- 
islation by a stated number of voters, the referen- 
dum of important measures to the people, and the 
recall of public officers and judicial decisions dis- 
tasteful to the greater number of citizens. With 
these inaugurated in their completest extent the 
country would not longer be so much a republic, 
based upon truly representative government, as a 

151 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

pure democracy patterned after that of Athens sub- 
sequent to the reforms of Solon and Cleisthenes. 

Inasmuch as this problem of whether purely dem- 
ocratic or generally representative and republican 
govermnent is best for this country and the entire 
world, of late has been uppermost in the minds of 
political thinkers, let us investigate whether it 
would be wise to give more radical scope to the 
tendency toward the former at this time. If the 
legislative, executive and judicial departments of 
the government of the United States have brought 
a happiness and prosperity greater than ever given 
to any people on the earth heretofore, does not the 
burden of proof rest upon the opponents of this 
system to show that it has outworn its usefulness ? 
If the American people and others who have come 
to their shores have gained a greater degree of 
liberty, more comforts, higher wages and wealth 
that has exceeded the dreams of avarice, do they 
need added functions to express their will? If an 
American has a full opportunity to express himself 
at the Australian ballot for measures, candidates 
and ofiicers, does he need a further voice in public 
affairs than he now possesses? 

No process in America is so easy as that of mak- 
ing laws. In Congress a member of the House or 
Senate, at the instance of a constituent or upon his 
own initiative, drops into a basket in the office of 
the file clerk, to be printed or referred to proper 
committee, a bill for any purpose from remo\dng 
the capital of the nation to the Ozark mountains to 
preparing the country for the emergency of war. 

153 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

If the originator of the bill speak for widespread 
opinion or real merit, his measure is granted a hear- 
ing. Arguments are made by witnesses for and 
against, members of the committee desiring to hear 
both sides, and if the cause be not insistent in its 
necessity, it is left to die for the time being by a 
majority vote. If worthy, it is reported to the body 
which the committee represents, a day set for its 
discussion and is then passed or rejected. The men 
who constitute the personnel of the various com- 
mittees are those thought to be best fitted by pre- 
vious training and experience for the consideration 
of such measures as are likely to come before them. 
If passed, the measure goes through exactly the 
same channels of consideration in the co-ordinate 
branch of the Congress. In the forty-eight states 
legislatures the process is about the same. And so 
in a lesser degree in the aldermanic bodies of most 
cities. 

To assist in giving information of fact regarding 
all measures intended to expedite the conduct of 
the executive branch, various commissions and bu- 
reaus have been created. No government in the 
world has ever collected, digested and distributed 
to the officials of the separate states and the peo- 
ple generally a wider range of useful information. 
And members of Congress have at their disposal 
one of the three largest libraries on the earth, any 
book of which may be secured by pneumatic tube 
'within five or ten minutes. Party government pre- 
vails and the measures favored indirectly through 
convention platform by the people before they elect 

153 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

their representatives are voted out of committee, 
but are subject to the criticism of the opposition 
both in committee and on the floor. The great ap- 
propriation bills are considered with little party- 
prejudice and with patriotic attention to duty. 

To say that measures include "pork barrels" 
and are subject to ''log rolling" is only to admit 
that men are human after election to Congress as 
before, as **pork" means merely an attempt on the 
part of a representative to satisfy the desire of the 
people of his district or state for new public build- 
ing or improvement, and "log rolling" a further ef- 
fort to satisfy their wishes by combination with a 
sufficient number of others of the same purpose to 
get the measure enacted. Without careful analysis 
and submission of plans by the architect of the 
Treasury or the engineers of the War Department 
the details of these measures would be unlikely to 
get past the committee, and if they did not for tlie 
most part contain merit they would not be able to 
meet the criticism of the two houses and the coun- 
try. Even the much criticised mileage is founded 
upon the just custom of making it sufficient to de- 
fray the expenses of transporting the member and 
his family to and from Washington. 

Not even under Reed and Cannon was the House 
of Representatives deprived of an inherent right 
or of any freedom in expressing itself. Those 
speakers appointed the majority members of the 
committees by and with the consent of their party 
colleagues, and accepted the recommendations of 
the minority leader for the remainder. Their dio- 

154 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

tnm in this respect and as parliamentarians was 
subject to the genuine rule of a majority of the 
entire House. They were leaders and patriots, 
and were so well thought of as to be prominently 
mentioned as candidates for the Presidency. As 
strong characters they made enemies, but the people 
or their representatives were not less able to find 
expression because of them. 

In the state legislatures the give and take of 
party combat, or the agreement of some of the 
members of one party to do certain things if some 
members of the other party will agree with them 
on certain legislation, should not be ground for stat- 
ing that the majority of the voters cannot express 
its will through them, for the reason that any posi- 
tive violation of public ethics is immediately detect- 
ed by the remainder of the representatives, or the 
executive and his assistant* in minor offices, and 
used for party purposes throughout the general 
constituency of the state. Aldermen are subject to 
the same fire of criticism through local avenues of 
opinion. Executives are subject to removal upon 
charges at any time and hold office but for a short 
period of from one to four years. Legislators con- 
tinue for from one to six years. The people may 
remove any or all of them at the subsequent elec- 
tion and replace them by those more to their satis- 
faction. The Supreme Court helps to maintain 
guarantees of expression which the people origin- 
ally in the fundamental law gave themselves. 

That the men who hold office in either the legis- 
lative, executive or judicial branch of the national 

155 



AMERICA'S T0M0RR0V7 

government are truly representative is evidenced 
by the fact that in nearly every district in the 
United States from whence they have been chosen 
or appointed they are entitled to the respect and 
admiration of their fellow citizens. Members of the 
Senate and House and the governors of states are 
looked up to as far above the average in their re- 
spective communities, not merely because of their 
position but due to their character and attainments. 
In the few cases w^here the contrary is true the dif- 
ference in feeling is the result of disclosures after 
election. As much as their constituents may come 
to differ with them politically, and though they may 
be ultimately defeated for that reason, many thus 
rejected are still regarded highly by their contem- 
poraries and some by the historian. 

Members of the Cabinet have been men of dis- 
tinction and unsullied character, with very rare 
exceptions. Lesser offices in both legislative and 
executive branches are filled by more than usual 
ability. Because of the American love of pub- 
lic honors, individuals often give up more lucra- 
tive vocations to serve the state, and hereafter 
many will be veterans of the great war. Judges of 
every kind of court are frequently revered as hav- 
ing in their lives exemplified the justice they are 
expected to deal. In the United States the ablest 
talent is enabled to reach the highest position, and 
so on down through the different gradations to the 
minor places. If the occupant of the lower office 
has the ability and personality to serve and please 
the people in a large way, he may reach the highest. 

156 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

If tide holder of the highest authority abuses the 
power the people have given him, he may be quickly 
removed. 

Some of the members of the federal Senate and 
House have served for many years. They are 
highly trained experts and wise servants of the 
nation. Having to deal A\ith the making of laws, 
most of the members are lawyers, but a large per- 
centage is composed of business men, with a sprink- 
ling of doctors and representatives of other pro- 
fessions. In the state legislatures and local bodies 
the same average prevails. The civil service laws 
make imperative an efficient corps of employees. 
A great body of postmasters, postal clerks and let- 
ter carriers and the police of large cities like New 
York testify to their character. No men are so 
amenable to public opinion and so frightened by it 
as elected legislative and executive officials. They 
love power and the business of government and, 
therefore, long to retain it. Hence their approach- 
ableness and constant desire to please the voters. 
Often they hesitate to take action in a definite way 
where opinion is seemingly evenly and bitterly 
divided. On the other hand, where there is a strong 
demand for a measure and they believe it to be right 
they lose no time in currying favor with their con- 
stituents and the country by voting for it. 

Representatives like James W. Good, of Iowa, 
working unremittingly to promote good statutes, 
and Senator Henry Cabot Lodge, of Massachusetts, 
with no thought but the common and material good 
of the nation, are among the highest examples of 

157 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the patriotic men who have served in the national 
legislature. And on the Democratic side patient 
and pains-taking members like Champ Clark and 
Senator Oscar W. Underwood have had the esteem 
not only of their own party but that of the opposi- 
tion. In the governorship men of the character of 
Charles E. Hughes and Samuel S. McCall have felt 
their responsibility to the enlightened opinion of 
their time and endeavored to represent and lead it. 
In the Presidency no men could have been more 
quick to respond to the awakened conscience of the 
nation than William McKinley, Theodore Roose- 
velt and AVoodrow Wilson. In the cities mayors 
like William J. Gaynor, of New York, the elder 
Carter Harrison, of Chicago, and James Rolfe, Jr., 
of San Francisco, have been an honor to the con- 
stituents who honored them. 

Are the representatives of the people in the leg- 
islative halls of Congress — communicative and 
kindly disposed toward their fellows, with abilities 
far above the average, elected because popular — 
subject to the sinister influence, power and even 
bribery of special interests? Does there exist in 
Washington a lobby which makes a business of cor- 
rupting those who enact the laws? It is true that 
there are numerous and more or less well paid 
lobbyists who represent only those who send them. 
If they have succeeded in bribing members of Con- 
gress the careful scrutiny of their colleagues and 
the vigilance of 154 representatives of the press, 
who are the eyes of the people in Washington, have 
been unable to detect but very few instances of it 

158 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

during the past quarter of a century. The character 
of the men who are sent by the people to both 
houses would indicate that it has almost never 
occurred. 

Yet every special interest of sufficient importance 
has a representative in the Capital. The farmers 
have sent officials of the Grange to seek legislation 
which would best aif ect those who till the soil. The 
American Federation of Labor has maintained a 
paid lobby for many years, endeavoring to have 
laws passed of advantage to union labor. Those 
in favor of the conservation of national resources 
have maintained a representative and assistants to 
accomplish what they desire. So have the timber 
men. Manufacturers of whiskey, beer and mnes 
have had offices, attorneys and clerks, as also the 
Anti-Saloon League. The National Association of 
Manufacturers and the Builders Association have 
likewise been well represented. Other influential 
attorneys are paid by the railroads. During the 
consideration of a tariff bill and the extended ac- 
tivities of war the number of lobbyists becomes le- 
gion. In these instances more than one industry 
oftentimes employs the same man. Merchants, 
manufacturers, and government employees who 
have special interests of any kind have paid lob- 
byists in Washington. 

Who then represent the people of the United 
States ? Who are disinterested in the special pleas 
of any of the lobbyists and seek the common 
good*? Alas! only the 435 men of tried character 
and ability who swerve them in the House of Eepre- 

159 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

sentatives and the ninety-six similar men in the 
Senate. And the 154 eyes ! 

How does the paid lobbyist work, then, and what 
does he accomplish! With 6,502 farms, a farming 
population of 49,348,883 and a value of farm prop- 
erty of $40,991,000,000 it is not surprising that the 
rural population should through agencies outside 
of the Department of Agriculture seek to gain leg- 
islation of benefit to themselves, such as financial 
credits. With a total of 2,604,701 labor unionists 
who pay dues and are keenly anxious to advance 
their own cause, it is not remarkable that they 
should attempt to influence Congress. And so with 
270,082 manufacturing establishments, 7,707,751 
persons at work in them and a capitalization of 
$18,490,749,000, a total of 1,815,239 engaged in rail- 
roading with a capitalization of $10,796^25,712, 
and the banking interests of the richest nation on 
the earth. 

The duty of the lobbyist is mainly to collect in- 
formation as to what measure of interest to his 
particular client is likely to come up for discussion, 
to ask that a day be set for public hearings, and 
then to send out letters or telegrams to those he 
wishes to present arguments for his side before a 
committee. He also sometimes directs through 
local affiliations the sending of thousands of mes- 
sages to members of Congress, all of the same tenor, 
urging for the general good of the community if 
favored, or blasting as harmful to the public weal if 
opposed. Some of these men are despised by mem- 
bers of Congress as menials. Others are highly 

160 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

respected as eminent legal talent or as authorities 
upon the subjects and interests they speak for. 
There being no clericals, aggrarians or special divi- 
sions according to class in Congress, and each mem- 
ber being the representative of all the people of 
his district, rich and poor, black and white, it is 
perhaps a natural result that each body of citizens 
desiring definite results at the hands of the repre- 
sentatives of all the people by a majority vote 
should have attorneys of their own on the ground 
to supply through the immense avenues of commu- 
nication in this country the information they need 
and to appear for them before committees and ar- 
gue cases. 

So far as I have been able to judge, through a 
quite thorough knowledge of these men, gained 
while seeking news, they are, on the average, men 
of standing and have the unquestioned confidence 
of those they represent. Members of Congress 
listen to them much as judges listen to lawyers. 
An individual representative or senator might have 
sympathy for the law or class pleaded for, as in 
the case of a labor leader sent to Congress; but 
back of all is the elected legislature of the people 
of the United States, amenable to the will and some- 
times to the whim of the people, and therefore de- 
sirous of pleasing them because subject to defeat. 

Some there are who believe that men and women 
are morally corrupt, that the government of the 
people established by those who have suffered from 
the errors of other political forms has become a 
failure because all of its public servants are alleged 

161 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

by them to be dishonest or in the pay of big busi- 
ness interests, and that unless the people are given 
more power than ordained for them in the consti- 
tution they mil be unable to obtain the just rights 
there granted. The fact is that nearly all of the 
women and nine-tenths of the men are good and are 
well disposed toward their fellow men if given half 
a chance, that the government Lincoln described as 
the best that ever conserved liberty on the earth 
never produced more honest, faithful or efficient 
public servants than now, and that the people have 
at the present moment every means of fully ex- 
pressing their will. 

Men and women are what they are and not what 
they sometimes think themselves, or what some 
people sometimes attempt to make them think they 
are. They are inclined toward better things and 
desire to hear and do that which will bring those 
things nearer to them and the community in which 
they dwell and have citizenship. Yet they are some- 
times befogged by those who make statements to 
them that all the world is wrong and that the only 
true way to set it right is by subscribing to the 
ideas and leadership of such persons. 

Sometimes these persons are genuinely desirous 
of bringing about changes in the political complex- 
ion of the state in order to give the people more 
power. But more frequently they criticise the form 
of the government in order that they may be 
tempted to take office. The electorate is told by 
such persons that it is capable of anything. The 
printers' devil of twenty-one in the great modern 

162 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

newspaper is as capable of giving expression to the 
pulsating life of the nation as the editor in chief, 
the young law clerk is as much master of the intri- 
cacies of statute, decision and practice as the head 
of the firm, the newest clerk of managing the Steel 
Corporation as its president, the freshest brake- 
man of running a train as the oldest engineer on 
the road, the newly graduated youth from college 
of directing a great banking house as the leader 
of Wall street, the uninitiated who bets on margins 
as the capable member of the Stock Exchange who 
has been buying and selling for forty years, the 
city lad of sowing, gathering and threshing wheat 
as the wisest farmer, the land lubber of running a 
ship in time of storm as the most weather beaten 
skipper, the old maid of bringing up children as the 
mother of several of them, the entered apprentice 
of laying the compass as the master mason himself. 

The reason why each of these is as worthy and 
well qualified as the other is that all are twenty-one 
years of age. They vote; therefore the judgment 
of one is as good as the other on any abstract or 
technical question that may arise. These men and 
women of twenty-one years and over are born legis- 
lators and jurists! Irrespective of calling, train- 
ing or position in life, the person without experience 
or reflection is endowed Avith as much wisdom in 
deciding an intricate issue before the municipality, 
state or nation as the man who has given to it that 
care which is the result of years of valuable train- 
ing! Was reasoning ever more fallacious? 

All kinds and qualities of men and women have a 

163 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

voice in the government of the United States, but 
the framers of the Constitution designed that they 
should express themselves indirectly and through 
their representatives, so that they might secure the 
wisest and most just laws. If any one will reflect, 
he must acknowledge that the men by whom he is 
surrounded in his locality are not all alike. Some 
have an aptitude for study and thought. Some have 
practical genius. Others center their attention 
upon pleasures of the passing moment. Some are 
industrious and worthy. Others are not. Some 
have great abilities. Others have lesser talents. 
But all, whether trained or not, have more or less 
common sense. That is why all are included in the 
government. 

The best exercise of that common sense lies in 
selecting men who have shown evidence of trust- 
worthiness and more than average ability to rep- 
resent them on the bench, in the legislature or in 
executive office to sift the argument of every side, 
discuss and decide upon matters of common benefit 
which the people as a whole have neither time nor 
mental capacity to discuss and decide. They decide 
upon the sort of men and platform they wish to 
represent them and they leave the details of admin- 
istration and legislation to such men. This implies 
that the people constitute the fourth and most im- 
portant branch of the government, and that they 
must do their duty as effectively as they demand 
that their servants do theirs. It might be thought 
that the people, clamorous for more authority, have 
exercised to the full that which they now have. Yet 

164 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

in 1916 a total of but 18,638,871 men and women, 
black and white, voted in the United States out of 
a male white population, twenty-one years and over, 
of about 27,000,000. 

A few years ago certain reformers declared that 
by giving the people of Pennsylvania more power 
through the primary and direct election of senators 
the result would inevitably be the elimination from 
public life of Boise Penrose, who was said to be the 
worst type of boss. But when the people received 
the additional powers Penrose was reelected by a 
majority of 250,000 votes. The reason was that 
Penrose had proven himself a leader of men, 
whether in legislature or primary. This primary 
system was put forward as a sure method of mak- 
ing it easier for the poor but independent man to 
serve the public in office and to prevent cliques and 
special interests from controlling the decision of 
the electorate. It has had the opposite effect. 
Those contending for important elective office have 
been subjected to greater expense. It has become 
more difficult for a candidate to succeed without 
large personal wealth. 

Under the convention system each party placed 
in nomination its most promising and invulnerable 
leaders in order to defeat the opposition at the 
polls. The result was a Lincoln, a Grant, a Cleve- 
land, a McKinley and a Eoosevelt. In several of 
the states the primary has been used by only a 
small percentage of the total number of possible 
party voters. The selection is thus left to those 
who are more selfishly interested in party affairs. 

165 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

In this respect, it substitutes no good for the con- 
vention system and is much more expensive to the 
tax payers. When Henry Ford, a Democrat, is 
made a candidate for the Presidency in the Repub- 
lican primary in Michigan and defeats the Repub- 
lican contender the system becomes ridiculous. 

At enormous cost special elections have been held 
upon technical matters which might have been left 
to the legislature to decide. To merely place a cer- 
tain issue upon the ballot is not in itself a guaran- 
tee that it will receive thorough consideration by 
the people as a whole. Because of a spirit of dis- 
content pervading the electorate during the past 
decade great fundamental changes have been made 
in the government of the states and nation. When 
this tide reacted for a time a constitution contain- 
ing many wise reforms for the benefit of the State 
of New York was vetoed by the people by a majority 
of half a million votes. The decision of the people 
upon an abstract question is expressive of a tend- 
ency only, and not of such judgment after careful 
and expert consideration by the majority of the 
electorate as has been given to it by its enthusiastic 
advocates. 

Few men attempt to try their own case in court ; 
they employ a lawyer. So it is with the people; 
they elect representatives. To contend that every 
man who whittles a stick at the village store is not 
an expert on a technical public problem which may 
be submitted to him is not evidence of a distrust 
of the people ; it is common sense. He decides such 
questions in a general way and votes for a repre- 

166 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

sentative to enact them specifically. This is the 
secret of the success of this government of onrs 
which has been thus carried through every national 
crisis and given some of the noblest characters of 
history. 

Yet there have sometimes come before the court 
of public opinion those who have prayed that the 
methods of expressing the popular will be changed 
so as to conform more nearly to that of Athens, 
where the entire population was half slave, where 
five hundred of the citizens sitting as a court con- 
demned Socrates to death because he was opposed 
to Paganism; sought to assail Alcibiades, their 
ablest general, for an alleged profanation of the 
popular religious rites when about to attack Syra- 
cuse, condemned him to death, caused his es- 
cape and then his recall; and permitted Miltiades, 
the hero of Marathon, to equip an expedition 
against Paros without telling them what it was for 
and then fined him heavily because he failed. In 
such a small community the people acted upon the 
prejudice of the moment and were jealous of their 
powers. They neither trusted their representa- 
tives nor instituted courts to compel them to obey 
forms of fundamental law which they had pre- 
viously made. 

In the United States an hundred millions of 
people have in their government profited by the 
mistakes of earlier republics and monarchies. They 
have prescribed checks against the suave dema- 
gogue who would pave the way for tyranny by 
smooth words. Expressing themselves with wis- 

167 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

dom upon large issues, and selecting men they can 
trust to make their wishes law, the American 
people have become more informed and more cap- 
able, but have clung tenaciously, for the most part, 
to the principle provided in the Constitution that 
the most talented and respected among them shall 
legislate for them and that they shall not legislate 
for themselves as a whole. 

Is it not a menace to the republican institutions 
of the United States to remove the safeguards for 
the making of wise laws by men best fitted for the 
task? It is not a menace if, in the interests of what 
is termed pure democracy, in a land where the 
people are already more democratic than ever be- 
fore on the earth, and where it is so easy to initiate 
legislation if there is sufficient demand for it, law 
making is taken out of the hands of the legislature, 
chosen because of its competency, at the instance 
of a minority, and placed in the hands of the elec- 
torate as a whole, the entire number of the individ- 
uals of w^hich cannot in the nature of the case decide 
with judgment for the full benefit of the taxpayer 
and the community? 

Through the channels they already have the peo- 
ple have unearthed scandals, legislated so as to 
prevent them in the future, curbed the power of 
large corporations, made great public improve- 
ments, provided a more perfect currency system, 
provided for the development of the military and 
naval establishment of the United States so as to 
win another great war, and elected officials of high 

character to govern them. Is it not a menace to sta- 
les 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

bility of our institutions and even-handed justice if, 
after their representatives have considered a prob- 
lem from every point of view and decided as they 
deemed right, the people have it referred to them 
for direct vote ai a time when the slander and 
clamor may be rampant and perhaps upset that fair 
and wise judgment already made ; especially when 
they have established authority to remove those 
representatives at the subsequent election and place 
others in power who will reverse the decision if 
after the intervening time it has been proven to be 
wrong ? Would it not be a menace to the wise safe- 
guards of life and property provided in the Con- 
stitution, if a loser in a case decided by judges se- 
lected by the people because of fitness shall be per- 
mitted to befog the issue and have it referred to the 
voters upon the most superficial grounds? 

Those who would make a democracy out of the 
Kepublic are apt to be men of great egotism and 
selfishness. In intense desire to accomplish their 
own -will they chafe at restraints of law and seek 
to remove them by honeyed words to the electorate 
so that they may gain more and more power, pun- 
ish their enemies and subvert the very rights for 
which they may have in wide generalizations been 
so vigorously contending. In the past they have 
frequently succeeded by this means. At other times 
they have not hesitated to take up arms for what 
they declared to be the common good but what was 
in reality an attempt to gain sole power. Peistratus 
is an example. 

The evil of the initiative, referendum and recall 

169 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

is best exemplified by such a measure as that pro- 
viding for the complete preparation of the nation 
for war. After the declaration of war against Ger- 
many in 1917 there was considerable opposition to 
the draft and to this and that means of compelling 
all citizens by conservation of food and effort to 
assist to their utmost in combating the common 
enemy. Upon the recommendation of the executive 
branch of the government, the national legislature 
made an exhaustive analysis of conditions and then 
made a thorough effort to place the country in posi- 
tion to win the conflict. Expert advice of military 
authorities was received. Those in Congress and 
among the people who were opposed to so great a 
military establishment were regarded as pacifists, 
mollj^coddles and traitors. Those who sought the 
utmost preparation were in their turn regarded by 
some absurd idealists as attempting to make this a 
militarist nation second only to Germany itself. 
Feeling ran high. 

Those in the minority, after their defeat in Con- 
gress, through twenty-five per cent, of the electo- 
rate might, under a referendum, have brought on a 
special election and had the subject debated 
over again in the midst of clamor and ex- 
citement and without the digestion of expert 
evidence by competent and representative minds 
at first hand. The large number of those who 
are perfectly -walling to sacrifice to the utmost so 
long as they do not have to do so personally might 
have brought disaster to the United States and the 
world for generations. Had a sufficient number, 

170 



MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 

under the same democratic system, initiated meas- 
ures to bring about immediate peace at that time 
when the country needed to be prepared, as against 
the decision of the President and the Congress, the 
situation would have been inconceivably worse. And 
under this system the justices of the Supreme Court 
who upheld the draft law might have been subjected 
to a recall for doing so. It is unthinkable that the 
people would have decided adversely, but the air 
would have been filled with rancorous debate, time 
would have been lost from concentration upon the 
aim of successful warfare, and public funds would 
have been wasted. Then not only the minority but 
all citizens would have ultimately suffered. 



171 



CHAPTER Vn 

MENACES TO LIBERTY 

"Protection, therefore, against the tyranny of the magistrate 
is not enough; there needs protection also against the tyranny 
of the prevailing opinion and feeling; against the tendency of 
society to impose by other means than civil penalties, its own 
ideas and practices as rules of conduct on those vi^ho dissent 
from them; to fetter the development and, if possible, prevent 
the formation of any individuality not in harmony with its ways, 
and compel all characters to fashion themselves after the model 
of its own. There is a limit to the legitimate interference of col- 
lective opinion with individual independence ;_ and to find that 
limit, and maintain it against encroachment, is as indispensable 
to a good conduct of human affairs as protection against political 
despotism." — John Stuart Mill. 

THE framers of the Constitution of the United 
States determined to secure the blessings of 
liberty to themselves and their posterity. They 
guaranteed to every state in the Union a republi- 
can form of government, declared that the right of 
the people to be secure in their persons, houses, 
papers and effects against unreasonable searches 
and seizures should not be violated, and stated that 
the enumeration in the document of certain rights 
should not be construed to deny or disparage others 
retained by the people. Those who followed them 
in the congress they created provided that the right 
of citizens to vote should not be denied or abridged 
by the United States or by any state on account of 

173 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

race, color or previous condition of servitude. It 
is not likely that either the original makers or their 
successors contemplated new forms of attempts to 
abride the liberty of the citizens, which would arise 
Avith the development of the ci^dlization they helped 
to establish. Nor is it probable that they fore- 
saw that the instrument they gave America in 
order to bring about the benefits named in the 
preamble would be so misconstrued in some in- 
stances as to prevent the very rights stipulated 
therein. 

Nevertheless there has manifested itself, along 
with the tremendous industrial progress of the last 
half century, and with the desire to provide ma- 
terial means for betterment and to do way with 
that which is a harm to the individual, a tendency 
to take away the right of a man to better himself 
in his own way and to make it the province of the 
community to do so; to deny rights of happiness 
and independence to some unless conferred by the 
organization which the greater number have sworn 
allegiance to; to stifle initiative, individuality and 
ambition in the interests of what is termed the 
common good; to deny the suffrage to masses of 
intelligent persons with life and property to de- 
fend, in spite of a fulfillment by them of the stipula- 
tions of the Constitution thereto; to increase gov- 
ernmental agencies for investigating and regulating 
the conduct of private business without full regard 
to basic economic law; to establish a state within 
the state in the interests of an organization outside 
of the state ; in short, to establish under the name 

173 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and form of the public weal a tyranny of the 
majority. 

No monarchy, oligarchy or aristocracy in the his- 
tory of man ever inflicted such severe punishments 
upon the individual, and always to what was said 
to be his advantage, than a majority acting in com- 
mon to compel him at the point of the sword, the 
rack or the law to believe the principles acceptable 
to or decreed by the greater number of a commu- 
nity, country or empire. With cruel and oftentimes 
inlmman treatment they deprived the minority of 
the right to think and act as it pleased, even when 
otliers were not thereby harmed, and of happiness 
and life. The Greeks banished and put to death 
those who particularly disagreed with or displeased 
the majority. The greater number of Romans, in 
their allegiance to Paganism, impaled and threw 
to the lions the Christians. Then, at the height of 
its power, the Roman church, with a majority of 
adherents in Christendom, invented refinements of 
cruelty for those who differed with it, burning 
them alive at the stake, torturing them with hot 
irons, breaking them open or crushing them on the 
rack for the good of their souls and because they 
did not subscribe to the latest vagaries of credulity. 

Protestants against this church, when they gained 
the power of a majority under Calvin in Geneva 
and Knox in Scotland strung up by the thumbs and 
slit the tongues of those who did not attend church 
or indulge in what to them seemed innocent amuse- 
ment. Servetus suffered for his individuality at 
the stake. The Puritans in Massachusetts placed 

174 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

in prison or the stocks and led to the whipping post 
those who did not wear black or otherwise failed 
to obey their strict regimen. This also for the good 
of those punished and the glory of God. During the 
revolt of the peasants in Luther's time nothing was 
sacred and nothing free from the wrath and de- 
struction of the majority in a given locality who 
considered that it should become the master. De- 
spite the reforms that were steadily being made 
between 1789 and 1793, in the latter year the greater 
number of the people of France, taking the law in 
their own hands, guillotined or otherwise murdered 
no less than 1,200,000 man, women and children 
who did not believe as they did. Cromwell over- 
threw in the name of better government one tyr- 
anny in order to establish another. So did the Bol- 
sheviki in our own day in Russia. 

The government of the United States is an at- 
tempt to safeguard the people who dwell within its 
borders from abuses at the hands of a majority. 
It has provided in its fundamental law that the 
rights and interests of the minority shall be pro- 
tected. Throughout a century and a half of national 
life these rights have been preserved and developed 
by a people jealous of them. But prior to our 
entrance into the great war, which caused a relin- 
quishment of all desires to the aims of the state, 
there had been a growing tendency to regulate the 
life of the individual according to the pattern of 
the entire electorate, to circumscribe the opportun- 
ity of every man to use his life as he would and 
for what he considered to be his benefit so long as 

175 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

he thought the similar rights of others were not 
interfered with. 

This tendency is revealed to a certain extent by 
those opposed to the use of intoxicating liquors in 
any form except for medical purposes. Men and 
women had been using fermented grape and grain 
as intoxicants duriug thousands of years. The 
Bible has several references to the subject. "Be 
not among those who drink wine immoderately," 
it says. In Egypt, Greece, Rome, Northern Europe, 
ancient Mexico and Peru, in our own time, it has 
been a habit of the entire human race to seek stim- 
ulation and excitement. And the abuse of the habit 
has been assailed for quite as long a period. The 
Prohibitionists who have become so prominent in 
American politics have much that is reasonable in 
their contentions. They regard alcoholic liquor as 
a poison. They declare the effect of the drinking 
of it is to gradually undermine the health, cause in- 
ebriety and habitual drunkenness, destroy the sta- 
bility of the home, produce weak and badly nour- 
ished children, distort the notions of the brain and 
lead to inunorality and crime. Hence they have 
legislated that their general use shall be as effec- 
tually stopped as that of opium or cocaine, and that, 
incidentally, the liquor traffic shall, as seems to 
them, no longer corrupt legislatures and debauch 
the public conscience. 

But the Prohibitionists are among the extrem- 
ists, who, while right in principle, have been often 
mistaken in the practicality of their aims. If every 
man who drank of whiskey, wine or beer became a 

176 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

drunkard thereby, their position would be unassail- 
able. But what of the Frenchman, the Italian, the 
German, the Englishman who enjoys a glass of beer 
or wine in his home ? Physicians disagree as to the 
effect of the mild use of liquor. Some say it aids 
digestion, others that it is as insidious as arsenic. 
I am inclined to agree with the latter opinion. But 
there is a tendency on the part of those who have 
come to this conclusion to impose through a major- 
ity of the people their will upon others to such an 
extent as to forever prohibit the mildest use of 
liquor, thereby interfering with the personal con- 
duct of the individual in his enjoyment of a habit 
which rs deleterious and dangerous in the abuse 
and not the temperate pursuance of it. Prohibitive 
law in the face of a weakness which has survived 
the tests of time may not entirely obliterate it, and 
this leads to an hypocrisy which lessens respect for 
law. The demand for industrial efficiency, the de- 
velopment of health and sanitation, the broaden- 
ing of the field of amusement, and the force of 
opinion have accomplished more in the direction 
of abstinence and sobriety than all the political 
extremists. 

Ice cream soda is really the national drink. The 
reason for this is that the crossed American stock 
is so vital it does not require further stimulant 
than tea and coffee. But the uncrossed stock, with 
its lesser vitality, it may be, does need mild stim- 
ulation. The constitution having been amended to 
prevent their having it, it would be a menace to the 
full play of individuality which Americans have 

177 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

always enjoyed if prohibition should be a step in 
general reformation by which cigarettes shall be 
suppressed, the stage and moving picture screen 
be censored by the narrow minded, and written and 
spoken expression be interfered with. If prohibi- 
tion does in the long run actually prohibit, it will 
be the first time in history that morals have been 
adequately and permanently imposed by law. 

Of greater present importance to the liberty of 
the toiler and of each independent citizen is that 
attitude of union labor toward non-union labor by 
which it seeks to prevent any from working in an 
industrial establishment unless he agrees to con- 
form to the prescribed mandates of the union, and 
that attitude of the employer by which he refuses 
to deal with employees if members of a union. Self 
interest is justifiable and the right of laborers to 
organize should not be denied ; but the practice by 
which a majority of union men in a plant sometimes 
seek to forcibly prevent independence of speech and 
action is to be reprehended in the name of genuine 
freedom. By organization wage earners secure ad- 
vantages in condition, pay and time from their 
employers. Sanitary surroundings in factories, the 
prevention of child labor, extra pay for overtime 
and a living wage should be granted and sanctioned. 
But the United States is founded upon the princi- 
ple of liberty for every man within the law as a just 
right to which he is entitled. It is an infringement 
of that liberty when a laboring man, who for rea- 
sons of his own does not desire to join a union, is 

178 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

maltreated by the majority of employees who are 
union men, when able by experience and capacity 
to secure service and wages otherwise, simply be- 
cause he refuses to accept membership with them. 

It is not less a tyranny and an attempt to set up 
a state within a state when trade unionists use other 
than peaceable measures to attain their demands 
from their employers, and also seek in this way to 
prevent non-union men from taking their places, as 
roused as they may be and as just as their griev- 
ances often are. They should find means in the 
give and take of industrial contention, in peaceful 
strike, or within the law to seek that redress for 
their grievances which the electorate would no 
doubt be glad to grant if well founded. Should men 
and women not receive the wages they are entitled 
to they should be given them, but that can be deter- 
mined by reason alone, and the justice of it cannot 
be proven by maiming men, burning the plants of 
employers or using dynamite. 

Nor can labor unionists appeal to the general 
public as fair when they resort to the method of 
regulating the speed of all in a given work to the 
capacity of the slowest man and thereby padding 
the profits of their labor by compelling those who 
employ them to take more men in such a job than 
are needed. Wlien they do so act they prove that 
they comprise a selfish element in the community 
which is seeking to prevent honest competition and 
efficiency and to interfere with the laws of supply 
and demand in order that they may receive greater 
benefits than otherwise. If a citizen does not de- 

179 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

sire to purchase the product which bears a union 
label it is his affair; and if a number of such citi- 
zens seek to prevent others who have no direct in- 
terest in the controversy from buying that product, 
it is an infringement of the liberty of every person 
to buy and sell in the market as he pleases. 

Union men should have the right to make their 
scale what they please and to withdraw from work 
whenever they prefer, if their demands are not 
granted, and the employer has the same right to 
employ other men in their places if he chooses, for 
one has the free right to sell his labor and the other 
has the free right to buy labor ; but in a controversy 
of peaceful kind the employer and employee should 
be compelled by law to submit their honest differ- 
ences to a board of arbitrators so that approximate 
justice may be done. Many employers desire that 
their employees organize so that it may be more 
satisfactory to deal with them through collective 
bargaining, but this should not deprive the minor- 
ity of non-union laborers in a plant of the right 
of peaceful labor. Nor should unionists be allowed 
to picket outside of retail shops and warn passers- 
by from entering the place because non-union men 
or women are employed therein. 

The formation of a separatist labor party, hav- 
ing as its object the control by unionists of the 
local, state or national government, in order that 
the resulting minority might be forced to accept its 
dictates, would be a danger to the country, if effec- 
tive, because of the ascendency of one element. 
Such movements, however, have never been vic- 

180 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

torious, except temporarily and locally, and have 
usually caused a reaction from worthy objects 
which would otherwise be obtained from either or 
both of the older political organizations. Among 
these is equal pay for men and women who do 
equal work as wage earners in industry. 

Passing from the aims of the trade unionists 
which are mild and for the most part beneficial, the 
Syndicalists, Industrial "Workers of the World and 
Socialists advance much further and seek to estab- 
lish a tyranny of not only the majority but the 
mediocre as well. They propose to set up classes 
in America, which have never existed since the gov- 
ernment was established and cannot thrive where 
every man may become a millionaire or ruler, and 
where every millionaire or ruler is a laboring man. 
The primary assumption upon which the pleas of 
these extremist organizations are based is that 
labor creates value. If labor alone creates value 
it is entitled to its full return in the entire profits 
of production. Proceeding upon this premise, the 
Snydicalist argues that he should by stealth or 
whatever underhanded means may seem to him to 
be necessary wreck the plant of his employer in 
order that out of such a warfare he may gain more 
and more of the value of the product ; the I. W. "W. 
that he will precipitate industrial revolution by 
violent means in order that he may gain the same 
ends ; the Socialist that the means of socially neces- 
sary production and distribution shall be owned 
and operated in common. From this the latter 

181 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

draws the conclusion that the result will be the 
elimination of what he is pleased to term ** exploi- 
tation by capitalism, ' ' that all will be treated alike 
and that at last industrial and political justice will 
prevail. 

But the assumption as to value is not justified by 
fact. Labor does not create value. If it did, the 
same amount of labor of like kind would produce 
an exactly equal result. But a man may work eight 
or ten hours during a day in a gold mine, a saw mill 
or a cheese factory, and his exertion and wage be 
the same but his product entirely different. That 
which gives the value to the ore, the planed lum- 
ber and the cheese is its worth, regulated by supply 
and demand, in the markets of the world. A 
person may scoop placer metal out of a stream and 
give very little labor to the task, but the gold is not 
less valuable for that. Neither are diamonds, one 
of which may be mined with comparative ease and 
yield more value than many years spent by an 
individual in milking cows. Should the alchemist 
after his search of centuries find the secret of arti- 
ficially producing the most precious of the metals 
he would cheat himself in the end, for by that very 
means he would cheapen and make it as common 
dirt. 

What a man sells to his employer — all the dec- 
larations of Congress notwithstanding — is not that 
which will make the product valuable, but some- 
thing which in itself has value — a day's labor. 
Every man is worth three dollars a day from his 
neck down; above that is a matter of brains. It 

182 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

may be that without labor gold could not be mined 
or fish be caught, but it may be urged as well that 
the labor by itself is worth three dollars per day 
while the gold by itself is worth its value in the 
markets of commerce, whether extracted by pick 
or shovel or machinery and that the fish are val- 
uable because people desire to eat them. 

A man without financial means, believing he can 
find a gold mine, borrows money, sets out for Mex- 
ico, spends several years in hardships, adheres by 
strong character to his purpose, meets another who 
has a claim, makes a contract with him to share 
the profits, returns to his starting place, with his 
organizing ability gets others to risk their savings, 
thus gains sufficient capital to unlock the secrets 
of the earth, forms a corporation, selects those ex- 
perts to run it who also have their price in the 
labor market, sees that legal rights are protected, 
goes to the mine, gives his ability to the new enter- 
prise and employs laborers who have not the ini- 
tiative or ability to make more than a dollar or two 
a day, uncovers a bonanza, and as his share makes 
a million while those who have invested with him 
make tremendous profits. 

The laborers who took the employment because 
it was nearest at hand and gave them three meals 
and a bed now come forward and state that it was 
their labor that produced the gold and that they 
are entitled to the full value of it ; they desire that 
the result in wealth shall be divided equally be- 
tween them. Such a plea is repugnant to the spirit 
of the United States because it would rob him who 

183 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

has initiative, thrift, honesty, industry and frugal- 
ity of the rewards of his enterprise and skill and 
give them to those who supply only their labor to 
the equation. 

It is also a part of the plea of the three organi- 
zations named that there is such a hobgoblin as 
** capitalism" which, employing labor, exploits it 
for its own selfish ends. Yet capital is nothing 
more or less than accrued earnings. Any person 
who saves the rewards of his toil of no matter what 
kind, instead of spending them for what would de- 
light him for the time being, is a capitalist. AVhen 
he and others combine their surplus or capital to 
make a sufficient sum to develop a given industry 
they employ labor at its value in the local market 
and do not "exploit" it by giving it the means of 
earning its daily bread. If that labor is more skilled 
and therefore more scarce, they are compelled to 
pay a higher price for it. The more skilled and 
valuable the laborer becomes the greater is his 
emolument until, as in the case of the head of the 
Steel Corporation, he received $1,000,000 a year. 
The latter is no less a laborer than the man who 
makes three dollars per diem. 

The combined earnings of the past, running up 
into the billions or a few hundred dollars, and in- 
vested in stock companies, receive a certain divi- 
dend or return, give employment to great numbers, 
and help to make products which receive their value 
because of the demand for them in the market, due 
to their worth and their suppl}''. The idea that all 
the laborers should share equally in these returns 

184 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

instead of the investors or capitalists, and that ac- 
crued earnings when used to give employment to 
them is really used to exploit them is an obvious 
absurdity; for any one of the commonest laborers 
may by the same ambition, initiative, skill, frugal- 
ity and foresight invent something new to satisfy 
the wants of mankind or invest his savings or cap- 
ital in that which will make practical the invention 
of another person. 

To place industry in the hands of the greater 
number of those having the least skill would stifle 
growth. The unenterprising are usually jealous of 
the skillful, and the enterprising are always anx- 
ious to excell. The majority of the unenterprising 
would, under the three systems named, appropriate 
the rewards of the skillful to themselves, and the 
enterprising, robbed of the large rewards of indi- 
vidual achievement, would lose the motive for in- 
centive. With that gone the world would become 
stagnant, for while industries already started might 
be taken over and owned and operated in common 
the formation of new enterprises would be pre- 
vented ; it is only by ambition for large reward on 
the part of the individual that they do start. 

Nothing has ever been achieved by all men in 
common. Every step forward in history has been 
accomplished by the individual. The mind of the 
human working upon any problem has solved it. 
Leadership is an expression of personal genius. 
In battle it is the mind of the general that controls 
and he wins with the help of his soldiers. They 
cannot share their glory in common; the private 

185 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

soldier may distinguish himself and become a gen- 
eral ; to say that all shall direct and receive a sim- 
ilar reward is foolish. In the eighth century in 
Tibet, King Muni Tsan-po being determined to raise 
(or raze) all his subjects to the same level, decreed 
that there should be no distinction between the rich 
and poor, humble and great. He compelled the 
wealthy to share their riches with the indigent and 
helpless and make them their equals in respect of 
all the conditions and comforts of life. He repeated 
this experiment three times; but at each venture 
he found that all returned to their former condi- 
tion, with the exception that the rich became still 
richer and the poor even poorer. 

When Karl Marx attempted to prove that the 
guiding force of history is economic determinism 
he took another way of saying that economic con- 
ditions are the underlying bases of social, indus- 
trial, political and military action. But '*it is the 
mind that makes the man and our vigor is in our 
immortal soul." With strength of blood to back 
mentality, the men of initiative, ability and person- 
ality have overcome or led others to overcome old 
economic conditions and have made new ones. In- 
dustry or anything else in the hands of the mediocre 
many is repugnant to the spirit of this land which of 
all others has progressed most by means of the 
intrepid spirits. Plagues, scarcity of crops and 
prevalent poverty have often affected the course of 
history, just as conditions which made for health, 
abundance of food and wealth have done so in an 
opposite direction ; but man's life on the planet has 

186 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

been most affected by his thought, and that has 
been determined by that individual genius which 
has thriven alike in spare and full times. 

Humanity in a physical sense has remained about 
the same throughout the historic ages, modifying 
to the greatest degree the economic circumstances 
surrounding him when transfused. He has never 
been long subject to these economic circumstances 
unless he has resigned his initiative to mediocrity 
and ignorance, as in the Middle Ages, and he has 
progressed most when he has by dint of ably di- 
rected energy so determined conditions as to leave 
room for originality. 

Attempts have been made to prove to the people 
at a time after the greatest industrial advance in 
the history of the world that some of the men who 
have become very wealthy in that advance have 
made their gains by methods that have sought to 
stifle competition, and therefore to do away with 
the means by which they accomplished the results 
attained. These attempts have brought about a 
more critical opinion and amendments to the laws 
calculated to prevent monopoly and injustice ; but 
they have also, along with the tendency to diminish 
the rights of the individual in other ways, sought 
to secure too strict governmental methods for pry- 
ing into the citizen's private affairs. At public 
hearings conducted with acrimony by legislative 
inquisitors, or manipulated so as to place at a dis- 
advantage those who have in order to curry favor 
with those who liave not, has been seen a willing- 
ness to go too far in the direction of state super- 
is? 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

vision of all business and actually menace that 
liberty of work and achievement which has been 
held so dear in America and has helped to make 
the nation so great. Constantly recurring investi- 
gations of matters which have been thoroughly dis- 
cussed and remedied worries and harasses industry 
and militates against the free exercise of business 
initiative and independence. 

The same tendency toward deprivation by the 
majority of the rights of the minority is seen in 
the hesitancy for so long a period in so extending 
the ballot to women as to give them an equal part 
in truly representative government. In some states 
they already have the right of the suffrage, and 
so far have used it Avith more enthusiasm and de- 
votion to civic duty than the men ; but. for the rest 
it has been found necessary to resort to federal 
amendment. There is no just reason why they 
should not have the vote universally, subject only 
to the same restrictions as imposed upon men. 
Women have intelligence, therefore they think and 
form judgments. Men have only to remind them- 
selves of their own mothers and sisters and mves 
to bear witness to that fact. 

The contention that women, when granted the 
franchise, would become less wives and mothers 
thereby is as much as to say that when men take 
two minutes of a year to mark a ballot they are on 
that account less husbands and fathers the re- 
mainder of the time. It is quite as ludicrous to 
contend that the female sex is less conservative than 

188 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

the male, and that the stability of our institutions 
would be unsafe in their hands. Indeed, the con- 
servative guardian of many a man's purse is his 
helpmeet who attends to the practical details of 
his life while he is away at his labor. She has at 
least as much time for thought upon local and na- 
tional problems, is even more interested in and 
sympathetic toward the well being of the children, 
and has a way of looking at things, which, added 
to that of the men, is as essential to the stability 
of the state as to that of the home. And with so 
many more women now engaged in the vocations 
of active life as the result of the great war and with 
income and property to defend, they should have 
an equal voice in the government. To deny mature 
intelligence of either sex the right of free expres- 
sion at the ballot is subversive of liberty. 

Through an attempt to establish a tyranny of the 
majority in the Southern states, the negro has been 
deprived of the rights vouchsafed to him by the 
fourteenth, fifteenth and sixteenth amendments to 
the Constitution of the United States. The result 
of that policy has been demonstrated in the burn- 
ing at the stake when only suspected of rape, and 
the hatreds and injustices engendered have been 
shown in such a case as that of Leo Frank, the Jew, 
who was hung up, cut down and his dead face 
stamped upon by a prejudice crazed mob. In the 
South the negro has few rights anyone is bound to 
respect. 235 were lynched in 1917. In many places 
he is now compelled to walk in the street when a 

189 



AMERICA'S TOMORROVy; 

white person passes by on the sidewalk. Wlien a 
member of the staff of the New Orleans Picayune 
years ago, I was wont to listen to serious argu- 
ments between my associates on the question of 
whether the negro is a human being or a lower 
animal. 

It is true that after the shackles of slavery were 
removed the negroes, incited by Northern carpet 
baggers, perpetrated outrages of government in the 
Southern states which are still felt in the debts in- 
curred. But in the fifty years that have intervened 
the blacks have had more opportunities than they 
formerly had, and should be given equal rights un- 
der the law at the ballot, though perhaps their com- 
mon sense would influence them to refrain from 
attempting to hold office for a time. The English 
have in the West Indies given the world a lesson 
in just treatment of the negro which this land 
would do well to emulate. 

The subversion of the fundamental rights of the 
blacks is harmful to the whites themselves in mak- 
ing them tyrannical and unjust, and causes this 
government of free men to appear hypocritical in 
guaranteeing rights without reference to race, color 
or previous condition of servitude, after four years 
of war to make possible those guarantees, and then 
denying them for the sole reason of race, color and 
previous condition of servitude. Liberty is for the 
human race as a whole and should be as wide as 
the earth. It cannot be denied without reacting 
upon those who deny it. Such liberty does not in- 
clude social equality or miscegenation, for that is 

190 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

an individual matter, but the right of equal pro- 
tection under the laws and of free expression at 
the ballot should be withheld form none. 

Even war for the sake of democracy should not 
have been made to serve the purpose of taking from 
the individual that liberty of thought and action 
which is indespensible to real equality. So long as 
men are not traitors to the government by any deed 
which would give actual aid to the enemy, they 
should have been allowed the full freedom of speech 
guaranteed by the Constitution. Particularly is 
this so of the press, the palladium of the public 
welfare, which, if silenced by any systematic at- 
tempt of well meaning officials to arrogate to them- 
selves authority, would make possible in tliis land 
a dogmatic and narrow rule. As Socrates long ago 
said, "Many a man with justice and right on his 
lips commits injustice and wrong, but no doer of 
right ever was a misdoer or could possibly be." 

An effort was made after the opening of the con- 
flict with Germany to suppress all criticism of the 
government in its conduct of the war. This was 
largely a result of the dangerous view that the 
President should be supported in a crisis no matter 
what he might do, so long as he had decided it to 
be to the best interests of the country to do it ; not 
that what he did was not exactly right, but that 
Congress was made in the Constitution to be a use- 
ful and intelligent check upon any arbitrary or 
ill considered act of the Chief Executive. For that 
reason it was given control of the purse and the 

191 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

right of impeacliment. Greater than the Presi- 
dent, in every instance a man of distinction of 
character; the Presidency, the highest office in the 
world; the American flag, S3^mbol of liberty; and 
the United States, with a wonderful destiny, are 
the Lord Eternal and His justice and righteous- 
ness. When our nation has crumpled into the dust 
of the ages and its very memory has passed away 
forever, His attributes mil still prevail. 

And so, if this country of ours Avould prosper 
and succeed, it must do what every other state and 
individual must in order to permanently enjoy hap- 
piness; it must treat all with fairness. If it does 
not, it will find that *'the judgments of the Lord are 
just and righteous altogether," and that the injus- 
tice we mete out to others will at some future time 
come back to us in the same measure. If we estab- 
lish any portion of the proceedure of a tyranny 
within our borders, it will be none the less tyranni- 
cal and undemocratic if done in the name of liberty 
and democracy. Our actions as a nation should be 
measured solely by the standard of justice and 
right. We should abide by the spirit of the words 
of the Caliph Omar: *'By Allah! he that is Aveakest 
among you shall be in my sight the strongest until 
I have vindicated for him his rights ; but he that is 
strongest will I treat as the weakest until he com- 
plies with the laws." 

In order that the utmost liberties of every citizen 
may be respected, a wise tolerance should be exer- 
cised toward those millions of foreign extraction 

192 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

whieli from the beginning of the European conflict 
in 1914 were more or less sympathetic toward Ger- 
many in its contest mth the allies of that time, and 
after onr entrance into the struggle in April, 1917 
gave every evidence by expression and active par- 
ticipation on our side that they were in no sense 
pro German but thoroughlj^ pro American. When 
in history before this period did a people, made up 
of all races and divided in sentiment because of 
their respective motherlands being engaged in a 
mighty conflict, with such little disturbance and 
with such great enthusiasm turn as a unit from' 
peace to war? Was there ever a more convincing 
proof of the stability of republican institutions ? 

As misjudged as the senseless utterances of a 
few hot heads and as deserving of the utmost rigors 
of the law as any traitors may have been, the old 
German-American and Irish-American social and 
benefit organizations had been called into exist- 
ence for the reason that the folk of German descent, 
like their brethren the French- Americans and the 
Italian- Americans, loved to cherish the memory of 
their fatherland, the land of Luther and Frederick 
the Great and Bismarck, the land of song and beer 
and the Ehine; because those of Irish blood had 
remained loyal in their memory to the Emerald 
Isle, the "auld sod," the home of their ancestors, 
which they and their fathers had left to find op- 
portunity in a free land. 

Neither the Germans nor the Irish had reason 
to be ashamed of the memory of their fathers, and 
they felt that there was no wrong in their organi- 

193 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

zations to cherisli that memory. Certainly tliey 
were loyal only to the memory. No nationalities 
have contributed so much in population and al- 
legiance to the United States as these. In the Civil 
War there were engaged on the side of the North 
and against slavery and disunion 250,000 Germans 
and 150,000 Irishmen. No peoples so quickly 
sought naturalization. None became true Ameri- 
cans more rapidly. It became increasingly dif- 
ficult for naturalized Germans to influence their 
children to learn the German language. In the 
early recruiting in Chicago after relations had been 
severed with Germany the largest number of vol- 
unteers were of German descent. 

However, statistics more clearly reveal facts 
which show how important the loyal German- Amer- 
icans and Irish- Americans have been to the United 
States. According to the last Census there were in 
1910 in this country 13,515,886 foreign born. Of 
these Germany contributed 2,501,333, or 18.5 per 
cent ; Austria-Hungary, 1,569,973, or 12.8 per cent ; 
and Ireland, 1,352,251, or 10 per cent; together 41.3 
per cent. Of the 32,243,282 people of foreign white 
stock in the United States in 1910 — they or either 
parent born in a foreign land — 25.1 per cent, were 
German, 14 per cent, were Irish, 6 per cent, were 
Austrian and 2 per cent, were Hungarian, a total 
of 47 per cent. 

The conclusion that of the total population of 
the country at the present time much more than 
a majority is of German, Irish, Austrian and Hun- 
garian descent, near or remote, may be gathered 

194 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

from the fact that the Germans and Irish alone 
made up 28.5 per cent, of the foreign born popula- 
tion in 1910; 40.8 per cent, in 1900; 50.3 per cent, 
in 1890 ; 57.2 per cent, in 1880 ; 64.7 per cent, in 1870, 
and 70 per cent, in 1860. As late as 1910, after fifty 
years of immigration and assimilation, there were 
8,282,618 white persons in the United States hav- 
ing Germany as their land of direct origin or who 
had at least one parent with it as the place of 
birth. 

At the same time there were 4,504,360 persons 
having Ireland as their land of nativity or who had 
at least one parent born there, 2,001,559 Anstrians 
of like condition, and 700,227 of Hungarian stock. 
In that year there were 2,752,675 (mostly Jews) 
who or at least one parent of whom haled from 
Russia, 2,332,442 from England, 659,663 from 
Scotland, 2,098,360 from Italy, and 292,389 from 
France. 

The preponderance of German and Irish immi- 
gration becomes even more evident when it is con- 
sidered that to the foreign born population 
Germany contributed 30.5 per cent, in 1860; 30.4 
per cent, in 1870; 29.4 per cent, in 1880; 30.1 per 
cent, in 1890; 27.2 per cent, in 1900, and 18.5 per 
cent, in 1910; England contributed 10.4 per cent. 
in 1860 ; 10 per cent, in 1870 ; 9.9 per cent, in 1880 ; 
9.8 per cent, in 1890 ; 8.1 per cent, in 1900, and 6.5 
per cent, in 1910 ; Scotland contributed 2.6 per cent, 
in 1860 ; 2.5 per cent, in 1870 ; 2.5 per cent, in 1880 ; 
2.6 per cent, in 1890; 2.3 per cent, in 1900, and 1.9 
per cent, in 1910 : Ireland contributed 38.5 per cent. 

195 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

in 1860; 33.3 per cent, in 1870; 27.8 per cent, in 
1880; 20.2 per cent, in 1890; 15.6 per cent, in 1900, 
and 10 per cent, in 1910 : Italy contributed 0.3 per 
cent, in 1860; 0.3 per cent, in 1870; 0.7 per cent, 
in 1880; 2 per cent, in 1890; 4.7 per cent, in 1900, 
and 9.9 per cent, in 1910: France contributed 2.6 
per cent, in 1860 ; 2.1 per cent, in 1870 ; 1.6 per cent, 
in 1880; 1.2 per cent, in 1890; 1 per cent, in 1900, 
and 0.9 per cent, in 1910 : Russia and Finland con- 
tributed 0.1 per cent, in 1860; 0.1 per cent, in 1870; 
0.5 per cent in 1880; 2 per cent, in 1890; 6.2 per 
cent, in 1900, and 12.8 per cent, (mostly Jews) in 
1910. 

And yet the peoples that have given so much of 
the blood of the nation throughout sixty years 
were ridiculed by those who had given compara- 
tively little, or were mlling to be unjust toward a 
very large body of the people having the utmost 
loyalty to the United States. When it is reckoned 
that in 1850 the total population was but 23,191,876 ; 
that of this number 3,628,808 were negroes ; that in 
1790 the number of inhabitants was 3,929,214 ; and 
that prior to 1850, throughout the entire national, 
confederation and colonial periods, there was a 
very considerable influx of Swedish, Norwegian, 
French, Dutch, Bavarian and Saxon, as well as 
British blood, it must be accepted as a truth that 
this country does not OAve special obligation to any 
particular race for its foundation in population, 
and that the fullest protection, liberty and toler- 
ance of speech and thought should be accorded to 
all who have proven their unqualified loyalty by 

196 



MENACES TO LIBERTY 

giving their utmost of blood, treasure and hope to 
the flag. 

To oppress these German, Austrian and Hun- 
garian citizens and treat them as though recently 
enemies merely because born in lands at one time 
at war mth the United States, or childfen of those 
born in those countries, and especially to impugn 
their patriotism or deny them equality of expres- 
sion and action is un-American and a menace to 
the liberties extended to them when they were wel- 
comed to our shores. 

No free government can arouse the full enthu- 
siasm of its people which does not vouchsafe to 
each citizen those inalienable rights which it in its 
fundamental law promised to him, which does not 
protect him in the fruits of his toil and genius, per- 
mit him the free exercise of thought and action so 
long as they do not interfere with the safety or 
liberty of any other man, ensure him or her equal 
participation in the choice of those who are to rep- 
resent him or her in political affairs, provide im- 
partial justice and order under the laws, and pre- 
vent classes from arising within the state to menace 
the individual rights of any person. The evils 
which menace ours are of a minor and temporary 
nature and will gradually disappear through public 
education and the ballot. He who has not faith in 
America views its free institutions, its broadening 
life and its marvelous possibilities from an ant hill 
instead of a mountain. 

197 



CHAPTER VIII 

ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

"One danger to the country is the extreme radical who de- 
mands the millenium here and now and who is very intolerant 
of the views of others who may differ from him as to ways 
and means. The coequal danger is that of reactionaireism. The 
path of America's true progress lies through the middle ground 
of a wise and sound liberalism." — Philander C. Knox. 

THE late war has wrought great changes in the 
thought of the country concerning the method 
of the government of the United States in the utili- 
zation of all of its powers and forces to bring about 
the one single aim of its participation in the con- 
flict — the destruction of the German military power 
— ^and in no other way does this change so manifest 
itself as in the attitude of the people toward the 
idea of unification of political machinery. 

It must at once become apparent to the most 
casual observer that forty-eight separate state legal 
and administrative systems within one nation are 
incongruous, make a hodge-podge of detailed sta- 
tutes to obey, provide extraordinary opportunity 
for lawyers, and cause enormous and unnecessary 
expense to the taxpayers. So flagrant is this weak- 
ness that corporations and persons doing an inter- 
state business must be constantly mindful of con- 

198 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

flicting regulations. And with the different states 
constantly making additional laws commercial men 
find it increasingly difficult to keep up with the 
changes that are made. 

Penalties vary greatly in most of the conunon- 
wealths. Laws governing the principal activities 
of men, women and children in all the relations of 
life are so diverse as to be ludicrous. Divorce is 
exceedingly difficult in several states and decidedly 
easy in others. Kegulations in regard to legiti- 
macy of birth, the age of consent, marriage, parent 
and child, estates, property, contract, insurance and 
stock companies are as diverse as the number of 
the separate political entities of the Union. Many 
of the commonwealths maintain their own bureaus 
for the investigation of corporations and insurance, 
and some for scrutinizing every sort of business, as 
in California. Necessarily the enforcement of these 
requires heavy burdens upon property and indi- 
viduals subject to tax. 

In the early history of the government of the 
United States the important cities and common- 
wealths were widely separated by the difficulty of 
transportation from one to the other. Two days 
were required to travel from New York to Albany 
and a week from Baltimore to Boston. The packet 
post was slow in moving and a month was needed 
to get news in New England of important happen- 
ings in Kentucky. The Confederation had proven 
a dismal failure, after a six years' trial of the ar- 
ticles binding it together, because it provided no 
means of overcoming the jealousies of the states 

199 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

toward the federal government and each other. 
The Constitution then enacted nicely adjusted the 
powers of the national and state governments in 
enumerated particulars, but left open the question 
of whether a separate commonwealth might secede 
from the Union. That issue was decided at Appo- 
matox after four years of conflict. It was then 
determined that the federal powers should be para- 
mount. But in the basic instrument of the govern- 
ment of the United States the way had already 
been left open for the extension of the federal juris- 
diction over all in matters pertaining to all. 

National authority had been enumerated in par- 
ticulars which would make a de facto nation, as in 
laying and collecting taxes, borrowing money on its 
own credit, establishing rules of naturalization and 
bankruptcy, coining money, founding post-offices 
and post roads, protecting authors and inventors, 
raising and supporting an army and a navy, pun- 
ishing felonies and piracies on the high seas, de- 
claring war and constituting federal tribunals of 
justice. Even more general power in the hands 
of the nation was implied in the stipulation that 
Congress should regulate commerce with foreign 
countries and among the several states, provide 
for the coimnon defense and general welfare of 
the United States and "make all laws which shall 
be necessary and proper for carrying into execution 
the foregoing powers and all other powers vested 
by the Constitution in the government of the United 
States or in any department or officer thereof." 

As all the powers other than those enumerated 

200 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

were implied to be vested in the nation, and as the 
enumerated denial of powers to the states was 
solely such as to prevent interference with the 
national authority, and as no reserved powers were 
placed in the hands of the states, it must be con- 
ceded that it was the purpose of the framers of the 
original document that the federal government 
should have the right to enact general laws, not 
merely for the protection of its national existence, 
but in all matters where they should be generally 
applicable to the people as a whole. 

Further evidence that the denial of powers to the 
states was not intended merely as a means of pro- 
tecting the integrity of any federal powers what- 
ever, is to be found in the provision that no state 
should pass any law impairing the obligation of 
contract. That the federal government, so far as 
the original and unamended document is concern- 
ed, was exceedingly chary of its powers is demon- 
strated by the stipulation in the Constitution that 
no state should without the consent of Congress 
lay any imposts or duties on imports, except such 
as might be necessary for executing its inspection 
laws, that the net produce of all duties and imposts 
so laid should be for the use of the treasury of 
the United States, and that, even then, such laws 
should be subject to the revision and control of 
Congress. 

This was the Constitution as adopted by the 
fathers of the Eepublic, September 17, 1787. 
Writing in the Neiv York Packet of January 25, 
1788, to offset bickerings between the states that 

201 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

had so recently been colonies, Madison says: **If, 
in a word, the Union be essential to the happiness 
of the people of America, is it not preposterous to 
urge as an objection to a government, without which 
the objects of the Union cannot be obtained, that 
such a government may derogate from the import- 
ance of the governments of the individual states? 
"Was, then, the American Revolution effected, was 
the American Confederacy formed, was the precious 
blood of thousands spilt, and the hard-earned sub- 
stance of millions lavished, not that the people of 
America should enjoy peace, liberty and safety, but 
that the government of the individual states, that 
particular municipal establishments, might enjoy 
a certain extent of power, and be arrayed with 
certain dignities and attributes of sovereignty? 

"We have heard of the impious doctrine in the 
Old World that the people were made for kings, not 
kings for the people. Is the same doctrine to be 
revived in the New, in another shape — that the 
solid happiness of the people is to be sacrificed to 
the views of political institutions of another form? 
It is too early for politicians to presume on our 
forgetting that the public good, the real welfare 
of the great body of the people, is the supreme ob- 
ject to be pursued; and that no form of govern- 
ment whatever has any other value than as it may 
be fitted for the attainment of this object. Were 
the plan of the convention adverse to the public, my 
voice would be. Reject the plan. Were the Union 
itself inconsistent with the public happiness, it 
would be, Abolish the Union. In like manner, as 

202 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

far as the sovereignty of the states cannot be recon- 
ciled to the happiness of the people, the voice of 
every good citizen must be, Let the former be sac- 
rificed to the latter." 

In spite of this logical reasoning, the jealous 
states insisted upon the tenth amendment to the 
Constitution, which was adopted by Congress Sep- 
tember 25, 1789, providing that *Hhe powers not 
delegated to the United States by the Constitution, 
nor prohibited to it by the states, are reserved to 
the states respectively, or to the people. ' ' The pre- 
sumption of preponderence of power was thereby 
diametrically changed from the federal to the state 
governments, and it was not until the decisions of 
the Supreme Court, the Civil War and the exigen- 
cies of modern commerce and industry that the 
nation gradually waived aside much of the pre- 
pondering authority of the commonwealths consti- 
tuting the Union. 

Had the states themselves, acting in concert, 
formed a federation, right would have been with 
them ; but the people were the authority, they alone 
formed the new and greater government. ''We the 
people of the United States, in order to form a more 
perfect unioii, establish justice, insure domestic 
tranquility, provide for the common defense, pro- 
mote the general welfare, and secure the blessings 
of liberty to ourselves and our posterity, do ordain 
and establish this Constitution for the United States 
of America." These same people have the right, 
if they will, to so construe the tenth amendment as 
to take advantage of the alternative, **or to the 

203 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

people.'' How shall "the people" express them- 
selves if not through their institutions? And are 
not their representatives in the federal House and 
Senate, elected by their direct vote, a part of those 
institutions? Indeed, are not **the people," as 
stated in the preamble and the tenth amendment, 
not meant to designate the people of the entire 
nation thus constituted, and not of a single state 
or even a federation of states ? Through their rep- 
resentatives they may make general laws applicable 
to them all and for their benefit as a whole. They 
may do so under a proper construction of the tenth 
amendment. Certainly they may do so by its re- 
peal. 

Assuming that the federal government has the 
absolute power to legislate for the entire people 
upon subjects which concern them all alike, and 
beyond such powers merely as help to maintain 
itself, what rights should it take unto itself which 
it has not yet exercised, and what powers should it 
subtract from the states which they now exert ? It 
should take all authority from the separate com- 
monwealths except the police power, carrying out 
in detail the suffrage, and such stated powers as 
are conferred in the original Constitution. The 
national government has the right and should ar- 
rogate to itself the function of making the common 
and statute law uniform throughout the United 
States. It may be contended that the Supreme 
Court has construed the Constitution differently 
and to mean that the federal authority in general 
matters outside of those specifically enumerated 

204 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

shall apply only to interstate relations, but if the 
court did so it went beyond the wording of the 
basic instrument itself and upheld the tenth amend- 
ment. Ecclesiastical courts for centuries contrued 
and misconstrued the Gospels, but today such au- 
thority as those Gospels exert over the minds of 
men rests within their terminology alone. 

Congress should enact a uniform divorce law 
along lines similar to that of the Code Napoleon, 
which gave as causes adultery, extreme cruelty, per- 
petration of a felony, malicious and willful deser- 
tion and mutual consent. Recognizing marriage to 
be a contract, the code sought to make its abroga- 
tion subject to the same mutuality with which it had 
been entered into. It was thought that the wife 
would not consent to resign legal claim to her hus- 
band, or vice versa, unless they had agreed upon 
substantial justice between them and for their chil- 
dren, if any. As there are said to have been few 
cases where one of the principals did not object, 
the provision proved a conservator of marriage in- 
stead of a loosener of its ties ; yet it rendered justice 
where both agreed to disagree. Morality is not 
enhanced by preventing a man and woman from 
remedying a fundamental mistake. 

The national government should also prevent 
child labor in the remotest locality, under heavy 
penalties, and should compel every youth and 
maiden, white or black, to complete a free grammar 
school education. It should enact a uniform cor- 
poration law and another covering every subject 
of commerce. Each act which comes within legal 

205 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

phases and is outside of the police power of the 
states should be legislated upon by Congress. This 
implies a new code of law, simple, readable by all, 
applicable in every state and territory. It does not 
mean the calling of a constitutional convention, for 
the reason that the tenth amendment may be con- 
strued differently or repealed. In fact the original 
fundamental document has called for a sacrifice of 
the practice of the states for more than a century. 
The result has not been attained heretofore and 
there has not been a great demand, though an ob- 
vious need, for it because of the distractions and 
distrusts of localities. 

The police power of the states may be said to 
comprise all local legal regulation and restraint. 
It has been defined as the right of the state or state 
functionary to prescribe regulations for the good 
order, peace, health, protection, comfort, conven- 
ience and morals of the community which do not 
encroach on a like power vested in Congress by the 
federal constitution or which do not violate any 
of the provisions of the organic law.* It has been 
stated to include education.^ Specifically, it in- 
cludes the regulation of the conditions of the dis- 
tribution and sale of food, the liquor traffic, the 
sale of tobacco and drugs, the manufacture and 
handling of inflammable articles, fire prevention, 
sickness and epidemics, hospitals, drainage, water 
supply, bodies and cemeteries, garbage and waste, 
gambling, prostitution, immoral literature, enter- 

1 Chambers vs. Greencastle, 138 Ind., 339, 351. 2 Barbier vs. 
Connolly, 113 U. S., 27, 

206 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

tainment and amusement, building regulations, 
smoke and dust, protection of the public through 
signs and warnings, paving, dockage, pawn brokers, 
peddlers, licensing of physicians and dentists, birth, 
marriage and death records, local education, bill- 
boards, blasting, lighting, insane persons, sabbath 
observance, extermination of noxious animals, col- 
lection of debt, prevention and detection of crime, 
public meetings, hunting of game, nuisances, and 
peace and order generally. 

If the authority of the several states were lim- 
ited by the repeal of the tenth amendment to the 
constitution to this exercise of the police power, a 
new meaning, not resting upon a forced construc- 
tion of that document, would be given to the words 
of Chief Justice Marshall in the case of McCullough 
vs Maryland: ''A constitution, to contain an slg- 
curate detail of all the subdivisions of which its 
great powers will admit, and of all the means by 
which they may be carried into execution, would 
partake of the complexity of a legal code, and would 
scarcely be embraced by the human mind. The 
government which has a right to do an act, and has 
imposed on it the duty of performing that act, must, 
according to the dictates of reason, be allowed to 
select the means; and those who contend that it 
may not select any appropriate means, that one 
particular mode of effecting the object is excepted, 
take upon themselves the burden of establishing 
the exception. Let the end be legitimate, let it be 
within the scope of the constitution, and all means 
which are appropriate, which are plainly adapted 

207 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

to that end, which are not prohibited, but consist 
with the spirit and letter of the constitution, are 
constitutional." 

Now that the American people are being solidi- 
fied more and more and the distinctions of race are 
passing away, especially as the result of participa- 
tion in the war against Germany, and now that New 
York and San Francisco are one by telephone and 
telegraph and all parts of the country are other- 
wise accessible to each other, they require a body 
of easily understood and universally fapplicable 
law, just alike to rich and poor, conserving the in- 
terests and independence of capital and labor, white 
and black, alien, naturalized and native, with proper 
ease and celerity of judicial procedure. The time 
for a great law giver is at hand, and that law giver 
is the Congress of the sovereign people of the 
United States. This country does not need an in- 
dividual law giver, or vague generalities placed 
upon the statute books and called law, but a body 
of legal provisions which will give specific justice 
to every man, woman and child. Federal legislation 
for the war is a proper introduction to this larger 
legal activity of the national government. 

In order that the utmost efficiency, the lowest cost 
compatiable with conditions, and good wages may 
be maintained, it is essential to the best interests 
of the general public, holders of stocks and bonds, 
and the employees of the great public utilities that 
those agencies of communication be regulated 
rather than owned by the federal government. 

208 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

The entrance of the country into the world war 
and the seizure by the government of many national 
utilities early developed an opinion quite favorable 
to their permanent national ownership, and again 
agitated the question of the taking over by munici- 
palities of their gas and electric lighting plants. 
The acquirement by the nation of the railroads was 
accepted gladly in many minds as a new departure 
which might lead to the acquisition of the coal 
mines, oil fields and water power, so that the sources 
of vast wealth to be made out of such public service 
might remain with the people. 

But the principal of the disadvantages of gov- 
ernment o^vnership soon became apparent. Service 
competition, between parallel railroad lines was 
stifled, with resultant diminution of the old esprit 
du corps and the desire to simultaneously get new 
business and please the traveling public. Conven- 
iences were diminished while rates were greatly 
increased. Many thousands of investors in these 
properties became alarmed at the prospect of ulti- 
mately losing a stable income. It began to be seen 
that the enterprising spirit which had done so much 
to make the industrial and commercial as well as 
the political America of our day possible might be 
lost in the taking over permanently for peace times 
of such utilities, because of carelessness of em- 
ployees, inertia of economic movement, dullness of 
trade which had been used to the stimulus of the 
development of new localities by the established 
but privately controlled means of public communi- 

209 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

cation, and lack of appreciation of individual re- 
quirements. 

It may be contended that government OAvnership 
would remove the chief menace of future concen- 
tration of capital, but it is likewise true that the 
people of the country are too apt to idealize a con- 
dition of more direct ownership by themselves, 
thinking it would abate evils of inertia to which 
human nature is subject when not in competition. 
Postal, telegraph and telephone communication are 
simple as compared to railroad control. Under the 
policy of regulation through government commis- 
sions of experts, appointed for the purpose, how- 
ever, all the benefits of government control are 
maintained without any of the disadvantages, and 
the vast number of holders of railway stocks and 
bonds are permitted to participate in the owner- 
ship. 

It may be urged by the superficial that the o\\mer- 
ship by the government of all public utilities, as 
different as it is from common control by those 
engaged in a given industry, would mean the grad- 
ual taking over of all the means of production and 
distribution, and that when this had been accom- 
plished there would no longer be any labor as such 
engaged in any industry outside of the government ; 
that the rate of wages, high or low, would then be 
regulated by Congress, as in the case of civil and 
military employees at the present time ; that crime 
would disappear with the abolition of poverty ; that 
men and women would participate in toil on a like 
footing; that temperance and chastity would be- 

210 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

come well nigh universal with greater self-respect ; 
that the ideal of socialism would be the ultimate 
result by other means. 

Such a suggestion presupposes a revolution in 
the facts of human life which is hardly to be ex- 
pected merely in order to satisfy this idealism. 
Government ownership by those agencies of pro- 
duction and distribution which do not fall within 
the classification of public utilities would hardly 
be tolerated by a people intent upon the mainte- 
nance of their individuality and independence. And 
direct ownership of such agencies of commerce as 
the railroads would hardly be more agreeable to 
the electorate as a whole, which has a vital interest 
in keeping up cheap and efficient travel, or to labor, 
the condition of which must rise or fall in the long 
run concomitantly with the general prosperity. 
But closer federal control over a unified and na- 
tionalized railway system is required. To state in 
the Clayton law, enacted by Congress, that labor is 
not a commodity does not make it less subject to 
the insistent demands of political economy. If 
railway fares are increased by the government con- 
stantly in order to pay higher wages than the con- 
dition of the road permits, the purchasing power 
of such wages wall be decreased thereby because of 
an additional cost of marketing production gener- 
ally. 

As vast and multifarious as has been the problem 
of adequately preparing for victory in the war with 
Germany, that of meeting the conditions to follow 

211 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the conflict has been even more complex. Millions 
of men have returned from the front and entered 
into competition with each other. Other millions 
which have been engaged exclusively in war pro- 
duction have been compelled to find other avenues 
for their energies. It has been found difficult to 
maintain rates of wages made abnormally high by 
scarcity of labor. Because of the high prices re- 
sulting from inflation and the decreased purchasing 
power of the dollar of the laborer, he found it diffi- 
cult to return to the low wages paid in cer- 
tain occupations before the conflict began. For 
such a problem there is one solution which will 
have more efficacy than any other. That lies 
in a protective tariff high enough to cover the 
difference between the cost of production here and 
abroad. 

The energies of the United States, stimulated by 
war, are turned to production for a greater domes- 
tic and foreign trade, and American initiative is 
finding the means of securing the market for it; 
but the standard of living and wages in the United 
States, as shown by our entire economic history in 
times of peace since the Civil War, can be main- 
tained only by tariffs on foreign made goods whicli 
are produced where wages are lower and living is 
cheaper. Protection of this sort is all that the term 
implies. It not merely nurses and foments the 
growth of infant industries, but maintains giant 
commercial enterprises which are different merely 
in the degree of their capacity to employ and pro- 
duce. 

812 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

The war has made labor more respected. In 
order that all working men and women may enjoy 
the full benefits of the new life about them now that 
liberty has been preserved, there should be a work- 
ing day of eight hours and perhaps ultimately of 
seven hours for all, and a right on the part of 
every one to enjoy the sabbath. In many offices in 
the large cities the shorter hours are already ob- 
served, employees reporting for work at 9 a.m and 
quitting at 5 p.m., with an hour for luncheon be- 
tween. This is becoming quite as practicable as 
eight hours. With industry developed to higher 
efficiency than is possible where a few unions 
attempt to regulate the speed to the slowest and, 
as in a department store, where the wages are so 
low as to make effort irksome, as much would be 
accomplished in the shorter time. 

If this seems premature, it should be called to 
mind that we are living in the twentieth century 
and that, in accordance with its spirit, men must 
have a larger reward for and more enjoyment of 
their toil. The custom of working frail women 
twelve hours daily in a hospital because they are 
nurses and it is an eleemosynary institution is not 
less hard on them than on those employed in fac- 
tories. Nor is the employment of women ten hours 
on their feet each day as saleswomen, or little chil- 
dren on farms and in sweatshops, less enslaving if 
done in the name of maximum of output. 

Furthermore, each person under the sun should 
have the benefit of a Sunday free from care. If it 
be necessary for the particular business to be con- 

213 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ducted on the sabbath, every employee should have 
another day out of the seven for rest instead. In 
the scriptures it is impressed upon man that he 
shall have that much time for rest ; and the infer- 
ence is that it does not make the slightest differ- 
ence whether Saturday, Sunday or Thursday shall 
be called the sabbath so long as on one day out of 
the seven he shall be allowed to leave whatever task 
he may be performing and find amusement or cul- 
tivation or repose; though it is more convenient 
that all enjoy the sabbath on the day generally 
adopted throughout Christendom. The seven-hour 
day may not come immediately, due to the slow 
adjustment of the new spirit to the mechanism of 
industry, but one day of rest out of seven practic- 
ally is and should by law be within the reach of all. 

Another nationally applicable principle is that 
the immigrant who enters the borders of the United 
States should be capable of assimilation with the 
Caucasian race. A higher standard of living pre- 
vails here than in oriental countries and it should 
be upheld. Japanese, Chinese and Hindoos should 
be prevented from immigration, except as duly ac- 
credited students. If allowed to come in any ap- 
preciable numbers, they would destroy the dignity 
and independence of American labor. All foreign- 
ers, European or otherwise, especially since the war 
has ended, should be prevented from entering our 
ports if diseased or permanently injured. But the 
comparatively recent requirement by Congress of 
an educational qualification from all immigrants in 

214 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

order to restrict their immigration is contrary to 
the spirit of American institutions. 

The movement inaugurated chiefly at the behest 
of the labor organizations was unfair, for the rea- 
son that the great majority of our fathers could 
sign their names with only a mark when they landed. 
Character is more important than ability to read 
and write. The latter is soon acquired in order to 
meet the necessities of life in this free land. The 
movement was also directed against the immense 
immigration from the Catholic countries of South- 
ern Europe just before the great conflict began. 
This, too, is unreasonable, for Catholics make fes 
good citizens as any other element in the commun- 
ity. The country needs the South European 
peoples, and will be at a disadvantage if it is lack- 
ing in its labor in the new era. For a century 
and more the practical peoples of Northern Europe 
furnished the backbone of America. Now should 
come the imaginative peoples. The two forces 
amalgamated will make a grander and greater na- 
tion in the future. 

As free schools and a free state are synonymous, 
it follows that it is to the best interests of the people 
of the United States that their children, the citizens 
of the future, be taught in such schools. No insti- 
tution, religious or otherwise, should place its own 
interests abo\e those of the commonwealth as a 
whole by the establishment of a separate system 
of education. Under the guise of tolerance this 
free nation should not go so far as to permit a very 

215 



amp:rica's tomorrow 

large body of its people to lose the benefits of un- 
prejudiced instruction and fair incentive in the pur- 
suit of knowledge, more than it permitted the Mor- 
mon church to practice what the latter claimed to 
be the God-given right of polygamy. A wise toler- 
ance, indeed, is to compel all to receive the advan- 
tage of non-sectarian schooling, just as under our 
legal system the fundamental liberties of each citi- 
zen must be respected. 

As the public schools of the country are free and 
are supported by the taxpayers as a whole, the 
Roman Catholic Church, which in 1916 educated 
1,500,000 pupils in parochial institutions, as worthy 
and decidedly intelligent as its instruction is, should 
lean more to the common system of which its inter- 
est should be and is a part, as has always been its 
allegiance otherwise. It cannot with reason be con- 
tended that the moral and religious training pro- 
vided by the Roman church in its schools is superior 
and therefore a necessity ; for the kingdom of God 
is universal and no single organization, creed or re- 
ligion has a monopoly of His mercy, grace or wis- 
dom. What the children of the country need to be 
taught in the moral field is love of God and simple 
righteousness, in accordance with the ideals of 
the age, and such teaching is daily imparted, by 
example or directly, by the six hundred thou- 
sand teachers in the free schools throughout the 
land. 

Seven millions of Methodists and six millions of 
Baptists are content with the system of popular 
and unbiased instruction provided by the people 

216 



ONE LAW FOR THE UNION 

through their government, as are all other Protes- 
tant denominations, and the two millions of Jews 
in the country. Why should not the Roman Catho- 
lics also be so satisfied? If the Socialists, making 
the absurd contention that this is a capitalist-ridden 
land, sought to establish schools of their own so as 
to teach their children in harmony with their views, 
would the Roman Catholics be favorable to them? 
If not, why should the citizens as a whole be favor- 
able to the maintenance, especially when taxed for 
the purpose, of any particularist system of educa- 
tion in a nation where all men are free ? In Novem- 
ber, 1917, the State of Massachussetts decided by a 
large majority to do so no longer. 

The Constitution guarantees tolerance to all re- 
ligions, but is silent upon the question of whether 
any church, Catholic or Protestant, shall educate 
its citizens apart from the general system to suit 
its owTi ends. However, the spirit of the free school 
institution, from its inception three hundred years 
ago until now, is opposed to such distinction. 

It should be unnecessary to say that I am not 
opposed to the parochial school system because it 
is Catholic. No person who has known the good 
priest and sister of charity, and recognized the fact 
that the Roman Catholic Church is the church of 
the poor, as I have, can deny that it is doing an 
incalculably great good. Nor can it be said that its 
communicants are not so public-spirited as those of 
other denominations. But the province of any 
church is outside the domain of non-sectarian edu- 
cation, which is meant to impart established knowl- 

217 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

edge; religion is a matter of individual belief and 
opinion; principles of right conduct are tactitly 
agreed upon by all and are taught in the free 
schools. Roman Catholics, particularly^ the Irish, 
who have never been outdone in love of this land, 
should be willing to share in the common lot of the 
great republic which provides the best school sys- 
tem the world affords. 

Is it to be doubted that with a simple and uni- 
versally applicable code of civil and criminal law 
throughout the United States and its possessions 
that conditions would be inestimably bettered ? The 
reforms suggested as possible under such a code 
are but a small portion of those which might be 
brought about within a generation. This nation 
should be a correct model for an entire world to 
follow in a world federation, and to make it so it 
must not hesitate to see itself as it is. As Lloyd 
George remarked, "A nation which is not virile 
enough to hear the truth about itself is not a first 
class power.*' 



218 



CHAPTER IX 

THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

"A nation, like a man, hides from itself the contemplation of 
its final day. It frames laws and constitutions under the delu- 
sion that they will last, forgetting that the condition of life is 
change. Very able modern statesmen consider it to be the grand 
object of their art to keep things as they are, or rather as they 
were. But the human race is not at rest; and bands which for 
a moment, it may be, are restrained, break all the more violently 
the longer they hold. No man can stop the march of destiny." 
— Draper. 

THROUGH the force of circumstances, in order 
that genuine civilization and order and liberty 
may be promoted, it is more than possible that the 
United States will be forced to exercise on this 
continent a greater amount of authority than in the 
past and perhaps ultimately to take over the work 
of enabling all the territory from Behring Strait 
to the Panama Canal to enjoy the benefits of its 
governmental ideal. 

Out of the upheaval precipitated by our entrance 
into the world war against Germany are evolv- 
ing conditions, including the continuance of a num- 
erous citizen army, which are awakening the Amer- 
ican people to a realization of a destiny to maintain 
peace and development near at home and to expand 
into new fields of endeavor. The nation no longer 

819 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

shudders at carnage and give and take. It seeks 
even greater progress. The Philippines and Porto 
Rico, seized by armed intervention from Spain, 
and Hawaii and Alaska have accustomed us to the 
idea of retaining sovereignity over other lands. 
America is awakening from the drowsiness caused 
by much wealth, and as the result of stress and 
privation is feeling a vigor which demands that it 
ever move extensively achieve. 

While outward events have much to do with this, 
the principal causes lie within. Until late in the 
nineties the easily tilled and rich soil of the present 
territory of the country had not been taken up. 
Homesteads were to be had for the asking from a 
generous and far-sighted government. Those 
farmers who had found difficult the earning of an 
increment from their holdings in the states along 
the Atlantic seaboard north of Maryland sold them 
and journeyed westward to gain a fresh start, in 
many cases leaving beyond them exhausted soil. 
Irrigation and drainage opened to cultivation still 
further areas which were soon taken by such farm- 
ers and by immigrants. Then the South found new 
and more intensive agricultural and industrial life. 
And finally the demand for land became such that 
there was a return to the abandoned farms of New 
England. 

Meanwhile population had been increasing until 
it aggregated an hundred millions. These in- 
habitants had become more and more repre- 
sentatively American, intermarrying and mould- 
ing into one people. Stimulated by the pressure of 

220 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

life in the more thickly settled regions, the Ameri- 
can spirit was thus stimulated to greater expansion, 
with the result that 300,000 who had been citizens 
of the United States emigrated to and found new 
opportunity in Canada. Because of the imperative 
economic causes at the basis of this movement, they 
are still answering the call of the venturesome and 
hazardous to strange lands. Across the southern 
border, in Mexico, the same spirit evinced itself, 
though not to equal measure, in advancement into 
the rubber plantations and mining country. Dis- 
turbances there and a great war temporarily halted 
this new manifestation of the century-long trek of 
the American pioneer into the wilderness, but the 
desire was only heightened by the barrier. 

Pulsating with life and determined to carry along 
with them the civilization they express, the Ameri- 
can people should find a way to fulfill that natural 
destiny which was in the mind of Seward when he 
said in the Senate in 1851 that the nation should 
extend its boundaries to continental limits. It is 
inconceivable that they should remain standing still. 
No people in the past has done so. If they would, 
they cannot stifle the energy that urges them on to 
do the work for which they have been fitting them- 
selves for centuries. 

It is now the dawn of their greatest day, and 
they must take advantage of that incentive which 
the root feels when it bursts forth into grass and 
flowers, which the youth of all lands have experi- 
enced when they left the old hearth and haunts to 
seek new achievement and bring honor to the mother 

221 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

who bore them, which the men of Macedon were 
animated by when they advanced throughout 
Greece and to a greater Hellas, which inspired the 
ancient Romans when they expanded over the penin- 
sula and then permanently influenced the world, 
which forged England, Scotland and Wales into 
the British state and empire, which united the com- 
ponent parts of France into such a strong nation- 
ality as gave the Revolution and Napoleon. 

Because they have intention of gaining per- 
manent power and territory in neither Europe, 
Africa, South America nor Asia, they should not be 
opposed to spreading out in those lands nearest at 
hand in Canada, vaster in area than the entire 
United States, and in a turbulent little country 
thrice the size of the Lone Star State which is as 
alluring to the eye and the senses as it was to the 
men of Cortez when they first gazed upon it four 
hundred years ago. 

If the aggressive American people merely sought 
to conquer rich and progressive lands and add them 
to those they already possess, they would be guilty 
of the covetous intention of expropriating to them- 
selves the wealth of their neighbors. But closer 
relations with Canada would come about only 
through the good will and comradry engendered by 
American and Canadian sacrifice in a common 
cause. This should be augmented by the utmost 
reciprocity of tariff agreement. The interests of 
the Dominion and the United States will become 
more and more one on both Atlantic and Pacific 

222 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

oceans. They are separated by a great distance 
from the motherland of both. Force of arms 
against the other on the part of either we now 
know would never bring this about. It would come 
through an invitation and an agreement, each Ca- 
nadian province immediately becoming a state in 
the Union and each district temporarily a terri- 
tory. 

With the British Empire as our ally in a world 
war, such a result could never be. But with a peace- 
ful dissolution of the empire it might become a 
reasonable outcome for both. The Cambridge 
Modern History says ^ that **in every field of gov- 
ernment, whether in legislation, justice, adminis- 
tration, or foreign policy, the great Dominions have 
assumed an increasing control over their own af- 
fairs. Clearly and fully the mother country has 
been throwing upon them the burden of their o^Yn 
destiny, which they in turn have promptly taken 
up with courage. Yet the logical and at one time 
not unexpected result of such a policy — the gradual 
dissolution of the empire — has not followed." Yet 
the Dominions urged claims at Versailles which 
indicated such an outcome. Should a dissolution 
ever ensue and should the United States and Can- 
ada by mutual consent unite, they would become the 
protectors of the American continent from aggres- 
sion east or west or south. Together they should 
maintain liberty, order and law in North America. 

An expanse extending from Atlantic to Pacific 
and from the border of the United States to the 

~iVol. XII, p. 650. 

233 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Arctic, comprising 3,745,574 square miles, Canada 
would have no adequate means of defending its 
population of 5,371,315 in the event of any ultimate 
disintegration of the empire of which it is a part. 
It had no navy at the beginning of the great war 
and computed its war strength of all ages at not 
more than a half million men. Its good British and 
French blood is uninfused. The Canadians are not 
a people in the sense that all have been who have 
been built up through many centuries from a trans- 
fusion. The hundred thousand Indians, descend- 
ants of the original possessors of the land who 
gave way before the prowess of the whites, are 
merely tolerated, as here. Themselves conquerors 
of a new territory, the Canadians would be assimil- 
able into the United States by every tie of lan- 
guage, religion, political system and race. 

Assuming that it would be for the inestimable 
benefit of the Americans and Canadians to unite in 
a greater United States, what opportunity for ex- 
pansion of activity would the Dominion provide 
for our people? Its resources are almost as varied 
as those of this country. It has nine provinces and 
five districts. Three of the provinces are about 
the size of the State of Texas, two of them a third 
larger, one as extensive as Nebraska, another like 
West Virginia and another similar in extent to the 
small State of Delaware. Two of the districts are 
twice as large as Texas, one with about the same 
number of square miles as that state, and another 
more extensive than California. Numerous rivers 
give fertility. Nine lakes are more than an hun- 

224 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

dred miles in length, and thirty-five are over fifty 
miles long. 

The climate is varied. In this respect the Pacific 
slope is like Western Europe. Only Ungara and 
Labrador are very chill because of the iceberg-laden 
current which sweeps along the Atlantic shore. 
South of the Gulf of St. Lawrence the temperature 
ranges from 40 degrees for the year to sixty degrees 
in the summer. In Quebec and Ontario the winters 
are brilliant but cold, and in the heated season from 
60 to 65 degrees fahrenheit. On the plains, where 
there is clear and bracing atmosphere, the climate 
is especially beneficial to those suffering from lung 
trouble. Even in the Mackenzie river valley, near 
the Arctic Circle, the average temperature is not 
less than 55 degrees. 

The entire land is a hunter's paradise. Animals 
are varied among them. Musk ox, caribou, moose, 
pronghorn antelope, Virginia blacktailed and mule 
deer, bison, elk, grizzly, black and cinnamon bear, 
timber wolf, coyote, puma, fox, lynx, beaver, otter, 
marten, fisher, wolverine, mink, hare and rabbit. 
Turkey, grouse and geese abound. Eagles are nu- 
merous, but for the most part birds are of the same 
kind as found in the United States and migratory. 

The forest wealth is the greatest in the world. 
Canada is destined to rank as the most important 
of the wheat-producing countries. Already it yields 
about one-fifth as much as here. Good samples of 
this staple have been gro^vn at latitude 61.52 de- 
grees, at St. Simpson on the Mackenzie river, more 
than eight hundred miles north of Winnepeg and 

225 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

a thousand miles from the boundary of the United 
States. A quarter of a million bushels of oats are 
harvested annually. BuckAvheat is produced plen- 
tifully for the national dish of griddle cakes and 
maple syrup. Vegetables of all sorts are to be 
found everywhere. In the entire Dominion are 
2,019,824 horses. Cattle, sheep, sMdne and poultry 
are abundant. Indeed, because of its immense dairy 
resources, Canada has been called the ''land of 
milk and honey. ' * 

In the manufacturing industries wood pulp, lum- 
ber and canned salmon have the chief place, though 
pig iron and steel have of late become important. 
Large bituminous coal deposits are to be found in 
British Columbia and Nova Scotia. The land is the 
"World's chief producer of asbestos, nickel and co- 
rundum. Copper, lead, silver and all the important 
metals are mined in the Rocky Mountain region. 
Vast tracts of virgin soil, like those which inspired 
the builders of the western half of the United 
States, are available and given away by the gov- 
ernment in homesteads of 160 acres each. Edu- 
cational institutions are thoroughly distributed ; 86 
per cent, can read and w^'ite. Order is well main- 
tained. In the Canadian Northwest seven hundred 
mounted police or ''Riders of the Plains" keep such 
peace in the remotest mining camp as was not 
known in the days of the vigilance committee of 
'49. Two great transcontinental railways span the 
continent, one having its western terminus at Van- 
couver and the other at Prince Rupert. 

It may be that in history President Wilson will 

236 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

receive the chief credit for having brought about a 
mutual defense in a common cause and an ultimate 
political unification of the two English-speaking 
nations of this continent. This would be the happy 
conclusion of a century of more or less pleasant re- 
lations. Prior to the Civil War complete commer- 
cial reciprocity between the two countries reigned, 
but afterwards Congress, in resentment of the 
aid given the Confederacy by England, stopped all 
that. Canadians, too, had their ire aroused by the 
Fenian raids. The two peoples drew away from 
each other gradually in homogeniety of interest, 
and in the Taft administration reciprocity with this 
country was rejected by the Canadians. Then, 
through the efforts of John A. Stewart, of New 
York, the two governments were brought into more 
friendly relations by a celebration of the hundredth 
anniversary of the conclusion of the war of 1812. 
Finally, after America had declared war upon the 
common enemy in 1917, the mutuality of effort 
resulted in a unity of spirit. It may be that Canada 
will choose to remain a part of the British Empire 
and a separate dominion, with its o^^ai separate 
parliament and premier as now, but certainly the 
foundation has been established for a greater Eng- 
lish-speaking North American republic. 

Mexico is in striking contrast to the United 
States in climate and economic conditions. In that 
country are 13,607,259 persons in a territory of 
767,055 square miles, about three times the State 
of Texas. The temperature varies annually from 

827 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

77 degrees to 82 degrees and sometimes as high as 
105 degrees. Considering the extent of land area, 
the density of populution, the salubrity of the cli- 
mate, and the resources in mines, forests and soil, 
Mexico is one of the richest countries on the globe. 
Yet nowhere have such opportunities been more 
abused by oppression and constant turmoil. The 
people are divided among 19 per cent, of whites of 
pure Spanish descent, 38 per cent, of Indians and 
43 per cent, of mixed blood. These figures are but 
roughly estimated. The blood of Spain became 
decadent centuries ago and that of the Aztecs even 
before. Out of these has come a short and physi- 
cally weak people, cruel and vindictive. 

The adobe hut is the type of residence of the 
great body of inhabitants. It is squalid and made 
of mud. Peonage prevails. The half breeds are 
chiefly noted for their indolence and criminal in- 
stincts. The habits and surroundings of the In- 
dians are so unsanitary that the death rate among 
the children amounts to 50 per cent. In 1864 Don 
Manuel Orosco y Berra found among the Indians 
fifty-one languages, sixty-nine dialects and sixty- 
two idioms, a total of 182, each representing a dif- 
ferent tribe. Perhaps nowhere in the world are 
the people so ignorant. A start toward education 
was made and in 1904 there were said to be 620,676 
children in school, but the past few years of revo- 
lution and rapine have destroyed such progress. 

In the early days of Spanish rule the country was 
entirely under ecclesiastical control, and there are 
today in the so-called republic 13,533,013 Roman 

228 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

Catholics, 51,795 Protestants, 3,011 of other faiths 
and 18,640 of no faith. The Holy Inquisition was 
established in 1571 and in 1574 its first auto de fe 
was celebrated with the burning at the stake of 
twenty-one '* pestilent Lutherans." This institu- 
tion for the defense of orthodoxy was continually 
active for two and a half centuries and ceased only 
after the revolution of 1820. It became necessary 
to stipulate in the constitution of the new govern- 
ment that no senator or member of the Chamber of 
Deputies should be an ecclesiastic. Under the sys- 
tem of limiting the suffrage to all citizens above the 
age of eighteen years for married and twenty-one 
for unmarried men engaged in honest means of 
livelihood, it became possible for a regime like 
that of President Diaz to restrict the right to vote 
to few and intimidate the rest. 

The extensive power exercised by ecclesiastical 
rule during the colonial period enabled it to estab- 
lish means of moulding the belief of the weak peo- 
ple, and also to control their industries and shape 
the political problems governing their daily life. 
In this way it acquired enormous wealth, becoming 
the owner of great estates in every part of the 
country and highly productive enterprises in the 
towns. In 1859 the church owned one-third of the 
real and personal property of the republic. 
Coupled with this unjust distribution of land and 
goods and the gross ignorance and superstition of 
the masses is the national amusement of bull fight- 
ing. In a land where the orthodox Christian re- 
ligion has held such long sway and would be sup- 

229 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

posed to have inculcated ideas of morality, this is 
the favorite diversion of Sunday crowds. The bull 
is brought into the ring to face the matador, with his 
red flag and his poinard which stings and thrusts, 
and finally sinks to a cruel death inevitable from 
the beginning. I have seen the horse ridden by 
the matador gored by the bull until its intestines 
fell a foot or two from its belly. The poor animal 
was then dragged out, sewed up and actually used 
for the same purpose the following Sunday. To 
this has fallen a land systematically denied civil 
and religious liberty. 

Yet Mexico is a land of golden opportunity. It 
abounds in mineral and floral wealth. Extensive 
coffee, sugar and rubber plantations are to be found 
in the extreme south. On the plateau a large por- 
tion of the acreage is as yet too arid for agriculture. 
There the crops of wheat, barley, Indian corn and 
forage grasses are interrupted by long draughts, 
and the people are compelled to supply the de- 
ficienc}^ by importations of food. But in the Terra 
Calientes are sugar, tobacco, indigo, cocoa, rice, 
sweet potatoes, alfalfa, beans, corn to the extent of 
two or three crops a year, bananas, plantain, tuna, 
chili pepper, olives, cocoanut, oranges, lemons, lime, 
mango, pomegranate, pineapples, figs, papaya, 
gourds, melons, guava, plums and zapote. Pulque, 
the fermented drinlc made from the mascal sap, is 
consumed to such an extent that the making of it 
is the leading industry of Hidalgo, Puebla and 
Tlaxcala. Silk, vanilla, palm oil, ginger, mahogany, 
rosewood, ebony, cedar, nuts of all kinds and fruits 

230 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

are produced in luxuriant plentitude. Pearl fish- 
eries thrive on the coasts of Yucatan and Campeche. 
In 1902 there were 5,142,454 cattle, 859,217 horses, 
334,435 mules, 287,991 asses, 3,421,430 sheep, 4,206,- 
011 goats and 616,139 swine in the country. 

Mexico 's most important resources, however, are 
to be found in the mines. Of the entire number of 
properties devoted to extracting metal from the 
earth before the political upheaval under Madero 
1572 were gold, 5461 silver, 970 copper, 383 iron, 
151 mercury, 6 sal sema, 5 tourmalines, 1 bismuth 
and 1 turquois. Petroleum, asphalt platinum, 
graphite, soda and marble are also found. Three 
hundred million tons of a low-grade coal ore, like 
that of Texas, is in sight. In the precious metals 
some of the great bonanzas of the world have been 
opened. A steady supply of gold has been yielded. 
Transportation of this from the mines is usually 
by the burro or mule, though the picturesque but 
centuries old yoked oxen are to be frequently seen 
laboriously providing means of transit. Two lines 
of railway, o^vned by the government, run south 
from the border of the United States and have their 
terminus in the capital, and one cuts across the 
country from Tehuantepec. Only five cities have 
a population of more than 50,000. They are Mex- 
ico City with 344,721, Guadeloupe with 101,208, 
Puebla with 93,152, Monterey with 62,266 and San 
Luis Potosi mth 61,019. 

From 1821 to 1884 Mexico was troubled by con- 
tinuous wars. Then came Diaz who for nearly 
thirty years maintained almost constant peace. As 

231 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

his hand grew older and more weak seed of dis- 
sention was sown, with the result that in 1910 oc- 
curred the revolution headed by an arch dreamer, 
Madero. Bartholomew Diaz made an unsuccessful 
attempt to wrest power from him, as did General 
Reyes. Then appeared Victoriana Huerta. The 
power of the United States wrecked his hopes of 
gaining outside means of upholding himself and 
he made way for Carranza. Too weak to subdue 
the turmoil, he, too, was forced to let the troops of 
the United States seek to find and punish Villa. In 
this country and Cuba plotters from time imme- 
morial have contributed gold to revolutionists in 
return for promises of huge concessions, purchased 
ammunition and sent it into Mexico openly if the 
administration in Washington was friendly and 
covertly if not, with the result that such revolu- 
tionists armed bands to keep up a sort of guerilla 
warfare and sought thereby to gain control over a 
horde of persons unable to read and write. 

In view of the ignorance, superstition, cruelty 
and disorder which prevail, can it be doubted that 
the land of the Aztecs would be far happier, more 
industrious and devoted to the enjoyment of a 
higher civilization, if the United States were to 
send into it a force of a quarter of a million sol- 
diers, establish law and order at the point of the 
sword and exterminate without stint the opponents 
of genuine liberty? In that case this country would 
be called an usurper, but it might reply with Na- 
poleon, who in his address to an Irish parliament 
said: '*Be it so. What throne, what government 

232 



THE UNITED STATES AND NORTH AMERICA 

ever yet existed which has not been founded on 
usurpation? The facts which are universal can 
never be particular. The history of mankind will 
inform you that the question which should interest 
them is not who has usurped power, but what use 
has been made of power when usurped?" 

America usurped power when it threw off the 
yoke of the mother country. It usurped power when 
it seized the Southwest. It usurped power when it 
took away the human chattels of the South and 
made them free men. It usurped power when it 
suppressed by arms a rebellion of the Filipino peo- 
ple who desired to be independent and self-deter- 
mining. We have done our work so far by force, 
as all peoples in history have done theirs, and 
hypocrisy and cant will not make it different. We 
should continue to do our work in Mexico. The 
establishment of universal free education, the open- 
ing up of vast individual holdings of land to culti- 
vation and their division among the people, the 
assurance of equality of right and opportunity 
irrespective of faction or religion, and the main- 
tenance of as stable and peaceful local institutions 
throughout the entire territory as in Massachu- 
setts, would at the end of a generation be the answer 
to the question of whether the United States had 
interfered in another state for the benefit of the 
people there or merely its own selfish interest. The 
Aztecs overcame the Toltecs. The Spaniards con- 
quered the Aztecs. Should the American people 
conquer Mexico and thereby give opportunity for 
Italians and other peoples of southern Europe used 

233 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

to a warm climate to immigrate and assist us in 
the task of development, a century or two would 
see all the persons living in that part of North 
America as typically American in type as any 
other. 

For the eighteen little states now comprising the 
republic to enter the Union after being annexed 
would be an injustice to the older commonwealths. 
They should be redivided into four or six territories 
and governed as such for a time before admission 
as American states. Because of strategic import- 
ance in the Caribbean Sea, all of Central America 
north of the Isthmus and as much of the "West In- 
dies as practicable should become a part of the 
United States as well. 

It is as inevitable that the United States spread 
out over this continent as that the law of blood 
makes it imperative that, if necessary, it subject 
a world in order that it may be free in a union of 
self-governing commonwealths. It is a part of the 
law of nature that the stronger of the peoples within 
natural and contiguous boundaries reduce and amal- 
gamate with the others and thereby bring about an 
even greater nation. Certainly in the near or dis- 
tant future this will be accomplished. When the 
American giant fully awakes it will dominate this 
eoTitinent in order that it may fully protect itself. 



i 



iU 



CHAPTER X 

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

"The theatre of events in the great hereafter will be upon the 
broad expanse of the Pacific Ocean." — William H. Seward. 

ACROSS the waters Balboa discovered and Ma- 
gellan gave a name indicative of their placid- 
ity and toward that Orient which has until recently 
remained in mysterious coma are dawning move- 
ments which threaten to change the political, eco- 
nomic and religious earth. 

To one who stands upon the slopes of sunny Cali- 
fornia and gazes out upon those serene depths there 
comes a pondering of the long past of empires 
fallen to decay in faraway lands ^vhich were once 
the east and are now the west. He cannot but re- 
flect upon the color and life of the days of the 
Great Kahn and the scenes depicted by Marco 
Polo; the hordes that came out of those scenes to 
threaten Moscow ; their marching west in still older 
times to give the nucleus of a new civilization in 
Arabia and Northern Africa; the prolonged in- 
activity which proved to be but the preparation for 
succeeding mightier overthrows; the adventurers 
of all lands traveling ever in the direction of the 

235 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

sun until tliey saw it set in blood-red glow on the 
same sea from whence man had started ages before ; 
Zoroastran, Braham, Buddhist, Confucian and 
Christian, carrying their respective messages along 
with the tides that swept their sails afar to that 
time when even their aggression reached its limits ; 
and then the final reawakening which in the years 
to come will unite the two hemispheres. 

Resting upon that ocean are four great continents 
which represent the past, present and future of 
mankind. The nations bordering it number in their 
populations something like seven hundred millions. 
China, India, Mongolia and Manchuria signify ear- 
liest history, while on the western side of the Amer- 
ican Rockies are the outposts of the most advanced 
civilization and vital people of our day. Siberia, 
Alaska, Canada, Western South America and Aus- 
tralia are the forge wherein the two forces will 
work. Up under the roof of the world at Behring 
strait they face each other. South of that narrow 
inlet is a string of islands across which in ages 
when more connected the fathers of the ancient Tol- 
tecs, Aztecs, Incas, red men, aborigines, mound 
builders may have crossed. Toward the Antarctic, 
westward from Tierra del Fuego, is a far expanse 
of waters to New Zealand, and then the way is easy 
to New South Wales, Queensland and New Guinea, 
through the Straits Settlements to Borneo, Su- 
matra, Siam and Cathay again. 

China proper has a population of 400,000,000, 
Mongolia of 2,000,000, Siberia of 6,000,000, Alaska 
of 64,356, Yukon Territory of 8,512, British Colum- 

236 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

bia of 392,480, Washington of 1,141,990, Oregon of 
672,765, California of 2,377,549, Mexico of 15,063,- 
207, Central America of 3,000,000, Columbia of 
5,500,000, Peru of 4,500,000, Chili of 5,000,000, New 
Zealand and Australia of 5,000,000, Java of 30,098,- 
000, Borneo of 1,250,000, the Celebes of 851,000, 
other Dutch East Indies of 4,528,411, Siam of 8,100,- 
000, Hawaii of 200,000, the Philippines of 8,735,000, 
Japan of 52,985,000 and Korea of 15,164,000. Yet 
these figures give inadequate idea of the possibili- 
ties of the development of peoples within the ter- 
ritories named. 

That China is not overpopulated, except in cer- 
tain districts like that of Canton, is shown by the 
fact that its 400,000,000 people are scattered over 
an area of 1,500,000 square miles. The Germany 
of 1914 contained a seventh of that number of 
persons in an area one-ninth -as large. It is esti- 
mated that the great Asiatic country could support 
50,000,000 more without inconvenience. It is also 
computed that Manchuria could sustain 200,000,000 
more than now, Mongolia another 100,000,000 and 
Siberia a similar number. Alaska, with a climate 
milder than Sweden and Norway and an area of 
590,884 square miles, could hold 40,000,000 more. 
In the 207,076 square miles of the Yukon Territory, 
the 355,855 exceedingly fertile square miles of 
British Columbia and the richest Pacific lands of 
Washington, Oregon and California is room for 
300,000,000 more. In South America, west of the 
Andes, 100,000,000 more could be stowed away. 
Australia and New Zealand could maintain 300,000,- 

837 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

000 people. The countries bordering upon the great 
basin of the Pacific could supply life to a billion and 
a quarter more human beings than at present in- 
habit them. History has given much to them, but 
they are lands of the future in an even larger sense. 

The natural resources of these regions are ex- 
pressed in figures which stagger the imagination. 
In British Columbia, Washington, Oregon and Cali- 
fornia are 1,756,000,000,000 feet of lumber, ready to 
be cut down, milled and supply the needs of the 
builders of both the Asiatic and American borders 
of the Pacific.^ A billion barrels of oil have been 
produced in California since 1891, that state now 
providing a quarter of the world's supply. This is 
worth twice as much as the gold mined in all the 
years since '49. In California alone are grown 
120,000,000 pounds of raisins and apricots annually. 
There, too, with climate and soil like that of Italy, 
and with vast supplies of grapes, are possibilities 
of becoming the vineyard of the great ocean. 

In Oregon and Washington are potentialities for 
wheat growing larger than now, but the granary of 
the peoples east and west of the Pacific will be 
Canada, which will in a few years probably produce 
four times the amount of wheat grown in the United 
States. In Alaska are 32,000,000 acres of coal lands, 
with a possible total output of 150,000,000,000,000 
tons. This includes lignite and anthracite of the 
best quality, easy of access to tidewater. The ter- 
ritory sold to the United States by Russia for $7,- 
000,000 has within it enough fuel to supply the na- 

1 London Times, Dec. 31, 1913- 

238 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

tions of the Pacific for untold generations. It has 
also yielded $200,000,000 in virgin gold. 

Along the entire coast of the Americas are im- 
mense stores of copper, lead, quicksilver, bismuth, 
vanadium, tungsten, nickel, iron, sulphur, antimony, 
petroleum, salt, zinc, borax, cobalt, gypsum, asbes- 
tos, ocher, kaolin, molybdenite, manganese, mag- 
nesia, mica, peat and marble. In Chili are the most 
extensive nitrate beds in the world, returning $30,- 
000,000 in export taxes annually. Australia has 
extended tracts of untouched land like those of the 
United States in the middle and latter half of the 
last century. In Siberia are vast areas for wheat 
production. These are but scant figures of the 
stupendous agricultural, mineral and lumber re- 
sources of the great basin. 

Development of these raw products will stimulate 
manufactures. With the enhancement of traffic 
through the Panama Canal, New York benefits by 
being brought seven thousand miles nearer San 
Francisco by water, Europe five thousand miles 
closer, and New Orleans and Chicago in correspond- 
ingly nearer proximity to the Pacific Coast and to 
the Orient. As in the instances of the Nile, the 
Tigris and Euphrates, the Arno, the Seine, the 
Thames and the Rhine, great civilization have fol- 
lowed the fertile valleys. Thus the Mississippi 
valley and its products will have a stimulative and 
retroactive effect on the Pacific Ocean. It will help 
to supply the tools, farming implements, electrical 
machinery and the thousand articles needed for 
the development of new countries. 

239 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

But that part of the United States which will 
play the greatest part in supplying the wants of 
the peoples upon the Pacific Ocean will be the three 
states bordering upon it, notably California. San 
Francisco has the best harbor, with perhaps the 
exception of Rio de Janeiro, in the world. As the 
Eastern States were made rich in agriculture and 
manufacturing while the Middle West formed the 
outer settlement, and the latter was built up into 
wealthy cities and farming communities while the 
Northwest and the AVest were the lands of possi- 
bility, so now the territory west of the Rockies 
should seek its prosperity in the quick exploitation 
of China, Mongolia, Manchuria, Siberia and Aus- 
tralia. 

Indeed, all of the Orient, Western Canada, Mex- 
ico and Pacific South America should be the recipi- 
ents of the products created by the cheap iron, coal, 
oil, lumber and unlimited water power of that 
region. The Coast should take the hemp, silk and 
w^ool of the western side of the Pacific, make them 
into various articles and send them back; just as 
the United States formerly sent its wool and cotton 
to Europe and reimported the manufactured prod- 
ucts. Cotton and mixed goods, underwear, and 
boots and shoes are called for in greater abundance 
yearly. The moving picture has taken prodigiously 
in Japan, helping to create a demand for creature 
comforts there and in Eastern Asia generally. 
Newspapers are being circulated more extensively 
in China. 

The English-speaking Pacific coast of North 

240 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

America can, through the ports of San Francisco, 
Seattle and Vancouver become the distributing ave- 
nue for flour to the Asiatic lands. Bread, the staple 
of the race, can be supplied to them in inexhaust- 
ible quantities. Time was when California pro- 
duced the finest of wheat, but with greater profits 
this gave way to fruit raising. In fact, the Avheat 
of the American states on the Pacific is second to 
none in delicacy, and for the purposes of the peo- 
ples of the earth who inhabit the milder climates it 
cannot be surpassed. It does not contain sufficient 
heat for the northern races ; but the Chinese like it, 
and there should in the future be a good trade with 
Southeastern Asia with this as a basis. Oregon 
and Washington are capable of producing great 
quantities of it. 

Canada, however, containing a volcanic ash soil, 
will outdistance rivals as a flour producer, and much 
of its product will be sent in time to meet this de- 
mand on the part of Asia. It is not anticipated that 
Argentine w^heat mil enter into the Pacific equation, 
as the demand for its product is mostly from Eu- 
rope. Siberian wheat is too far inland to figure 
in the Pacific lands of Asia. Hence the millers of 
Pacific North America who supply the demand of 
Eastern Asia will become more potential factors 
in wealth than those of the northern Mississippi 
valley ever were. It is not likely that they will have 
serious rivals in the Japanese Empire by its taking 
our wheat and making it into flour, for it has not 
the same demand for by-products. India will con- 
sume its own wheat and flour. The war has caused 

241 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

an unnatural flow of all wheat products to the ar- 
mies in Europe, but at its conclusion production 
and distribution will develop in normal channels. 

Of great importance in feeding the peoples of 
the Pacific basin — and this is particularly the oip- 
portunity of our Coast states — is the production 
of dried fruits. Nutricious, delicious, easily pre- 
pared and transported, and very cheap, it is prob- 
able that they will be numbered among the most 
popular staples of the Eastern Orient. It is con- 
sidered only reasonable to suppose that when the 
Chinese and kindred races begin to crave more 
variety in eating they will turn first to the cheaper 
foods, and these they will find in California's prod- 
ucts of this sort. That this is so is partially in- 
ferred from the case of France, which before the 
war raised its own prunes but imported those of 
the Golden State in increasing quantities. Awaken 
the Asiatic to the delicacy of the California prune, 
apricot and other dried fruits, is now the cry of 
the Coast merchant. Raisins, too, are produced in 
enormous quantities there. With the development 
of this trade there will go with it the abundant 
apples of Oregon and Washington. 

Vegetables are perishable and hence cannot be 
transported across the Pacific from our coast under 
present conditions. But with the perfection of the 
making of cans, several of the Coast cities should 
become the centers of a great canning industry to 
feed the peoples of the Orient. In this Australia 
is expected to be unimportant as a competitor. 
California berries, peaches and other products of 

242 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

its soil, as well as vegetables from the entire Coast 
and Mississippi valley should go sailing over the 
sea in increasing quantities. With cheap water 
transportation, it is anticipated by the California 
canner that he can lay the product of the farm in 
tins at the door of the housewife in Hong Kong or 
Shanghai as cheaply as in New York or at even less 
cost. He is looking for an immense harvest, if not 
eliminated by trade barriers. 

The hardier races of the Pacific region must have 
a certain amount of meat. When the Chinaman of 
today buys it he considers it as a delicacy and eats 
it about as the American consumes the real Rus- 
sian caviar. In time he may learn to use more, es- 
pecially if he can afford it, but the possibilities in 
this are more or less remote. But with the filling 
up of the northern expanses of Asia there will be a 
demand for heat-producing meats. Because of the 
hard winters and insufficient protection to cattle 
there, it is extremely unlikely that it will furnish 
its own supply. The United States cannot requite 
the demand because it will use more than it can 
produce. Before the war in Europe and our par- 
ticipation in it our meat exportation had been fall- 
ing off. Great ranges had been broken up to make 
way for more profitable small farming, the result of 
urban growth. Hence an increased demand, les- 
sened supply and higher prices. Nor can Argentine, 
one of the principal abbatoirs of the world, yield 
the meat for the Pacific Ocean. Europe will con- 
sume its surplus for a long time. The cost of re- 
frigeration and consequent difficulty of carrying 

243 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the product around the Horn to the Orient further 
remove it as a factor. 

The country destined to supply the meat for the 
Pacific, particularly the milder mutton, is Aus- 
tralia. That country has vast tracts of grazing 
lands which can be utilized for the purpose for a 
long period. This alone should be sufficient to cause 
a rapid extension of population in Australia during 
the next few decades, intensive farming accompany- 
ing and following live stock raising, and bringing 
increasing demand for manufactures for the United 
States to supply as the result of the era of good 
feeling after our fighting shoulder to shoulder with 
Australians in the war. 

China probably will continue to be the chief rice 
producer of the earth for generations. It now 
raises all it desires for its own immense popula- 
tion and enough to send much abroad besides. This 
under crude methods, with the exception of great 
plantations in occidental hands. Because of the 
cheapness and value of the staple as food, the Chi- 
nese, Hindoos, Japanese and Filipinos will un- 
doubtedly continue its use as extensively as now; 
and, as the oriental is acquiring flour as food, the 
occidental is adopting rice in place of meat where 
climate will permit. 

The United States is raising rice in Louisiana, 
but not in sufficient quantity to supply more than a 
small portion of its own population. The Indian 
product is small and inferior to ours. The Japanese 
rice is the best. This the Jap exports to the United 
States and to the better classes in China and India 

2U 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

and then imports the Indian, which is cheaper and 
lessens his living expense. South America will use 
much Chinese rice, sending in return its cocoa. It 
is not probable that the United States will trade 
for the rice of Japan and China our com in the 
production of which we continue to lead the world. 
It is the food of northern nations. America will be 
busy supplying itself and Europe, while Asia wiVL 
produce sufficient for its own demand. 

The great rival of the United States in its com- 
mercial and political activity upon the Pacific Ocean 
is Japan. That country comprises 156,673 square 
miles of islands, like Britain. In a similar area are 
the New England States, New York and Pennsyl- 
vania, the most densely populated section of the 
United States which contains 16,208,696 people. 
Yet within the narrow limits of Japan at the begin- 
ning of the European war were 52,865,259. They 
live under a government in which their emperor is 
looked upon as a god. His person is therefore re- 
garded as sacred. 

The Japanese are progressive, ambitious and 
marvelously efficient. They long demanded an out- 
let in Asia before they found it. The food and 
population problem has formed the basis of their 
international policy. The total annual food pro- 
duction is valued at yen 640,000,000 out of a total 
agricultural yield priced at yen 1,300,000,000. 
Nearly 900,000 people are engaged in the produc- 
tion of tea. Attempts have been constantly made to 
add to the wealth of the Island Kingdom by the 
stimulation of manufactures. Thus in 1868 the 

245 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

value of all exports and imports was yen 26,246,545. 
Forty-five years later this total had reached yen 
1,361,891,000 and fifty years later yen 2,777,630,000. 
The chief import is raw cotton and the principal ex- 
port is raw silk. 

A million people are engaged in the fisheries. 
Half as many have ** weaving houses" in what in 
Japan is a home industry. In these are 800,000 
looms. In them also sixty thousand persons make 
paper and an hundred thousand manufacture mats. 
These small establishments are a part of Japanese 
life and peculiar to it. The production of ma- 
chinery, chemicals, food and beverages takes up 
considerable of the efforts of the industrious popu- 
lation. Compulsory education has been adopted, 
and 97.8 per cent, of children of proper age of both 
sexes attend school. The governmental system is 
representative and constitutional in theory, and 
partially in practice, but rests fundamentally upon 
the Emperor. The representatives and nobility 
gain their power in the constitution through him 
and not from themselves or the people. 

Buddhism, Shintoism or ancestor worship, and 
Christianity are the chief religions, with numerical 
standing of 28,510,382, of 766,685, and of 140,208 re- 
spectively. Telegraph and railway lines are owned 
and operated by the government. The Japanese 
are naturally a sea-faring people. The state has 
subsidized steamship lines to North America, the 
coast of Eastern Asia and India. The navy is the 
third largest in the world, and before the great war 
the army had a peace footing of 220,000 men, with 

246 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

a trained reserve in the first line of defense of half 
a million men and, altogether, of fully a million men. 
This it was expected would soon be developed to a 
million and a half. 

Such is Japan, a nation aroused out of its sleep 
but fifty years, and, trained industrially and in a 
military way, now seeking further expansion on 
the great waters in which its islands rest. Having 
insufficient food supply for its crowded population, 
Korea was seized. But it was to be seen that Japan 
would seek vaster territory in order to gain raw 
materials for its manufactures and supply the peo- 
ples of the Asiatic mainland. Not a creative na- 
tion, it was early found difficult to compete with the 
United States in the fields of production peculiar 
to the latter until after imitation of them. 

But if it gained preponderant political influence 
over the territory in which the competition would 
mainly be and a great merchant marine, it could 
gain important commercial advantages over this 
country. To this end it signed a treaty with our 
agreement whereby we recognized its sphere of in- 
fluence in Eastern Asia. Further than that, Japan 
has long desired to impress its individuality upon 
all the nations bordering upon the Pacific. The 
Japanese have taken the position that they are 
equal to any other, that they should be accepted in 
foreign countries as citizens, as holders of prop- 
erty in the same right, and as recipients of like 
school privileges. 

Facing Japan on this side of the great ocean are 
the people of the United States, loving liberty, am- 

247 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

bitious to sell their products in fair exchange to 
the Orient, determined to spread their civilization. 
They will expand on the waters where their inter- 
ests already lie by possession of the Philippines. 
This will not be by further taking of territory, for 
in time to come those islands will be given up to the 
Filipinos, but by argosies of sails carrying Ameri- 
can-made goods, symbols of our arts and crafts and 
productive soil, and the word of freedom to all men 
through wire and book and paper. 

The Asiatic and the American do not amalga- 
mate ; that is, they do not intermarry except rarely, 
and the Asiatic does not readily accept the stand- 
ard of living in the land of a composite of Cau- 
casian blood. He imdersells both our labor and our 
product. But in competition for the market of Asia 
those varied products in which the Japanese can- 
not underbid America will insist upon equal oppor- 
tunity by the maintenance of that principle of ' ' the 
open door" enunciated by John Hay. For the best 
market of those commodities in which is competi- 
tion and for influence in all the lands of the Pacific 
basin there is bound to be a growing rivalry. Out 
of it will come a contest for supremacy, near or re- 
mote, peaceful or otherwise, which will clear the 
air and determine the future of the Eastern Orient 
and Western Occident. 

The outcome of such an economic or political 
struggle cannot be in doubt. The course of empire 
has always advanced westward and toward liberty 
and equality — from Malay and Cathay and the In- 
dia of old and from Babylon, Ninevah and Egypt, 

S48 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

to Greece and Rome, to the lands of Western Eu- 
rope, to republican America. This in itself would 
not be sufficient to enable us to out-think and outdo 
the energetic Japanese. More than theory will be 
required to do that. But the people of the land of 
the Mikado have not the blood, the strength, the 
stature to compete for a great while with the virile 
Americans whose resources of a natural, military 
and financial kind have been very thoroughly organ- 
ized for not only the present but the future. Japan 
has expanded in Asia, but in time to come it will, 
like every other empire in history, resume its origi- 
nal boundaries. Those over whom it has claimed 
suzerainty may bring this about by casting off the 
yoke. 

The sole aspiration upon the Pacific of the United 
States, as expressed by its statesmen, is the freeing 
for the future of the nations and generations to 
come for the ideals and trade but not the conquer- 
ing sword of a republic of free men. This through- 
out the ages will be the chief benefit derived by this 
country from the soul of '49 upon its western 
shores. This will be brought about sooner and more 
peaceably should Japan join in the great democratic 
movement, throw off its feudal system of govern- 
ment and become a republic like ours. 

Such a result, however, should not be naively 
expected by Americans, for Japan from the begin- 
ning of the war in 1914 had a mighty hope that with 
its present institutions it might expand on the 
Asiatic continent. It so indicated when in that year 
it made demands upon Cliina which would have 

249 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

meant the relinquishment of the sovereignty of the 
new republic. And Japanese statesmen may have 
pictured in their vision not only a China taken by 
conquest, but Manchuria, Mongolia, Tibet, Chinese 
Turkestan, and Siberia; that is, all of the great 
mainland within the southern boundary of China, 
the Himalaya Mountains south and west of Tibet, 
the Thian Shan Mountains west of Chinese Turke- 
stan, the Altai Mountains west of Mongolia to the 
Yanesi River, to its mouth in the Kara Sea, to the 
Arctic and Pacific Oceans. Then there might have 
grown up in their minds the thought that they 
would see the land ruled over by their Mikado widen 
its boundaries southward to include Sumatra, 
French Indo-China, Siam, the Malay Peninsula, 
Burma to the Ganges and Bramaputra Rivers, and 
westward to the Caspian and Urals, over Turkestan, 
the Kirghis Steppes and West Siberia. 

But whatever the outcome of the stirring up of 
the dry bones of Asia, due to the expansion of 
Japanese activity, there has been in progress for 
several years, due to the republican ideas of the 
United States, the electrical and mechanical com- 
munication brought about by our inventive genius, 
and the reaction of the thought of the East upon 
the West, one of the mightiest creative religious 
and philosophical revolutions in the history of man ; 
and by it the bridge between religion and science 
may at last be crossed. Not since the days when the 
Greeks and Romans conquered the peoples of 
Asia and Northern Africa and were reacted upon 
by the ideas of the latter, so that their conceptions 

850 



THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 

of life and the hereafter were mutually affected for 
all the future, has there been such a comparison of 
ancient and modern view and standard as now. Out 
of it will come a new world thought and mutual 
appreciation of Occident and Orient. 



851 



CHAPTER XI 

THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

"The United States should ultimately possess incomparably the 
most adequate navy in the world." — Woodrow Wilson. 

"The navy of the United States should ultimately be equal to 
the most powerful maintained by any other nation of the world. 
It should be gradually increased to this point by such a rate of 
development year by year as may be permitted by the facilities 
of the country, but the limit above defined should be attained not 
later than 1925." — General Naval Board. 

"Supreme power belongs to him who gains command of the 
sea." — Cicero. 

AS during the past four hundred years the move- 
ment begun by the daring spirit of Columbus 
resulted in constant discovery and development on 
the sea along which he sailed westward and a suc- 
cession of the empires of Spain, Portugal, Holland, 
France and Britain, so now are gathering forces 
upon that ocean which may eventuate in the might- 
iest maritime if not naval struggle yet known. 

Great Britain and the United States, for the pur- 
pose of the great war in attaining the defeat of 
Germany, have been friends and allies. Indeed, 
had not free America gone with food, ships, men 
and money to the assistance of the monarchial land 
from whence my own ancestors came it is more than 
doubtful whether the great result to civilization in 
Central Europe would have been accomplished. 

252 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

Hands of friendship of the English-speaking peo- 
ples were extended across the sea, and it was ex- 
tremely fortunate for the fatherland of the first 
American colonists that the mother of President 
Wilson was born in Scotland, and that his generous 
nature found unanimous support in this country 
against the atrocity perpetrated by the Germans 
upon the Lusitania, and its violation in other v/ays 
of our rights on the seas. Because the men of 
Britain, Canada, Australia and South Africa fought 
side by side in the conflict, the armistice in Novem- 
ber, 1918, found them one in mutual appreciation 
and esteem. But the discussion of the final terms of 
peace had hardly begun when it was seen that the 
competitive struggle of history was not to cease 
because the war had ended. 

With more than double the wealth of the entire 
British Empire, the United States reported for the 
end of the fiscal year 1918 imports amounting to 
$2,946,059,403 and exports totaling $5,847,159,678, 
as compared to imports in 1912 of $1,893,925,657 
and exports of $2,364,579,148. In 1917 the United 
Kingdom reported imports amounting to $579,157,- 
405 and exports of $2,901,199,298, as compared to 
imports in 1913 of $3,736,050,831 and exports of 
$3,085,226,784. 

In shipping the United States has made like 
strides. On June 30, 1914, the total tonnage of the 
world was 49,089,562, as against 45,201,221 in 1918. 
In 1914 the United States had a gross tonnage of 
5,368,194, of which 2,254,368 was seagoing. In one 
year after its entrance into the war, from Decem- 

253 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ber 1, 1917 to December 1, 1918, it built 3,028,737 
tons, as compared to construction in Great Britain 
for the same period of 1,600,000. Furthermore it 
planned for the building of 16,500,000 additional 
dead weight or actual cargo tons by the end of 
1920. At the end of 1918 it had seagoing tonnage 
amounting to 5,233,052. England, on the other 
hand, at the beginning of the war had 21,450,049 
gross tonnage, of which the United Kingdom pos- 
sessed 19,256,866 tons. On November 1, 1918, the 
Empire had a gross tonnage of 17,880,048, of which 
15,000,000 constituted seagoing tonnage. The 
United States was then carrying 9.7 per cent, in its 
own bottoms, while Great Britain was carrying 70 
per cent, in its own bottoms. It was shown to be 
possible, however, to build enough merchant ships 
in our yards by 1925 to more than overmatch the 
mercantile marine of Great Britain. 

In order to protect the growing commerce and 
world interests of the United States it was proposed 
by Rear Admiral Charles J. Badger for the Gen- 
eral Board of the Navy, and by Secretary Daniels, 
at the conclusion of the war that this country should 
adopt a building program which would make our 
fighting strength on the sea equal to that of Great 
Britain by 1925. Already we were supplying Eng- 
land mth most of the steel to make her battleships 
and the oil with which to run them. At that time 
the United States possessed or had ordered the 
construction of fifty-eight battleships and battle 
cruisers, the latter of which constituted but six. 
England then possessed sixty-one battleships and 

254 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

nine battle cruisers, and had in addition ordered 
four of the latter. Having become used to pro- 
digious figures in the conduct of the war against 
Germany and having spent twenty-five billions of 
dollars to defeat the common enemy, it did not seem 
reasonable to suppose that the United States would 
overlook the necessity of preparing to defend itself 
in any further struggle that might take place, 
whether peaceful or warlike. 

The submarine, more than any other instrument 
since the days of the caravel of Columbus, has 
shaken the Atlantic and determined its future. It 
wore down the world's seagoing commerce to such 
an extent as to compel the great industrial nations 
to afterwards proceed in competition on a more 
even keel. It brought America into the war and is 
therefore responsible in a maritime way for the 
results of the war. It made it imperative that the 
country which could think the quickest, had the most 
capital to rebuild, and could best man the ships with 
cheap labor or subsidize that labor, would achieve 
most in securing the trade of the world. 

England for two centuries has not only controlled 
the sea with her navy, but has had a merchant fleet 
which has carried the major portion of the ocean 
commerce of the earth. It means to retain both. 
To yield either to any other power would result in 
the dissolution of the empire. It is willing that all 
other nations stop building immediately because, 
if it keeps what it has, it will still be able to sweep 
the water of competitors and enemies. It was will- 
ing to do away with the conscription system of rais- 

255 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ing armies in Europe and to agree to maintain none 
by that method itself, for then it would be in no 
danger of having any power gain ascendancy at its 
front door in Europe; but it was not willing that 
its fleets be disbanded or diminished, because they 
are the arteries through which its life blood pul- 
sates, and by them it means to maintain its suzer- 
ainty over a fourth of the globe. That is its right. 
It should not be denied that right. But the United 
States should realize that England is entirely selfish 
in its aims in this respect and should take advan- 
tage of the same right to protect itself and seek 
its own interest in the world. 

This does not mean that England is inimical to 
the United States. It does not mean that the 
motherland intends to do aught but cultivate a 
friendly relationship with the land which was once 
its colony. Nor does it mean that the United States 
is antagonistic to Great Britain. It does not mean 
that the great Republic of the western world in- 
tends to do other than extend the hand of fellow- 
ship across the ocean to those who speak the same 
language and have fought in the same cause. It is 
the hope of both nations that they remain forever 
friendly. It simply means that Great Britain is 
necessarily for itself and intends to seek trade and 
dominion and livelihood and wealth and to protect 
itself by whatever methods compatible with its 
civilization which it deems proper. It means that 
the United States is for itself and its people, is de- 
termined to go on in the world's struggle and gain 
greater wealth, to strive for its human welfare and 

256 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

its comfort, convenience and protection. Neither 
will become a part of the other. Neither will be- 
come subservient to the other. Therefore they must 
compete. And in time they may fight, though it 
does not seem possible that the land of Tennyson, 
Kipling and Bryce would fight us. The only alter- 
native is the dissolution of the empire into its com- 
ponent parts as separate republics. This now seems 
remote. 

Perhaps no recent event is more significant of 
the future of the Atlantic Ocean than the alliance 
against Germany of so many of the nations border- 
ing upon that great body of water. Thus Great 
Britain, France, Portugal, their colonies in Western 
Africa, Argentina, Brazil, Canada and the United 
States have similarly acted and suffered in the in- 
terests of civilization. This has helped to bring 
about a greater community of interest between them 
and, with the growing ascendency of this country, 
should enable us to ultimately leaven the entire 
Atlantic basin with our ideas. It assisted in prov- 
ing to all in the alliance that the aims of the United 
States were unselfish so far as it was concerned. 
It perhaps convinced them that if the United States 
desired to excel in commerce and to finally dominate 
the seas it would do so only in order that it might 
establish a world state wherein each nation and 
people would have equal voice and authority and 
wherein great naval power, except as each nation 
may contribute one ship to it, in order to maintain 
order and peace, might be done away with. 

In order that it may become the greatest of mari- 

257 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

time and naval nations the United States should 
take full advantage of the start in merchant and 
naval construction made during the war. It should 
utilize its immense facilities for construction, but 
under private ownership in order that extravagance 
and waste may be prevented. It might then again 
become as important an ocean carrier as it was be- 
fore the Civil War. We were at that period an 
agricultural country. Our people were frugal. 
Their standard of living was on a level with their 
rivals. But in the blockade during the war the 
American bottoms disappeared, and thereafter, with 
the enhancement of manufactures and a much 
higher standard of wages and living, it became 
more difficult to compete with foreign ship rates. 
But with vast operations of building on the part 
of the government this disparity has been ficti- 
tiously made up, and now we are again in position 
to see our trade carried under our own flag. 

To fully regain the position formerly held by the 
United States in maritime commerce it is impera- 
tive not only that ships be standardized to single 
patterns for equal size, but that cargoes to distant 
points be subsidized to provide for higher wages 
to such an extent as to cover the difference in oper- 
ation at home and abroad, as in the case of the 
tariff. An alternative would be a system of dis- 
criminating duties against goods imported in for- 
eign bottoms, but in that case the nations flying 
their respective flags on those bottoms might re- 
taliate, as they did when they forced France to 
abandon such duties. Another alternative is the 

258 -^ 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

continuance of building under government control. 
This would lead to endless extravagance and waste, 
if not corruption. In any event, it is preferable 
to have sufficient bottoms for our commerce under 
our own flag. A foreign flag, carrying its own cap- 
tain and seamen and its own cargoes principally, 
and those of the United States only incidentally, is 
much more interested in its own trade than in ours. 
Shipping has always helped to carry civilization in 
an awakened desire for goods, customs and even 
institutions. The earth is covered with a network 
of wires today, and the same prominence is not 
given to the arrival of a vessel in port as in former 
times, but the principle survives and undoubtedly 
has an effect upon trade. 

It will do no good to build a great fleet for com- 
mercial purposes, however, if it is not to be accom- 
panied by methods of adaptation to the life and 
habits of those our financiers and merchants are 
to trade with. America — and this is primarily a 
problem of the Atlantic, because of the greater 
economic development there — should take the finan- 
cial leadership of the world, now due it, and keep 
it indefinitely, with New York as the center. Amer- 
ican banks and branch houses should be established 
in South America and Africa, learning the local 
methods and prejudices with thoroughness and care. 
Even though Germany has been forced within its 
original territorial boundaries, it is seeking to man- 
ufacture so rapidly and cheaply as to furnish the 
world market with its products. It would be a folly 
then to permanently stop the teaching of German 

259 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

in our schools — a spite which might react to onr 
commercial disadvantage. 

Spanish, the language of Mexico and South Amer- 
ica, where our interests so largely lie, should be 
studied with a view to practical use. Latin, along 
with Greek, should pass into disuse, to be a part of 
the curriculum of the university for those so elect- 
ing. Two years of Spanish and one of other mod- 
em and commercial language should replace it in 
the high schools of the country, a compulsory course 
by all pupils. It is these boys and girls who will 
some day become the advance agents of our com- 
merce. They should be trained to the utmost to 
meet the keenest sort of competition. Talk of 
trade boycotts, as meritorious as their object may 
be, will be diverted by the dollar seeking profit 
alone. 

It is not an exhausted world that has turned its 
attention to commercial and intellectual pursuits 
after the war, but is a revivified world. A slight 
percentage of those engaged have been killed. The 
remainder have been stimulated to intensified effort 
in various fields of production. In the interval 
women have taken a place in industry never be- 
fore contemplated. It is impossible that they shall 
ever return to their former status. A great number 
of them have mated with returning soldiers, but 
there is a sufficient residue remaining in industry 
to more than make up for the casualties during the 
conflict. Enormous national debts, a general con- 
dition of hardship, and the necessity of obtaining 
subsistance by the millions of individuals returning 

260 * 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

from the fronts, have made imperative national 
economy and vaster wealth production. 

All the method and systematic effort utilized by 
entire states for war purposes have been turned 
to manufacturing, agriculture and other forms of 
production. The more intensified and abundant 
this is, the greater will be the demand for foreign 
markets. For a time wages are lowered, produc- 
tion cost is slightly less, and prices are slowly cut 
down by the removal of the abnormal demand to 
support those engaged in the war, the habit gained 
of living more economically and the prevention of 
further currency inflation. With the greater peo- 
ples starting on a more even basis than before the 
mighty conflict began, and the enhanced energies 
of the peoples engaged in it turned toward peace- 
ful pursuits, the inevitable result is an attempt by 
every means possible to secure the trade of the 
countries surrounding the Atlantic Ocean. In this 
the United States has the advantage in raw and 
finished production, if it utilizes its opportunity to 
the full. 

Such increased energies, post bellum economic 
chaos and seeking for foreign trade must inevitably 
result in considerable emigration into new coun- 
tries. Every nation with surplus population has 
expanded. With a stirring up of the former Eus- 
sian Empire and of the Balkans, so long held back 
by lack of education and scientific method of pro- 
duction, it is not unlikely that many millions of 
Germans and Austrians might turn to new fields of 
effort. This is also true of Russians, English and 

261 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Italians. In Atlantic South America is room for a 
half billion more persons, in Africa for a quarter 
billion and in North America for 150,000,000. 

The United States cannot insist upon shutting out 
cheap foreign Caucasian labor, for the reason that 
if it does it will prevent itself from competing for 
foreign markets. A value given to a labor market 
in which the demand is greater than the supply may 
be upheld by a protective tariff high enough to 
retain our own market for the time being; but it 
cannot enable us to become the greatest of mari- 
time and commercial nations. By a proper infusion 
of Caucasian labor without restriction and a protec- 
tive tariff we can maintain our standard of living 
and gain foreign trade. If we permit this to come 
without restriction, greater number of foreigners 
will ultimately immigrate to our wealth of re- 
sources than before the conflict began. 

Assuming that the American people realize that 
they have permanently become a world power, that 
they are no longer isolated in contentment to live 
within lines of least resistance, and are determined 
to find opportunity for expanding energy, what 
field have they on the Atlantic Ocean? First in 
importance. South America, which now offers 
greater opportunity for quick and extended devel- 
opment than any other expanse on the earth. It has 
the fertile valleys of the Amazon and Parana. The 
far interior is almost unknown. A great range of 
mountains with some of the highest peaks in the 
world extend north and south almost the entire 
length of the continent. In this are deposits of the 

262 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

precious metals which enriched the Spanish gran- 
dees of old, but have hardly been scratched. They 
await the surplus capital from manufacturing and 
■agricultural South America to find development. 

Other metals will plentifully provide for the in- 
dustrial needs of the Atlantic portion of the con- 
tinent, and in Chili is sufficient coal to supply the 
Latin Republics indefinitely. Vast tracts of grassy 
plains on the eastern side give ample means for 
cattle grazing and farming. Already Argentine 
is one of the chief grain producers, the principal 
coffee supply of mankind is raised in Brazil, and 
rubber is a principal crop of a territory like that 
of the United States. Areas of timber land simi- 
lar to those to be found in this country a century 
ago await the hand of man to cut them. These in- 
clude mahogany and other hard woods. Argentine 
is an important exporter of meats and hides. Sugar 
and tobacco are promising crops. Some of the 
richest soil on the globe is to be had for the asking. 
Means of communication are still primitive in the 
greater portion of the continent, but, in those sec- 
tions where population has required it, modern 
transportation facilities have been provided. No 
long trunk line of railway runs north and south, 
however, and none crosses South America at its 
widest point. 

That the continent to the south of us will become 
in the course of the next half century one of the 
most important of agricultural producers may be 
judged from its tremendous virgin resources. The 
Amazon Kiver is navigable for 2,200 miles and is 

263 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

3,300 miles long. At its point of entrance into 
Brazil it is two miles in width and at its mouth is 
150 miles from shore to shore. Together with its 
tributaries, it forms the largest river system in the 
world, and should in the future provide a mammoth 
production and a civilization tempered by the heat 
of the equator. Today there are in Brazil 23,070,- 
969 people. Less than half are of white blood. A 
third are half breeds and the remainder pure negro 
and Indian. Portuguese is the language spoken 
and the basic stock is of that descent. Half a mil- 
lion Germans are in the State of Dio Grande de 
Sul and as many Italians in San Paulo. Processes 
of intermixture has been too recent to admit of 
sufficient transfusion to make a warlike people. 
With so large and fertile an area Brazil could easily 
support 300,000,000 persons. As railway lines are 
extended and the Amazon becomes a scientifically 
extended and improved system of internal water- 
ways, carrying goods back and forth in the interior, 
Brazil will become one of the chief marts of the 
earth. It already has the best of all natural har- 
bors at Rio de Janeiro. 

Argentina, situated in a temperate zone, con- 
tains immense grazing and farming possibilities. 
Its population is 7,171,910, the Italian element of 
which has increased rapidly in sixty years, and 
its area is five times as large as France. Colum- 
bia, with an area two and a half times the State of 
Texas, has 5,076,000 inhabitants, mostly mixed 
white and Indian. Pure whites constitute less than 
10 per cent, of the total. With the Panama Canal 

264 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

in near proximity, it lias opportunities for exploi- 
tation in agriculture, minerals and timber. In the 
small country of Ecuador, with an area of 116,000 
square miles, the 1,500,000 people are mostly In- 
dians and half breeds ; only 200,000 are estimated to 
be pure whites. In British, Dutch and French 
Guiana the inhabitants are mostly negroes. Those 
of Uruguay, on the contrary, are almost entirely 
pure Spanish and Italian. Though the smallest 
country of South America, with an area less than 
Nebraska, the foreign trade of that country in live 
stock and agricultural products exceeds $100,000,- 
000, and ranks next to Argentine, Brazil and 
Chili. Venezuela, mth 2,743,000 people in a 
territory of 394,000 square miles, has potential- 
ities dependent upon the Panama Canal and the 
development of the Caribbean Sea region. The 
total population of South America is 49,000- 
000. 

Though it has a very large supply of water 
power and an abundance of coal and iron, the con- 
tinent has only latent possibilities for manufactur- 
ing. Agricultural products are exported north- 
ward and eastward. Prior to the war these were 
exchanged for manufactured goods from the United 
States, Great Britain and Germany. In thirteen 
years the value of these imports had increased 
from $38,337,667 to $145,724,022. It may be ex- 
pected that within a generation the inner recesses 
of the great expanse of land will be uncovered and 
brought to cultivation. This process will be more 
rapid than in the case of the United States because 

265 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of tlie recent development of transportation, elec- 
tricity and machinery. 

The new-comers gradually fall into old Spanish 
and Portuguese ways of education, religion and 
life, and take up the agricultural lands in an 
easy fashion. Made up of races of mild climates in 
Europe which had their day of expansive power 
several centuries ago, they cling to the customs they 
brought with them. Easier means of livelihood and 
enjoyment are the incentives for advancement. 
Conducting commercial affairs largely on a social 
basis, and there being as yet no transfusion of the 
great races, they have not the hardihood, initiative 
and quick perception of the American pioneers, who 
sprang from still vigorous northern peoples. 

Hence, despite all the continued and greatly aug- 
mented influx of immigration from Southern 
Europe during the next half century, it is quite un- 
likely that there will be an appreciable impetus to- 
ward manufactures. The nations of the world 
which have developed most in this branch of indus- 
try have been those mth abundant energy. In time, 
after agricultural areas have reached their limit, 
the creation of artificial goods will progress. But 
in the meantime the opportunity for the sale of 
manufactured goods in South America belongs to 
Europe and the United States, and should belong 
in far greater measure to us. To bring about an 
even closer commercial union of North and South 
America a Pan-American railway should be built 
along the west and east coasts of the United States, 
Mexico and Central America, meeting at Panama 

266 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

and thence spreading out again along the coasts of 
South America to Patagonia. 

For this future result and for immediate en- 
hancement of trade, the continent is better situated 
than formerly because more orderly. From the 
time of the throwing off of the yoke of Spain in the 
early years of the nineteenth century for a pro- 
longed period revolutions and dictators followed 
each other in rapid succession. Tyranny was often 
exercised under the name and form of a republic, 
Corruption and favoritism thrived. Privileges 
were bartered. But in the course of the last few 
decades has grown up a more stable condition. 
Life and property have become more secure. The 
fears on the part of the South American states that 
the United States might become aggressive and 
domineering toward them have been found unjus- 
tified. As the government of Washington and Lin- 
coln has vouchsafed to them protection under the 
Monroe Doctrine against European aggression, it 
may be concluded that rule by the people has per- 
manently taken possession of South America. With 
similarity of interests both continents of the west- 
ern hemisphere will gradually become akin in 
commercial as well as political life. 

Across the South Atlantic is another immense 
industrial prize in the continent of Africa. Devel- 
oped to slight extent by the western European peo- 
ples, it awaits the hand of science and method to 
make it a dwelling place and center of endeavor 
for all races. Negroes, Bushmen and Aborigines 
inhabit the interior. In the northeast are Egypt- 

267 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ians and Abyssinians and in the north are Arabs 
and Berbers. With the latter the principal staple 
of food is dates. South of the narrow fringe of 
territory along which they subsist are the deserts 
of Sahara and Gobi. In Central and South Africa 
are to be found the flora and fauna which are to 
form the basis of the coming civilization. In that 
region are immense tracts for the development of 
varied woods and of rubber, and rich agricultural, 
grazing and mineral lands. 

Farming will continue to be the chief industry for 
a long time, and hence the opportunity for the 
manufactured goods of the United States. It should 
be its policy to maintain there, to as great an extent 
as possible, such freedom of commercial oppor- 
tunity as will give ready access to a growing mar- 
ket. With the dissemination of technical education 
among the 126,000,000 of people in Africa, most of 
them Ethiopians, and the abandonment of mere ex- 
ploitation of the natives for the benefit of the na- 
tions of western Europe, there should be a tre- 
mendous additional impetus to production. 

Spain built in the New World a dominion which 
remained beneath its sovereignty long after the 
period of its greatest strength. It gave laws, insti- 
tutions and religion to much of South America and 
the lower portion of North America. Portugal, 
spreading out, planted its masterpiece of coloniza- 
tion in Brazil, a country larger in extent than the 
United States. Its imprint and that of Spain are so 
similar, except in language, that they may be said 
to be one. The Dutch founded New Amsterdam, 

268 



THE FUTURE OF THE ATLANTIC OCEAN 

only to have it taken away from them and renamed 
New York, and left but a trace of territory in 
Guiana. Frenchmen took Canada and explored the 
Mississippi, finally leaving to the State of Louis- 
iana the Code Napoleon which remains as a funda- 
mental system. Their vast possessions were either 
seized by the British or purchased by the United 
States. 

The English common law and representative in- 
stitutions were thus left as a permanent influence 
in shaping the future civilization of the North 
American continent. Questions of sovereignty had 
long been settled in the Western Hemisphere when 
Africa, almost unkno^\m until 1850, was discovered 
and exploited without being thoroughly colonized, 
in this process the Germans, Belgians and Italians 
joining the older colonizing nations. Then in 1914 
came the great debacle which was to determine tlie 
strongest of the mighty powers around the Atlantic, 
and therefore the victor of preponderant political 
influence in Africa and perhaps in the commercial 
future of South America. 

Now arises the United States, with vast possibili- 
ties of men and wealth and super-abundant energy, 
to wrest from Great Britain its supremacy in trade 
and perhaps its naval domination on the Atlantic, 
and to stamp its civilization upon all the countries 
both east and west of that ocean for the future 
ages as part of a life of genuinely free men. As 
the civilization of Great Britain was superior to 
its predecessors, so ours is superior to that of 
Great Britain. England's greatest work has been 

— 269 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

done. She can overcome her enemies only by 
using the vital forces of the United States to 
help her. That she is not less ambitious, how- 
ever, is revealed by the fact that in 1912 she 
made a condition of her recognition of the 
new republic of China her seizure of Thibet and 
her willingness to gain in territory at the expense 
of Germany at the termination of the war ; but her 
ambition is born of empire and not virility to con- 
quer with her own forces. In this sense she is 
decadent, and in time the United States must over- 
come her with its far mightier power, unless she in 
the meantime peacefully relinquishes dominion over 
lands which ask freedom to govern themselves. 



270 



CHAPTER XII 

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

"A nation — and were it even possible, a whole world — of free 
men, lifting their foreheads to God and nature ; calling no man 
master, for none is their master, even God ; knowing and obeying 
their duties toward the Maker of the Universe, and therefore to 
each other, and that not from fear, nor calculation of profit or 
loss, but because they had loved and liked it, and had seen the 
beauty of righteousness and trust and peace, because the law of 
God was in their hearts ; and need at last, it may be, neither king 
nor priest, for each man and each woman were kings and priests 
of God. Such a nation — such a society — what nobler conception 
of mortal existence can we form? Would not that indeed be the 
kingdom of God come on earth?" — Charles Kingsley. 

^T*0 a world gradually groping throughout the 
■■• centuries, whether in peace or war, toward 
unity of governmental, industrial, commercial, 
scientific, legal and religious conception, there can 
be but one ultimate outcome for mankind and that 
to accept the ideal of the American people and fed- 
erate into a single state which shall include all 
races, nations and climes. 

So evident are the tendencies in that direction 
that it is not a question of whether the result shall 
be the Federation of the World, but just how it 
shall be brought about. Certainly it will not become 
a reality by mere high sounding and rhetorical dec- 
laration in favor of universal peace. It will not 
come through a parliament of legal representatives 

271 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of all self-determining nationalities which might 
fail to perceive that the decrees of a congress are 
as naught if without force to back them. It will 
not appear by means of a world court wherein prob- 
lems of controversy may be decided on supposed 
merits of particular cases in lieu of discussion by 
peoples. It will not be the expression, law and 
policy of one man, for history teaches that from 
such unchecked power civilization has suffered its 
greatest disasters. It will not be brought by the 
mediocre acting in common, as in Revolutionary 
France and Bolshevik Russia, to suppress with 
democracy on their lips but with tyrannical method 
all rival opinion. It will not be brought into being 
by a league of great nations temporarily acting to- 
gether from motives of self-interest to control the 
rest and maintain a status quo. Nor will it ever 
come through a commission of dictators set up in 
the name of expediency to rule the world. 

All of the discussion throughout the earth of the 
subject of a league of nations, and all the means 
taken by various countries to assist in it, have 
helped to promote the ideal of world unity. Every 
people and nation everywhere has had its attention 
concentrated for a time upon the problem, and it is 
certain that further momentum mil be given to the 
movement as time goes on ; for it will be seen more 
and more that this is the keystone in the arch of 
the reformation and regeneration of the entire race 
of men. More struggle will bo required before its 
day comes. More wars will ensue. More suffer- 
ing will follow. But with every clash and conflict 

272 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

of opinion and force in international affairs, the 
lesson will come home to the peoples of every land 
that this is the only solution of the question of 
how to preserve law and order and civilization 
in equal measure everywhere. 

Only through a combination of such elements and 
machinery, resting upon the consent of the gov- 
erned, as conceived and modified by Washington, 
Hamilton and Jefferson, can the ends of justice and 
righteousness be obtained through government. 
This would be the outcome of that tendency by 
which the clan and afterguards the tribe gave way 
to the small and then the greater nation, and finally 
to empire and attempts made by conquerors and 
ambitious potentates toward universal dominion. 
It would be the outcome of that trend toward rep- 
resentative institutions and liberty in which, after 
the Grecian democracies and the Eoman republic 
had sunk to rest, the city states and the federations 
in Europe succeeded each other from time to time, 
culminating in free America; South America and 
Mexico, France after 1871, Portugal, China and 
Russia overthrew the yoke in however crude a way ; 
constitutions were wrested from monarchs in the 
middle of the last century, as in Germany, Austria 
and Italy ; the Hague conference was called by the 
Czar, mth the result of a permanent court of arbi- 
tration, which was potent only until nations ani- 
mated by self-interest and with force found it 
necessary to test power by the sword ; the Interpar- 
liamentary Union, the Pan-American Union of the 
Latin American Republics and this country, the at- 

273 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

tempts to bring about closer relations between the 
component parts of the British Empire, and the 
movement having in view the establishment at 
Versailles of a league of the Allied nations. 

It would also be the outcome of such forces to 
bring about greater amalgamation of the activities 
of mankind as great trusts and other combinations 
of capital, unification and federalization of control 
of certain industries, socialism, labor unionism, re- 
ligious and political community of interest, and the 
railroads, steamships, telegraph, telephone and 
printing press. Genuine self-government has 
spread and given further weight to the statement 
of Emanuel Kant that the prerequisite of the Fed- 
eration of the World is the establishment by all the 
nations individually of representative institutions. 

Every people on the earth having expanded in 
empire, it remains for the United States, with its 
work on this continent accomplished, to demand as 
its return for its breaking away from the traditions 
of Washington and Monroe and its participation 
in the world war and world politics, that every 
people on the earth not only have the right of self- 
determination but a place in a federal republic for 
all. It can accomplish this not by idealism but by 
the excellence of its military establishment founded 
upon red corpuscles, not by vain hopes and desires 
but by ardor of devotion to the unselfish task of 
beating off usurping empires from weak peoples 
that had their day in the long past and have been 
awaiting the time when they should awake from the 
torpor of centuries and express themselves with 

274 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

full individuality by intelligence alone, as China 
and Korea. 

Made up of all peoples, it alone should pulsate 
with sympathy for the entire world. It alone has 
taken a Cuba and given it liberty again. It alone 
has fought for a free Europe without selfish return. 
It alone contains a people enthusiastically bent 
upon giving the world free institutions as the high- 
est expression of itself. It alone has been fighting 
for democracy everywhere. It alone has the ca- 
pacity to put a million freshly soldiered youths in 
the field every year under universal training, is 
able to supply itself with every item of food and 
material, and has invention as its genius. 

The world state of the future should have one 
law and one government. The latter should have 
three co-ordinate branches, as that of the United 
States has. It should have its system of checks 
and balances of authority. Tyranny should be pre- 
vented thereby through the power given legislature 
and courts and their restriction upon the executive. 
Efficiency of administration should be provided by 
great departments. 

The chief executive of the earth should receive 
such authority as is now given to the President of 
this country. He should be subject to removal by 
a two-thirds vote of the less numerous branch of 
the congress after impeachment by the more num- 
erous branch. He should appoint all important 
federal officers, and be commander-in-chief of such 
forces of a minor but adequate character as may be 
required to put down insurrections anywhere on 

875 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the globe and maintain public order. He should be 
elected for a term of ten years and be once eligible 
for re-election. He should receive a salary of 
$250,000 per annum, enough to maintain in dignity 
such a position. At the conclusion of his term he 
should have a seat, a voice and a vote in the Senate. 
Election should be by the people, irrespective of 
race, creed or previous condition. Authority should 
rest upon them alone and be grounded upon the 
principle that under the law all men are created 
equal. 

The President should be assisted by a cabinet 
comprising a secretary of state to transact official 
correspondence of the chief executive with the sev- 
eral states and be his principal confidential ad- 
viser; a secretary of public order to see to the de- 
tails of maintaining peace in the world by means of 
a small navy composed of one ship from each na- 
tion and a regular standing army made up of a 
contingent from each nation; a secretary of com- 
merce and manufactures to administer the laws 
pertaining to business production and distribution ; 
a secretary of conmmnication to head post-office, 
telegraph and telephone; a secretary of public 
works to oversee building, bridge, road and harbor 
construction required by the federation; a secre- 
tary of agriculture to superintend the execution of 
the laws relating to the development of farming 
lands everywhere; a secretary of labor to inspect 
technical problems regarding wage earners and re- 
port suggestions of betterment; a secretary of 
transportation to direct the execution of statutes 

276 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

relating to land, water and air locomotion and navi- 
gation; a secretarj^ of the treasury to administer 
the details of a universal coinage, finance and bank- 
ing system; a secretary of mines and public lands 
to execute restrictions placed upon coal mines, oil, 
water power and other natural resources suscepti- 
ble to monopoly, and to provide for the giving of 
homesteads out of vacant and tillable soil and the 
prevention of enormous holdings of land by indi- 
viduals ; an attorney general to institute and defend 
suits in the name of the federation, as well as to 
investigate wrongs and seek remedies at law ; a sec- 
retary of public health and sanitation to enhance 
the progress of medicine and research, to carry out 
regulations for the prevention of contagious dis- 
eases and to administer laws pertaining to food and 
drugs ; a secretary of publication to supervise the 
carrying out of laws relating to the subject of lit- 
erature, journalism, book and magazine making, 
advertising and libraries, to suggest methods of the 
mechanical improvement of a free press, protect the 
production of pulp and other constituents of paper 
so as to vouchsafe printed matter for the public at 
as cheap a rate as possible, to prevent the press of 
the world from getting into the hands of a monopoly 
or a series of them, to publish all documents and 
papers of the general government, and to collect 
and maintain a library for the use of the central 
authorities ; and a secretary of education to report 
upon improvements in and supervise the carrying 
out of laws relating to all grades of instruction. 
Each of the members of the cabinet of the Presi- 

H 277 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

dent of the earth should have a seat and a voice, but 
not a vote in the deliberations of either branch of 
the congress during consideration of appropriation 
bills relating to his department. A vice-president, 
selected for the same length of term as the Presi- 
dent, should preside over the less numerous body, 
with voice but no vote except in case of a tie. 

The national legislature of the federation should 
consist of a house of representatives and a senate. 
The former should be elected directly by the people 
on the basis of one to every three millions of popu- 
lation, or one to every nation where the number of 
inhabitants is less. It should have the sole author- 
ity to originate money bills, as in the case of the 
English Parliament and the more numerous branch 
of the Congress of the United States. Members 
should be selected for a term of five years and take 
office within two months after election. Two sena- 
tors should be selected by the legislature of each 
nation and serve a term of ten years. It would be 
preferable to have the members of the less numer- 
ous body selected in this way instead of by the 
people, first, because they would then be the repre- 
sentatives of representatives and therefore larger 
national figures and more conservative and able 
men, and, second, because they would then be more 
apt to consider national and world interests in their 
broader aspect rather than in favor of any popular 
clamor of the time. Certainly this would be true 
at the period of the organization of such a govern- 
ment, at least. The branches of the legislature 
should be co-ordinate, without one being superior 

278 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

or inferior to the other in general authority. 

In the supreme court of the world sitting at the 
federal capital there should be eleven members. 
Time has shown that in our own court the docket 
is frequently delayed by the fact that the number 
of justices to write opinions is insufficient. An- 
other reason for the naming of two more by the 
President of the federation is that the circuit over 
which each would preside during the interregnum 
between sessions in cases of appeal would be larger. 
Two or three weeks might be required to travel to 
some portions of the jurisdiction. The duties 
should be the construction of the constitution in 
the decision of international cases. 

The constitution of the federation should uphold 
the rights of property; of equal protection under 
the law to every person of whatever race, religion 
or color; free worship without molestation, free 
speech, a free press, and of every boy and girl to 
a free education at the hands of the state, at the 
same time denying the privilege to any sect, whether 
Mohametan, Confucian, Buddhist or Christian, to 
establish separate general systems of primary, 
graded or secondary education ; abolish forever all 
titles to kingship or nobility, all special privileges 
of birtli, wealth or origin, and all connection be- 
tween church and state anywhere in the world ; also 
polygamy, polyandry and slavery in any form ; also 
grant the right to all women on the earth to equality 
of suffrage, property and independence. Tariffs 
and diplomacy and armaments should then be abol- 
ished. 

379 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

General laws should be applicable to every na- 
tion, tlie exercise of the police power alone being 
reserved to each. Constitutions containing every 
ism of the moment of adoption often result in con- 
fusion or regret. A simple instrument laying out 
the barest outline, as in the immortal document 
framed by the fathers of the American common- 
wealth, and especially by the genius of Alexander 
Hamilton, is wisest and best withstands the assaults 
of radicalism throughout future time. Such a gov- 
ernment would necessarily be *'of the people, by 
the people and for the people" of the earth. Two 
great parties would perhaps spring up, one radi- 
cal and the other conservative to satisfy the natu- 
ral division of minds. Others might arise with the 
intent of making humanity over according to a new 
pattern, but they would not be apt to last long. 
Elections for the president and congress would 
engross attention, but all nations and peoples 
would in a generation become as accustomed to 
conducting them in orderly and honest fashion as 
are now the people of the United States. In these 
every white, black, yelfow, brown and red man and 
woman over twenty-one years of age should par- 
ticipate. 

English should ultimately become the language 
of the earth. Already it is used more than any 
other. To propose a new tongue and expect every- 
body to learn it to gratify the vanity of the man 
who invented it would be impractical. As the lan- 
guage of government and commerce and then of 
all communication English should be used in schools 

280 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

throughout every continent and become universal. 
There is justice in this, for the English-speaking 
peoples have accomplished more for human liberty 
than all of the balance of the race combined. Every 
people should be expressed in a nation and have a 
voice in the federation. About sixty states should 
be included in it, making a total number of senators 
of about 120 and a house of representatives of more 
than five hundred. 

The states of Asia should be India, Burma, Siam, 
Annam, Tibet, China, Mongolia, Manchuria, Si- 
beria, Japan, Korea, Turkestan, Afghanistan, Per- 
sia and the great state of Israel at the junction of 
three continents. Africa, now apportioned arbi- 
trarily within boundaries made by the colonizing 
empires of Europe, should be divided into five na- 
tions: one circumscribed by the Atlantic Ocean, 
Mediterranean Sea, the line of 20 north and the 
eastern limits of Tripoli and French West Africa ; 
another comprising the lands between Tripoli, 
French West Africa, the Mediterranean, the Red 
Sea, the Indian Ocean and the northern limits of 
British East Africa and Uganda ; a third from the 
latter Ugandian and British East African limits, 
along the eastern limits of Belgian Congo, Portu- 
guese West Africa, German Southwest Africa, the 
Orange River and the Indian Ocean; a fourth by 
the northwestern, northern and eastern limits of the 
Belgian Congo, the eastern limits of Portuguese 
West Africa, German Southwest Africa and the At- 
lantic Ocean; and a fifth by the parallel of 20 de- 

281 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

grees north, the eastern limits of French West 
Africa and the Atlantic Ocean. 

The states of Europe should be Norway, Sweden, 
Ireland, England, Scotland, Holland, Belgium, Ger- 
many, Austria, Denmark, Russia, Hungary, Bo- 
hemia, Switzerland, France, Italy, Greece, Ru- 
mania, Bulgaria, Servia, Finland, Ukraine, Spain 
and Portugal. South America should be divided 
into the states of Venezuela, Columbia, Guiana, 
Ecuador, Peru, Chili, Argentine, Uruguay, Boli\da 
and Brazil. The East Indies, the AVest Indies, Aus- 
tralia, New Zealand, Guiana, Madagascar and Ice- 
land might have separate commonwealths, as well 
as groups of archipelagoes. 

The attention of the entire world might be cen- 
tered upon the City of Jerusalem, where the fed- 
eral capital should be situated. Is it not the 
prophecy of old that '*out of Zion shall go forth 
the law?'^ Mohametan countries, extending from 
Southern Europe and Africa to India and even 
China and Japan, would not be displeased at this 
result, for their religion has that of Abraham as its 
basis. Christian lands including nearly all of Eu- 
rope and all of North and South America, as well 
as Australia and New Zealand, would rejoice that 
the place M^here Jesus taught should provide for 
a common brotherhood of man. And the Jewish 
people, who have been scattered everywhere and 
yet have retained unimpaired their yearning for 
separate identity, would find final proof of the ful- 
filment of the promises of Jehovah in the vision 
of the seer nearly three thousand years ago that 

282 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

their beloved Jerusalem, the city of David, in *Hhe 
glorious land," should be the seat of the govern- 
ment of a united earth. 

It would be the strength of the American people 
which would jealously guard and strictly uphold, 
until upon so stable a footing that nothing could 
shake it, the Republic of Man against unscrupulous 
and designing traitors or groups of lawless people 
seeking to disturb it anywhere; but the chief city 
should be where every state would be satisfied to 
have it. Newspapers the world around would re- 
ceive from the wires the happenings of the day be- 
fore in the metropolis. None would be so poor as 
to be unable to buy or so ignorant as to be unable 
to read the doings of that city of the future. The 
world of art, science, literature, music and fashion 
would reflect there the best thought and highest 
achievement of a billion and a half of human be- 
ings captivated by liberty and union. 

Under the aegis of such a world dominion of 
universal citizenship, with every man and woman 
eligible to the highest dignity and with freedom of 
opportunity guaranteed to all, can it be questioned 
that there would arise a civilization surpassing any 
that the planet has heretofore known ? Every field 
of human endeavor would be stimulated to great 
things. As in ancient Athens, the symmetrical de- 
velopment of body and mind would become the aim 
of men, and the ideal of beauty would be pursued 
mth avidity. In industry men would bring forth 
the creations of their toil with less pain and sorrow 

S83 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and more enjoyment of life. Every child would 
be taught the dignity of labor and have his hand 
trained to wrest from it in maturity something use- 
ful. In education they would not fear to seek new 
truth in place of the pap doled out by pedants of 
the past or to reconfirm their belief in that found 
worthy. With the evolution of medical science, the 
temperance that would come with greater self-re- 
spect, the cleanliness of a world taught hygiene, and 
the distribution of more necessities and comforts by 
inventive skill, disease would in time be conquered. 
And with men learning to serve God only by serv- 
ing men and seeking the unfoldment of all in a 
conunon light and happiness, might it not be al- 
most anticipated that selfishness itself, the evil of 
the race, might, after many ages perhaps, die away? 
Nobler manhood and womanhood, it may be hoped, 
would secure in the great state of the future an 
ever-increasing number of useful and worthy lives. 
If this dream seems vague and beyond the limi- 
tations of our faith, we shall find it written by the 
prophets of Israel in letters that will never die. It 
was Isaiah who said: **And it shall come to pass 
in the last days that the mountain of the Lord's 
house shall be firmly established on the tops of the 
mountains and shall be exalted over the hills, and 
unto it shall flow all the nations."^ **And I will 
visit on the world its evil and on the wicked their 
iniquity; and I will stop the arrogance of the pre- 
sumptuous, and the haughtiness of the tyrants will 
I tumble. I will make the mortal more precious 

^Isaiah 2:2. 

284 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

than fine gold, and more than the valued metal of 
Ophir."^ 

**And it shall come to pass on that day that the 
Lord will visit punishment on the hosts of heaven 
in heaven and on the kings of the earth on the earth. 
And they shall be gathered in heaps as prisoners in 
the prison and shall be shut up in the dungeon, and 
thus after many days shall they be punished."^ 
**And men will say on that day, lo, this is our God 
for whom we have waited that he would help us; 
this is the Lord our God for whom we have waited ; 
we shall rejoice and we shall be glad in His salva- 
tion. "« 

**And I, because of their works and their 
thoughts, will let it come to pass to gather all the 
nations and tongues ; and they shall come and shall 
see my glory. ' ^ * * ' There shall be no more thence 
an infant of a few days, nor an old man that shall 
not have the full length of his days; for as a lad 
shall one die an hundred years old ; and as a sinner 
shall be accursed he who dieth at an hundred years 
old."" 

' ' The wolf and the lamb shall feed together, and 
the lion shall like the bullock eat straw: and tlie 
serpent — dust shall be his food. They shall not 
hurt nor destroy in all my holy mountain, saith the 
Lord."« 

Jeremiah said: *'The vintner's call, as they that 
tread out the grapes, will he lift up against all the 

1 Isaiah 13: II-I2. 2 ibid. 24 : 21-22. ^ ibid. 25:9. ^ibid. 66: 18. 
5 Ibid. 65:20. «Ibid. 65:25. 

285 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

inhabitants of the earth. A tumultous noise Com- 
eth out of the ends of the earth, for the Lord hath 
a controversy with the nations, to hold judgment 
over all flesh: the wicked — these he giveth up to 
the sword, saith the Lord. ' ' ^ Through Ezekiel it 
was said: ''And I will display my glory among the 
nations. " ^ This through Joel : *' And it shall come 
to pass after this that I will pour out my spirit over 
all flesh; and your sons and your daughters shall 
prophesy ; your old men shall dream dreams ; your 
young men shall see visions ; and also over the men 
servants and over the maid servants in those days 
will I pour out my spirit. ' ' ^ 

Micah said: ''And he shall judge between many 
people, and decide for strong nations even afar off ; 
and they shall beat their swords into plowshares, 
and their spears into pruning knives : nation shall 
not lift up sword against nation, and they shall not 
learn any more war. But they shall sit every man 
under his vine and under his tig tree, with none to 
make them afraid, for the mouth of the Lord of 
Hosts hath spoken it. " * Habakkuk declares : ' ' For 
the earth shall be filled with the glory of the Lord 
as the waters cover the sea. "^ 

Zephaniah says: "Yea, then mil I charge unto 
the people a pure language, that they may all call 
on the name of the Lord, to serve him with one ac- 
cord."^ Haggai foretells: "And I will overthrow 
the throne of kingdoms, and I will destroy the 

1 Jeremiah 25:30-31. ^Ezekiel 39:21. ^ jgel 3:1-2. ^Micah 
4 : 3-4. ^ Habakkuk 2:14. ^ Zephaniah 3 : 9. 

286 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

strength of the kingdoms of the nations ; and I will 
overthrow chariots and those that ride in them ; and 
the horses and the riders shall come down, every 
one by the sword of his brother." ^ Zechariah pro- 
claims : **0n that day, saith the Lord of Hosts, shall 
ye call every man his neighbor under the vine and 
under the fig tree."^ "Thus hath saith the Lord 
of Hosts. In those days shall it happen that ten 
men out of all the languages of the nations shall 
take hold — yea, they shall take hold of the skirt of 
him that is a Jew, saying, let us go with you, for 
we have heard that God is with you. ' ' ^ 

David said: *'He causeth wars to cease unto the 
ends of the earth ; he breaketh the bow and cutteth 
the spear in pieces ; he burnetii Avagons in the fire. 
Be still, and know that I am God. I will be exalted 
among the nations, I will be exalted on the earth. ' ' * 
"The mountains shall bear peace for the people, 
and the hills the same through righteousness. ' ' ^ 
"The Lord hath sworn and will not repent of it. 
Thou shalt be forever a priest after the order of 
Malchizedek. The Lord at they right hand crush- 
eth kings on the day of His wrath. "^ Finally 
through Daniel the word came: "But in the days 
of these kingdoms will the God of heaven set up a 
kingdom which shall to eternity not be destroyed, 
and its rule shall not be transferred to any other 
people ; but it will grind up and make an end of all 
these kingdoms, while it will itself endure for- 

1 Haggai 2 : 22. 2 Zechariah 3 : 10. ^ ibij 8 : 23. * Psalm 46 : 
10-11. 5 Ibid. 72:3. 6 ibjd. 110:4-5. 

387 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ever." * ** Until the ancient of days came and pro- 
cured justice unto the saints of the Most High ; and 
the time came and the saints took possession of the 
kingdom. ' ' 

Perhaps the mystical meaning of these latter 
Avords of Daniel is that at the time of the spiritual 
awakening of mankind to simple righteousness after 
the establishment of freedom, equality of oppor- 
tunity and complete tolerance on the earth, under 
the government of the Republic of Man, those minds 
that have most served the Most High during the 
centuries in which they have appeared in life to do 
his work and lead the world nearer and nearer to 
obedience to Him, will one after the other be recog- 
nized for their abilities and character and be lifted 
by their fellowmen to the highest place of re- 
sponsibility on the planet as President of the Fed- 
eration of the World. It may be true that as they 
have been enabled to achieve by inspiration in the 
past, so will they be guided by the will of the Eter- 
nal in the future. 

These may be meant by Zechariah when he said : 
**I saw this night, and behold there was a man rid- 
ing upon a red horse, and he was standing among 
the myrtle trees in the deep valley ; and behind them 
were red, pale and white horses. And I said, AVhat 
are these my Lord? Then said the angel that 
spoke with me, I will show thee what these are. 
And the man that stood among the myrtle trees an- 
swered and said, These are they who the Lord hath 
sent to traverse the earth. And they answered the 

1 Daniel 2:44. 

288 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

angel of the Lord that stood among the myrtle trees 
and said, We have traversed the earth, and behold 
all the earth is inhabited quietly and is at rest/'^ 

It may be possible that reincarnated century after 
century they do the work of the Eternal. In such 
a process it would be but natural for their abili- 
ties and personality to remain the same. Each 
would then only become more trained for his re- 
spective task. Maybe they perform the wonders 
they do because more subject to the guidance of the 
Creator. They may also have been meant by Zech- 
ariah in the words :^ *'And the angel that spoke 
with me came back again, and waked me up, as a 
man that is awakened up out of his sleep ; and he 
said unto me, What art thou seeing? And I said, I 
have looked and behold there is a candlestick all of 
gold, with a bowl upon its top, and its seven lamps 
are thereupon, and seven pipes to the seven lamps 
which are upon the top; and two olive trees are 
upon it, one upon the right side of the bowl and 
the other upon the left side thereof. And I com- 
menced and said unto the angel that spoke with 
me, saying what are these, my Lord? Then the 
angel that spoke with me answered and said unto 
me, Knowest thou not what these are? And I said, 
No, my Lord. 

**Then answered he and spoke unto me, saying. 
Not by might, nor by power, but by my spirit, saith 
the Lord of Hosts. Who art thou, great moun- 
tain, before Zerubbabel (the anointed) thou mlt 
become a plain ; and he shall bring forth the head- 



iZechariah i:8-il. ^Zechariah 4. 

289 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

stones with shoutings of Grace, grace unto it. And 
the word of the Lord came unto me, saying, The 
hands of Zerubbabel have laid the foundations of 
this house, and his hands shall complete it; and 
thou shalt know that the Lord of Hosts hath sent 
me unto you. For whoever even despised the day 
of its small beginning; yet will they rejoice when 
they see the plummet in the hands of Zerubbabel 
with those seven; they are the eyes of the Lord 
which hold a survey through all the earth. And I 
began and said unto him. What are these two olive 
branches on the right side of the candlestick, which 
are close by the two golden pipes which empty out 
of themselves the gold colored oil! And he said to 
me as folloAveth, knowest thou not what these are? 
And I said. No, my Lord. Then said he. These are 
the two sons of the clear oil that stand by the Lord 
of the whole earth." The oil may be symbolical of 
the truth. On the throne of grace, as it is called in 
Daniel, maybe these characters will dispense divine 
leadership to the world. 

For such a new and glorious dispensation it is 
the task of the LFnited States to prepare, with the 
help of God. Who but the Almighty put the idea 
into the brain of Columbus that lying afar off 
across the western waters was land to be found? 
Who gave him the intense longing when a boy for 
the sea? Who subdued the Aztecs with the same 
rod of iron with which they had slaughtered their 
victims at the sacrifice? Who practically exter- 
minated the savage Indians, who with fiendish 
cruelty, depravity and lust had been attacking each 

290 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

other from time immemorial as they later toma- 
hawked the white men, burned their houses and at- 
tacked their wives? Who prepared this land be- 
tween the two great oceans and then led to it the 
lovers of liberty and despisers of hardship of every 
people? Who inspired the simple but intrepid 
spirit of George Washington? 

Who guided the fathers of the Republic when 
they met in Philadelphia to deliberate upon a con- 
stitution, especially Avhen Benjamin Franklin arose, 
after a deadlock in the debate, and asked light from 
the Bestower of Blessings? Who led the kindly 
soul of Abraham Lincoln in the dark days of the 
war which was to determine whether this country 
was to become altogether free and unified so as to 
be potential enough in the hereafter to give liberty 
to all men? When another and different crisis 
arose, who brought forward Grover Cleveland to 
stand like a rock in a weary land against attempts 
by sophists to repudiate the financial credit of the 
nation? In the time of the Spanish war who guided 
the noble and patient McKinley to fight for liberty 
and honor? 

When there was need to curb organized wealth 
and restimulate the conscience of the people, who 
brought forth a Theodore Roosevelt, a great re- 
former? When constitutional guarantees needed 
safeguarding who produced a William H. Taft? 
WTio inspired a Woodrow Wilson to give new im- 
petus to democracy? Who will bring another man 
when the necessity for him arises? Who has built 
the nation and will guide it through all the years? 

291 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

None but the Living God! None but His omnipo- 
tent hand has fashioned this mighty land, 

**Here, where freedom's equal throne 
To all her valiant sons is known ; 
Where all are conscious of her cares, 
And each the power that rules him shares/'^ 

The American people should realize that they 
cannot enjoy the benefits of their institutions long 
if they do not prepare for their destiny to give 
those institutions to all mankind. If they do not 
do their duty in exertion to the utmost to expend 
their treasure, train all their youth for military 
service and sacrifice life abundantly in battles on 
land and sea, they will be deprived of their own 
liberty as punishment. If they do so exert them- 
selves, train all and are willing to sacrifice all, they 
\\ill be rewarded by receiving the honor and the 
glory of accomplishing more for humanity than any 
people since the world began. This they should do 
because of their unrivaled wealth of manhood and 
womanhood, spirit, farm, factory and mine. Tliey 
should awaken to the greatest crusade that the 
ages have known, not to free a cross and a sepul-, 
cher, but all mankind; to make the entire race 
brothers and sisters, not in a monastery or nunnery, 
but under God. 

They should not cease from their toil, their sor- 
row and pain, their hazardous undertakings in the 
face of pitiful bleatings from copperheads and 

lAkenside, "Odes." 

292 



THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 

pacifists, their grief for the sons, fathers and broth- 
ers slain in the fight, their putting every hazard to 
the gruelling test of iron and steel and blood, their 
triumphant shouts of victory which are the re- 
wards of complete eifacement for the accomplish- 
ment of a grand ideal, their continual giving birth 
to patriots who will, like Nathan Hale, regret that 
they have but one life to give for their country, 
their striving through stress and storm for every 
spiritual light and material means to bring the com- 
mon end, their seeking through comradry and al- 
truism for the righteousness of the race, 

''Till the war drum throbs no longer and the bat- 
tle flags are furled 

In the parliament of man, the federation of the 
world. 

There the common sense of most shall hold a fret- 
ful realm in awe. 

And the kindly earth shall slumber, lapt in univer- 
sal law. ' ' ^ 

The promises of God are always kept. As He 
spoke through the sages of the ages, through in- 
spired minds from David and Isaiah to Kant and 
Napoleon, so shall it be. The noble vision they 
foresaw no longer seems a weird and unlikely 
dream. It already appears dimly but certainly upon 
the horizon as a practicable accomplishment. 



1 Tennyson, "In Memorium." 

293 



CHAPTER XIII 

GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

*'Ah God for a man with heart, head, hand, 
Like some of the simple great ones gone 
Forever and ever by. 
One still strong man in a blatant land, 
Whatever they call him, what care I, 
Aristocrat, democrat, autocrat — one 
Who can rule and dare not lie." 

jTTVERY nation which has a stupendous labor to 
-*--' perform produces a preeminent personality to 
do it. The mightier the nation and the task the 
greater the man seems to be to those who come after 
him. The United States, having before it the super- 
latively momentous work of history, will in time 
give to the world the figure best equipped for it. 
Leadership is as essential to the development of 
humanity as vitality. As the spirit guides the body, 
so intelligence rules the earth. Genius is a com- 
bination of past experience and inspiration. His- 
tory is the sum of the work of human genius, of 
those inspired minds throughout the ages who have 
advanced the cause of mankind. They in all lands 
and climes have been guided intuitively by the in- 
finite intelligence of God. The sublime deeds of 
life are done by individual men who are the servants 
of the Most High. 

294 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

Moses, Samuel, Isaiah and David in Israel, Rame- 
ses and Thetmosis III in Egypt, Alexander in 
Greece, Caesar in Rome, Hannibal in Carthage, Ma- 
homet and Harun in the Caliphate, Buddha in In- 
dia, Confucius in China, Zoroaster in Media, 
Justinian in the Byzantine Empire, Charlemagne 
in Francia, Columbus in Italy, Magellan in Portu- 
gal, Cortez in Spain, Charles V in Austria, Peter 
in Russia, the elder and younger Pitt in England, 
Napoleon in France, Frederick the Great and Bis- 
marck in Germany, Washington and Lincoln in 
America are among the achievers of all time who 
have advanced humanity step by step to greater 
things. 

Praxiteles, Lysippus, Pheidias, Polyclitus, Damo- 
phon, Michelangelo, Piasno, Cellini, Bartolome, 
Berini, Gavnova, Houdon, Gilbert, St. Gaudens and 
Rodin in sculpture; Scopus, Cossotus, Vetruvius, 
Mucins, Rabirius, Ristori, Pontelli, Anthemus, Isi- 
dorus, Bramante, Wren, Michelozzo, Inigo Jones, 
Steindl, Wallot, Barry, Visconti and White in ar- 
chitecture; Polygrotus, Micon, Pansenus, Zeuxis, 
Parthasius, Protogenes, Leonardo da Vinci, Ra- 
phael, Rubens, Rembrandt, Velesquez, Van Dyck, 
Henner and La Farge in painting; Hippocrates, 
Galen, Theophrastus, Herophilus, Erasistratus, 
Isaac Ben Emran, Rhases, Avicenna, Kalid, Valen- 
tine, Priestly, Lavoisier, Lister, Virchow, Welch 
and Osier in medicine ; Hipparchus, Eratosthenes, 
Ptolemy, Kepler, Copernicus, Newcombe in astron- 
omy ; Euclid, Newton and Leibnitz in mathematics ; 
Archimedes, Hero, Gutenberg, Whitney, Stevenson, 

295 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Fulton, Bell and Edison in invention; Magellan, 
Vasco da Gama, Cook, Hudson and Peary in dis- 
covery; Othman, Albertus Magnus, Humboldt and 
Darwin in scientific investigation ; Socrates, Plato, 
Aristotle, Bruno, Kant, Descartes, Spinoza and 
Comte in philosophy; TertuUian, Augustine and 
Luther in religious reform ; Homer, Pindar, Hesoid, 
Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Virgil, Horace, 
Ovid, Petrarch, Boccaccio, Montague, Shakespeare, 
Lope de Vega, Moliere, Corneille, Voltaire, Rous- 
seau, Hugo, Dickens, Tolstoy and Poe in literature ; 
Demosthenes, Cicero, Pitt, Ranke, Mommsen and 
Motley in historical composition; Hammurabi, 
Moses, Solon, Lycurgus, Justinian, Charlemagne, 
Gregory VII, Napoleon, Langton, Cromwell, Hamil- 
ton and Bismarck in justice; Tribonian, Papinian, 
Thomasius and Grotius in legalism ; Dana, Greeley 
and Bennett in journalism; Epaminondas, Don 
Juan, Tromp, Drake, Nelson and Dewey in naval 
warfare ; Crcesus, Crassus, the Fuggers, the Roths- 
childs and some of the American financial geniuses 
have made their indelible imprint upon the life of 
man. 

They and those like them, individuals all, have 
brought humanity down to date. Sweep away those 
who have labored and struggled singly in leader- 
ship of their fellows throughout historic life on the 
planet and man is again under a tree in the forest, 
subsisting on the line of least resistance. And 
without the individual help of those good women 
who have been the wives and mothers of the world, 
as well as those inspired feminine characters who 

296 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

have assisted in the leadership of mankind, such 
as Semiramis, Cleopatra, Zenobia, Bmnhilda, Isa- 
bella, Catherine, Elizabeth and Joan de Arc, there 
would be but a verdant nature on an unthinkable 
earth. All these mighty spirits, added to the con- 
querors and statesmen, have fashioned the world 
we live in, wresting something new in government, 
thought or material out of old conditions to make 
them better. 

Vitality, determination, opportunity and inspi- 
ration provide the means by M^hich the great men of 
the earth perform their deeds. They spring for- 
ward for each occasion and seem to have been 
created for it. In moments of supreme decision 
they appear to see more clearly than others what 
should be done and advance toward accomplish- 
ment with assurance. Through boyhood and youth 
they give evidence of uncommon and preternatural 
precocity. They understand problems pertaining 
to activities in which they engage as though they 
had had long experience in them. Their compan- 
ions and associates, even in youth, are forced to 
give way to their asserted genius. As they grow 
older a glamor attaches to them. Men delight to 
know and follow them. 

"Sword and staff, or talents sword-like or staff- 
like carry on the work of the world," says Emer- 
son. This is due in large measure to the fact that 
they utter the truth lying as a germ in the mind 
of all and thereb}^ convince, or by the magnitude 
of their operations attain success, but also to that 
indefinable something we call personality. In times 

297 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of stress they realize themselves and express tHat 
which is the nature of their being in deeds. It is 
then that clearest inspiration conies to them. They 
feel innately that certain things are or should be 
so. This is direct or immediate intuition. 

Millions had seen apples fall, but when Isaac New- 
ton did so he perceived the law of gravitation. Mar- 
tin Luther said: *'I do not know where my ideas 
come from.'* Napoleon said: "No great general 
ever profited by experience in war.'* His rivals 
said of him that he possessed an uncanny intuition 
on the battlefield. At twenty-four Cavour wrote' 
that he already saw himself minister of the King- 
dom of Italy. Mommsen says of Csesar that *'his 
remarkable power of intuition revealed itself in 
the precision and practicality of all his arrange- 
ments, even when he gave orders without having 
seen with his own eyes." * Xenophon says of Soc- 
rates: "If it appeared to him that a sign from 
heaven had been given him, nothing would have in- 
duced him to go against the heavenly warning: he 
would as soon have been persuaded to accept the 
guidance of a blind man ignorant of the path to 
lead him on a journey in place of one who knew the 
road and could see ; and so he denounced the folly 
of others who did things contrary to the warnings 
in order to avoid some disrepute among men. For 
himself he despised all human aid by comparison 
with counsel from above." Socrates said of a con- 
viction that "this came to me apart from demon- 
stration. ' ' ^ The prophets of Israel ages ago f ore- 



1 "History of Rome," Vol. IV, p. 424. 2 phaedo. 

S98 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

saw by this process what would come to pass in the 
hereafter. So far each one of their visions capable 
of fulfillment up to the present has been realized. 
All of them will be in time. 

It is not without the pale of human consciousness 
to realize that God is infinite intelligence, infinite 
individuality, infinite personality. As man is in 
spirit finitely, so God is infinitely. He is the Most 
High, the Almighty, Lord of Hosts and King of 
Kings. He alone rules the universe. Force and 
molecular energy but operate under his own laws. 
The Everlasting One, the Eternal, holds within 
Himself all natures and things and the minutas of 
worlds. Nothing is hidden from Him. His will it 
is that rules the destinies of men ; for, although He 
grants free will. He inspires those who obey Him. 
Jehovah in the perfection of His intelligence has 
knowledge of the mental processes and bodily ac- 
tivities of each man, woman and child. The most 
penetrating intellect oftentimes only reflects His 
desire. His is the divine plan for the world. Is not 
this revealed in the beautiful sjonbol of Nebuchad- 
nezzar, brought low and forced to eat the grass of 
the field in order that he might see in his fallen 
pride, as Daniel said, that the rule of the Most 
High is over every generation? 

As men through hardship and struggle are broken 
to humility and the realization that they may gain 
inner light and happiness solely through kindness, 
mercy and simplicity, they are brought in harmony 
with and therefore nearer to that apperception by 

899 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

whicli they find surcease from difficulty and restora- 
tion of soul. Augustine, turning from his ''fill of 
hell" and ''fog of lustfulness," as he termed them 
in his Confessions, to the contemplation and work 
of the Living God, became the light of a thousand 
years. As one can see the stars in the daytime only 
from the bottom of a well, he may behold the truth 
more clearly in the adversity which brings sorrow 
and unselfishness into his heart. This is true of 
Saint Francis of Assisi and that royal line of mys- 
tics who have discerned love of God in love of 
man. 

The truly great have ever been as simple as Lin- 
coln. In themselves they were not great. They 
merely seemed so. They were enabled to do re- 
markable things by their oAvn initiative and that 
inspiration and kindness which the Lord God vouch- 
safed to them. "If God is with a man he cannot 
fail; if He is against him he cannot succeed," said 
the leader born in a log cabin in Kentucky, who was 
given the task of freeing the slaves and saving the 
Republic. Before every battle the mild and sensi- 
tive "Washington, the "father of his country, " knelt 
in prayer. Alfred of England, one of the noblest 
characters of human story and born to help lay the 
foundations of a state, said: "As long as I have 
lived I have striven to live worthily." He longed 
when death should overtake him to leave with the 
men who came after him a remembrance of him in 
good works. Canute, when told by his courtiers 
that he might accomplish anything, by taking his 
seat by the ocean and commanding the tide to turn 

300 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

back proved that he by his own power could do 
nothing. 

Men in his day thought the doings of Joshua so 
unusual that they humorously declared he com- 
manded the sun and moon to stand still and that 
they obeyed, but those orbs of night and day heed- 
lessly continued their revolutions while he, a sim- 
ple warrior, did the work God had given him. Mar- 
tin Luther before deciding to face the diet at 
Worms, where his life was endangered, in an upper 
room found in prayer that light which told him he 
was to go, no matter what might be the outcome. 
Socrates was scolded by his wife because he per- 
sisted in arguing daily in order that he and his com- 
panions might find truth. When he ''with gaiety 
welcomed death's embrace and discharged life's 
debt,"^ the victim of having taught simple right- 
eousness in opposition to the formalism of the time, 
his wife and children were there to bid him good- 
bye, for they had loved him and he had loved them. 
Yet he was the father of philosophy. He fought as 
a hoplite for his native land and was an intrepid 
soldier. 

Charlemagne sought learning like the humblest 
scholar at his court, attending school there when 
late in life. His favorite book, the City of God was 
always near him. Otto the Great in the same way 
invited the learned to his capital. Alexander ot 
Macedon was the most companionable man in his 
army, and was great only in his love of glory and 

^- Xenophon. 

301 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

accomplishment of it. This may also be said of 
Caesar and Napoleon. 

When the first of the Romans was about to cross 
the Rubicon and combat Pompey for control of the 
Empire he strode up and dowTi for some time, un- 
decided as to the course to take. Then it suddenly 
came to Mm what was best and he cast the die which 
was to lead to civil strife and a vaster Rome. Men- 
eval says ^ of the French Emperor that *'he began 
to dictate in a serious and emphatic tone, without 
resting for a moment. As inspiration came to him 
his voice assumed a more animated tone. In ren- 
dering his thought expressions came without ef- 
fort." 

Filson Young relates ^ of Columbus that ' * there 
gradually greiv up in his mind the intuition or con- 
viction — I refuse to call it an opinion — that over 
that blue verge of the west there was land to be 
found. How this seed of conviction first lodged in 
his mind it would be impossible to say." **As that 
other mystery began to grow in his mind, and that 
idea of worlds that might lie beyond the sea line 
began to take shape in his thoughts, he found in the 
holy wisdom of the prophets and the inspired writ- 
ings of the fathers a continual confirmation of his 
faith." 

Andrew D. Wliite says ^ of Bismarck that ''his 
insight and foresight seemed due to intuition — to 
sudden flashes which lighted up his course and de- 
termined his conduct." It is this same Bismarck 

1 "Memoires," Vol. I, p. 420. - "Christopher Columbus," Vol. 
I, p. 76. 2 "Seven Great Statesmen," p. 418. 

302 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

who in one of his letters to his wife says : * ' Good- 
night, my dear. It strikes twelve. I will go to bed 
and read yet the second chapter of Saint Peter. I 
do this noAv systematically, and after I have finished 
Peter I am going to read the Epistle to the Hebrews. 
There is no need of reminding me to remember our 
dear little Mary in my prayers. I do so every day. ' ' 

Oliver states ^ of Alexander Hamilton that he 
was like a boy who had dreamed a dream but could 
not prevail with men to accept it in all its glorious 
symmetry; that he sought power, not as an end in 
itself but as a means to the accomplishment of a 
vision. 

Cromwell declared he left Cambridge with a pur- 
pose of self-dedication "to that same lot, however 
mean or high toward which time leads me and the 
will of heaven. ' ' Yet it was this same leader of the 
British state who had said : * * Oh, I lived in and loved 
darkness and hated light. I hated godliness."^ 
Mrs. Gladstone confided in John Morley that the 
Great Commoner succeeded in the struggle for self- 
mastery "ever since he was three or four and 
twenty, first by the natural power of his character, 
and second by incessant wrestling in prayer — 
prayer that had been abundantly answered.'" 
David, kindly warrior and king of Israel, said: 
"The Lord is my strength and my shield; in Him 
hath my heart trusted and I am helped."* "The 
sins of my youth and my transgressions do not re- 

1 "Alexander Hamilton," by F. C. Oliver, p. 12. 2 "History of 
the English People," by J. R. Green, pp. 436-7- ^ "Life of Glad- 
stone," Vol. I, p. 189. * Psalm 28 : 7. 

303 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

member.* How precious are unto me thy thoughts, 
God! I awaken and I am still with thee."^ 
Jesus felt he had a mission to perform. He spoke 
of the will of God as supreme and aimed to set aside 
ceremonial tradition. Paul saw the vision of a more 
glorified humanity and thenceforth lived for his 
fello-vATnen.^ These are some of **the simple great 
ones, gone forever and ever by." 

It was because they were simple that they saw 
and were helped by God. Insight came to them be- 
cause they sought His will. Consciously or uncon- 
sciously, they placed themselves in harmony with 
the Infinite Intelligence. "If the body has many 
attributes of higher value than pleasure," says 
Cicero, "what, pray, think you of the mind? The 
wisest sages of antiquity believed that the mind 
contains an element of the celestial and divine. ' ' * 
Says Marcus Aurelius : * ' God is in man, and so we 
must constantly attend to the divinity within us, 
for it is only in this way that we can have any 
knowledge of the nature of God. ' ' And Agapetus : 
' ' He who knows himself will know God ; and he who 
knows God will be made like to God ; and he will be 
made like to God who has become worthy of God; 
and he becomes worthy who does nothing unworthy 
of God, but thinks the things that are His and 
speaks what He thinks and does what He speaks." 

Isaiah says : ' ' The Lord Eternal hath given me a 
tongue for teaching, that I should know how to 
strengthen the weary with the word. He wakeneth 



1 Psalm 25 : 7. 2 Psalm 139 : 18. ^ i Cor. 15. * De Finibus, 
II, 114. 

304 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

morning by morning, He wakeneth my ear to listen 
like those that are well tanght.'*^ Jeremiah: *'Be 
not afraid of them; for I am with thee to deliver 
thee, saith the Lord. And the Lord stretched forth 
His hand and touched me therewith on my mouth ; 
and the Lord said unto me, Behold I have put my 
words in thy mouth.'* ^ Ezekiel: *'And He said 
unto me, Son of man, all my words that I will speak 
unto thee receive in thy heart and hear them with 
thy ears.'* ^ And David: *'With Thee is the source 
of life; in Thy light shall we see light."* *'Who 
shall be able to stand in His holy place? He that 
is clean of hands and pure of heart." ^ 

"Happy are they," says Augustine, "who know 
it was Thou that gave the command. For all things 
are done by them that serve Thee, either for the 
providing of themselves of what is needful for the 
present, or for the foreshadowing of something to 
come hereafter."^ Thomas A Kempis pleads: 
* ' Seek for thyself a secret place, love to dwell alone 
wiih thyself, desire the conversation of none; but 
rather pour out devout prayer unto God, that thou 
mayest keep thy mind in compunction and thy con- 
science pure."^ St. Bernard says: "To lose thy- 
self in some sort, as if thou wert not, and to have 
no consciousness of thyself at all — to be emptied of 
thyself and be almost annihilated — such is heavenly 
conversation — so to be affected is to become God. ' ' ^ 

Smiles remarks: "Good sense, disciplined by 



1 Isaiah 50 : 4. 2 Jeremiah i : 8-9. ^ Ezekiel 3 : 10. * Psalm 36 : 10. 
5 Psalm 24:3-4. « "Confessions," 3:9. ^"Imitation of Christ," 
LIII. 8 "On Loving God." 

305 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

practical experience and inspired by goodness, is- 
sues in practical msdom. Indeed, goodness in a 
measure implies wisdom — the highest wisdom — the 
union of the worldly with the spiritual. ' ' ^ Deven- 
dranath Tagore in his autobiography relates: 
' * From now I began to train myself to listen to His 
conmiand, to understand the difference between my 
own inclinations and His will. What seemed to 
be the insidious promptings of my own desires I 
was careful to avoid; and what appeared to my 
conscience to be His conunand, that I tried to fol- 
low. Then I prayed to Him to inspire me "with 
righteousness, to guard me with moral strength, 
to give me patience, courage, fortitude and con- 
tentment. I could make out that He was dwelling 
within me, seated within my heart. Even as He, 
dwelling in the sky, guides the stars and planets, 
so does He, dwelling within my heart, inspire all 
my righteous feelings and guide my soul." 

In the Upanishads this is found: **We salute 
Thee, spirit of truth and cause of this universe. 
We salute Thee, essence of wisdom and upholder 
of all that is. Thou art the bestower of salvation 
and only God, the one without a second; eternal 
and all-pervading Brahma, we salute Thee." Says 
the Zend Avesta: '*0 maker of the material world, 
Thou holy one ! Wliich is the first place where the 
earth feels most happy? Azura Mazda answered: 
*It is the place whereon one of the faithful steps 
forward, Spitama Zarathustra ! ' " The Dham- 
mapada or '*Path to Virtue" of Buddliism de- 

1 "Character," p. 19. 

306 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

clares: **The virtuous man is happy in this world 
and he is happy in the next. He is happy when he 
thinks of the good he has done. He is still more 
happy when going on the good path. When the 
learned man drives away vanity by earnestness, he, 
the wise, climbs the terraced heights of wisdom. All 
that we are is the result of our thoughts; it is 
founded on our thoughts; it is made up of our 
thoughts. A supernatural person (a Buddha) is 
not easily found. He is not born everywhere. 
Wherever such a sage is born, that race prospers. ' ' 
Mahomet in the Koran asks : '*Dost thou not know 
that unto God belongeth the kingdom of heaven and 
earth? Neither have ye any protector or helper 
except God." Confucius stated that man's life 
was from God. The harmonious acting out of it 
was obedience to the mil of the Most High, and the 
violation of it was disobedience. He intimated that 
he had a mission from heaven and until it was ac- 
complished he was safe from all attempts to injure 
him. Jesus said: **My Father, He it is that doeth 
the work.'* Moses commanded: "Hear, Israel! 
The Lord, our God, is the one eternal being. And 
thou shalt love the Lord thy God with, all they heart 
and with all thy soul and with all thy might. And 
thou shalt do that which is right and good in the 
eyes of the Lord, in order that it may be well with 
thee." Gideon said: ''I shall not rule over you, 
neither shall my son rule over you ; the Lord shall 
rule over you. ' ' It was said of Daniel that he ex- 
celled all the presidents and lieutenants in the king- 
dom of Babylon because a superior spirit was in 

307 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

him, and that no manner of hurt was found on him 
because he had trusted in his God. 



Among philosophers Kant expressed the view 
that he who is permeated by the moral law is there- 
fore obliged to believe in the existence of God. 
Practical reason, he says, thus leads us to entertain 
convictions concerning something which lies beyond 
the limits defined by the theoretical reason. Bruno, 
in a larger sense than is generally appreciated, the 
founder of modern philosophy, is convinced that 
the Deity works at the heart of the world and is to 
be found at every point ; that the highest is every- 
where, if only our mind is open to it. 

''Heaven,'^ said Jacob Bohme three hundred 
years ago, *'is not up there in the sky, but it is 
here, within thyself where the divine life stirs 
within thee. God is not far ; thou livest in God and 
God in thee, and if thou art pure and holy, then thou 
art God.'* Descartes said: "The natural light 
teaches us that the effect cannot contain more than 
is the cause. It follows from this that nothing can 
come out of nothing, and that the perfect cannot 
proceed from the imperfect. If we apply this to 
our ideas it becomes clear that some of them arise 
from external causes, while others must be ex- 
plained as arising within us. But neither of these 
explanations is sufficient to make the idea of God 
as the infallible being, the essence of all perfection 
and reality, comprehensible. Since I myself am a 
finite being (and of this I am convinced by my 

308 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

doubts and my desires) I cannot have produced any 
such idea. Neither can it have arisen by any com- 
bination of particular, perceived perceptions, for it 
would not then contain the unity and indivisibility 
which are the marks of the idea of God. Moreover, 
every external cause is finite. There is, therefore, 
nothing left but to suppose that God Himself is the 
author of the idea. ' ' And again : * ' Every transition 
of thought takes place through immediate percep- 
tion, i.e., intuition." 

Hoffding says that ** Spinoza aims at nothing less 
than the highest result of all knowledge, vis. the 
most intimate union possible of individuality with 
continuity, of the particular with the sum of con- 
stant relations. He only succeeds in this when pos- 
tulating an intuition which reminds us now of the 
artist's conception, now of the mystic's vision," 
Schopenhauer says: *'It is possible in certain cases 
for knowledge to escape from the bondage of the 
will, at which time the individuality of man is can- 
celed and he becomes entirely absorbed in disin- 
terested contemplation. This revolution and 
emancipation, in which the will disappears and pure 
perception has the upper hand, can only be ex- 
plained as a sudden breaking forth of the faculty 
of intuition. ' ' 

Bergson is the latest of the modern philosophers 
to develop the idea of intuition. Hoffding re- 
marks ^ of the French philosopher that he is ob- 
scure with regard to the relation between intuition 
as a psychological condition and intuition as a con- 

*• "Modern Philosophers," by Harold Hoffding, p. 241. 

309 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

elusion of thought. Yet he has given great impetus 
to reflection upon the subject. For my own part, 
I am constrained to believe that no new truth is 
ever added to the thought of the world except by 
immediate intuition ; that is, by realization without 
demonstration. Empirical investigation assists by 
concentration of cognition in the discovery of hy- 
potheses before unknown, whether in invention, 
science or pure reason, but does not in itself dis- 
close that which is discovered, which comes to one 
suddenly and intuitively. Inductive and deductive 
principles as applied to experience only prove that 
which is already known. 

John Stuart Mill's view that all false ideas and 
tendencies within the ethical, religious and social 
spheres are invincible so long as the assertion is 
allowed to pass unchallenged that truths can be 
gained by immediate intuition, by way of pure 
thought, independently of experience and observa- 
tion, is to be answered by the fact that if the con- 
clusion is not afterwards probable on grounds of 
experience and right reason, inductively and de- 
ductively, it is not an intuition at all. 

It was such an intuitive message of the indwelling 
spirit that told Abraham he would become the 
father of many nations. It was such a spiritual 
light that came to Bil'am when he said of Jacob: 
* 'I see him, but not now ; I behold him, but not nigh, 
there steppeth forth a star out of Jacob and there 
ariseth a scepter out of Israel. ''* ** There shall 



1 Numbers 24 : 17. 

310 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

rule the one from Jacob," the prophet concludes. 
It was the living God who spoke through Zechariah 
as follows: *' Behold a man, Sprout is his name, 
since out of Ms own place shall he sprout up, even 
he shall bnild the temple of the Lord. Yea, he shall 
bnild the temple of the Lord ; and he shall bear the 
glory, and shall sit and rule upon his throne." ^ 

It was this divine intuition, this reflection of the 
mind of God, that enabled David, who from shep- 
herd boy became king of Israel, to perceive that he 
would live again and become the ruler of the world. 
By the Divine Mind it was said: *'I have found 
David my servant ; with my holy oil have I anointed 
him, mth my hand shall he be firmly established; 
also my arm shall strengthen him. Also I will ap- 
point him my first born, the highest among the Icings 
of the earth/' '*My son art thou," was said of 
David. '*Ask it of me and I will give thee nations 
for an inheritance, and for thy possession the utter- 
most ends of the earth." ^ ''The spirit of the Lord 
came suddenly upon David from that day and for- 
ward. ' ' ' 

"And David felt conscious that the Lord had es- 
tablished him as king over Israel."* ""VMien thy 
days shall be completed, and thou wilt sleep with 
thy fathers, then will I set up thy seed after thee, 
who will proceed out of thy bowels, and I will es- 
tablish his kingdom. He it is that shall build a 
house for my name, and I mil establish his kingdom 
forever. "° "Thou hast also spoken of thy ser- 

1 Zechariah 6:12-13. 2 Psalm 2:7-8 . ^I Samuel 16:13. * II 
Samuel 5:12, ^ Ibid., 7:12-13. 

311 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

vant's house for a distant time." ^ *'Aiid then the 
king, who was a simple man though a conqueror, 
again may have reflected the intuition of the Most 
High when he said : ' ' Thou preservest me to be the 
head of nations, a people ivhich I hnoiv not shall 
serve me."^ "The spirit of the Lord spoke 
through me and his word was upon my tongue. 
Thus said the God of Israel, concerning me spake 
the Rock of Israel, that I should be ruler over men, 
be righteous, ruling in the fear of God. " ^ It was 
this same kind of a voice that said to Daniel: ''But 
thou, go thy way toward the end; and thou shall 
rest and rise again for thy lot at the end of the 
days. ' ' 

If a man's ambition is his intuitive perception of 
what he may become if he ^vill, the thought of Alex- 
ander the Great that he must conquer and govern 
the world was as inspired as that of David. Momm- 
sen says : ' ' Caesar renewed the interrupted work of 
the great Alexander whose image we may well be- 
lieve never was absent from Csesar's soul. In the 
capital of his empire he regulated the destinies of 
the world for the present and the future. ' ' The Em- 
peror Julian remarks : * ''Nor do I despise that lot 
with which I was myself endowed by the God Helios, 
that I should be born of a house that rules and 
governs the world in my time. ' ' 

Gibbon says of Jinghis Kahn that "he accepted 
the title of Jinghis, the most great, and a divine 
right to the conquest and dominion of the earth." 

Ill Samuel 7:19. -Ibid., 22:44. ^Daniel 12:13. * Loeb ed., 
Vol. I, p. 355. 

312 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

The British historian also declares that *Hhe con- 
quest and monarchy of the world was the first object 
of the ambition of Timur." Gregory VII felt that 
he had been entrusted by God with the task of unit- 
ing all mankind in a single society in which His will 
would be the only law. This was also the thought 
of Boniface VIII. Charles XII longed to emulate 
Alexander. Turenne most admired the exploits of 
the Greek conqueror and of Julius Caesar. So did 
Napoleon, who in his exile at St. Helena said that 
the grand ideal toward which his efforts had been 
directed was a great confederacy of peoples, bound 
together "by unity of codes, principles, opinions, 
feelings and interests." He prophesied that it 
would yet be realized, sooner or later, *'by the force 
of circumstances. ' ' ^ 

If these figures of the past had the same intuitive 
perception of destiny, may not the reason for this 
be that they were the same spirit, born again from 
life to life, showing quite naturally the same mighty 
talents and aspirations'? May it not be, preposter- 
ous as it seems because new to our thought, that 
the line of David and Daniel, who saw themselves 
returning in another age, is as follows: David, 
Sheshonk, Shalmonesser II, Sargon, Psammeticus 
I, Daniel, Miltiades, Alcibiades, Alexander the 
Great, Ptolemy Philadelphus, Hannibal, Mithrada- 
tes I, Julius Caesar, Tiberius, Trajan, Septimus 
Severus, Aurelian, Maximin, Julian, Attila, Justin- 
ian, Heracleus, Leo the Isaurian, Harun al Raschid, 
Alfred, Hugh the Great, Canute, Gregory VII, Al- 

1 "Cambridge Modern History" Vol. X, p. i. 

313 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

phonso VII, Jingliis Kahn, Boniface VIII, Timur, 
Casimir IV, Suleiman the Magnificent, Turenne, 
Charles XII and Napoleon? 

This might, then, be the meaning of the words: 
*'The throne of David will be established before the 
world forever." As the Living God said through 
the prophet Nathan : * ' When thy days will be com- 
pleted and when thou shalt sleep with thy fathers, 
then will I set up thy seed after thee, who shall 
proceed out of thy body, and I will establish the 
throne of his kingdom forever. I, too, will be to 
him as a father and he shall indeed be to me as a 
son; so that when he committeth iniquity I will 
chastise him with the rod of men and with the 
plagues of the children of men; but my kingdom 
shall not depart from him, as I caused it to depart 
from Saul, whom I removed from before thee ; thy 
throne shall be established forever." 

When he heard this it is related that ''then went 
King David in and sat down before the Lord, and 
he said. What am I, Lord Eternal? and what is 
my house, that Thou hast brought me as far as hith- 
erward ? And this was yet too small a thing in Thy 
eyes, Lord Eternal; and Thou hast spoken also 
of Thy servant's house for a distant time. And is 
this the desert of man, Lord Eternal ? And what 
can David add yet more to speak unto Thee ? Since 
Thou, Lord Eternal, knowest well Thy servant. 
For the sake of Thy servant, and in accordance with 
Thy own heart, hast Thou done all this great thing, 
so as to let Thy servant hnoiv it." Before David 
was king of Israel he may also have been Joshua, 

814 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

Jacob and Abraham. He may also have been Tig- 
lath Pileser I, Rameses II, Amenhotep III, Thet- 
mosis III, Hammurabi, Gudea and many another 
great leader of men. 

This may be he of whom it was said through 
Isaiah: **And there shall be founded through kind- 
ness a throne and there shall sit upon it in truth- 
fulness in the tent of David a judge who seeketh 
justice and is quick in righteousness." This may 
be he of whom the same prophet said: "And there 
shall come forth a shoot out of the stem of Jesse, 
and a sprout shall spring up out of his roots. And 
there shall rest upon him the spirit of the Lord, the 
spirit of wisdom and understanding, the spirit of 
counsel and might, the spirit of knowledge and of 
the fear of the Lord. ' ' This may be he of whom the 
great prophet of the eighth century also said : *' Be- 
hold, for a lawgiver unto the people have I ap- 
pointed him, a prince and a commander of the peo- 
ple. Behold a nation tlicfu Jcnowest not shalt thou 
call, and a nation that knew thee not shall run after 
thee." 

It may be he of whom it was said : * 'And I let come 
forth out of Jacob a seed, and out of Judah an in- 
heritor of my mountains ; and my elect shall inherit 
it and my servants shall dwell there. ' ' It may be he 
of whom Jeremiah spoke when he said: *' Behold 
days are coming when I will raise up unto David a 
righteous sprout, and he shall reign as king and 
prosper, and he shall execute justice and righteous- 
ness on the earth." And it may be he alone that 
Micah foresaw when he declared: ''But thou, Beth- 

315 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

lehem Ephratah, the least though thou be among 
the thousands of Judah, yet out of thee there shall 
come forth unto me that is to be ruler of Israel, 
whose origin is from olden times, from most ancient 
days. Therefore will he be given up until the time 
that she who travaileth hath brought forth, then 
shall the remnant of his brethren return with the 
children of Israel. And he shall stand forward and 
feed Israel through the strength of the Lord, 
through the excellency of the name of the Lord his 
God; and they shall abide safely; for now shall he 
he great even unto the ends of the earth.' ^ 

It may be he of whom it was said: *'Out of him 
Cometh forth the corner stone, out of him the tent 
nail, out of him the battle bow, out of him every 
ruler of others together. And they shall be like 
mighty men, treading down their enemies in the 
mire of the streets in the battle, and they shall fight 
because the Lord is with them, and the riders on 
horses shall be made ashamed.'* Malachi speaks: 
*' Behold I will send my messenger and he shall clear 
out the way before me ; and suddenly will come to 
his temple the Lord whom ye seek and the messen- 
ger of the covenant whom ye desire, for behold he is 
coming, saith the Lord of Hosts." And also: 
'* There shall rise unto you that fear my name the 
sun of righteousness with healing in his wings." 
**It shall happen on that day," says Isaiah, **that he 
of the root of Jesse who shall stand as an ensign 
of the people, to him shall nations come to inquire, 
and his resting place shall be glorious." 

The Old Testament seers are perhaps the first 

316 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

to lay down the principle of everlasting life, but 
they have had many successors. Socrates, greatest 
of teachers of free Athens, said that death was only 
the separation of the soul from the body; that the 
intelligence is soul, like the Divine Mind, and both 
are immortal; that we recollect afterwards things 
which we acquired before our birth; that "if the 
soul exists before birth and when it comes into life 
and is born from anything else than death and a 
state of death, must it not also exist after dying, 
since it must be born again?" ''These souls," he 
says, ''flit about until, through the desire of the 
corporeal which clings to them, they are again im- 
prisoned in a body." And again: "God and the 
principle of life and everything that is immortal can 
never perish. The soul being immortal is also im- 
perishable." 

Aristotle says: "Now, though only one of the 
powers of the soul, intellect alone of these powers 
has no bodily organ ; it alone is immortal ; it alone 
is divine." In the Upanishads, seven centuries be- 
fore Jesus, Death answers Nachiketas : ' ' The know- 
ing self is not born; it dies not; it sprang from 
nothing; nothing sprang from it. The ancient is 
unborn, eternal, everlasting ; he is not killed tliough 
the body is killed. If the slayer thinks that he slays, 
or if the slain thinks he is slain, they do not under- 
stand, for this one does not slay nor is that one 
slain." "There can be no question," says Profes- 
sor Pratt, ^ "that the belief in immortality is much 

1 "India and Its Faiths," by J. B. Pratt, p. 105 

317 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

stronger and much more prevalent in India than it 
is in Europe or America. Ahnost everyone accepts 
it, takes it as a matter of course and plans his life 
in reference to it." Philo of Alexandria before 
Christian thought had perfected itself and Gior- 
dano Bruno in later times attested to the same be- 
lief. Hume says : ' ' Metempsychosis is the only sys- 
tem of immortality that philosophy can hearken 
to.^' 

Bulwer opines : ** Eternity may be but an endless 
series of those migrations which men call deaths, 
abandonments of home after home, even to fairer 
scenes and loftier heights. Age after age the spirit 
may shift his tent, fated not to death in the dull 
Elysium of the heathen but carrying with it over- 
more its two attributes, activity and energy. ' ' And 
Schopenhauer makes this statement: "We find the 
doctrine of metempsychosis springing from the 
earliest and noblest ages of the human race, and 
always spread abroad on the earth as the belief of 
the great majority of mankind." What is true in 
the nature of things is for all. This is Isaiah's 
meaning when he declares : "The Lord of Hosts . . . 
will destroy on this mountain the face of the cover- 
ing which covereth all the nations. He will destroy 
death to eternity; and the Lord Eternal will wipe 
away the tear from off all faces ; and the shame of 
his people will He remove from off the earth; for 
the Lord hath spoken it. ' ' 

The character and genius of those mentioned as 
of the possible line of David, who may have been 

318 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

reborn from life to life, are the same. The might- 
iest conquerors by talent for movement of troops in 
the mass, consummate statesmen by being builders 
of unity and order, lawgivers by condensation of 
code and dispensers of justice, writers and even 
orators when the need required it, simple men gifted 
with practical sense, they, or, more properly speak- 
ing he, may last have seen earthly expression in 
Napoleon. In each life the contour of the face — 
the soul's mark of its individuality — is the same. 
Potentially, the personal characteristics in each 
case are similar. 

When he became selfish and cruel he was pun- 
ished. *'I have found David my servant; with my 
holy oil have I anointed him, with whom my hand 
shall be firmly established ; also my right arm shall 
strengthen him. He will call upon me. Thou art 
my father, my God and the rock of my salvation. 
Also I will appoint him my first born, the highest 
among the kings of the earth. Forevermore will I 
keep for him my kindness, and my covenant shall 
stand faithfully with him. And I appoint forever 
his seed, and his throne as the days of heaven. If 
his children forsake my law and walk not in my 
ordinances; if they profane my statutes and keep 
not my commandments ; then will I visit with the rod 
their transgressions and with plagues their iniquity. 
Nevertheless my kindness will I not make utterly 
void from him, and I will not act falsely against my 
faithfulness. I will not profane my covenant and 
what is gone out of my lips will I not alter. One 
thing have I sworn by my holiness, that I will not 

319 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

lie unto David. His seed shall endure forever, and 
his throne shall be like the sun before me. ' ' 

The French Emperor was not unlike Alexander 
and Caesar. Alfred and Canute were not dissimi- 
lar to David. It may have been the same intuitive 
knowledge that God was with him that led David 
with his sling to approach the giant Goliath with 
his sword and armor and say, "Thou comest unto 
me with a sword and with a spear and with a jave- 
lin, but I come to thee in the name of the Lord of 
Hosts, the God of the arrays of Israel, that thou 
hast defied," and that led Napoleon, upon return- 
ing to France as an outlaw and with the armies of 
Louis XVIII and Europe against him, to open his 
coat to the soldiers who had been ordered to fire 
upon him and exclaim, "Shoot your Emperor!" 
It was the same love of learning that animated 
Ptolemy II, Harun, Julian, Alexander, Tiberius 
and Bonaparte in Egypt. And it was the same 
determination, courage and daring that carried 
Csesar through his trial with the pirates, led Psam- 
meticus to a united kingdom and so many times 
stood David in good stead. The Roman conqueror 
did not finally resort to arms until nearly forty. 
Julian turned from scholarship to defeat the Ger- 
mans. It came to them because of memory of their 
o\Aai past experience how to guide armies and re- 
build civilization. 

As peculiar and weird, as unreal and merely spec- 
ulative as the suggestion appears, this man may 
arise again in the United States and be he whom 
Tolstoy predicted would come and be a new Na- 

320 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

poleon to make the world one republic in a feder- 
ation of peoples. He it may be who will have an 
influence in reshaping the world. Many in our day 
have groAATi to look upon the Bible as good to be 
taught to children in Sunday School, but as out- 
side the pale of practical and workaday affairs. 
Yet it has within it the living truth. It contains 
the secrets of the ages. It holds the message of 
the Great Time. It gives the simple truths by 
which all men may live righteously and behold for 
themselves the light. And it foretells the coming 
of the Messiah, who is not any more or less than 
a man as simple as David, who may have been 
trained by the Almighty these many centuries for 
the work of unification he has to do with the help 
of inspiration from on high. 

Nowhere are such innate abilities likely to find 
full usefulness than in the United States, which 
needs men who fear naught but God and *'dare not 
lie. " In no age such as this are the obliteration of 
self in a mighty work and the talent for government 
for the good of all so likely to be understood. At 
no period in history have the peoples so sought the 
man who mil fulfill the message: **He shall come 
doAvn \\ke rain upon the mown grass, as showers 
that are dropping on the earth. In his days shall 
the righteous flourish, and abundance of peace shall 
be till the moon shall be no more. And he shall 
have dominion from sea to sea and from the river 
unto the ends of the earth." It may be that he will 
come to help lead the American people in their 
maximum of strength so that freedom and right 

321 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

may become worldwide. And possibly lie will by his 
leadership assist in restoring the Jews to their land 
and in making Israel among the greatest of the na- 
tions of the earth. 

It was said through Ezekiel: "And speak unto 
them, Thus hath said the Lord Eternal, behold I 
will take the children of Israel from among the 
nations whither they are gone, and I will gather 
them from every side and bring them unto their 
own land. And I will make them into one nation on 
the land, on the mountains of Israel ; and one king 
shall be over them all for king ; and they shall not 
be any more two nations, nor shall they at any time 
be two Idngdoms any more ; neither shall they de- 
file themselves any more with their idols and with 
their detestable things, and with all their trans- 
gressions; and I will save them out of all their 
dwelling places wherein they have sinned, and I 
will cleanse them, and they shall be unto me for a 
people, and I will be unto them for a God. And my 
servant David shall be king over them; and one 
shepherd shall be for them all ; and in my ordinances 
shall they walk, and my statutes shall they observe 
and do them. And they shall dwell in the land that 
I have given unto my servant, unto Jacob, wherein 
your fathers have dwelt; and they shall dwell 
therein, they and their children and their children 's 
children forever. And I ^\dll make with them a 
covenant of peace, an everlasting covenant shall it 
be with them, and I will be unto them for a God 
and they shall be unto me for a people. And the 
nations shall know that I am the Lord who sancti- 

322 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

fieth Israel, when my sanctuary shall be in the midst 
of them forevermore.'^ 

This does not necessarily mean that the Jews 
will be returned merely to Palestine. It may sig- 
nify that they will occupy all the land ''from the 
river unto the ends of the sea," which now con- 
stitutes the Arabian Peninsula, Syria and Asia 
Minor. Within the territory encompassed by 
boundaries drawn from the Euphrates and the Per- 
sian Gulf to the Arabian, Red, Mediterranean and 
Black Seas Israel might rear a state which would 
be the center of the world's wealth. This could be a 
temporal reward for long dispersion. 

Does not the Lord declare, through Ezekiel, of 
the man destined to assist in this task: "After 
many days shalt thou be ordered forward; in the 
end of 3^ears shalt thou come into the land that is 
recovering from the sword (the United States, 
where pennanent peace has been most discussed), 
and is gathered together out of many peoples, 
against the mountains of Israel, Avhich have been 
ruined for a long time: to a people (of the United 
States) that are brought forth out of the nations, 
and that now dwell in safety, all of them. Thou 
shalt ascend and come like a tempest, like a cloud 
to cover the earth wilt thou be, thou, and all thy 
armies, and the many people with thee. Therefore 
prophecy, son of man, and say unto Gog, Thus hath 
saith the Lord Eternal, behold on the day when 
my people of Israel dwelleth in safety (as they 
are now beginning to) shalt thou know my power. 

"And thou wilt come from thy place out of the 

323 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

fartlierest ends of the north (the United States), 
thou and many people with thee, all of them riding 
upon horses, a great assemblage and a mighty- 
army ; and thou wilt come up against my people of 
Israel, like a cloud to cover the land; in the latter 
days will this be, and I will bring them over my land 
in order that the nations may know me when I am 
sanctified on Thee before their eyes, Gog. Thus 
hath said the Lord Eternal, Art thou not he of 
whom I have spoken in ancient days, through means 
of my servants the prophets of Israel, who prophe- 
sied in those days many years, that I would bring 
thee against them ? 

"And it shall come to pass at the same time, on 
the day of Gog's coming over the land of Israel, 
saith the Lord Eternal, that my fury shall be kin- 
dled in my nose. And in my zealousness, in the fire 
of my wrath have I spoken, Surely on that day 
shall there be a great earthquake in the country of 
Israel; and there shall quake at my presence the 
fishes of the sea (submarines), and the fowls of the 
heavens (aircraft), and the beasts of the field (great 
guns), and every creeping thing that creepeth upon 
the earth (trenches and machine fire), and the 
mountains (great nations) shall be thrown down, 
and the cliffs (of a coast city) shall fall, and every 
wall (barrier between men) shall fall to the ground. 
And I mil call against him throughout all my moun- 
tains for the sword, saith the Lord Eternal: every 
man's sword shall be against his brother. And I 
will hold judgment over him with pestilence and 
with blood shedding; and an overflowing rain (of 

3S4 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

bullets), and great hailstones (shells), fire and sul- 
phur (liquid fire and poisonous gases) will I let 
over him and his armies, and over the many people 
that are with him. Thus will I magnify myself, 
and make myself kno\Mi before the eyes of many 
nations : and they shall know that I am the Lord. ' ' 

The man who will help do this work mil need to 
be as martially inclined as Eameses, David, Alex- 
ander, Hannibal, Cassar, Trajan, Attila, Heracleus, 
Jinghis, Suleiman, Turenne, Charles XII and Na- 
poleon. He will need to be a statesman as they 
and Sargon, Alcibiades, Ptolemy, Tiberius, Septi- 
mus Severus, Leo the Isaurian, Harun, Gregory 
VII and Boniface VIII were statesmen. He will 
need to be a lawgiver like Hammurabi, Justinian 
and Napoleon. He will need to be able to express 
himself as did David, Caesar, Julian, Gregory VII, 
Turenne and Napoleon. He will need to be a builder 
of unity as were Alexander, Caesar, Hugh the Great, 
Canute, Alphonso VII, Jinghis, Timur and Casi- 
mir. He will need to evince the religious enthus- 
iasm of David, Maximin, Julian, Leo and Gregory 
VII. He will need to be an orator like Caesar, who 
was the rival of Cicero. He will need to be unsel- 
fish, lest **he forsake my law" and be brought to 
grief like Miltiades, Alcibiades, Caesar, Attila, 
Charles XII and Napoleon. 

He will need to be a simple servant of the Most 
High, as were Abraham, Jacob, Joshua, David, 
Daniel, Julian, Harun, Alfred, Canute and Gregory. 
Otherwise he will not receive the light to guide him 

325 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

through vicissitudes and perils. It may be ex- 
pected that should he appear he will be found as 
gifted with energy, ability and simplicity as all the 
''line of David." When and where he cometh no 
man knoweth. All those who believe they resemble 
in features the great French conqueror will per- 
haps prime themselves for the mighty task they 
imagine to be before them. One of these, of the 
name of Chandler, spent several years in an asylum 
for the insane. And there comes to mind the amus- 
ing story of ''Bunker Bean," who conceived the 
idea that he could make himself believe he was Na- 
poleon and therefore be capable of mighty deeds. 

But only he who has the gift and memory of the 
marvelous experience of the "line of David" and 
is intuitively inspired by the Almighty can wield 
the bow of Ulysses. Then he will achieve and rise 
to fame by seeming miracle. So natural and simple 
will he be in his manner, action and thought that 
ideas will come to him, as to the inspired leaders 
of the ages, ' ' out of the air. ' ' It may be he of whom 
Isaiah prophesied long ago : 

"And there shall rest upon him the spirit of the 
Lord, the spirit of wisdom and understanding, the 
spirit of counsel and might, the spirit of knowledge 
and the fear of the Lord. And he shall be animated 
by the fear of the Lord ; and not after the sight of 
his eyes shall he judge, and not after the hearing 
of his ears shall he decide ; but he shall judge with 
righteousness the poor, and decide with equity for 
the suffering ones of the earth ; and he shall smite 
the earth with the rod of his mouth, and with the 

326 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

breath of his lips shall he slay the wicked. And 
righteousness shall be the girdle of his loins, and 
faithfulness the girdle of his hips. And the wolf 
shall then dwell with the sheep, and the leopard 
shall lie down with the Idd; and the calf and the 
young lion and the fatling shall be together, and a 
little boy (simple man) shall lead them. And the 
cow and the she-bear shall feed, together shall their 
young ones lie down ; and the lion shall like the ox 
eat straw. And the suckling child shall play on 
the hole of the asp, and on the basilisks den shall 
the weaned child stretch forth his hand. They shall 
not do hurt nor destroy on all my holy mountain ; 
for the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the 
Lord as the waters cover the sea.'* 

Indeed, it may be that this personality of so much 
experience throughout the centuries will be called 
upon to rule because he will fulfill the ideal of the 
Emperor Julian, who wrote sixteen centuries ago : 
* ' But now I must demand from it an account, as far 
as possible, of the man who is good and kingly and 
great souled. In the first place, then, he is devout 
and does not neglect the worship of the gods, and 
secondly he is pious and ministers to his parents, 
both when they are alive and after their death, and 
he is friendly to his brothers, and reverences the 
gods who protect the family, while to supplicants 
and strangers he is mild and gentle; and he is 
anxious to gratify good citizens, and governs the 
masses with justice and for their benefit. And 
wealth he loves, not that which is heavy with gold 

327 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and silver, but that which is full of the true good 
will of his friends, and service mthout flattery. 
Though by nature he is brave and gallant, he takes 
no pleasure in war, and detests civil discord, though 
when men do attack him, whether by some chance or 
by reason of their own wickedness, he resists them 
bravely and defends himself with energy, and car- 
ries through his enterprises to the end, not desist- 
ing until he has destroyed the power of the foe and 
made it subject to himself. 

"But after he has conquered by force of arms, 
he makes his sword cease from slaughter, because 
he thinks that for one who is no longer defending 
himself to go on killing and laying waste is to incur 
pollution. And being by nature fond of work, and 
great of soul, he shares in the labors of all; and 
claims the lion's share of these labors, then divides 
with the others the rewards for the risks which he 
has run, and is glad and rejoices, not because he 
has more gold and silver treasure than other men, 
and palaces adorned with costly furniture, but be- 
cause he is able to do good to many, and to bestow 
upon all men whatever they may chance to lack. 
This is what he who is truly a king claims for him- 
self." 

Creasy, in his ** fifteen Decisive Battles of the 
World,'* says of the great Hun: "When we turn 
from the legendary to the historic Attila, we see 
clearly that he was not one of the vulgar herd of 
barbaric conquerors. Consummate military skill 
may be traced in his campaigns ; and he relied far 
less on the brute force of armies for the aggrandize- 

338 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

ment of his empire than on the unbounded influence 
over the affections of friends and the fears of foes, 
which his genius enabled him to acquire. Austerely 
sober in his private life, — severely just on the judg- 
ment seat, — conspicuous among a nation of war- 
riors for hardihood, strength and skill in every 
martial exercise, — grave and deliberate in counsel, 
but rapid and remorseless in execution, — he gave 
safety and security to all who were under his do- 
minion, while he urged a warfare of extermination 
against all who opposed or sought to escape from 
it." 

Arrian, whose authorities knew Alexander the 
Great personally, says: ''His body was beautiful 
and well proportioned ; his mind brisk and active ; 
his courage wonderful. He was strong enough to 
undergo hardships, and willing to meet dangers; 
ever ambitious of glory and a strict observer of re- 
ligious duties. As to those pleasures which re- 
garded the body, he showed himself indifferent ; as 
to the desires of the mind, insatiable. He was fam- 
ous for exciting his soldiers with courage and ani- 
mating them with hopes of success, as also in dis- 
pelling their fears by his own example and mag- 
nanimity. ' ' 

Mommsen relates of the Roman conqueror: 
' ' Caesar retained both his bodily vigor and his elas- 
ticity of mind unimpaired. In fencing and in rid- 
ing he was a match for any of his soldiers, and his 
swimming saved his life at Alexandria. Although 
a gentleman, a man of genius and a monarch, he 
had still a heart. In his character, as well as in his 

329 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

place in history, Caesar occupies a position where 
the great contrasts of existence meet and balance 
each other. Of the mightiest creative power, and 
yet at the same time of the most penetrating judg- 
ment; no longer a youth and yet not an old man; 
of the highest energy of will and the greatest ca- 
pacity of execution; filled with republican ideals 
and yet born to be a king ; a Roman in the deepest 
sense of his nature, and yet called to reconcile and 
combine in himself, as well as in the outer world, 
tlie Roman and Hellenic types of culture — Caesar 
was an entire and perfect man.'* 

J. Holland Rose says of Napoleon: "In spite of 
his prodigious failure, he was superlatively great 
in all that pertains to government, the quickening 
of human energies and the art of war. His great- 
ness lies, not merely in the abiding importance of 
his undertakings, but still more in the titanic force 
that he threw into the inception and accomplish- 
ment of all of them — a force which invests the 
storm-blasted monoliths strewn along the latter 
portion of his career with a majesty unapproach- 
able by a tamer race of toilers. ' ' The military gen- 
ius of David built the nation of Israel, which his 
statecraft united, and made possible the messages 
of the great prophets. Despite one stain of sen- 
suality, he is to be judged by his habitual recogni- 
tion of a generous standard of conduct, the purity 
and lofty justice of an administration never stained 
by selfishness, his power of winning men's hearts, 
and the fruits of his deeply religious nature.* 

lEncy. Brit., VII, pp. 858-9. 

330 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

Sheshonk founded a new dynasty in Egypt by his 
own capacity, conquered Israel, Judah and Nubia, 
and developed his kingdom to great prosperity/ 
During the long reign of thirty-five years of Shal- 
manesar II over Assyria, Babylon was reduced to 
vassalage by his military prowess. Great in sol- 
dierly and administrative qualities the second Sar- 
gon arose by his own capacities to be king of Baby- 
lon.^ Daniel was made ruler over the province of 
Babylon and chief of the superintendents because 
enlightenment and intelligence and superior wis- 
dom were found in him.^ Psammeticus was a firm 
and wise ruler under whom Egypt recovered its 
prosperity and extended its boundaries. * Greece 
was saved at Marathon by the genius of Militiades.^ 

Athens lost the war with Syracuse because it 
failed to make use of the talents of Alcibiades.^ 
and Hellas finally triumphed through Alexander. 
Philadelphus was the greatest of the Ptolemies and 
patronized scientific and literary research.^ Han- 
nibal was not only a great warrior, but a statesman 
and a man of wonderful resource. The innate mili- 
tary prowess of Mithradates I enabled him to suc- 
ceed his brother on the throne and extend the fron- 
tiers of Parthia over Babylon, Bactria, Iran and 
Media.^ And it was the same intuition that led 
Tiberius, Trajan, Septimus Severus, Aurelian, 
Maximin Deza and Julian to rise by military steps 
and solely by individual merit to the purple. 

lEncy. Brit, IX, p. 86. 2 ibid.. Ill, p. 104. 3 Daniel 2:48 and 
5 : 14. 4 Ency. Brit., IX, p. 87. ^ "Fifteen Decisive Battles of 
the World," by E. S. Creasy, e ^hueydides (Jowett), p. 419. 
^ "History of Egypt," by Breasted. 8 Ency. Brit., XX„ p. 871. 

331 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

Finley says "the fame of Heracleus would have 
rivalled that of Alexander, Csesar or Hannibal had 
he expired at Jerusalem after the successful ter- 
mination of the Persian war. He had established 
peace throughout the Empire, restored the strength 
of the Roman government, revived the power of 
Christianity in the East, and replanted the holy 
cross on Mount Calvary. His glory admitted of no 
addition.'*^ Of Leo the Isaurian, Foord writes: 
''He opened his reign with the most splendid victory 
in history, saving his realm and religion from de- 
struction, once more staving off from Europe an 
attack which could not otherwise have been re- 
sisted ; out of the wild chaos about him he built up 
a fresh and in many respects an entirely new struc- 
ture of Europe, throwing into the tremendous task 
a force and enduring energy, a stern and pure re- 
ligious enthusiasm. Where he inherited ruin and 
misery, he left strength, order, peace and reviving 
prosperity."^ 

Justinian, who reformed the legal and adminis- 
trative system of the Empire and instigated its 
wars and ecclesiastical reforms, was a man of re- 
markable bodily and mental energy. The reign of 
Harun Al-Rashid was the most brilliant in the his- 
tory of the Caliphate. Scholar and poet, he sur- 
rounded himself with learned men. Jinghis Kahn 
and Timur subdued Asia, but possessed the traits 
and likeness of Napoleon or Csesar. Spain was 
united by the statesmanship and military talents of 

1 "Greece Under the Romans," pp. 339-40. 2 "The Byzantine 
Empire," by Edward Foord. 

333 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

Alphonso VII. The executive and diplomatic ge- 
nius of Gregory VII laid the foundations of papal 
power for centuries. Though the life of Boniface 
VIII fell in a more unfortunate time, he evinced 
the same qualities of leadership. Alfred and Ca- 
nute were alike as simple warriors and statesmen, 
loved by their followers. Casimir IV, of Poland, 
was one of the great statesmen of his age. His 
habits were homely but his political sagacity pro- 
found. 

Creasy says of Suleiman the Magnificent: **We 
must remember his princely courage, his military 
genius, his high and enterprising spirit, his strict 
observance of the laws of his religion mthout any 
taint of bigoted persecution, the order and econ- 
omy which he combined with so much grandeur and 
munificence, his liberal encouragement of art and 
literature, his zeal for the diffusion of education, 
the conquests by which he extended his empire, and 
the wise and comprehensive legislation mth which 
he provided for the good government of all his sub- 
jects." Hugh the Great was the real founder of 
the dynasty of the Capets. He might have made 
himself king had he chosen, but, instead, nominally 
supported the last of the Carolingians Avhile arro- 
gating to himself all real power. Cardinal de Eetz 
says that Turenne from his youth up possessed all 
good qualities. He was a warrior and of heroic 
mould. Montecuculli, his opponent and enemy of 
the battlefield, said : ' * Today a man has fallen who 
did honor to man," and uncovered respectfully.^ 

1 "History of the Ottoman Turks," by Edward Creasy. 

333 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

If the assumption that all of these lives from 
David to Napoleon were but one humble personality, 
it may be said that down the pathway of the cen- 
turies marched this self-same spirit of whom it was 
promised: *'Also I will appoint him my first born, 
the highest among the kings of the earth." Con- 
quering, reorganizing, rehabilitating, unifying 
wherever he was reborn, whether in Asia, Africa 
or Europe, he was enabled to perform his task in 
the development of civilization. After David he 
was three times king of Egypt, four times king of 
Babylon, once prophet in and high official of Baby- 
lon, three times leader in Greece, once greatest of 
Carthaginians, including Julius Caesar seven times 
emperor of Rome, once king of the Huns, three 
times East Roman emperor, once Caliph, twice king 
of England, once of Castile, once of Poland, once 
of France, once of Sweden and once of Turkey, 
twice pope, once Mongol and another time Berlas 
conqueror, once French general and finally French 
emperor. 

Trained in government and war, he will be ready 
when he again appears for the great task the Al- 
mighty, it may be, will give him to do — the govern- 
ment of the earth as a servant of God and of hu- 
manity in the Republic of Man. **In his days 
abundance of peace shall be till the moon shall be 
no more." **And my servant shall be over them." 
*'For a child has been born unto us, and the govern- 
ment is placed on his shoulders; and his name is 
called Wonderful, counselor of the Mighty God, of 
the Everlasting Father, the prince of peace, for 

334 



GENIUS FOR THE TASK 

promoting the increase of the government, and for 
peace without end, upon the throne of David and 
upon his kingdom {unto the ends of the earth), to 
establish it and to support it through justice and 
righteousness, from henceforth and unto eternity; 
the zeal of the Lord of Hosts will do this." "AVlio 
can withstand the day of His coming? Who can 
stand when He appeareth? for He is like the fire 
of the melter, and like the lye of the washers." In 
his day it will be said: "Now the Lord hath brought 
it to fulfillment and hath done according as He hath 
spoken." And if this spirit is to reappear by 
primordial law, all human souls will reappear ; and 
if all reappear, we shall have such a flowering of 
genius in this land of the free, where is to be found 
ample opportunity for expression and achievement, 
as the earth has never known. 



335 



CHAPTER XIV 

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

"Our faith gives us assurance that God's hand guides events 
both great and small ; and the science of history has no higher 
task than to justify this faith." — Droysen. 

"And when this cometh to pass (lo, it will come), then shall they 
know that a prophet hath been among them." Ezekiel 33 133. 

npHERE were men in Israel in ancient days who 
-■- denied the wisdom of the prophets unless it co- 
incided with what they already believed. When the 
Babylonian monarchy was about to attack Jerusa- 
lem it was the voice of Jeremiah which warned his 
people that it would be wisest for them to quietly 
accept the joke of the stronger and rising king- 
dom. They refused to listen, considered him a 
traitor and cast him into a dungeon. But his words 
were fulfilled. Then, lil^e Washington, he refused 
the monarchial honors the conquering Nebuchad- 
nezzar desired to bestow upon him, and merely 
chose an abode safe from molestation in his own 
land, asking also that his friend Baruch be freed. 
Moses, centuries before, had warned his race 
that if it disobeyed the Eternal One and resorted 
to abominable practices, including unnaturalness 
and the worship of idols, it would be dispersed 
among the nations, and after it had been purged 
of its wickedness by terrible punishments through- 

336 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

out a long period, He would again have mercy upon 
it and restore it to its original habitation. Only 
a few listened. The great body of the people dis- 
obeyed. And the curse of God was fulfilled to the 
letter. 

Separated from the seat of their nationality and 
cast among the countries, the Jews have been de- 
nounced upon the slightest pretext, bitterly hated 
and persecuted upon the rack, broken upon the 
wheel, pursued by fire and sword, and, even in free 
America, reviled and shunned for no other reason 
than because Hebrews. Only at the present time 
because of a general slackening of legal and social 
restrictions, the growth of the Zionist movement, 
and the increased security in life and property of 
the individual Jew in nearly all the nations are they 
who have eyes beginning to perceive that the ful- 
fillment of the latter part of the prediction of the 
divinely inspired Moses is not fat removed. 

After the Jews had passed over from Egypt into 
Palestine, under Joshua, conquering the peoples 
they found there, it was said that *'the Lord gave 
them rest round about, all just as He had sworn 
unto their fathers; and there stood not up before 
them a man of all their enemies ; all their enemies 
the Lord delivered unto their hand. There failed 
not aught of all the good things which the Lord 
had spoken unto the house of Israel: it all came 
to pass." ^ Joshua himself then warned his fellow 
countrymen: "Take good care therefore, for your 



2 Joshua 31:42-45. 

337 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

soul's sake, to love the Lord your God." ^ **Now 
therefore fear the Lord and serve Him in sincerity 
and in truth. ' ' ^ Perhaps with some sarcasm, 
''Joshua said unto the people, Ye will not be able 
to serve the Lord; for He is a holy God; He is a 
watchful God ; He will not have any indulgence for 
your transgressions and your sins. If ye forsake 
the Lord and serve strange gods, then will He again 
do you evil and consume you, after that He hath 
done you good." ' 

And so it came to pass. Samuel added to the 
warning: "He ever guardeth the feet of His pious 
ones, and the wicked shall be made silent in dark- 
ness ; for not by strength can man prevail. ' ' * Like- 
wise Zechariah: "Not by might nor by power, but 
by my spirit, saith the Lord of Hosts. "^ These 
spiritual leaders had seen these things. It is re- 
marked in the Book of Samuel that "in former 
times it was customary in Israel that when a man 
went to inquire of God he said thus, Come and let 
us go as far as the seer; for the prophet of the 
present day was in former times called a seer."* 

It came to Samuel by the divine guidance that he 
was to go to the son of Jesse, who proved to be the 
shepherd boy, David, and say to him that he had 
been chosen king of Israel. And so the lad became. 
Later Achiyah told Jeroboam that he would suc- 
ceed to a part of the kingdom which would be di- 
vided after the death of his father Solomon. Re- 
hoboam, the first successor of him who has borne 

1 Joshua 23:11. 2jbid., 24:14. 3 Ibid., 34:19-20. * Samuel 
2:9. 5 Ibid., 4:6. ^I Samuel 9:9. 

338 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

the reputation of being the wisest of kings, became 
a tyrant, his subjects rebelled and the vision was 
fulfilled to the letter. Isaiah prophesied to Heze- 
kiah and Ezekiel to Zedekiah that all in Jerusalem 
and the king's house would be carried away to 
Babylon. And so they were. 

Isaiah, too, predicted that as soon as his child 
Immanuel should grow to the age when he should 
know the difference between good and evil the king 
of Assyria would come. This happened. When 
Sennacherib appeared before Jerusalem the son 
of Amos foretold that he would hear a rumor and 
return to his own land. This was fulfilled. Then 
the prophet's wife gave birth to another son, Ma- 
her-shalal-chashbas. It came to Isaiah that before 
his offspring should know how to call father or 
mother the wealth of Samaria and Damascus would 
be carried away by the Assyrian monarch. And 
they were. Israel escaped destruction, but passed 
under the yoke of Ninevah. 

The great seer now declared that his people 
should not be afraid of Asshur, for in a little while 
the indignation of the Lord would cease, the hand 
of the oppressor be smitten and the burden lifted 
from the shoulders of Israel. This he said would be 
because of the fatness of Assyria ; that is, it would 
pass to the decline of energy following upon decay. 
This also came true, for Babylon succeeded as the 
mighty power. Isaiah saw the doom of Damascus 
and that men of that city would no more turn to 
their altars, groves and images, which their hands 
had fashioned, but to their Maker, the Holy One 

339 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of Israel ; that Egypt would revolt, pass Tinder the 
foreign yoke, and see many of its inhabitants led 
away captive ; that altars to the Lord would be es- 
tablished in Egypt and that there would be com- 
munity of interest between Egypt and Assyria; 
that Babylon would fall and all its graven images 
be shivered into the ground; that the feet of Tyre 
would carry her afar off to sojourn, that she would 
fall because she had no more strength, be lost 
seventy years, revive again. 

And so it was fulfilled. Damascus fell before Tig- 
lath Pileser III and did not rise again for a long 
time, Egypt was divided in the Ethiopian invasion 
of the XXIII and XXIV dynasties, passed under the 
yoke of Assyria, saw many of its inhabitants, in- 
cluding the royal harem, led away by Esarhaddon ; 
after Necho had defeated Josiah of Judah many 
Israelites were taken away to Egypt and Hebrew 
altars were set up there; because of Assyria de- 
stroying the Ethiopian tyranny and setting up 
Necho, the father of Psammeticus, as governor, 
there was international amity between the vassal 
and conquering kingdom; Babylon did finally fall 
before the Persians; Tyre was carried off by its 
o\Mi feet to Carthage, under Sennacherib and Esar- 
haddon was oppressed, for just how many years it 
is difficult to verify at the present stage of archeo- 
logical excavation, and then did for a time prosper 
again, Isaiah lived between the years 750 and 700 
B.C., approximately. It was a time of change and 
upheaval, and he appeared as a light to his people. 

An hundred years were to joass before Jeremiah. 

340 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

In the time of the latter the Jewish nation had de- 
clined morally. It was he who foresaw the terrible 
chastisement that befell in 586 B.C. He says: 
** Everyone neighed after the wife of his neighbor. 
Shall I not for these things inflict punishment? 
saith the Lord : and shall on a nation such as this 
my soul not be avenged?" He continues to speak 
in the name of his God: *'I will render this city 
(Jerusalem) desolate and an object of derision."^ 
I will tear you (the Jews) completely away, and I 
will cast you off, and the city that I have given to 
you and to your fathers out of my presence. And 
I will lay upon you an everlasting disgrace and a 
perpetual shame which shall not be forgotten."^ 
"And I will make them a horror because of their 
mishaps unto all the kingdoms of the earth, a dis- 
grace and a proverb, a bj^word and a curse, in all 
the places wherein I will drive them. And I will 
send out against them the sword, the famine and 
the pestilence, till they be destroyed from off the 
land which I have given to them and to their fath- 
ers."^ So it came to pass. 

Jeremiah foretold that Philistia would be utterly 
spoiled and wasted by overflowing hosts from the 
northern lands. This, too, shortly occurred. He 
prophesied the great dispersion, like Isaiah, and the 
return **when they shall serve the Lord their God 
and David their king, whom I shall raise up unto 
them."* And when ** their leaders shall be of 
themselves, and their ruler shall be from the midst 
of them"^ (in a republic). He warned Zedekiah 

1 Jeremiah 19:8. ^Jbid., 23:39-40, ^ Ibid., 24:9-10. *30:9. 
5 Ibid., 30 : 21. 

341 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

that if he willingly passed under the yoke of Baby- 
lon, Jerusalem would not be destroyed by fire. The 
king did not do so and the punishment was severe. 
He predicted the ruin of Philistia, Moab, Tyre and 
Sidon, the fall of Babylon, and the rise of Media. 
As he saw, so it came to be. 

Ezekiel in mighty messages to the people of the 
exile predicted, as his forebears had done, the doom 
which the Jews would suffer throughout the cen- 
turies: **Yea, I will render thee a ruin and a dis- 
grace among the nations that are round about thee. " 
Then he, too, foretold the restoration in the golden 
age: **And those of you that escape shall remem- 
ber me among the nations among whom they shall 
have been carried captive, when I shall have broken 
their licentious heart, which had departed from me, 
even with their eyes which were gone astray after 
their idols, and they shall loath themselves on ac- 
count of the evil deeds which they have committed 
with all their abominations. And they shall know 
that I am the Lord ; not for naught have I spoken 
that I would do this evil unto them."* 

"And I will assemble you from out of the coun- 
tries whither ye have been scattered, and I "svill give 
you the land of Israel. And they shall come thither, 
and they shall remove all of its detestable things 
out of it. And I will give them one single heart, 
and a new spirit will I put within yon; and I will 
remove the heart of stone out of their body, and I 
will give unto them a heart of flesh, in order that 

1 Ezekiel 6 : 9-10. 

343 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

they may walk in my statutes and keep my ordi- 
nances and do them ; and they shall be unto me for a 
people, and I will indeed be unto them for a God.*' ^ 
Certainly the Jews were dispersed. Their return 
has begun. 

He foresaw that Tyre would become **a place for 
the spreading out of nets ... in the midst of the 
sea. " ^ * ' Down to the grave will they cast thee, and 
thou shalt die the death of the slain in the heart of 
the sea. Wilt thou then say, I am God before him 
that slayeth thee, when thou art but a man, and 
no god, in the hand of him that fatally woundeth 
thee?"^ "As though thou hadst not been will I 
render thee, and thou shalt be no more; and thou 
shalt be sought for, but thou shalt not be found 
any more to eternity, saith the Lord Eternal."* 
Tyre today is a place where fishermen cast their 
nets, its ancient grandeur forgotten for many cen- 
turies. 

It was Jeremiah who predicted that Egypt would 
become **a mass of ruins, a waste and a wilderness 
from Migdol to Saveneh, even up to the border of 
Ethiopia. There shall not pass through it the foot 
of man, and the foot of beasts shall not pass through 
it, and it shall not be inhabited forty years, and I 
will scatter the Egyptians among the nations, and 
I will disperse them through the countries.^ I will 
give unto Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon the 
land of Egypt.'*" **I will make the land desolate 

lEzekiel II : 17-20. 2 Ibid., 26: 5. s Ibid., 23 : 8-9. * Ibid., 26 : 21. 
» Ibid., 29: 10-12. « Ibid., 29 : 19. 

343 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and all that filletli it, by the hand of strangers. I, 
the Lord, hath spoken it. Thus hath said the Lord 
Eternal, I will also destroy the idols, and I will 
cause false gods to cease out of Noph ; and a prince 
out of the land of Egypt shall there not be any 
more. ' ' ^ 

Research of the facts discloses that Nebuchad- 
nezzar did invade Egypt; that under the Persian, 
Cambyses, the country was completely crushed ; that 
subsequently the land became so desolate in the 
midst of desolated countries that even its language, 
history and monuments were lost to direct view 
until Napoleon brought to light the Rosetta stone ; 
and from the time shortly after Jeremiah wrote 
until now, though the Babylonian, Persian, Grecian, 
foreign Ptolemaic, Roman, Mohammedan, French 
and British occupations there has been no native 
prince to lead the nation. 

Jeremiah also declared of Babylon: *' Behold, I 
am against thee, destroying mountain, saith the 
Lord, which destroj^est all the earth; and I will 
stretch out my hand over thee and I will roll thee 
down from the rocks, and will render thee a burnt 
mountain. And they shall not take from thee a 
stone for a corner, nor a stone for foundations ; but 
everlasting ruins shalt thou be, saith the Lord. ' ' ^ 
So exact was the fulfillment of this prophecy that 
naught but a great mound covered the site of tlie 
once mighty city when it was rediscovered during 
the nineteenth century. Nahum had likewise spoken 
in the name of God when he said of Ninevah : '* And 



1 Ezekiel 30 : 12-15. 2 Jeremiah 51 : 25-26. 

344 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

I will cast abominable filth upon thee and defile thee 
and render thee a dirt heap. And it shall come to 
pass that they that see thee shall flee from thee and 
say, Laid waste in Ninevah." ^ And this city, too, 
as it was foretold, was buried beneath the debris 
of the ages and completely lost to the view of man 
until in the last century the great mound near Mosul 
was found to contain its remains. 

These sublime passages from the Old Testament, 
containing predictions that have been fulfilled to 
the letter, are auguries of those other prophesies 
made by the seers of Israel which have not yet 
reached final fruition. Those of the Messiah, the 
Messianic kingdom and the Messianic time but 
await the passage of the period indicated by Daniel. 
He with exactness foretold the rise and fall of em- 
pires that had not yet come into being in his day. 
He gave description of these and also dates which 
are unmistakable in their clarity. Viewing them 
in the light of the present and the immediate future 
of the world, they seem as majestic as the pyra- 
mids against the azure sky of the Nile valley. 
Speaking out of Babylon, the capital of an empire 
long since sunk to rest and oblivion, his far-seeing 
vision across centuries of Asiatic, Egyptian, Euro- 
pean and American history seems like the hand 
writing of God which he is said to have deciphered 
upon the palace of Belshazzar. 

Nearly twenty-five hundred years ago Daniel 
foresaw the coming of the period when all the earth 

iNahum 3-6-7. 

345 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

would be one in a common brotherhood, and calcu- 
lated its appearance to a nicety. Probably with the 
fall of Jerusalem in 586 B.C. he was carried to 
Babylon and made an attendant in the palace of 
the conqueror. A boy then, it may have been a 
quarter of a century later when he gave to the 
world the prophesy that a time (a thousand) times 
(another thousand) and half a time (half a thou- 
sand years) would 'Hhe God of heaven set up a 
kingdom which shall to all eternity not be destroyed, 
and its rule shall not be transferred to any other 
people; and it will grind up and make an end of 
all these kingdoms while it will itself endure for- 
ever. ' ' ^ 

No mention is made in the * 'Book of Kings" or in 
*' Jeremiah" of the taking of the Hebrew capital 
by Nebuchadnezzar in 605 B.C., the ''third year of 
Jehoiakim" of "Daniel," and it is extremely im- 
probable. The chapter in which the quoted pre- 
diction is stated to have been made was composed 
"in the first year of Belshazzar, " ^ who is referred 
to throughout as the son of Nebuchadnezzar. The 
latter, as crown prince, defeated the Egyptians at 
Charchemish in 605 B.C. If, as Berosus says, he 
hurried home shortly afterwards, iipon the death 
of his father, to become king, and this was in the 
same year, and if, as the same ancient authority 
asserts, he reigned forty-three years, the first year 
of Belshazzar would fall in 562 B.C. and the cul- 
mination of the "time, times and half a time" in 
1938 A.D. 



1 Daniel 2 ; 44. 2 ibid., 7 : i. 

346 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

One might by Biblical computation easily bring 
himself in harmony with the fanatical Adventists 
who proclaimed the end of the world on a certain 
day in 1844 and awakened the next morning to find 
it going on about as nsnal. But m the present analy- 
sis of ** Daniel" and of history are to be found facts 
which, if interpreted correctly, when corroborated 
by the law of blood narrated earlier in this work, at 
least give probability to such an estimate of Dan- 
iel's forecast. 

Archeological inscriptions name Belshazzar as 
the son of Nabunaid and state that he was slain in 
the night by Gubaru, the governor sent by Cyrus ; 
but the man who was regent and general under his 
father may have been the grandson of Nebuchad- 
nezzar and have been given some power immedi- 
ately upon the death of the latter : a campaign as a 
successful commander in 605 B.C. and a reign there- 
after of forty-three years must have made the king 
very old at the time of his passing away. If we 
are to accept the date of 605 B.C. as that in which 
Jerusalem fell, as some scholars have thought, *'the 
time of the end" would be brought about many 
years earlier. 

In the first of his visions Daniel revealed the 
dream which Nebuchadnezzar had had and its 
meaning. The astrologers and wise men had, when 
requested to decipher it, asked that the king first 
tell them his dream. He had refused and con- 
denrned them to death, when Daniel asked that ho 
be given time to find the solution. This came tQ 

347 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

him in a dream of his own at night after he had 
prayed for light. Then did Daniel exclaim: "May 
the name of God be blessed from eternity to all 
eternity, for wisdom and might are His; and He 
changeth times and seasons ; He removeth kings and 
raiseth up kings ; He giveth wisdom unto the wise 
and knowledge to those that possess understand- 
ing. He it is that revealeth what is deep and secret ; 
He knoweth what is in the darkness and the light 
dwelleth with Him. ' ' ^ 

The prophet said to the king: *'The secret which 
the king hath demanded no wise men, astrologers, 
magicians or soothsayers can tell unto the king; 
but there is a God in heaven that revealeth secrets, 
and He hath made known to Nebuchadnezzar what 
is to be in the latter days. Thy vision and the dream 
of thy head upon thy couch are these. As for thee, 
king, thy thoughts when thou wast on thy couch 
rose within thee concerning what is to come here- 
after, and the Revealer of Secrets hath made known 
to thee what is to come to pass. But, as for me, 
this secret hath not been revealed to me because 
of any msdom that is in me more than all other 
living, but for the sake that men might make Imown 
the interpretation to the king, and that thou 
mightest understand the thoughts of thy heart. ' ' ^ 

Daniel continues: '^Thou, king, sawest, and be- 
hold there Avas a large image, its head was of fine 
gold, its breasts and its arms were of silver, its 
belly and its thighs of copper, its legs of iron, its 



1 Daniel 2:20-22. 2 ibid., 2:27-30. 

348 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

feet part of them of iron and part of them of clay. 
Thou didst look on till the moment that a stone tore 
itself loose, not through human hands, and it struck 
the image upon its feet that were of iron and clay 
and ground them to pieces. Then were the iron, the 
clay, the copper, the silver and the gold ground up 
together, and become lilie the chaff of the summer 
threshing floor; and the wind carried them away 
and no trace was found of them ; and the stone that 
had strucken the image became a mighty mountain 
and filled the whole earth. 

**This is the dream, and its interpretation mil we 
relate before the king. Thou, king, art a king of 
kings, to \vhom the God of heaven hath given king- 
dom, power and strength and honor : and whereso- 
ever the children of men dwell hath he given the 
beasts of the field and the fowls of the heaven unto 
thy hand, and hath made thee ruler over them all. 
Thou art the head of gold. And after thee there 
mil arise another kingdom (Persia) inferior to 
thee; and another third kingdom of copper (Mace- 
don) which mil bear rule over the earth. And the 
fourth kingdom (Rome) will be as strong as iron; 
forasmuch as iron grindetli up and beateth do^vn 
all things, as iron that breaketh everything mil it 
grind down and break up these (Mediterranean na- 
tionalities). 

**And that thou saw the feet and toes (European 
countries), part of them of potter's clay (weak) 
and part of them of iron (strong), signifieth that 
it will be a divided kingdom, although there will be 
in it of the strength of the iron (through Roman 

349 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

law and institutions) ; forasmuch as thou sawest the 
iron mingled with the miry clay (by blood and lan- 
guage). And as the toes of the feet were part of 
them of iron and part of them of clay; so will the 
kingdom be partly strong and partly brittle. And 
whereas thou sawest iron mingled with miry clay, 
so will they mingle themselves among the seed of 
men (by colonization across the sea) ; but they will 
not cleave firmly one to another (in a Europe of 
separate nationalities), even as the iron cannot be 
mingled with clay. 

*'But in the days of these (European) kings will 
the God of heaven set up a kingdom (the Republic 
of Man) which shall to eternity not be destroyed, 
and its rule shall not be transferred to any other 
people ; but it will grind up and make an end of all 
these kingdoms while it will itself endure forever. 
Whereas thou sawest that out of the mountain a 
stone tore itself loose (like the United States), not 
by human hands (but by the work of God), and that 
it ground up (in the crucible of the greater repub- 
lic) the iron, the copper, the clay, the silver and the 
gold: the great God hath made known what is to 
come to pass after this : and the dream is reliable 
and its interpretation correct.'^* 

The Book of Daniel relates that **then did king 
Nebuchadnezzar fall upon his face, and he bowed 
down to Daniel, and ordered that they should offer 
an oblation and sweet incense unto him. The king 
answered unto Daniel and said : ' Of a truth it is that 
your God is the God of gods and the revealer of 



1 Daniel 2:31-43. 

350 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

secrets, because thou hast been able to reveal this 
secret. ' Then did the king elevate Daniel and gave 
him many j^resents and made him ruler over the 
whole kingdom of Babylon and chief of the super- 
intendents over all the wise men of Babylon." 
Thereafter followed the beautifully symbolic stories 
of the trust in God through trials in the fire (of 
experience) of Shadrach, Meshach and Abednego, 
of the dream of Nebuchadnezzar of his being 
brought low to eat grass so that he might know that 
''the Most High ruleth over kingdoms of men," of 
the interpretation of the warning on the wall of 
the fall of Belshazzar's kingdom, and of Daniel 
being thrown into the den of lions and "no manner 
of hurt being found on him because he had trusted 
in his God. ' ' 

The second of his marvelous visions, which has 
engaged the thought of more than two thousand 
years, is then narrated and is here given: "I saw 
in my vision by night, and behold the four winds of 
heaven blew fiercely on the great (Mediterranean) 
sea. And four great beasts (of Europe) came up 
from the sea, differing one from another. The first 
(Rome) was like a lion (in power) and had eagle's 
wings (to spread out over the land) : I looked till 
its wings were plucked out, and it was lifted up 
from the earth (in deprivation of its dominion) and 
was placed upon its feet as a man (in strength), 
and a human heart (to realize that it must meet its 
end like all manl^ind) was given to it. 

"And behold there was another, a second beast 
(the Empire of the West), like a bear (of the north- 

351 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

ern climate), and on one (western) side was it 
placed, with three ribs (Charlemagne, Charles V, 
Napoleon) in its month (to hold) between its (con- 
quering) teeth: and thus they said, 'Arise, eat much 
(territorial) flesh.' After this I looked and, lo, 
there was another (Britain), like a leopard (mth 
many spots of territory dotted over the face of the 
earth) : and it had four wings (British North Amer- 
ica, Australia, South Africa and India) of a bird 
(that flew far) on (or at) its back; the beast had 
also four heads (England, Ireland, Scotland, 
Wales) ; and dominion (to the extent of nearly a 
fourth of the globe) was given unto it. 

''After this I looked in the night visions, and be- 
hold there was a fourth beast (Germany), dreadful 
and terrible and strong exceedingly; and it had 
great iron teeth (in its armies and submarines) ; 
it devoured (territory) and ground up (rights and 
institutions), and what was left it (ruthlessly) 
stamped its feet; and it was different (in the compo- 
sition of the states of its kingdom) from all the 
beasts that were before it; and it had ten horns 
(or kings, as follows: Frederick William, the 
"Great Elector," Frederick I, Frederick William 
I, Frederick the Great, Frederick William II, 
William I, Frederick III, and William II). I looked 
carefully at the horns and behold, another little 
horn (Prussia) came up between them, and three 
of the first horns (Denmark, Austria, France) 
were plucked up by the roots (and defeated) before 
the same ; and behold there Avere eyes like the eyes 
of a man in this horn (eartlily, materialistic and 

353 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

seeking dominion), wdth a mouth speaking pre- 
sumptuous things (of the divine right of monarchy 
and the power of blood and iron). 

**I was looking until chairs (for presidents) were 
set do\\Ti (established) and an Ancient of Days (be- 
cause in preparation from the beginning of history) 
seated himself (in the presidency of the United 
States), whose garment was white as snow (in 
spiritual light) and the hair of whose head was like 
clean wool (in inspiration) ; his chair was like 
flames of fire (in its successful w^arfare), and his 
wheels like fire that burnt ; a stream of fire (armies) 
issued and came forth before him ; thousand times 
thousands (of citizens) ministered unto him (in as- 
sistance), and myriad times myriads stood before 
him (in the great democracy) ; they sat down to 
hold judgment (of the history and condition of 
men) and the books (of the Bible) w^ere opened (to 
explanation through the higher criticism). 

"I looked then because of the presumptuous 
words which the (Prussian kingly) horn had 
spoken, — I looked till the (German) beast was slain 
and its body destroyed, and given over to the burn- 
ing fire (of the conquerors). But concerning the 
rest of the beasts, they had their dominion (of em- 
pire) taken away; yet a longer duration of life was 
given unto them until the time and period (of the 
end of the dispensation in the Federation of the 
World). I looked in the nightly visions and behold, 
with the clouds of heaven (in inspiration) came one 
like the son of man (in appearance, though en- 
lightened) and he attained as far as (or lived in 

353 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

the time of) the Ancient of Days, and they brought 
him near before him. And there were given him 
dominion and government and dignity (as president 
of the entire earth), and all peoples, nations and 
languages had to serve him: his dominion (the Re- 
public of Man) is an everlasting dominion, and his 
kingdom is one that shall never be destroyed. 

''My spirit was deeply shaken within me, Daniel, 
in the midst of its tenement, and the visions of my 
head troubled me. I came near unto one of those 
that stood by and asked him something concerning 
all this : and he spoke to me and made kno^vn unto 
me the interpretation of the things. 'These great 
beasts of which there are four are four kings who 
are to arise on the earth. But the saints of the 
Most High (those simple men who are His servants) 
will obtain the kingdom and possess the kingdom 
(in ruling over it) to eternity, even to eternity.* 

"Then I desired what is certain concerning the 
fourth beast, which was different from all these 
others, exceedingly dreadful, whose (armed) teeth 
were of iron, and whose nails (munitions) were of 
copper (metal), which devoured, ground up and 
stamped with its feet what was left (of the beasts 
or kingdoms that had gone before in Europe) ; and 
concerning the ten horns (kings) that were in its 
head (of the state) and concerning the other (Prus- 
sia) which came up and before which three fell 
down, — even concerning that horn which had eyes 
and a mouth speaking presumptuous things and 
whose appearance was greater than its companions. 
I had seen how the same horn had made war with 

354 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

the saints (of liberty and righteousness) and pre- 
vailed against them (for a time) : until the Ancient 
of Days came and procured justice unto the saints 
of the Most High, and the time came and the saints 
took possession of the kingdom. 

**Thus said he, *The fourth beast signifieth that 
a fourth kingdom (Germany) will be upon the earth, 
which is to be different from all kingdoms, and will 
devour all the earth and will tread it do\^Ti and 
grind it up. And the ten horns out of this kingdom 
signify that ten kings will arise ; and another will 
arise after (or in the latter part of the line of) 
them (the Empire) and he will be different from the 
first (Prussia) and three (great) kings will he bring 
low. And he mil speak words (of materialism) 
against the Most High, and the saints of the Most 
High will he oppress, and think to change the festi- 
vals and law (as Haeckel) ; and they will be given 
up unto his hand until a time (a thousand) and 
times (another thousand) and half a time (half a 
thousand). But they will sit do\\Ti to hold judg- 
ment, and they will take away his (the German Em- 
peror's) dominion, to destroy and to annihilate it 
unto the end. And the kingdom and the dominion 
and the power over the kingdoms under the whole 
heaven w411 be given to the saints of the Most High, 
whose kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all 
governments are to worship and obey liim.' " (The 
last word probably an interpolation, as in all of 
Isaiah LIII.) 

Probably in the latter part of his life, in the days 

355 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

of Belshazzar, Daniel was again enabled to see into 
the future. He says: *'And I saw in the vision — 
and it came to pass in my seeing that I was in 
Shushan (Susa) the capital, which is in the province 
of Elam — and I saw in the vision as though I were 
by the river Ulai. And I lifted up my eyes and saw, 
and behold there was a ram (empire) standing be- 
fore the river, and he had two horns (Media and 
Persia) ; and the horns were high (in power) ; the 
one (Persia) was higher than the other, and the 
higher one came up last (Cyrus deposing Asytya- 
ges). I saw the ram butting (in its conquering) 
westward and northward and southward; so that 
all the beasts could not stand before him, and no 
one was there to deliver out of his hand: and he 
did according to his Avill and became great. 

*'And as I was looking attentively, behold, there 
came a shaggy he-goat (Greece) from the west over 
the face of the whole earth, without touching the 
ground (in defeat) ; and the he-goat had a slightly 
large horn (Macedon) between his eyes. And he 
(Alexander) came as far as the ram that had two 
horns, that I had seen standing before the river, 
and ran at him with his furious power. And I saw 
him coming close unto the ram, and he became bit- 
terly enraged against him: and he cast him down 
to the ground and stamped upon him ; and there was 
no one to deliver the ram out of his hand. ' ' 

Of this time Josephus says: ''Now Alexander 
when he had taken Gaza made haste to go up to 
Jerusalem; and Jadua, the high priest, when he 
heard that, was in an agony and under terror, as 

356 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

not knowing how he should meet the Macedonians, 
since the king was displeased at his foregoing dis- 
obedience. He therefore ordained that the people 
should make supplications, and should join with him 
in making supplications to God, whom he besought 
to protect that nation, and to deliver them from the 
perils that were coming upon them. Whereupon 
God warned him in a dream, which came upon him 
after he had offered sacrifice, that 'he should take 
courage and adorn the city and open the gates ; that 
the rest should appear in white garments, but that 
he and the priests should meet the king in the 
habits proper to their order, Avithout the dread of 
any ill consequences, which the providence of God 
would prevent.' 

''Upon which when he arose from his sleep he 
greatly rejoiced, and declared to all the warning 
he had received from God. According to which 
dream he acted entirely and so waited for the com- 
ing of the king. And when he understood that he 
was not far from the city he went out in procession 
with the priests and multitude of the citizens. The 
procession was venerable and the manner of it dif- 
ferent from that of other nations. It reached to a 
place called Sapha, which name translated into 
Greek means a prospect, for you have thence a 
prospect both of Jerusalem and the temple; and 
when the Phoenecians and Chaldeans that followed 
him thought that they should have liberty to plun- 
der the city and torment the high priest to death, 
which the king's displeasure fairly promised them, 
the very reverse of it happened; for Alexander 

357 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

when he saw the multitude at a distance in white 
garments while the priests stood clothed with tine 
linen, and the high priest in purple and scarlet 
clothing with his miter on his head, having the 
golden plate whereon the name of God was en- 
graved, he approached by himself and adored that 
name and first saluted the high priest. 

''The Jews also did altogether, with one voice, 
salute Alexander and encompass him about. 
Whereupon the king of Syria and the rest were 
surprised at what Alexander had done, and sup- 
posed him disordered in his mind. However, Par- 
menio alone went up to him and asked him, *How it 
came to pass that when all others adored him he 
should adore the high priest of the Jews'?' To 
whom he replied: 'I did not adore him, but that 
God who hath honored him mth his high priest- 
hood ; for I saw this very person in a dream, in this 
very habit, when I was at Dios in Macedonia, who, 
when I was considering with myself how I might 
obtain the dominion of Asia, exhorted me to make 
no delay, but boldly to pass over the sea thither, 
for that he would conduct my army, and would give 
me the dominion over the Persians; whence it is 
that having seen no other in that habit, and now 
seeing this one in it, and remembering that vision, 
and the exhortation which I had in my dream, I 
believe that I bring this army under the divine 
conduct, and shall theremth conquer Darius and 
destroy the power of the Persians, and that all 
things will succeed according to what is in my 
mind. * 

358 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

** And when lie had said this to Parmenio and had 
given the high priest his right hand, the priests ran 
along by him and he came into the city. And when 
he went up into the temple he offered sacrifice to 
God, according to the high priest's direction; and 
magnificently treated both the high priest and the 
priests. And when the Book of Daniel was showed 
him, wherein Daniel declared that one of the Greeks 
shonld destroy the empire of the Persians, he sup- 
posed that himself was the person intended. And, 
as he was then glad, he dismissed the multitude for 
the present, but the next day he called them to him 
and bid them ask what favors they pleased of him ; 
whereupon the high priest desired that they miglit 
enjoy the laws of their forefathers, and might pay 
no tribute in the seventh year. He granted all they 
desired. ' ' ^ 

There has been considerable disposition to dis- 
pute the authenticity of this passage and to make 
it appear as an attempt to magnify the priesthood, 
but the facts it narrates are eminently in keeping 
with the character and policy of Alexander as well 
as the customs of the time. When the Greek con- 
queror appeared before Tyre and the ambassadors 
met him on the road there, professing to do his will, 
he expressed the intention of visiting the city in 
order to sacrifice in the temple of Heracles, and 
after they had refused and he had subdued the place 
he did so. In Eg3T)t he propitiated the native re- 
ligion and had himself proclaimed as the divine son 
of the god Ammon. When he approached Babylon, 

1 "Antiquities," XI ; 8, 4-5. 

359 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

expecting the necessity of conquering it, the people 
streamed out of the gates, led by their priests and 
chief men. It was his policy to conciliate and when 
he passed through Syria he may have visited Jeru- 
salem. The lack of knowledge of Josephus* sources 
does not make such an event impossible ; and those 
who have denied the authenticity of the passage 
may have forced a point in order to substantiate the 
theory that all of the Book of Daniel was written in 
Maccabean days. 

Several interpolations now occur, even to the ex- 
tent of entire chapters. As S. R. Driver admits, 
"there are features in the book which might sug- 
gest that the author was not throughout the same. ' ' 
R. H. Charles asks whether we are to explain dif- 
ferences in the language in which the work is writ- 
ten by diversity of authorship. Those who adopt 
the theory that it was in its entirety compiled in the 
time of Antiochus Epiphanes (175-164 B.C.) do not 
attempt to explain the exact application of the 
image Nebuchadnezzar saw, the four great beasts, 
the ten horns, or the kingdom which ground up all 
the rest while it endured forever. 

It is not difficult to place the statements of the 
bronze belly and thighs, the leopard with the four 
wings, the goat with one horn, and Alexander and 
his successors side by side and declare that they 
mean the same thing. But that proves no more 
than the Christian attempts since the early church 
fathers to make all the prophecies of Daniel fore- 
run the coming of Jesus. It is true that a part of 

360 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

the eighth and all of the ninth and eleventh chap- 
ters give evidence of having been made up in Mac- 
cabean times to suit the exigencies of Judean hopes. 
The style of these chapters is unlil?:e the remainder 
of the book. Both begin mth a mention of having 
been composed in the first year of Darius the Mede 
(or Persian). This would have made Daniel about 
an hundred years of age. In Chapter IX is a prayer 
very similar to that of Ezra IX. Yet the greater 
part of the work remains to baffle those who have 
accepted the Maccabean hypothesis. Even the ap- 
plication of each mention of the 'Hime, times and 
half a time" to the little more than three years of 
the abominations caused by Antioelms Epiphanes 
fails to correspond with the exact period. 

The narrative continues: "And the shaggy he- 
goat became very great; but when he was become 
strong the great horn was broken (by Alexander's 
early death) ; and there came up four (his generals, 
Seleucus who took Syria, Ptolemy who took Egypt, 
Antigonus who took Persia, and Cassander who 
took Macedon) slightly large ones (in power) in 
its place toward the four winds of heaven (in direc- 
tion). And out of one of them (Seleucus) came a 
little horn (the kingdom of the Seleucids) which 
became exceedingly great toward the south (and 
Egypt), and toward the east (Bactriana and the 
Indus) and toward the glorious land ( Judah). And 
it became great (under Antiochus Epiphanes), even 
up to the prince of the host (God himself), and by 
it the continual sacrifice (burnt offering) was taken 

361 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

away and the place of his sanctuary (in the temple) 
was cast dowai. And the host (of the Jews) is given 
up together with the continual sacrifice by reason of 
transgression (for unrighteousness) ; and it (the 
power of Antiochus) casteth down the truth to the 
ground, and it doeth this and is prosperous. 

''Then did I hear a certain holy one (this in imi- 
tation of the language of the former chapters) 
speaking, and the holy one said unto the unknown' 
who was speaking, 'For how long is the vision con- 
cerning the continual sacrifice, and the wasting (by 
terrible persecution) transgression to give up both 
the sanctuary and the host, to be trodden under 
foot?' And he said unto me, 'Until two thousand 
and three hundred evenings and mornings (of 
daily burnt offerings, or three years from 168 to 
165 B.C.) when the sanctuary shall be justified' " 
(by resumption). 

Daniel goes on: "And it came to pass when I, 
even I Daniel, saw the vision and sought for under- 
standing, that, behold, there was standing' opposite 
to me something like the appearance of a man. And 
I heard the voice of a man between the banks of 
the Ulai and it called and said, ' Gabriel, cause this 
one to understand this appearance.' Now as he 
was speaking with me, I fell down in amazement on 
my face to the ground ; but he touched me and set 
me upright where I had been standing. 

"And he said, 'Behold I will make known unto 
thee what is to be at the last end of the indigna- 
tion (against the Jews) ; for it is for the appointed 
time of the end. The ram that thou hast seen with 

363 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

the two horns sigiiifieth the kings of Media and 
Persia. And the shaggy he-goat is the king of 
Javan (Greece); and the great horn which is be- 
tween his eyes is the first king (who united Mace- 
don and the Pelopennesns). But that it was broken 
(by the death of Alexander), and that four sprung 
up out of the nation, but not A\dth his power (their 
o\Mi instead). 

''And in the latter time of their kingdom, when 
the transgressors have filled their measure of guilt 
(by having drunk of suffering to the full), there 
will arise a king (the Pope) of an impudent face 
(asserting himself to be the vicegerent of God on 
earth and infallible), and understanding deep 
schemes (such as the seizure of jurisdiction over 
the bodies as well as minds of men) . And his power 
will be mighty (in the time of the Holy Roman Em- 
pire), but not by his own power (because without 
armed force in his o"\Aai right) ; and he will destroy 
wonderfully (through the Holy Inquisition by which 
between 1481 and 1808 there were 340,000 punished, 
of whom 34,000 were burnt alive), and will prosper 
(by the sale of indulgences and by mammoth van- 
it}^ while he doeth this; and he will destroy very 
many (heretics) and the (Jewish) people of the 
saints. And through his intelligence and because 
he prospereth (in maTerial leisure) is craftiness (of 
design, as exemplified by the Medeci) in his hand; 
and in his heart mil he magnify himself (as when 
Alexander VI divided the new worlds of discovery 
between Portugal and Spain), and in peace (without 
armies of his o\vn) will he destroy many (*as Ar- 
ses 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

nold of Brescia, Savonarola, John Hus and Gior- 
dano Bruno) ; he will also stand up against the 
Prince of Princes (God Himself), but without a 
human hand (and only by right reason) will he be 
broken. 

*'And the appearance of the evening (of dark- 
ness) and the morning (of light) which was spoken 
of is true; but do thou keep the vision closed up; 
for it will come to pass after many days (in the far 
future).'' 

As announced in verse 2, the purpose of chapter 
IX is to find a meaning for the seventy years pre- 
dicted by Daniel to satisfy Maccabean hopes : * ' Sev- 
enty weeks (or 490 years, which were never con- 
cluded) upon thy people and upon thy holy city, to 
close up the transgression and to make an end of 
sins (terminology which appears as the Christian 
era approaches), and to atone for iniquity, and to 
bring in everlasting righteousness, and to seal up 
the vision and prophesy and anoint the most holy 
thing (in the temple). Know therefore that from 
the going forth of the word of Jeremiah (in 586 
B.C.) to restore and to build Jerusalem unto the 
anointed, the prince (Zerubbabel), will be seven 
weeks (of years, to the beginning of the restoration 
in 538 B.C.) ; and during sixty and two weeks (from 
596 B.C., the date given by some authorities for an 
exodus following that assumed by them to have 
occurred in 605 to 162 B.C. when Judas Maccabeus 
threw off the Syrian yoke) mil it again be built 
with streets and ditches around it, even in the pres- 

364 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

sure of the times. And after sixty and two weeks 
will an anointed one be cut off (Judas Maccabeus 
was killed in the following year) without a succes- 
sor to follow him ; and the city and sanctuary will 
the prince that is coming (Antiochus Epiphanes) 
destroy; but his end will come in a violent over- 
throw; but until the end of the war devastations 
are decreed against it. And he will make a strong 
covenant with the many (followers of Menelaus, 
the renegade high priest) for one week (of years, 
from 171 to 164 B.C.) ; and in the half of the week 
(from 168 to 165 B.C.) will he cause the sacrifice 
and the oblation to cease, and this because of the 
abominations (of swine sacrificed) which bringeth 
devastation, and until destruction and what is de- 
creed shall be poured out upon the waster (through 
the Maccabees it was hoped)." 

The eleventh chapter, a continued effort to pro- 
pitiate Maccabean hopes, follows: "Behold there 
will stand up yet three kings of Persia (Cyrus, who 
took Babylon in 538 B.C., ^ Cambyses, who suc- 
ceeded him in 529 B.C., ^ and Darius, who reigned 
521-485 B.C. ') ; and the fourth (Xerxes, 485-465 
B.C. *) will obtain greater riches than all these 
(subduing Egypt more completely than his prede- 
cessors ^) and when he is strong through his riches 
will he stir up all, namely the kingdom of Javan 
(Greece, by whom he was defeated at Salamis and 
Platea^). And then will stand up a mighty king 

1 Ploetz Epitome, p. 26. 2 ibjd., p. 27. ^ ibid., pp. 27-28. 
* Ibid., pp. 28-29. 5 Herodotus VII, 7- ** Ploetz, p. 60. 

365 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

(Alexander), and when he shall have stood his 
kingdom will be broken toward the four winds of 
the heavens (in direction), and not to his posterity 
(Roxana and her son being mnrdered^), nor ac- 
cording to his dominion which he ruled (the empire 
of Macedon with his death passing away and his 
generals who survived their contests with each other 
becoming kings in their own right ^) ; for his king- 
dom was torn asunder even for others beside these 
(such as Rome). 

''And the king of the south (Ptolemy Soter, 325- 
285 B.C.) will become strong, yea, he who is one of 
Alexander's princes, but another (Seleucus Nica- 
tor, 312-281 B.C.) will become strong and will rule 
(over Syria and Babylon ^) ; a great dominion will 
his dominion be (extending to the Indus *). But at 
the end of some years mil they associate themselves 
together (by Ptolemy Philadelphus, 285-247 B.C., 
giving his daughter Berenice in marriage to Antio- 
chus Theos, of Syria, 261-241 B.C., to cement an 
alliance, provided that Antiochus should divorce 
his wife Laodice and secure to the offspring of 
Berenice the throne °) ; and the daughter of the king 
of the south will come to the king of the north to 
make a settlement of difficulties (which had arisen 
between them®) ; but he will not retain the power 
of the support (Antiochus ha^dng abandoned Bere- 
nice and again made Laodice his queen, due to the 



iDiodorus XIX, 8. = Ibid. 3 Ency. Brit., XXIV, 603. Mbid. 
5 "House of Seleucus," by E. R. Bevan, Vol. I, pp. 178-9- ^ Ibid., 

p. 179- 

366 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

death of Philadelplius ^) ; neither will he (Antio- 
chus) stand nor his support (being poisoned ^ in 
revenge by Laodice, in order to secure the throne 
for her son, Seleucus Callinicus, 226-222 B.C.) ; 
but she (Berenice) will be given up (through 
Laodice 's assassination of her, her infant son ^ and 
those women who had escorted her from Egypt *), 
and he that begat her (by death, 246 B.C.) and he 
that had strengthened her in those times. 

"But there will stand up a sprout (son) of her 
(Berenice's) roots (parents) in his (Ptolemy Phil- 
adelphus') place, and he (Ptolemy Eugertes, her 
brother, 221-217 B.C.) will come to the army, and 
will enter into the stronghold (by capturing Seleu- 
cia) of the king (Antiochus) of the north (Syria) 
and will deal (fight) vnWi them (killing Laodice^) 
and prevail (by overrunning Palestine, Syria, Meso- 
potamia, Babylonia and Iran and subduing portions 
of Cyprus, Celicia, Pamphilia, Ionia and Thrace *). 
And also their gods mth their molten images, with 
their precious vessels of gold and silver (which had 
been taken away from Egypt in the days of Cam- 
byses) will he carry into captivity to Egypt; and he 
(Ptolemy Eugertes) will stand off (due to domes- 
tic troubles ^) for some (ten) years from the king 
of the north (having made a treaty of peace with 
Seleucus ®). 



1 "House of Seleucus." 2 "Roman History," Appian, XVH, 65. 
3 Ibid. ■* "House of Seleucus," Vol. I, p. 183. ^ "Roman His- 
tory," Appian, XI, 66. « "House of Seleucus," Vol. I, pp. 184-190. 
7 Justin XXVII, I, 9. 8 Ibid., 2, 9. 

367 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

"But this one (Selencus II, 246-226 B.C.) will 
then enter the kingdom (of Syria, which v/as now 
in possession) of the king of the south (Egypt) and 
then return unto his o^^^l land (Seleucus, after the 
defeat of his army at Aneyra, 235 B.C.^). But 
his (Seleucus') sons (Seleucus III Keraunus, 226- 
222 B.C., who lived four years after the death of his 
father and warred wtih Attains, king of Perga- 
mus,^ and Antiochus III, 220-187 B.C., who sub- 
dued insurrections in Media and Parthia, 221 
B.C.^) will conunence a war and assemble a multi- 
tude of great armies (with the ultimate object of 
subduing Egypt,* latterly ruled over by Ptolemy 
IV, 221-205 B.C.) ; and one (Antiochus III) will 
certainly enter (Palestine) and overflow (Phoenicia 
also) and pass along (capturing Tyre, Ptolemais 
and other cities, 219-218 B.C.^) ; then A\ill he return 
(the Syrian army going into winter quarters follow- 
ing an armistice), and make war again (in the 
following year taking the field with an army of 
62,000 infantry, 6,000 cavalry and 102 elephants), 
even to his stronghold (of Coele-Syria). 

**And the king of the south will be moved to bit- 
ter wrath (raising a superior force except in ele- 
phants) and go forth and fight with them, even with 
the king of the north, and he will set forth a great 
multitude; but the multitude of the other will be 
given up unto his hand (Antiochus being defeated 



lEncy. Brit, XXIV, 604. 2 Polyblus, 4, 48, 7. 3 Appian II, i. 
■* "House of Seleucus," Vol. I, p. 204. ^ Ibid., Vol. I, p. 313. 

368 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

at Raphia with a loss of 10,000 men, 217 B.C.') 
And the multitude (of Syria) will be lifted up and 
his heart will become proud (with courage ^) and 
he will cast down myriads (defeating the Achgeans 
216-214 B.C., Armenians 212 B.C., Parthians 209 
B.C. and Bactrians 208 B.C., crossing the Hindu 
Kush and invading the Kabul Valley 206 B.C.) but 
he wiU not be strengthened by it (having perman- 
entl}^ subdued neither). And the king of the north 
(Antiochus III) will return (205-204 B.C.) and set 
forth (toward Egypt) a multitude greater than the 
former, and at the end of the times (consisting) of 
years will he certainly come with a great army and 
with much riches (especially of elephants newly 
acquired from India ^). 

''And in those times many (including Philip V 
of Macedon) ; also the rebellious (against the dis- 
persion decreed by the Almighty) of thy people 
(the JeM^s *) will lift themselves up to establish the 
vision (of return of nationality) ; but they will stum- 
ble (through inability of Antiochus to take Egypt). 
And the king of the north (Antiochus III) will come 
and cast up a mound (taking Mt. Parmium, after 
defeating the Egyptian general Scopus, 198 B.C. ^) 
and capture the city defended by fortification (Si- 
don, were Scopus surrendered with 10,000 men®), 
and the arms of the south will not be able to with- 
stand (being unable to raise the siege), and as re- 
gardeth the chosen people (the Jews), there will 

iPolybius V, 8. 2 ibid., XI, 8. 3 ibid., XI, 8. ^Josephus, 
"Antiquities," XII, 3, 3- ^ Ency. Brit., Vol. XXIV, p. 605. 
^ "House of Seleucus," by E. R. Bevan, Vol. II, p. 37. 

369 



\ 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

be no power in them to withstand (the arms of 
Antiochus III). 

"And he (Antiochus III) that cometh against 
them (through occupation ^) will do according to 
his pleasure and none will stand before him ; ^ and 
he will place himself (in the citadel ^) in the glor- 
ious land (Judah), which will be altogether in his 
hand.* He will also direct his face to enter (into 
Egypt, thinking Ptolemy Philopotor dead ®) with 
the strength of his whole kingdom, having profes- 
sions of peace with him (he and Philip V, of Mace- 
don, having agreed to divide Egypt between 
them ^) ; and thus mil he do it (change his mind 
upon finding Ptolemy alive ^ and hearing of the 
defeat of Philip V, of Macedon, his possible ally, 
by the Romans at Cynocephale, 197 B.C.*) ; and he 
will give him (Ptolemy) the daughter of his wife 
(Cleopatra, as part of an alliance with Ptolemy to 
pacify the latter and to assist in withstanding the 
power of Rome ®) ; but it will not stand (she being 
unable to prevent her husband from offering aid 
to Rome against Antiochus^''), and it will not re- 
main his (Coele-Syria, Phoenecia and Palestine, 
which had been given as dowry with Cleopatra, not 
being delivered "). 

** And he (Antiochus III) will direct his face unto 
the isles (Cyprus and the coast lands of Asia Mi- 

ijosephus, "Antiquities," XII, 3, 3. 2 ibid. 3 Ibid. ^Ibid. 
5 Appian, "Roman History," XI, 4. ^ Ency. Brit., Vol. XXII, 
p. 617. ^ Ibid, s Dio Cassius, "Roman History," XIX, 9, 18. 
9 Appian, "Roman History," XI, 4-5. 10 Livy, "Roman History," 
XXXVI, 12. " Polybius, XXVIII, 20, 9. 

370 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

nor^ after Rome had declared them free, and the 
islands of Greece) and capture many (being at first 
successful in Thrace, Galatia,^ Aetolia and lonia^) ; 
hut a chieftain (Hannibal, who had escaped to Syria 
after his defeat at Zama) will cause to cease his 
(Antiochus') reproach against him (due to service 
rendered in planning with Antiochus to attack 
Rome^), without his giving back to him his own 
(HannibaFs) reproach (he failing to arouse Car- 
thage to attack Rome and being defeated in a naval 
battle, while Antiochus was crushed at Thermopy- 
lae, 191 B.C.,^ Myonesus,^ and Magnesia, 190 
B.C.'). Then he (Antiochus) will direct his face 
toward the strongholds of his own land (with the 
intention of recuperating his fortunes by again ad- 
vancing against Persia and Media) ; but he will 
stumble and fall (to his death while plundering the 
temple at Elymias^), and will no more be found.* 
"And there mil stand up in his stead one (Seleu- 
cus IV, 187-176 B.C.) who will cause the exactor of 
taxes to pass through the glorious land ( Judah) of 
the kingdom (after the defeat of Antiochus III 
Rome compelled him to give up all his possessions 
in the Grecian archipelago, to pay 15,000 talents 
within twelve years, and to give twenty hostages, 
including Antiochus Epiphanes, the youngest son 
of Antiochus III," this burden falling upon Seleu- 
cus IV," who recalled Antiochus Epiphanes and 



lAppian, "Roman History," XI, 5-6. 2 ibid, s ibid., XI, 12. 
4Appian, "Roman History," XI, 7. 5 ibid., XI, 8. e ibid., XI, 
27-28. 7 Ibid., XI, 33-36. sDiodorus, XXVIII, 3; XXIX, 15. 
^ "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 120. 1° Appian, "Roman His- 
tory," XI, 38-39. 11 "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 125. 

371 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

sent Ms own son, Demetrius, a lad of tAvelve years, 
instead^); bnt within a few (seven) days (years) 
will he be broken (killed, 176 B.C.), but not in anger 
nor in battle (being assassinated as the result of a 
conspiracy headed by Heliodorus, a court official ^). 

' ' And there mil stand up in his place a despicable 
person (Antiochus Epiphanes), to whom they as- 
signed not the honor of the kingdom (which would 
by primogeniture have fallen to Demetrius) ; but 
he will come (in 175 B.C.) quietly (Heliodorus be- 
ing driven out by Eumenes and Attains, of Per- 
gamus, who installed Antiochus Epiphanes in order 
to secure his good will in opposition to Rome ^) and 
lay hold of the kingdom by flattery (saying the 
child, Demetrius, was too young to govern). And 
the powers of the overflow (Egypt, where Ptolemy 
V Epiphanes had died in 181 B.C. and his widow, 
Cleopatra, the sister of Antiochus Epiphanes, had 
become regent and also died in 173 B.C., leaving 
a young son, Ptolemy VI Philometor, 181-145 
B.C.*) will be swept away from before him (the 
young king's guardians being defeated at Pe- 
lusium, 169 B.C. ^) and will be broken (the child, 
Ptolemy VI, being taken while attempting to es- 
cape by sea ®) ; yea, so also the prince in covenant 
with him (Ptolemy VII Eugertes, the young king's 
brother, who fled with his sister, Cleopatra, to the 
fortified city of Alexandria). 

''And from the time of his (Antiochus Epipha- 
nes') associating with him (Ptolemy VI) will he 

lAppian, XI, 45. 2 ibid. 3 ibij. 4 Ency. Brit., XXII, 617. 
""House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. I35- •* Ibid., p. 136. 

372 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

(Antiochus Epiphanes) deal deceitfully (pretend- 
ing to lielp and take an interest in liim, because a 
boy, and seizing the gates to Egypt by guile ^) and 
he will come up (to Memphis) and obtain the vic- 
tory (by obtaining nominal possession of the king- 
dom^) with a small number of people (by repre- 
senting himself as the protector of legitimate 
interests and setting up the boy as king '). In quiet 
and into the fattest portions of the province (Lower 
Egypt) will he enter, and he will do what his fath- 
ers have not done, or his father's fathers (obtain 
temporary suzerainty over practically the entire 
kingdom) : the prey and spoil and riches (stored 
up by the Ptolemies since the days of Perdiccas and 
Antigonus *) will he divide freely among them (each 
of those of Greek nativity in Egypt receiving a 
gold piece ^) and against the strongholds (of 
Rome,^ to whom he sent fifty talents as a gift to 
allay suspicion '') will he devise his plans, but only 
till a certain time (when he retreated in 169 B.C. 
after having unsuccessfully invested Ptolemy Eu- 
gertes in Alexandria^). 

''And he (Antiochus Epiphanes) will then stir 
up his power and his courage against the king of 
the south (Egypt) with a great army (returning 
again in the following year °) ; and the king of the 
south will prepare himself for the war with a great 

iDiodorus, XX, 9, 25. 2 "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 137. 
3 Ibid., pp. 137-139. * Ibid., p. 141. ^ Ibid., p. 140. ^ Ibid. '' Ibid., 
p. 141. 8Livy, 45, ii. 9 "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 137. 

373 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

and mighty army ; ^ but he (Ptolemy Engertes) will 
not stand (being defeated at Mt. Casius ^) ; for 
they (who had supported him) will devise evil plans 
against him (going over to Antiochus Epiphanes ^). 
Yea, they that eat of his food (in his immediate 
entourage) will bring his downfall, and the army 
of the others (Antiochus Epiphanes) will fall down 
slain (before Alexandria). 

^'As for both these kings (Ptolemy Philometor 
and Ptolemy Eugertes, who had now united), their 
heart is bent on mischief (against each other be- 
cause of jealousy over territorial arrangements 
between them made temporarily by the Romans*), 
and at one table will they speak lies ; but it shall not 
prosper, for the end is yet for the time appointed. 
Then he (Antiochus Epiphanes) will return unto 
his own land (Syria) with great riches, and his 
heart will be against the holy covenant (at Jerusa- 
lem, where he had set up Menelaus, who helped to 
have Onias murdered and robbed the temple, as 
high priest ^) ; and he will do it (take the city on a 
plea of peace, slay his opponents and plunder^) 
and return to his own land (again ^). 

''At the time appointed (168 B.C.) will he return 
and enter into the south (after Ptolemy Philometor 
had refused to give up Pelusium^), but not as in 
the former will it be in the latter time (because dis- 
astrously). For there will come up against him 

1 "House of Seleucus." 2 Ibid. ^ Jbid. 4 ipjo Cassius, XX, 
9, 25. 6 Josephus, "Antiquities," XII, 5, i. ^ ibid., XII, S, 3. 
7 Ibid. 8 "House of Seleucus," Vol II, p. 143. 

374 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

(Antiochus Epiphanes) the ships of Kittira 
(Rome) ; and he (Antiochus Epiphanes) will be- 
come faint-hearted (because of the demands of the 
Roman ambassador, Popillius Lsenas, that he with- 
draw from Egypt ^) and return,^ and will rage 
against the holy covenant (because of rampant op- 
position to his policy of stamping out Jewish rit- 
ualism ^) ; and he will do it (profane the holy of 
holies by entering it, rifle the treasury and carry 
away the golden candlesticks, the golden altar, the 
table of shew bread and the vessels of gold and sil- 
ver*), and he will return and have an understand- 
ing with those that forsake the holy covenant 
(including Menelaus). 

"And army divisions will proceed from him,^ 
and they will defile the sanctuary and fortress, and 
remove the continual sacrifice (of a lamb twice each 
day) and they (Antiochus Epiphanes and those 
subject to him) will set up the desolating abomina- 
tion (of an idol image,^ the sacrifice of s^^ine,' 
and finally a temple to Jupiter on the site of that 
to Jehovah®). And such (including Menelaus) as 
act wickedly against the covenant will he corrupt 
by flatteries (saying the Greek customs were prefer- 
able ®) ; but the people that do not know their God 
will be strong and deal valiantly (Mattathias and 
his sons conducting a guerilla warfare against the 
idolatrous shrines throughout the country). 



1 Appian, XI, 66. 2 Ibid, s "House of Seleucus," Vol II, p. 171. 
* Josephus, "Antiquities," XII, 5, 4. ^ ibid., XII, 5, 2. « Ibid., 
XII, 5, 4- ^ Ibid. 8 Ibid., XIJ, 5. 5- ^ Ibid., XII, 5, i- 

375 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

"And the intelligent of the people (teachers 
springing up everywhere ^) mil impart understand- 
ing to many; yet they will stumble through the 
sword (of martyrdom, in which they were whipped 
with rods, their bodies were torn in pieces and they 
w^ere crucified alive ^), through flame (of burning 
homes), through captivity and through being plun- 
dered for some time. But in their stumbling will 
they be aided with a little help (Judas Maccabeus 
now coming forward) ; but many (Jewish rene- 
gades) will join themselves to them (that follow 
Antioehus) with deceptive flatteries (saying he was 
right in changing the customs of the Jews to con- 
form to the average). And some of the intelligent 
will stumble (through many defeats and some vic- 
tories), to make a purification among them (and 
return to the old worship), and to select and to 
cleanse them (of the hated abominations) until the 
time of the end (prophesied and hoped for at this 
time) ; because it is yet (to come) for the time 
appointed. 

''And the king (Antioehus Epiphanes) will do 
according to his pleasure (in his tyranny) ; and he 
will exalt and magnify himself above everj god 
(as E. R. Bevan says, 'His surname, Theos Epipha- 
nes, declares him to be an effulgence in human form 
of the Divine, a god manifest in flesh' ^) and against 
the God of gods will he speak incredible things 
(claiming to be an impersonation of the gods, he 

ijosephus, "Antiquities," XII, 5, 4. 2155,3, s "House of Seleu- 
cus," Vol. II, p. 154. 

376 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

appropriated the treasures of the temples as be- 
longing to him), and he will prosper till the indig- 
nation (against the Jews, which had been predicted) 
be at an end (at least, it was so hoped by the Mac- 
cabean writer of this chapter) ; for that which is 
determined (in prophesy) will be accomplished 
(now against Antiochus Epiphanes, it was desired). 

*'And to the gods of his fathers (rather to Jupi- 
ter, a Roman god) will he pay no regard; and to 
the desire of women (robbing the temple of Hera), 
or to any god whatever will he not pay any regard ; 
for above all will he magnify himself (having him- 
self worshipped as a god). And in his place mil he 
pay honor to the god of the fortresses (Jupiter 
Capitolanus) ; and to a god whom his fathers knew 
not will he pay honor with gold and silver and with 
precious stones and costly things (starting the erec- 
tion of the temple to Jupiter which was afterwards 
completed by Hadrian). This mil he do for the 
very strong fortresses (Rome) together with the 
strange god (Jupiter) ; whoever will acknowledge 
him (such as Menelaus) will he give much honor 
(as high priest) ; and he will cause such a rule over 
many and to divide out the land for a price (of tax- 
ation). 

*'And at the time of the end (which was thus 
indicated as the completion of the seventy weeks 
apochraphally stated in the ninth chapter, and was 
not fulfilled in history despite the following sen- 
tences), will the king of the south push against him ; 
and the king of the north will come up against him 
(the king of Egypt, which did not occur) like a 

377 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

storm wind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and 
with many ships ; and he will enter into some coun- 
tries and will overflow and pass along. And he will 
enter into the glorious land ( Judah) and much will 
be overthrown; but these will escape out of his 
hand, even Edom and Moab and the first portion of 
the children of Ammon. And he will stretch forth 
his hand against some countries and the children of 
Egypt will not escape. And he will have control 
over the treasures of gold and of silver and over 
all the costly things of Egypt ; and the Libyans and 
the Ethiopians will follow at his steps (as they had 
already done). But reports out of the east and out 
of the north will terrify him; and he will go forth 
with great fury to destroy and to exterminate many. 
And he will pitch the palace of his tent between the 
seas and the glorious holy mountain (Mt. Zion) ; 
and he will come to his end without one to help him 
(dying of a wasting disease ^ at Elymias while plan- 
ning to rob the temple of Diana).'* 

Passing over these ninth and eleventh chapters, 
so palpably adapted to Maccabean yearnings, 
the tenth chapter mentions having been writ- 
ten by Daniel in the third year of Cyrus, the 
Persian, or in 535 B.C., when it is possible that 
the prophet was about sixty-five years of age. 
Again the style is as in the earlier chapters. He 
sees a man all in linen (perhaps an ecstatic vision 
of the Messiah), and says: **His loins were girded 
with fine gold of Uphaz (*I will give him of the 

1 Appian, II, 235. 

378 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

gold of Ophir') ; and his body was like the cryso- 
lite (a stone with the appearance of glass which so 
reflects light that its source is not visible), and his 
face like the appearance of lightning (in its spir- 
itual radiance), and his eyes are like the torches of 
fire, and his arms and his feet of burnished copper 
(in an age of metal), and the sound of his voice 
was like the noise of a multitude (in the great 
democracy of the future). And I Daniel saw alone 
(like the witch of Endor who perceived the shade 
of Samuel) this great appearance.'' 

Continuing to speak of the end of the days (de- 
spite the intervening historical eleventh chapter) 
Daniel, in Chapter XII, says: **And at that time 
will Michael the great prince, who standeth for the 
children of thy people, stand forth; and there will 
be a time of distress (through wars) such as there 
hath not been since the beginning of any nation 
until that same time; and at that time shall thy 
people be delivered (here commence words which 
are evidently interpolated), every one that shall be 
found written in the book. And many of those that 
sleep in the dust of the earth shall awake, some to 
everlasting life and some to everlasting abhorrence 
(and here they end — expressive of views alien to 
the Old Testament). And the intelligent shall 
shine brilliantly like the brilliance of the expanse 
of the sky ; and they that bring many to righteous- 
ness shall shine like the stars for ever and ever. 
But thou, Daniel, close up the words and seal the 
book, until the time of the end; many shall roam 
about, yet shall knowledge be increased. 

379 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

''Then I Daniel looked and behold, there were 
two others standing, the one on this side of the bank 
of the stream (of life) and the other on that side 
of the bank of the stream. And the one said to the 
man clothed in linen, who was above the waters of 
the stream, 'How long shall it be to the end of these 
wonders 1 ' Then heard I the man clothed in linen, 
who was above the waters of the stream; and he 
lifted up his right hand and his left hand unto the 
heavens, and swore by the Everlasting One that 
after a time (a thousand years), times (another 
thousand years), and a half (of a thousand years), 
and when there shall be an end to the crushing of 
the power of the holy people (as already in free 
America and to a lesser degree elsewhere) all these 
things shall be ended. 

"And I heard, indeed, but 1 understood it not: 
then said I, ' my Lord, what end shall be the end 
of these things 1 ' And he said, ' Go thy way, Dan- 
iel ! for the words are closed up and sealed till the 
time of the end. Many shall be selected and 
cleansed and purified; but the wicked will deal 
wickedly and none of the wicked will understand; 
but the intelligent mil understand. 

"And from the time that the continual sacrifice 
will be removed (apparently an interpolation for 
the date of 535 B.C. mentioned at the chapter's 
beginning as the time of composition) even to set 
up the desolating abomination (of which this ex- 
cerpt from the "Letters from a Chinese Official" is 
sufficient explanation : And such, if I 'understand it 
aright, was the character of your civilization in 

380 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

what you describe as the Ages of Faith. Asceti- 
cism, monastic vows, the domination of priests, the 
petty interests of life and death overshadoived by 
the tremendous issues of heaven and hell, beggary 
sanctified, wealth contemned, reason stunted, imag- 
ination hypertrophied, the spiritual and temporal 
powers at war, body at feud with soul, everyivhere 
division, conflict, confusion, intellectual and moral 
insanity — such was the character of that extraor- 
dinary epoch in Western history when the Chris- 
tian conception made an effort to embody itself in 
fact), there will be a thousand tAvo hundred and 
ninety days (or years, from 535 B.C. to 755 A.D., 
when Pippin, the Frankish king who had been 
anointed by the Roman pontiff, crossed the Alps, 
attacked Aistulf, the Lombard, and compelled him 
to give to the Pope estates which made the latter 
a temporal ruler). 

"Happy is he that waiteth to the thousand three 
hundred and five and thirty days (A.D., when Pe- 
trarch, ''The Father of the Renaissance" entered 
upon his work of cojDying the manuscripts of the 
ancient classics and discussing them with the men 
of Paris, Ghent, Liege, Cologne and Rome, thus 
helping to lay the foundation of the Revival of 
Learning and the modern world, and when Boccac- 
cio settled at Naples and began his immortal task 
of appealing to the desire for more life in this 
world instead of postponing all its joys until the 
next. It mil be noticed that this date stands by 
itself in the calendar and is not a continuation, as 
in the case of the 1290 days). But thou (Daniel) 

381 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

go thy way toward the end; and thou shalt rest (in 
death) and rise again (in another life) for thy lot 
at the end of the days.' " 

Such is the Book of Daniel. It is not meant for 
the eye of the mystic merely ; it bears a living mes- 
sage of present and permanent value for the people 
of the United States and the world. For if its 
visions are true and its interpretation is correct, 
the ''time of the end," not of a world but of a dis- 
pensation which shall give way to a new one of 
peace on earth and good Avill to men, is not far 
away. It may be true that neither 1938 or any year 
in the interval is to be an exact verification of either 
the law of blood or the ''time, times and half a 
time." As Mrs. Humphrey Ward has remarked, 
"the force of things is against the certain people." 

In this connection there comes to my mind the 
recollection of days as a newspaper man in San 
Francisco when obsessed by the thought that some 
day that city would sink beneath the waves of the 
ocean. A friend once told me that he never walked 
along the streets there that he did not feel himself 
far below the water. Investigating, the inf onnation 
came from scientific quarters that the Golden Gate 
it situated on a perfect earthquake fault. Now and 
then there would be a tremor to freshen my memory 
of this, but reporters were forbidden ever to men- 
tion it. Finally, I had a dream of the town being 
all awash and disappearing in a mammoth over- 
flow, and a voice in my ear declaring: "For oh! 
city that hath not repented, ten times ten thousand 

382 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

years shall roll over thee. Thou shalt be as though 
thou hadst never been. ' ' But the beautiful city still 
stands in a land of sunshine, all the obsessions and 
feelings and science and dreams notwithstanding. 

In the spring of 1911 it came to me in a dream 
that the great debacle in Europe would occur in 1914 
and that Germany would for a time seize all the 
land east to the Dneiper and the Duna rivers. I 
did not believe it and paid not enough attention to 
it, but it came to pass. And at this same time there 
was a vision of trouble with Japan at a not far dis- 
tant day and of another great war in 1931. But 
at this period there are no signs of a conflict 
wdth our Asiatic neighbor and a mighty contest of 
arms at the later date appears remote indeed. In- 
tensely interested in the events of August, 1914, I 
reasoned that Germany w^ould expand and then 
recede, as all other conquering nations had done. 
But I did not foresee that the United States alone 
would bring the triumph of the Central Empires 
to an end, and, in consequence, I spent many nights 
under the stars at Plattsburg, wondering why I 
had not been given to see the light, and feeling 
that my owm will must have interposed to prevent 
it. The flickering consciousness of something that 
was to be had gone. I was left with the certainty 
that no man can read the future and that knowledge 
of it must come to him as a voice from the Most 
High. 

So it ma}^ be with any prediction of result from 
the law of blood and the Book of Daniel. \"et it 
may be assumed, because of the working out of that 

383 



AMERICA'S TOMORROW 

law among all peoples in the past and the exact 
fulfillment of Divine prophecy heretofore, that the 
near future will witness the end of monarchial in- 
stitutions and the sword and the ushering in of the 
Great Republic and the brotherhood of man. 

With such a commonwealth discernible as the 
final human goal and yet only the beginning of a 
richer life on the planet, we may, in view of the 
proposed principles underlying it, receive new 
meaning from the words of the poet Akenside : 

** if to this the mind 



Exalts her daring eye, then mightier far 
Will be the change, and nobler. Would the forms 
Of servile custom cramp her generous powers ? 
Would sordid policies, the barbarious growth 
Of ignorance and rapine, bow her down 
To tame pursuits, to indolence and fear? 
Lo ! she appeals to nature, to the winds 
And rolling waves, the sun's unwearied course, 
The elements and seasons : all declare 
For what the Eternal Maker has ordained 
The powers of man : we feel ^^ithin ourselves 
His energy divine: He tells the heart, 
He meant, He made us to behold and love 
What He beholds and loves, the general orb 
Of life and being; to be great like Him, 
Beneficent and active. Thus the men 
Whom nature 's works can charm, with God Him- 
self 

384 



THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 

Hold converse ; grow familiar day by day 
With Hig conceptions, act upon His plan, 
And form to His the relish of their souls.** 



C 15- 80 



C 15 80 



""^ 



■) * 



m 



f 











.^ .' 



o V 



■^^ .\."^>^^^i'%'- "-t. r,^ ' :£M^j^^ '^'- <-^ ->:^Bii^''- '-^^. ^ ;^ 






"•"'^ "*• ^^il^ ♦ ■Or' ^ *» V ^^^ 






/.c^.'^-'o 





L'''* O 












,^* ,• 



. °o 




.^* .• 

















^°*^, 




^^ "^ *v °^ *»•» a9 v> 

(V\\ »R //h o «S» -^ _ i=5Mffllfci? vP . S dW SK ///) o 




^'•K « \ 1 • • 









•*t-o^ 




^ N. MANCHESTER, 1 
^ INDIANA 46962 










